Home

460202008

Contents

1. A screen similar to the following will display Figure 129 Template group Wizard Wizard You are using Template Name COMPOSITE NAME Template Description COMPOSITE DESCRIPTION p Status Navigation You are on Step 1 for COMPOSITE NAME There are 32 steps remaining to complete There are 8 templates to be applied Readers READER WITH NEW AREA Global Variables 1Global Values 8 output Groups READER VALID OUTPUT 2 Output Groups Input Groups VALID READER INPUT GR 3 Define Input Group 4 Parent Input Groups 5 Output Groups W I Areas AREA 209 Step 1 Define Global Variables for N A GlobalValues Description Facility Micro 5 Inour example under Status Navigation notice that you are on Step 1 of 32 and there are 8 templates included in this template group The first step allows you to assign a global name to be applied to the related records but this is not required Click Next Step 6 Continue to fill in the remaining tabs until all required fields are compete When you have finished click Save and Close 323 324 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Managing templates The ability to manage templates for operators and system administrators is governed by their Facility Permission Profile The action permissio
2. 409 Enter SQL Statement jin eet erret etri teres 294 Enterprise Consulting 6 POLASCI VAUC e neidetutaun oque pmi A A RERAN 65 Ertor Messaer ieee erar Aee s E See 66 IESGOTU EE 173 Escort Required 5o tie rtt e dy de rt ep eS 390 ESCOERUROULUDE cinere RUBRI ERUNT eats 181 Event History 5 ioo ore nae e IER 287 Evento e 42 Execute SQL Statements eicere dette tedtetn notte nein nana Een anuo 87 Exit Button deinenutowo mico enm ete n rer ide 189 Facilities 14 17 30 53 54 80 86 98 lr m 409 Facility Permission Profile 19 31 80 81 83 85 93 99 100 324 Facility Petirisstons etie cnt Ie eher ne a e Eet 94 Facility Profile ue DEE 409 Facility Set niece EE 16 Facility Ser Manager esce RR eenegen 14 Field EE 331 LEE 331 LU 23 26 Fire DO after Floor Selection cceeeseeeeeeseeseseeeeeseseeeeeteeeneeas 374 417 418 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual ee Firttiware N taion i antec eterne intret petere eere a E Floor Labelaren me om E Force Rolle MM Forced Open In Group Forced Open Monitoring Forced Open Shunt Time Forced RELOGK Ve Form Fields Form Permission Profile Form e ET 94 FORTS E 90 Eree Access HE 371 G Gateway eh e s ee eie EE EE ec 409 Generate Verification Report 311 315 Global ARB rete ee RR P ieee 185 204 208 Graphical Terminal dec err empero mede 409 G
3. 375 376 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual How to edit floor labels The default floor labels are Floor 1 through Floor x where x the maximum number of floors There are two ways to edit the floor labels 1 Type directly in the text box 2 Specify a starting floor number and an Increment Decrement value The default is 0 Click the Increment or Decrement buttons to set default floor labels Example 1 Set up an elevator that will only access floors 20 through 40 and the name of floor 20 is Lobby 2 Figure 179 Example of Increment Floors 1 Type in description Lobby 2 in Floor 1 2 Enter Start Floor Number 2 3 Enter Increment Value 19 4 Click Increment This will result in Floor 2 displaying a description of Floor 21 19 2 Floor 3 will display as Floor 22 and so on m Elevators Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zone Elevators CategoryFloors j Description elev 1 GU Lobby2 Elevator Gu a 4 dj E X D J ab x Elevator Description Define Floors m a Number of Floors 20 Floor 1 Lobby 2 Floor 2 Floor 21 Floor 3 Floor 22 Floor 4 Floor 23 Floor 5 Floor 24 Floor amp Set Default Floor Start Floor Number Llew25 1 4 Output 1 Elevator Button 1 lt GLOBAL gt Output 2 Elevator Button 2 GLOBAL O
4. MM 282 Port nI m 411 Port Group Leader eet 411 POS edi rr ENEE 17 64 65 66 132 135 147 Power on R set 55 nee gek iert 141 IN 190 Pre Alarm In Group 190 rjr M xv Preview Pane ecd dp bte ERR crt etie 332 Primary Wan GUase T 411 Primary EE 134 Print BAE EE 226 Printers enan a RE QU tet AA SN 20 30 54 55 PONV EE 118 264 411 Privileged se nta ebat e te eto E EE 234 le Y 412 PROCESS Iri 265 385 Processing State ences ese eter ene prt e RAPI IMBRE e ah 122 Progress Lr 26 Provided Language eee t ete m REED ERE 412 Q uid 4 Query Parameters 294 QUEUE Nam 23 siener ieii tE A E ESEA E i ER R Radio Buttons ANERER 27 LEE 412 E 288 Reader Communication Failure essen 127 Reader Events etit er ed A eege 18 200 206 209 Reader Issue 4950 225 229 Reader Offline E 272 Reader Orline Offline 5 6 eene ee tide ie 203 207 Readers18 33 94 130 134 172 174 181 182 209 211 338 339 342 ET 344 345 348 349 356 357 368 373 382 BB Tis 412 SE 366 Real Time Monitoring sirenerne n ete ritenere 4 Record Remove Interval eese 47 230 Record Remove Maximum 47 230 Redundant System Option essent 5 Reissue COMUN
5. 411 Page Level Permission see Eeer 84 88 Page Level Permissions eee 340 346 351 352 359 Parent Input Group deeg 130 131 132 Parity E Passive Apb In e Passive le E Passive Time amp Attendance 136 PASS WOE WE 411 People 16 31 34 36 37 77 78 236 238 240 243 252 355 362 389 Performance Monitor 17 86 87 287 289 Performance mOnitOL rn Ee EENS 286 Bemmission 19 31 80 83 93 94 95 96 98 102 103 282 Permission Group s s s eree 19 31 81 91 92 173 178 411 Permission cascade OR DE oa NR GO RR KR RC DR GNE 81 93 A11 Penuiissions PO siia oder p dd n api d i ed d dc n 94 96 Permit scheduled mode changes sss 197 Person Tee m 233 388 389 Person E EE 388 Person EE 46 388 Personnel 16 34 36 37 76 178 224 225 227 231 232 235 236 238 se 240 242 243 251 252 255 257 258 260 348 eos 355 356 362 363 388 389 390 DEELER 31 233 237 247 251 252 Personnel Ty EE 16 77 78 257 personnel ty Pe zi entere HU PRIN ERROR 31 lamp du vetoeiae 68 PHOto Staph e 237 Photo Imaging Option essent 5 Physical Reader Function erret treten 184 Physical Reader Type amp Ne Physical Melmer PIN EE PIN EN Zeie 5 LCE 407 Places 16 32 173 182 205 341 353 354 355 360 361 362 Polling Intetval 4 citt rte pere ege 136 POLE sis
6. Control Outputs 00 1 00 READER O On Off Ok Cancel Help Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Chapter 8 165 Device management Table 72 Control Outputs form fields Field name Description Input Group Select an input group from the list and click Input Group to display a list of all associated output groups Select an output group and click the On or the Off radio button to fire all the associated outputs Output Group Select an output group from the list and click Output Group to display a list of all associated outputs Select an output and click the On or the Off radio button Output Select the output you wish to control and click Output Select an output and click the On or the Off radio button Note Each transaction is recorded in operator history Related procedures To control an output from an output group When you select an output group from the list on the Control Outputs window you can trigger any or all of the outputs associated with this output group l 2 3 4 From the Control menu select Control Outputs Select an output group from the Output Group list Click Output Group A list of all associated o
7. 4 Save and exit the Category form 361 362 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual To assign M2MR categories to areas and badge holders 1 2 3 it to Assigned Categories Figure 173 Area form M2MR Category f Places From the Access menu select Places and then click the Areas tab From the toolbar click Find to locate the area record to be controlled Click the Category Manager tab and select an M2MR category from Available Categories and move People Badges Uf areas Categories Places AreaEvents _ Description JOHISERVER ROOM JOH STORE ROOM JOHIMOTION SHUN STLAST FLOOR D STL 2ND FLOOR D STL SETTLEMENT SSTLIFACILITIES OFC STLSWITCH ROOM STLIGENERATOR R STLIGIT LAB STL SETTLEMENT F STLALLN180 CORP STL SECURITY REAR STLHR STL 2N80 SYST DE STL 3N MCIDEAS STLSN MOL STL 3W ARCH DVLP D Computer Room Research and Deve v Iz Lu Results 96 records a a 4 amp Xx o Area Category Manager Input Groups Assigned Categories stot Category 2 Computer Room Team D ky X SC Q Routings Available Categories tenant Y STLISECURIT Y OFFICE ISTLISECURITY OFFICER STLISETTLEMENT 7 24 amp _ stusrtwost STL TELCO ROOMS Slot STL TELECOM cz STLITEST FACILITY 4 53 stLivp ACCESS ISTL VP ACCESS THIS BADGE HAS TEMP CATEGORI Computer
8. Primary Port Missing Record 1 5 Click the eFlash tab to display the eFlash form Figure 63 eFlash Form Micros Online Micros Offline Nonexistent Micros 0 01 ub Network Map d Use File n5npe403 eft Direct Micros lt Use File mSpe403 eft f PXNplus Micros Use File PXNP7515 etl j DirecDoor Micros Use Fite 0D7515 ef1 Flash Micro s 6 On the Network Map click the micro that you want to flash 7 Click Browse next to the selected micro to display a list of firmware files and select the file to be used for flashing Figure 64 Select File Chapter 8 Device management mSnpet70 etl mSnpe202 etl imSnpe251 eti im5npe252 efl im5npe253 eti imSnpe254 efl imSnpe255 efl im5npe257 efi File Name m5npe257 efl Kales 8 Click Flash Micro to begin the flash procedure The flash procedure begins and the micros being flashed are highlighted in yellow Figure 65 eFlash in Progress Micros Ports Modems NetworkPorts Keys Micros Online 1 Q amp SJ AX eo fap zx Z Q Nonexistent Micros 0 Micro Timing InputGroups Advanced Features DialUp Flash Notes 01 0000 GES ae n icro ID eo d om Status Online 4 r Network Micros Direct Micros
9. Reset on Input E Enable Output E Normally Open Moor ees Duration MICRO 0 GLOBAL zj Z Le bo z Save operation completed successfully Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Chapter 8 Device management Table 67 Output form fields Field name Description Description Enter a description up to 60 characters This description usually includes a micro board address and a text description Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box By default the output record will be assigned the same facility as the micro to which the output is assigned however you do have the ability to manually re assign an output s facility This might be desirable in a case where one micro controls more than one facility for instance two companies occupying the same building that use separate doors for entry exit For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Output Group Displays a description of the selected output group to link this output point with a group of outputs Click the Select Output Group button to display the Output Groups list box Select the desired output group Reset on S
10. This field is only enabled if the optional Image package is installed Click to change properties of images such as the aspect ratio These changes apply to all badge images captured or printed on the Imaging workstation where the changes are made If there are multiple Imaging workstations the changes must be made on each workstation Warning These parameters are critical to the operation of the Image component Consult Customer Support before making any changes 45 46 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Tab History Routing Field name Alarm Badge Operator Event Tour History Size Default Routing Description The number of transaction records alarm badge or operator that can be stored in the history table or backup table This value is set according to the amount of alarm badge or operator activity expected considering the desired archive frequency These three fields are grayed out which means that they are read only fields These fields are set during installation These fields are pre set and should only be changed as directed by your customer support representative Define a default routing to ensure that all messages alarm and activity are routed somewhere Whenever the routing of a function is unassigned the system will use this setting as the default Click Default Routing to display a list box of routings Select the desired routing and then click Close Operator Routing Def
11. Figure 164 Area Form M2MR Category Uf areas Categories People Badges Places AreaEvents J Description JOHISERVER ROOM JOH STORE ROOM JOHIMOTION SHUN STLAST FLOOR D STL 2ND FLOOR D STL SETTLEMENT STLIFACILITIES OFC STL SWITCH ROOM STLIGENERATOR R STLIGIT LAB STL SETTLEMENT F STLALLN180 CORP STL SECURITY REAR STLIHR STL 2N80 SYST DE STL 3N MCIDEAS STL 3N MOL STL 3W ARCH DVLP 7 Computer Room Research and Dee ei Alz Ll Results a amp S x o Area Category Manager Input Groups m ST gt x Routings Q 95 records Assigned Categories Available Categories stot j Category J Category 2 Computer Room Team I sTUSECURITY OFFICE ISTLISECURITY OFFICER STLISETTLEMENT 7 24 amp _ stusrrwost ISTLITELCO ROOMS STLITELECOM iz STLITEST FACILITY Liens ACCESS ISTLAVP ACCESS Slot THIS BADGE HAS TEMP CATEGORI Computer Room Team 4 Saveandexit the Area form 5 From the Access menu select People and then click the Personnel tab 6 From the toolbar click Find to locate the Personnel records of the badge holders requiring access to the controlled area 7 Clickthe Category Manager tab and select an M2MR category from Available Categories and move it to Assigned Categories 356 Pictu
12. Online Color Picker No Color Picker Yes Inhibit Schedule Changes No Foreground T O Yes NENNEN Results 1 records Immediate Reset Input Search operation c Chapter 13 Alarm activity monitors If you select Jump to Device the associated device record displays such as the following H Doors And Readers M P Doors DoorEvents Readers Reader Events description Q a 3 TRE SCHEECK EE E a Gi Reader Description inputs and Outputs State Type Function Options Notes Description 00 1 00 READER Facility GLOBAL AT GLOBAL hr To Area From Area AREA lt GLOBAL gt K i f e b Interval Time seconds 5 Board Address Board 1 Address d Micro MICRO 0 GLOBAL To use the Alarm Alert pop up 1 When an alarm occurs a pop up Alarm Alert window appears for every operator that is configured to receive alarms The window beeps and displays the number of new alarms the number of unanswered alarms and the highest priority alarm that is pending 2 Click Silence to stop the beeping The button will change to Stand By If another alarm occurs the beeping resumes and the information displayed is updated To remove all alarms from the Alarm Monitor If you are having hardware problems and need to clear alarms that will not reset
13. Open Duress A valid read occurred in a Keypad reader but was followed by a duress code The door was opened Open Shunt The door was opened as part of an alarm shunting process Passive APB In A badge holder was granted access in two successive APB IN readers Passive APB Out A badge holder was granted access in two successive APB OUT readers Swipe And Show A valid read occurred on a reader configured for Swipe and Show This will be followed by another valid transaction indicating how the transaction ended T amp A In A valid read occurred in a Time amp Attendance In reader T amp A Out A valid read occurred in a Time amp Attendance Out reader Valid Door Locked In a Double Badge reader the first badge read was valid but will not open the door until the second is validated Valid Floor A valid floor number was selected with elevator reader DI DO configuration Valid No Passage A valid read occurred but the door was not opened Valid Toggle A valid read occurred in a Toggle reader which reversed the current state of the Input Group Valid Nested APB A valid read occurred at a nested APB reader Valid Timed Nested APB A valid read occurred at a timed nested APB reader Passive Nested APB A badgeholder was granted access at a nested APB reader despite a nested APB violation Fail Safe A badgeholder was granted access at a gl
14. Related procedures To create edit or delete a Permission record 1 Select Control Operators and then Permissions tab Chapter 6 95 Operator administration 2 Refer to Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 Defining operators Use the Operators form to assign operator permissions to individual operators and to give them login capabilities on the system Note Always have more than one operator with System Administrator permissions Figure 36 Relationship Between Permissions and Operators m9 D om Example Jane Doe is the badge administrator at the manufacturing plant of Global Corporation Her employee identification number is 555666777 and her Login Id is jadoe She is assigned the permission Badge Admin Figure 57 Operator Form Operators Modes Routings Backup Restore Access Secure Control Outputs Operators Permission Groups Permissions System Permissions Profiles Facility Permissions Profiles Form Profiles 2 pm Systems Admin 0000 x ful MIN o 2 Xx a Pane fe ses Operators User Name Jane Doe Employee Id Login Id 555666777 ados Locale English in the United States e Time Zone US FL1 United States GMT 5 e Facility ES Permission Badge Admin GLOBAL v ges El Recei
15. Select Access Badges and then Badges tab Click New 4 Click Reader Issue Swipe the badge in the console reader assigned to the terminal The badge ID number will appear in the BID field Complete the Badges form For details on completing each field see Badges form fields on page 225 Click Save To create a Badge record using the manual method l gt Select Access Badges and then Badges tab Click New g Type the badge encode number into the BID field Complete the Badges form For details on completing each field see Badges form fields on page 225 Click Save To change a badge record l 2 4 Select Access Badges and then Badges tab Find the desired badge record in one of two ways e When the Badges form appears click Reader Issue Swipe the badge in a console reader and then click Find amp to display the existing badge holder data or When the Badges form appears enter search criteria in one or more fields and click Find amp Note Asearch amp using indexed fields improves the time required to find the records Some examples of indexed fields on the Badges form include Person Description and BID Complete the Badges form for the fields that require updating For details on completing each field see Badges form fields on page 225 Click Save To change a badge status to deleted l 2 3 Select Access Badges and then Badges tab
16. To restore the entire system 1 To recover the entire system perform the installation procedures For the complete installation procedures for Picture Perfect and the operating system refer to the Picture Perfect Installation Manual When you reach the Database Restore utility during installation select option 2 Restore customer s Database from Tape or option 3 Restore Customer s Database from Disk File depending on your media type and reload your database backup rather than the minimum or sample database Chapter 16 Data Generator and templates This chapter shows you how to use templates and template groups to create records In this chapter CFO E 320 Running templates orse irene a tA Ea E we ae ee es 320 Fei 321 Managing EE 324 320 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Overview The ability to run Data Generator is governed by your system permission profile The ability to run templates is governed by your facility permission profile The action permission Run Templates must be enabled on the Facility Permissions Profile form This function allows you to generate new records based on a template There are two ways to use templates Generate new records of the same type using the Run Template option on the form toolbar When a template is run a Wizard guides you through the necessary steps to create a new record for the form Generate and link all records required to set up a particular device using t
17. Also X BCTLABORDAYE Mode Event MSP LABOR DAY S MSP LABOR DAY E Description LIN LABOR DAY ST LIN NEW YEARS START LIN LABOR DAY END BCT THANKSGIVIN Faclity BCT THANKSGIVIN LIN LINCOLNTON NC LIN THANKSGIVING LIN THANKSGIVING MSP THANKSGIVIN MSP THANKSGIVIN BCT XMAS START L BCT XMAS END E LELXMAS START LIN HOLIDAY lt LIN LINCOLNTON w 9 LIN XMAS END MM MSP XMAS START MSP XMAS END MMiddlyyyy HHimmiss BCT NEW YEARS S ER Date 010172010 EEM Time 00 05 00 C Time Zone US NC United States GMT 50 w MSP NEW YEARS S MSP NEW YEARS E BCT MLK DAY END LIN MLK DAY START BCT MLK DAY STA LINMLKDAYEND w za Results 234 records Ir 3mpleted successfully Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 83 Mode Events form fields Field name Description Description Type any alphanumeric combination 1 to 60 alphanumeric characters for Description Example Normal to Thanksgiving Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box This field reflects the facility to which this record is assigned For more information s
18. T NO CATEGORY MAT 14 28 52 12345678901 23 initials last_name first 00 1 00 READER AREA 8888888822 GLOBAL 3 Ifyou select Jump to Reader the record for the reader where the badge activity occurred displays such as the following Doors And Readers Alarm Monitor Badge Monitor Input Monitor Operator Monitor Status Monitor User Monitor Doors DoorEvents Readers Reader Events Description t fe Q 00 1 00 READER a i B x o 4 gt x Q Reader Description inputs and Outputs State Type Function Options Notes Description 00 1 00 READER Facility GLOBAL Area AREA lt GLOBAL gt Interval Time seconds b Board Address Board 4 Address Micro MICRO 0 lt GLOBAL gt EN E 4 Results 1 records Search operation completed sur Chapter 13 277 Alarm activity monitors If you select Jump to Person the person record of the badgeholder displays such as the following or in the case of an Unknown Badge a blank person record displays 12 E XO 4 x Ge First Name 11 first name Last Name i ast name initials 71 initials j Title Employee Id 12345678901 2345678901 2345678901 23456 Juge Contractor lt GLOBAL gt v 20 PA Active i
19. translate lookup exclusivelbadge history SELECT column selection exclusivelid pin employee first name last name area category xact type duress hl reader type log reader type phy reader desc dept status dev xact date host xact date host xact fime utc AC utc xact time nbadge sequence kp alarm resp personnel type swipe show floor accessed tzcorr facility employee last name area xact type host xact date host xact time FROM Sunion exclusivelbadge historylbadge historytmp WHERE Stext exclusivelreport BadgeEncodeNumber bid AND Stext_exclusivelreport LastNamellast name AND text exclusivelreport PINNumberlpin AND Stext exclusivelreport EmployeeNumberlemployee AND Apply JP New Category Select a Report Badge History Report Tin Query Badge History Archive Report Will Query Snumber_exclusive report FloorNumber floor accessed AND single choice exclusivelreport Areal SELECT H Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 114 Reports form fields Field name Description Select a Report C
20. 393 records L Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete The list is in the order that the fields appear on the form There is no required sequence to follow Table 74 Time Zone form fields Field name Description Description Enter a description up to 60 characters This description should include the name of the country and region as well as the GMT time offset Example US TX United States Texas GMT 6 00 Location ID The location code based on the ISO 3166 1 standard up to 10 characters Example US TX Locale The name of the country up to 60 characters Example United States Region The name of the region if there is more than one time zone up to 60 characters Example Texas City List A list of some major cities in this specific region or country up to 255 characters Example Austin Dallas Houston San Antonio Std Bias The normal difference in hours and minutes of time in this location from UTC UTC Coordinated Universal HHMM Time is more commonly referred to as GMT Greenwich Mean Time and is the basis for the worldwide system of civil time Enable DST Click Yes to enable Daylight Savings Time Click No to disable Daylight Savings Time DST Bias The normal difference in hours and minutes of time in this location from UTC UTC Coordinated Universal HHMM Time is more commonly referred to as G
21. Create a New Template New Template from Blank Form Use a blank record form to create a new template New Template from Record Use the currently selected record to create a new template Modify Duplicate or Delete an Existing Template Select a Template Template Description Name Facility Engineering Elevator GLOBAL L vean JL pupicate Jl Gens a 3 Select the template you want to copy and click Duplicate A screen similar to the following displays 328 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Figure 137 Duplicate Template Create a New Template New Template from Blank Form Use a blank record form to create a new template New Template from Record Use the currently selected record to create a new template r Modify Duplicate or Delete an Existing Template Select a Template Template Description Hame 1 Facility his is for demonstration purposes only ICopy of Engineering Elevator GLOBAL Engineering Elevator GLOBAL Modity Duplicate Delete Cancel 4 Ifyou want to save it under a different name or edit any fields select it and click Modify to make the necessary changes Chapter 17 User interface customization This chapter shows you how to customize your system to your particular needs using custom forms and custom lists In this chapter yeFWeW 1 beep adh eee d d eae heed eed ee d
22. Detected To allow an alarm condition on this door to occur during this event when the door is held open beyond the Unlock Time specified in the Doors form gnored To allow a door to remain open during this event beyond the Unlock Time specified in the Doors form without generating an alarm Do Not Care See Radio buttons on page 27 Detected Ignored Forced Open Monitoring Detected To allow an alarm condition on this door to occur immediately when the door is forced open without a valid badge read or exit device gnored Select Ignored if the Monitoring function on this door is not used Do Not Care See Radio buttons on page 27 Mode Select the mode in which the area event will occur An event will not take place if it is not assigned to a mode and it will only occur in those modes to which it is assigned Begin Event At Mode Start If this is a Start End event click if you want the event to activate at the start of the mode At Mode End If this is a Start End event click if you want the event to activate at the end of the mode Time If the event is a Run Time event click if you want the event to activate at a specified time Chapter 10 211 Schedules and modes Table 86 Door Event form fields continued Field name Description HHmmss If the event is a Run Time event select the time of day that the event will start Remember to schedule another event as the pair of th
23. Elevator control Elevator Control allows you to control access to floors serviced by an elevator This feature works only with the Micro 5 M PX 2000 and M PXN 2000 micro controllers It allows the micro to control multiple elevator readers DI s and DO s This section shows how to implement the Elevator Control feature using any one of the following methods Elevator Micro DO Configuration Elevator Reader DO Configuration e Elevator Reader DI DO Configuration System configuration standards Elevator Control is a part of the base Picture Perfect software package Elevator Control is implemented on Micro 5 M PX 2000 or M PXN 2000 configurations only e A maximum of 64 floors can be serviced by one elevator 128 separate user configurable elevator categories are supported per elevator The elevator buttons are enabled for a length of time duration defined on the Outputs form All the buttons outputs should be set to the same duration M Badges must be authorized for an elevator reader in order to gain access to an assigned floor e Picture Perfect can address up to 4096 micros with each micro having up to a maximum of 16 elevator readers The recommended limit is based on memory and disk capacity of the Picture Perfect host system Elevator access There are two ways to grant access to an elevator floor Both require a valid badge swipe to an elevator configured reader and a valid category match between the badg
24. Enter SQL Statement SELECT elevator floor FROM elevator Rename Delete Category Category Badge History Report Will Query Badge History Archive Report Will Query 10 Click Print i to display the Print Preview page From this window you may Save to pdf or Print to your local printer Chapter 18 381 Advanced access control features Pre alarm notification Pre alarm Notification informs users that a sensing violation is about to occur The warning notification method can vary It can be set to trigger an output such as a horn or a light and or send a signal to the Alarm Monitor Pre alarm function Pre alarm is activated at a specified interval before a sensing violation occurs on an open door and will not function if the Allowable Open Time for that door is less than the specified interval The length of the Pre alarm interval is user configurable Pre alarm can be reset by a valid reader transaction or by closing the door Otherwise it resets when the sensing violation occurs Activating the Pre alarm means activating the Pre alarm input group Resetting the Pre alarm means resetting the Pre alarm input group When a valid reader transaction occurs while waiting for the Pre alarm to activate its timing is restarted During the interval between the Pre alarm and the sensing v
25. Form Set Page J Custom Form Alarm Colors Alarm Events Alarm Messages Alarm Responses Alarms Area Events Areas Backup Events Badge Designs Badge Format Badges Manufacturing Badge Categories Category Floors Change Mode 3 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 42 Form Profile fields Field name Description Description Enter a description up to 60 characters This description will appear in the Form Profile list box of the Permission form Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box This field reflects the facility to which this record is assigned For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Form Set Page The Picture Perfect form such as Badges Custom Form The custom form that you want to display when the operator accesses the Picture Perfect form Related procedures To create edit or delete a Form Profile record 1 Select Control Operators and then Form Profile tab 2 Refer to Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 Chapter 6 91 Operator administration Settin
26. Insert Facility Permi Update Facility Per view Operator Facility ace rl i Actions C Change Mode C Change Threat Level C Encode Badges C Encode Setup vj Manage Templates C Print Badges vi Run Templates Page Level Permissions Micros Mode Event Modems Modes Operator Activity Monitor ators i Output Group Events oan Groups Outputs lee eoeeseesE olololeolololoofi Goo ooooch Control Level Permissions i Change Password i Change Password on Next Login E Employee Id E Facility LDAP Authentication j Locale Login ta O O O O O O OF 101 102 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Step 3 Defining Permissions and Assigning a Facility Profile 1 2 3 4 5 From the Control menu select Operators and then the Permission tab From the toolbar click Add KI In the Description field type Badge Administrator Click Facility and select Global Under Facility Permissions from the list of facilities select Facility X and click in the adjacent Permission Profile cell A list of the defined facility profile records displays From the list select Update Badge Repeat step 5 and step 6 substituting Global in step 5 and View Operator in step
27. Personnel Template Template Name Maintenance Contractor 09 Template Description Step 1 Define Personnel for N A This template is used for creating personnel records Personal for maintenance personnel First Name Last Name initials Status Navigation You are on Step 1 for Maintenance Contractor Title There are 6 steps remaining to complete There are 1 templates to be applied l Personnet Maintenance Contractor W I Personnel Maintenance Contractor eg SS 1 Personal Le Jan d 3 2 Address 3 Properties CN 4 Category Manager 3 5 Badge Manager Status Dis User Fields LLL 3 7 Notes Previous Step Next Step Save and Close 5 In our example under Status Navigation notice that you are on Step 1 and the Wizard displays the Personal tab Fill in the required fields that appear in red and then click Next Step 6 Continue to fill in the remaining tabs until all required fields are compete When you have finished click Save and Close Data Generator The Data Generator form allows you to run a template group which contains templates for all the associated records required to set up a device Default template groups are provided for you Data Generator form The following example reflects a
28. SMS Inputs Tab 32 Define category records to identify groups of badge Access See Creating categories on holders by type title function or shift Places page 172 Categories Tab ER Define area records to describe areas of your site that Access See Creating areas on page 174 require the same level of access control Places Areas Tab Table 23 The steps for configuring a Picture Perfect system continued Chapter 3 Configuration checklist Step Task Menu Reference 34 Create reader records to define how each reader operates Configuration See Defining readers on page 182 and to associate it with any links required to process reader Doors and Readers actuvity Readers Tab 35 Create door records to define how each door operates and Configuration See Defining doors on page 187 to associate any links required to process doorstatusor Doors and Readers alarm activity Doors Tab 36 Create records to define operating modes in addition to Control See Creating modes on page 194 the system defined Normal mode that are activated either Modes by schedule or by command Modes Tab 37 Create mode event records to assign the starting date and Control See Changing modes by scheduling time that a mode goes into effect when scheduling a mode modes a mode event on page 198 h h holiday SE Ee Mode Events Tab 38 Create area events records to define and schedule the Access See Scheduling area ev
29. Select the desired category from the Available column on the right Slot The next available slot will be highlighted 1 2 Select the specific slot to which you want to assign the new category and then click l The new category and the slot number to which it was assigned displays in the Assigned column on the right To remove a category from a slot 1 Click the Category Manager tab A list of all assigned categories in alphabetical order will display on the left pane If a category has been assigned a slot the slot number will be displayed beside it All available categories will display on the right pane Select the desired category from the Assigned column on the left Click or double click the selected category The category is moved to the Available column and the slot number is removed Chapter 11 Badge management Category scheduler When you click the calendar on the Category Manager the Category Scheduler displays From here you may define the properties of the schedule Category schedules are set to be enabled during certain times of the day and will expire on a certain date and time They are selected and set based on an individual personnel record Note Micros must be properly installed before Category schedules become active In addition for this feature to work communications must be present between the host and micro Figure 101 Category Scheduler form Category Scheduler ye Midd HHmm
30. To select a capture input device 1 From the Access menu select People and then click the Personnel tab 2 Select the Images tab and then click Find Q to display a current list of records 3 Select the Personnel record that the image is to be associated with and then click Capture The Capture screen displays Figure 92 Capture dialogs xi Capture Signature i Reselect profile Epi Capture xj Crop Image Accept and close Cancel careto Capture Signature Dialog Reselect profile Enhance Image Gray Image Set Effects Fix Redeye Find face Accept and close Cancel Capture Photo Dialog 4 Click Capture Photo or Capture Signature to display the Select Image Source dialog box listing the available input devices on your computer By default the input device loads from a file Chapter 11 239 Badge management Figure 93 Select Image Source dialog Select Image Source lxi Capture Profiles OK Load Image From File File 5 Select the device you will be using and click Ok The next time you capture a photo or a signature the program will use the input device you selected 6 Repeat these steps to set up an input device for signature pads The program recognizes a separate input device for photos and signatures To capture a new image for a record 1 Click on the Capture Photo or Capture Signature button to capture a new imag
31. Total Licenses d a EA 9 3 en Total Users Licenses Available 97 Image User ID UserName Employee ID Permission Session IP Address Port Login Date Login Time 888999000 GLOI f Force Logoff Badge Admin LGPXUSDW 3 137 169 188 8085 09 01 2006 13 48 34 j 555656777 Badge Admin RIBVDSHEIE 3 137 169 188 8086 09 01 2006 13 49 49 d gj Send Message dmin 0000 System Administr ONZEBMEHKS 3 137 169 188 8087 09 01 2006 13 50 58 Jump To Operator 3 Select Force Logoff The user is immediately logged off of the system Note You can also force logoff from the command prompt Type pplogoff lt userid gt To force all users to log off the system 1 Make sure you are logged on to the operating system Open a terminal window 2 Atthe command prompt type pplogoff all To broadcast a message to all users that are logged into the system Note In order to perform this action you must have Send Message permission From the Main menu select Control Operators System Permissions Profile Make sure the Send Message action is selected on your System Permission profile 1 From the Monitor menu select User Monitor 2 From the toolbar click the Send Message icon Chapter 13 Alarm activity monitors Figure 117 Send Message All Operators Send a Message to Other Operators es Selected Operators Available Operators badams LOPXLISDWVVPLI jadoe RIS V DSHEIE Type your text Y ou w
32. enter a valid e mail alias An alias is used if you want to have an message sent to more than one email address Any messages sent to this address will be handled by the Sendmail subsystem and routed to the appropriate e mail addresses in the e mail alias Phone Number The phone number of the person specified by the e mail address Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box This field reflects the facility to which this record is assigned For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Test Email Click the Test Email button to send a test email to the email address entered Chapter 5 71 System configuration Related procedures To create edit or delete an email record 1 Select Control Routings and then Email Recipients tab 2 Refer to Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 To set up an alias 1 Open a new terminal window 2 Change tothe root user by typing su 3 Using an editor such as vi add the new alias to the etc aliases file Each alias must be unique and must start on a new line Aliases are in the form alias name somedomain com name2 someotherdomain net For more information at the command prompt type man aliases Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Defining routings Use the Routings form to define where messages are to be sent There are eleven predefined routings already entered The system lets you use these routings to send mes
33. 168 169 170 199 203 207 211 213 0c ere 216 218 220 226 227 235 time zone BK 5 Klee E 204 208 Timed ENEE 186 Timed tead er iss o aus inp dh eee Rk ees 185 DEE Rm 288 PAID E 288 MES 51t EAEE EE ves vene cp uuven E 24 Tool Ba ei een eee ee ee a 24 Toolbars MOnOr arree SEA SEENEN 262 Tour Badge eet EA EN E 227 Tour EA s v 287 TOU MONON iioc ORO aU PT ORDEN RUE to 17 Tracing Badge Holder Act 388 bein TS 6 BK 413 RRE 271 TLA EE 271 U Le 288 LBE 413 Unig e BEE 228 366 LCE 4 LR KEE UD eerste nra E Unknown Badge Eet Eed Unknown Routing Unlock E Duci ENEE eege SEENEN Upstream Communication Failure sseeeeeees 127 Upstream MiCIO cae ecd eere o to uices tab Te e ee HEUS 134 Upstream RECS tert e E Ee 135 Upstream Retry Interval eee tete erp tet edidit 135 Usage COuUnt m 227 Usage Exha sted ee e SD Ee 272 User et 17 86 87 283 V Valid Door Eocked EEN 271 SV aid RO 271 Valid AGr E 183 KI Big EE 271 KE BE 181 Valid Toggle Wizard 5 320 321 Mt ET terr eere RS E ESSE WEE We PEREUA 413 X X enee E Ee e EE ee 413 X ee 413 RG EE 413 MOP gi Rate DE 42 Xon Threshold
34. 460620002C Picture Perfect 4 5 External Interface User Manual 460588003B Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual 460581004B Picture Perfect 4 5 Tables and Fields 460566003B Picture Perfect 4 5 Enterprise Edition User Manual 460234008B Picture Perfect 4 5 Import Export User Manual 460219007C Picture Perfect 4 5 Guard Tours User Manual 460203007B Picture Perfect 4 5 Redundant Edition User Manual 460134009C Picture Perfect 4 5 Imaging Installation Manual 460119107B UBF Universal Badge Format for Picture Perfect 460625001A Graphics Monitoring and Control User Manual 460624001B Credential Designer User Manual 460557006B CARMA Card Access Report Management Application for Picture Perfect 4605 16002C Chapter 1 Introduction This chapter describes Picture Perfect and its features Readers should familiarize themselves with the information in this chapter before continuing to other chapters in this document In this chapter EE EEN H New in Picture Perfect A3 3 ORCAS Jeunfuhel EE eese ee ede caedes oe Ce ds 4 Optional features RENE er RR RR SER NER 5 BURTON SPIEL stesse Sere e esae aged adu rotes ed Sod datos 6 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Overview The Picture Perfect system is a powerful flexible integrated computer based physical access management system It is a complete end to end solution for today s most commonly deployed physical security applications providing real time monitoring command and
35. A type of bus conforming to the Industry Standard Architecture Keypad Override Code See Shunt LAN A Local Area Network X Terminals are connected to the host computer using an Ethernet LAN Linux Linux often pronounced LIH nuhks with a short i is a UNIX like operating system that was designed to provide personal computer users a free or very low cost operating system comparable to traditional and usually more expensive UNIX systems Linux has a reputation as a very efficient and fast performing system Linux is a remarkably complete operating system including a graphical user interface an X Window System TCP IP the Emacs editor and other components usually found in a comprehensive UNIX system Linux is publicly open and extendible by contributors Because it conforms to the Portable Operating System Interface standard user and programming interfaces developers can write programs that can be ported to other operating systems Locale A language and the location in which it is used All languages in Picture Perfect are defined in terms of locale Each language has a unique locale identifier Picture Perfect uses the locale identifiers defined by AIX Refer to the Operator s form for a list of locale identifiers Log on The procedure used by operators to identify themselves to the system To use the system an operator must log on with a Login ID and Password The Login ID is associated with a Permissions le
36. After clicking OK on the Select Image Source window the change is not accepted This is a known problem that can occur the first time the Select Image Source window is used after the client application is started Perform the following workaround 1 After selecting the device click Reselect profile a second time to confirm that the desired capture device is highlighted If not highlight the desired capture device 2 Click OK Problem When clicking the Print and or Preview buttons on the Badge or Personnel form the application appears to hang This problem can occur if there is a hidden window requiring input that is obscured by another window If the Show print setup dialog button 1s enabled on the Print Options screen the printer options window can be hidden behind another window Perform the following workaround to bring the hidden window to the top of the screen 1 Hold down the keyboard Alt key 2 Click the Tab key until the Java coffee mug icon is selected 3 Release the Alt key The hidden window should now appear on top and can be dispatched to allow the print or preview operation to continue Problem Application appears to hang The first time that an operator logs in on an imaging workstation the client applet will perform a one time analysis of the badge designs to determine their use of fields in the person and badge tables Please be patient as this process may take a few minutes if you have a large numbe
37. Asia 852 2907 8108 Australia 61 3 9259 4700 Europe 48 58 326 22 40 Latin America 503 885 5700 Glossary This section explains some terms as they apply to Picture Perfect 4 5 Table 127 Picture Perfect 4 5 terms explained Term Definition Access The ability to enter or pass through such as to enter a building by going through a door See Access Control Access Control A security system that controls an individual s ability to enter an area building parking lot room Typically readers protect doors or gates Badges used in the readers permit or deny access based on a person s authorization ACK Acknowledgment See ACK Packet ACK Packet A message sent between computers to acknowledge that the preceding message was received correctly Active Window The window with the input focus in which what you type appears Only one window is active at a time AIX Advanced Interactive Executive the UNIX based operating system developed by IBM used for Picture Perfect Alarm Notification Message An alarm alert message that displays on the Alarm Notification Window on Picture Perfect X Terminals when an alarm occurs Alarm State When an alarm sensor detects an alarm condition such as an open door its contacts open or close depending on the type of sensor and how it is wired to the system and the sensor is said to be in alarm state Allowable Open The length of time a door can remain
38. Enabled Door Strike Relock On Door Open On Door Close ST Hl On Door Unlock Duration Results 2 records D F Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 80 Doors form fields Field name Description Door Values Define the door and the times allowed before alarms are enabled Description Type a door description up to 60 alphanumeric characters long Unlock Time Enter the number of seconds that this door may remain unlocked due to a valid badge read or an exit button secs being pushed This field controls how long the door strike is unlocked for the badge holder to open the door After that the Allowable Open Time controls how long the badge holder may keep the door open while the badge holder is passing through Forced Open Enter the number of seconds that the Door Forced Open alarm will be shunted before an alarm is generated Shunt Time When the shunt time expires the Door Forced Open alarm is enabled secs The number of seconds set here must be greater than the Unlock Time This field controls how long a door strike will remain unlocked after the Unlock Time expires so a bad
39. For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Permission Group Type Area Category Select the Area Category radio button if the permission group is to be used to control the categories and areas that an operator is permitted to assign Reports A Report permission group can be assigned to reports if the Enforce Report permissions option is enabled through the System Parameters form Select the Reports radio button if the permission group is to be used to restrict operator report access to only those reports that the operator permission record specifies Related procedures To create edit or delete a Permission Group record 1 Select Control Operators and then Permission Groups tab 2 Referto Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 Chapter 6 93 Operator administration Setting up permissions Use the Permissions form to define the functions that each operator level is permitted to perform such as System Administrator Badge Administrator or Alarm Operator That permission can then be assigned to individual operators from a list box By default the system provides the permission of System Administrator This permission should be assigned to one or more operators who have total responsibility for the Picture Perfect system and therefore require all functions Figure 34 Relationship Between Permissions Profiles and Permission Groups Facility based forms a Pe
40. Input Groups Inputs Outputs Input Group Events Output Group Events Description Facili OH L E A p Eed tan mmm l E Ej X o r4 2 xX az MICRO 10 123898 GLOBAL Output Groups 01 1 00 Fire Output GLOBAL Description 01 1 00 Fire Output Device Facility GLOBAL Enabled O No Results 3 records Save operation completed successfully Chapter 8 127 Device management Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 54 Output Groups form fields Field name Description Description Enter a description up to 60 characters You can write descriptions for output group names to reflect how the outputs in the group function The description becomes part of the transaction message telling the monitoring operator what happened and where One part of this description may include non technical language for operator information and the other part may include a wiring address or location Example 001 0 01 FIRE OUTPUT DEVICE 001 0 02 PERIMETER SURVEILLANCE DEVICE Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box By default the output group record will be assigned the same fa
41. Interval Er E Invalid APB e E Invalid APB A 8 LE 272 Invalid Badge iur eege 128 Invalid COU EE 272 OTT 272 Invalid In Grou EE 183 Invalid CR LEE 272 Invalid PIN T valid re EE Invalid T amp A In Invalid T amp A Out 190 384 386 Keypad Alarm Response Keypad Gode eee pere e n te boe OU OS 384 Keypad Only bee d Ee 184 Keypad Override Code eer need 410 Keypad Response eene e Re D ee e ee e serene 233 Keypad Shunt Time erra p eee Roe 189 KRINVLD Open DR utet ico dente test ie tete einen 272 KR Not Enabled eiat vetet e Mere e er trece 272 LAN egene eekleg eet eebe 410 Eear Tiraeout cicer SEENEN EE aeons 272 Tages eesti eens 2 410 413 TSS EW WOW EE 28 ET 238 TO Gale ageet reegt 96 410 TO CAG ON ys een eia iet oie eet emt e ro en 264 Location IR DEE 169 Lock on DUfeSS esce ep cene eei oet tee m e pP E 136 Log Monitor ER 17 86 87 289 Logging off Logging on Ihm M Logical Reader Function sese 185 208 Logical Reader Type eripere eterne ete pe eee 204 Logical State c eU eee Lost Badge ee M 128 Iano 181 Low Speed Ba d ste e Att br eee tees id 65 EA 410 Mana tess P 23 25 26 34 335 Manage Template 82 324 Manage Tettiplates ie oen ee Ee ere elei 83 324 Map Vales E S 258 M x View R68 ovario re eerta
42. Overview Once your installation is complete perform the steps below to begin using your system Each of these steps is discussed in detail in the following sections 1 Start Picture Perfect 2 Log on 3 Select one or more facilities 4 Familiarize yourself with the user interface and the navigation tools Starting and stopping Picture Perfect Power on your system to start Picture Perfect On the desktop open a browser that has a Java plug in for example Internet Explorer or Netscape During normal operations the application automatically starts when the Picture Perfect server is powered on There may be occasions when the system administrator shuts down Picture Perfect and other occasions that the entire system and Picture Perfect TPS and Informix is shut down For more information see Related procedures Related procedures The following procedures are performed from the command line in a terminal window on the server console Stopping Picture Perfect e Shutting down the entire system Restarting Picture Perfect To stop Picture Perfect Use the following command sequence to shut down the Picture Perfect application 1 Logonas ppadmin atthe console terminal 2 Make sure no one is logged on as an operator To verify 1f anyone is logged on from a new window type smutl o 1 A detailed list of all operator sessions currently logged on displays 3 Type rc pperf k or On a redundant system type pprsc
43. Restore Access Secure Control Outputs Routings Route Definitions L7 Route Points Email Recipients O Jeff Jackson lt GLOBAL gt v T Sean Ackerman GLOBAL DS D Z Ezmereueas o POI xa x Gio Route Point Schedule Route Definition Building 1 GLOBAL GES P Y Facility GLOBAL goo Ke d Route to Operator Bump to Operator Jeff Jackson Sean Ackerman Operator perator Results Route to Email Bump to Email 1records r Save operation could not be completed Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 49 Route Point form fields Field name Description Route Definition This field identifies the current route point s route definition Click the Route Definition button to display a list box Select the desired Route Definition and then click OK Example Building A Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box This field reflects the facility to which this record is assigned For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Route To Operators This field identi
44. Select a record from the list in the data grid Click Delete x The selected record appears in the data grid with the deleted icon fy next to it Click Save This icon will not be available if all required information is not entered or if you do not have the required permissions for the form Note If you delete a custom list that is being used on a custom form the custom list will not be deleted from the form 336 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Chapter 18 Advanced access control features This chapter describes how to control specific areas of access in your system according to your specific requirements In this chapter DyerWeW be eet et Peta eae pete E eeh ERES 338 ee CORO AAR a cha eA a we E eee pps 338 Ar d so APP 366 Double badee function i cererii essct et esa ed ke Roe es 366 Elevator COMPO esses ersa c er ERROR GR AUNT 369 Pre nlarm notification 62654 cese sese ee meae e e e os 381 Controlling alarms using a keypad code 384 Tracing badge holder activity ere oc oe Lees ce ences 388 Ix dicc EE 390 338 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Overview Your access control system is a group of devices working together including a host micros readers doors inputs and outputs To accommodate high security areas elevators and varying stages of security alerts these devices can be configured to operate in different manners based on your particular needs Occupancy control Picture Perfect allow
45. Some examples of indexed fields on the Personnel form include Last Name First Name Employee ID Phone1 Last Access Reader and Last Access Area Example Jane Doe is a temporary employee assigned to the Accounting Department Figure 90 Personnel Form Q 4 EX o 9X s Personal Address Properties Category Manager Badge Manager Images User Fields Notes Last Name First Name Mane Initials A Title Ms Employee Id 123 Type Temporary GLOBAL Department ACCOUNTING GLOBAL Facility GLOBAL Find Complete Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 93 Personnel form fields Field name Description Last Name Enter the badge holder s last name up to 60 characters First Name Enter the badge holder s first name up to 60 characters Initials Enter the badge holder s initials up to 60 characters Title Enter the badge holder s title up to 60 characters Example Mr Mrs Ms Dr 232 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 93 Personnel form fields
46. Table 56 Micros form fields continued Tab Field Description Secondary Displays the selected secondary port for micro communications Port Click the Secondary Port button to display the Ports list box Select the secondary port that will be activated if communication is lost on the primary line Uni directional micros require a primary port assignment and None specified for the secondary port Bi directional micros require both a primary and a secondary port assignment Dial up micros do not require a port assignment assign None to both the primary and secondary port Firmware The revision of application code that is contained in the micro This field is read only Version Facility Code Optional Type a facility number 1 to 5 digits long If the 8RP board loses communication with the micro s CPU board access can still be granted to all badges with a facility code that matches this field If this field is left empty the 8RP will grant access to all badges while in this degraded mode This applies only for 8RP boards in a Micro 2 or Micro 4 Shunt Code Optional Type a shunt code 1 to 10 digits long With Shunting Enabled on the Area and Reader forms this code entered on a keypad allows a badge holder to prop a door open for the time specified on the Doors form without triggering a door held open alarm Alarm Optional Type an Alarm Response Code 1 to 10 digits long With Keypad Alarm Respon
47. The modified two man rule further restricts access to a controlled area based on the badge holders M2MR category type Additionally a Door Control option can be enforced which after access has been granted to the first two badge holders requires a door release button to be pressed before access is granted to any subsequent badge holders M2MR category type There are three M2MR category types assigned through the Categories form None Access to an M2MR controlled area will not be permitted while M2MR control is enabled By default any existing or new categories are assigned this category type Guest A Guest is not allowed entry to an M2MR controlled area unless two 2 Team Members are already present in the area Team Member If the M2MR controlled area is empty a Team Member is allowed entry only with a second Team Member Additional Team Members can enter individually after the initial two 2 Team Members are present in the M2MR controlled area Furthermore at least two 2 Team Members must be present until all Guests have exited Note Ifthe micro controlling an M2MR area resets it will automatically reset the occupancy count to zero Therefore in the unlikely event that this occurs while the area is occupied the system administrator must disable Two Man Rule evacuate the area and then reinstate M2MR Modified two man rule without door control The first two badge holders to enter a controlled space must be Team Members a
48. Time If the event is a Run Time event click if you want the event to activate at a specified time HHmmss If the event is a Run Time event select the time of day that the event will start Remember to schedule another event as the pair of this one Example If something is turned on every day at 8 AM it must be turned off at some time later that day Time Zone Context Select the time zone context in which the schedule should execute Host Micro or Operator See Verifying time zones on page 168 Days of the Week If the event is a Run Time event select the days of the week that the event will occur Media Type Select the media to use for the backup Tape or Disk File Note If Disk File is selected the file cas db text diskfile cfg must exist Filename If you chose to save to a Disk File enter the name of the filesystem to store the backup Click Browse to select from a list If your backup file is expected to exceed 2 GB ensure that the location where the file is to be stored is defined as a Large File System Otherwise the backup file will be incomplete Related procedures To create edit or delete a Backup Event 1 From the Control menu select Backup Restore and then click the Backup Events tab 2 Refer to Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 Triggering Emergency modes using input groups Use the Emergency form to define emergency mode triggers for selected faci
49. You must select a direct port Secondary port For bi directional micros you must also select a secondary port which must be a direct port Modem type None 4 Leave the remaining fields on the Dial Up screen blank To create a Dial up Micro record 1 Select Configuration Micros and then Micro tab 2 Refer to Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 3 Complete the Micros form with special attention to the items below The following fields must be set to the given value Specify None for port assignment primary and secondary since dial up micros call the host on any available port that is compatible same modem type Select the modem type of the host s modem 4 Complete the remainder of the Dial Up portion of the screen To create a Network Micro record 1 Select Configuration Micros and then Micro tab 2 Referto Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 3 Complete the Micros form with special attention to the items below The following fields must be set to the given value For the primary port you must select a network micro port For the secondary port you must select None e Select a modem type of None 4 Leave the remaining fields on the Dial Up screen blank To create a Network Dial up Micro record 1 Select Configuration Micros and then Micro tab 2 Referto Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 3 Complete the Micros form wit
50. a specific time of the day must be entered The search will return only those records that contain a start time that matches the time entered To search for scheduled events based on any time of the day do not select the At time mode buttons Select the days of the week for which scheduled events are desired and then click Find Drop down lists e Selecting an item from a drop down list will limit the search to records with matching selections Drop down lists will auto complete allowing you to type in leading characters of a desired item to jump to that point A blank or an empty drop down list does not limit the search List window Adding an item from the Available window to the Selected window limits the search to those records with matching selections If more than one item is selected the search is limited to those records containing all of the selected items in the exact order shown Note A blank Selected window does not limit the search Type ahead search To quickly access an item in a grid click in any cell and begin to type the first letters of the item for which you are searching For example if you type mO where 0 is zero the first item beginning with mo is highlighted However if you type mo where o is oh the first letter typed m takes you to an entry beginning with m but when you type the o the text displays in red indicating that there is no entry beginning with mo Search for 00 Ges T
51. and system performance activity transactions which can be archived to disk file or Chapter 1 Introduction tape Depending on the size of your hard drive the system can be configured to store more history records online User Defined Reports The reports feature provides an SQL Structured Query Language interface to the online Picture Perfect database so that you can use ANSI standard SQL select statements to query the database and generate reports Pre loaded SQL reports satisfy standard administration requirements The query function allows unlimited selection criteria and up to eight sort criteria including the use of user defined variables as input to the query The relational database allows an SQL statement to join multiple database tables in one report sorting the result by any selected field DirecDoor PXNPlus M5 M3000 and M2000 series microcontroller support for Readers Alarms Scheduler During normal operation these micros use their resident databases to make local access control decisions In the event of communication failure with the host these micros control and store reader and alarm activity and also implement scheduler events Global Anti passback Supported Any reader on any M5 M2000 DirecDoor or M3000 series microcontroller except a dial up micro can be configured as an anti passback reader Keypad Reader Support for PIN Entry Keypad reader support is provided to enhance security Time Zone Support The Time Zo
52. such as access attempts or alarms Management reports are available to provide the system administrator with the activities within the system any time on demand The program is personalized by the customer to their specific requirements and configuration by simple windows and menus An operator can change the size and position of a screen the forms can be customized to include specific fields and custom lists can be added Chapter 1 Introduction The system uses a relational database management system RDBMS which allows the operator to query the database using menu driven forms These forms allow the operator to specify data fields requested logical relationships between the fields and the order in which the fields are to be selected Once the request for data is made the matching records are displayed in a grid the operator selects a record from the grid to display the form If desired the operator can print the requested data by selecting the appropriate option The system architecture uses a distributed approach comprised of micros and the host processor Onan AIX system all terminals are graphics terminals except the host console which could be a character based terminal OnaLinux system all terminals including the host console are graphics terminals New in Picture Perfect 4 5 Picture Perfect 4 5 introduces the following key capabilities features and or product enhancements OS and database technology refresh
53. unless someone manually unlocks the door Runtime events can be used to allow certain people access to an area at certain times such as with multiple shifts of workers You can assign an area certain categories from 8 AM to 5 PM and other categories for later shifts or for weekends Each shift must have its own category which must be on the appropriate badges To do this set up a series of Area Events that change categories After you set the days and the time for each event category change to occur the events continue to occur on a weekly cycle Start end events Start end events occur only once during the mode either at mode start or at mode end Start end events are frequently used for Emergency and Holiday modes A mode start event may require a parallel mode end event to undo the change This may not be necessary however since the next normal mode change may accomplish the desired change For example a Fire Mode could be set up using mode start and mode end events When the operator uses the Mode Command form to select Fire Mode all the events associated with this mode will immediately activate such as triggering a continuous siren and unlocking all doors so people can exit or enter the building without badges Chapter 10 Schedules and modes Scheduling area events To schedule changes for all the readers doors and routings in an area use an area event An event can also put the entire area online or offline
54. 152 Readers form Options H Doors And Readers Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zone Doors Readers Reader Events Door Events Description e Pyl 71 91 STHOCCR a Q 4 Wi Ax o 4 x ZS Gi 21 2 00 STLIOCE R 221 00 STLIGE180 Reader Description Inputs and Outputs State Type Function Options 14 3 00 STLF ACILI 14 3 01 STLILLDEC Kies 14 4 00 STLILLDEC EE 15 1 00 STLIMAINT Double 454 01 STLALE C 15 2 00 STLALE C pastas 15 2 01 STLALE Gl Enabled 40 1 01 STLI2NBO O Disabled 40 2 01 STL 2N104 40 3 00 STL 2NS80 Toggle 32 1 00 STLILOBB No 32 1 01 STLILOBB O Yes 32 2 00 STLILOBB 32 2 01 STLILOBB Shunting 31 2 00 STLIEMPL Disabled 31 2 01 STLIEMPL O Enabled 31 3 00 STLIEMPL 31 3 01 STLIEMPL Scheduling 53 01 01 DTRISER Enabled 53 03 01 DTRIDBL pf 53 03 00 DTRISTE Ge 53 02 01 DTRANNE Elevator Reader 53 02 00 DTRITAI Yes 53 01 00 DTR BAI x 54 01 00 DTRISTE Ono I gt Results 118 records gt 6 Optional If you want to activate a DO such as a blinking light between the first and second required badge swipes click Two Man Rule Output and select the output to be triggered 7 Save and exit the Readers form To set up the area doors Note The door sensor input and the door outp
55. 30 Field Length 60 Field Name description Label Name Description Required Yes Validation Class Name comn ge security pp 12 Click Save to save your custom form Creating and editing custom lists You can create custom lists to appear in the user fields of the Personnel form to satisfy specific requirements For example you can create a custom Personnel form that contains a drop down list of company or division names 334 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Figure 145 Custom List form ij Custom Lists P System Parameters Printers Imaging Terminals Badge Designs Custom Lists G custom List Description j IM 3 Eye Color GU Q ES E x D L wd SZ Custom List Description Eye Color Facility GLOBAL x K of r Custom List Element Bue 4 D Results Add Remove Update 1 records Fields and controls Table 123 Custom List form fields Field name Description Description Type any alphanumeric combination 1 to 60 characters Example Eye Color Custom List The items that will appear in the custom list are displayed in this box Item Type the name of the item to be included in the custom list Add Click Add to insert the text entered in the Item box to the Custom List box Remove Select one or more items in the Custom List box and click Remove to delete them from t
56. 618 324 1226 knowledge but do not clear the alarm Responses to Date Date Time Operator Response 10 27 2004 12 58 30 install System testing Enter new response gt lal RSVP uilding patrol caused the alarm v Add Fields and controls Table 104 Alarm Response form fields Field name Description Instructions Displays alarm instructions such as who to call or who to dispatch to the area Messages can be defined in the Alarm Messages form Up to five messages can be assigned to each alarm in the Alarm form Responses to Date Displays all the responses to the alarm event up to the current time Date Time The date and time of the response Operator The operator s user name Response The response text Enter new response Use to enter a custom text response Use up to 255 characters RSVP Click to select from a list of predefined alarm responses To create a new response based on a predefined alarm response click Add The selected response displays in a window where you may edit it and save as a new response Related procedures To respond to an alarm 1 Silence the alarm by clicking Silence on the Alarm Alert window 270 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual 2 Select Monitor and then Alarm Monitor 3 Select the alarm The Alarm Response window appears 4 Optional Click Outputs to toggle associated outputs on or off 5 Option
57. Alarms 10 Se d l a x amp a Total Alarms 774 Display is now active Highest Priority 1 Pri i Fields and controls Table 103 Alarm Monitor columns Field name Description Priority The priority level assigned to the alarm in the Alarms form This tells the system in which order it should alert the operator should multiple alarms occur at the same time Alarm Description The alarm s text description as defined in the Alarms form Location The alarm location can be an 8RP board number or the description field of any of the following forms Inputs Readers Micros or Input Groups Condition Alarm The alarm is in the active alarm state either Open or Closed The active alarm state for an alarm is defined in the Alarms form Reset The alarm has been reset or turned off It is no longer in the active alarm state Tamper The wiring of the alarm input has been cut or tampered with Table 103 Alarm Monitor columns continued Chapter 13 Alarm activity monitors Field name Description Input State Open The wires connecting the input are registering more than normal infinite resistance indicating the connection has been broken Closed The input contacts are in the closed position N A This field is not applicable for this type of alarm Short The wires connecting the input are registering less than normal or no resistance eat indicating the con
58. C Manage Templates for Elevators Create a New Template New Template from Blank Form Use a blank record form to create a new template New Template from Record Use the currently selected record to create a new template Modify Duplicate or Delete an Existing Template Select a Template Template Description Hame j Facility his is for demonstration purposes only Engineering Elevator GLOBAL larketing Elevator GLOBAL Modify Duplicate Delete Cancel LA T I Select the template you want to edit and click Modify A screen similar to the following displays Figure 134 Modify Template E Template Management You are modifying a template for Elevators Template Hame Marketing Elevator Template Description This is for demonstration purposes only Elevator Definition Define Floors Description xj lal Manage Configuration Facility GLOBAL Template Facility GLOBAL Field Locks Configuration Type Micro DO amp ReaderibO Lock the following fields Locked fields cannot be ReaderDIDO edited when the template is run in the Wizard MIO Manage Description vi Facility vi Configuratii Reader 01 1 00 READER GLOBAL Fire DO a Manage 4 Make the desi
59. DOOR HELD OPEN DOOR FORCED OPEN INVALID BADGE LOST BADGE SUSPENDED BADGE UNKNOWN BADGE HOST TO MICRO 0 COMM F BADGE HISTORY OVERFL MO DOWNSTREAM MICRO UNKNOWN BADGE TRACED PERSON ALARM SUSPENDED BADGE stsmar sndmgr schmagr rsndmar rcvmgr prmgr oprmgr My Reader E Chapter 3 Configuration checklist This chapter describes the preferred order of tasks required for setting up your Picture Perfect system Readers should familiarize themselves with the information in this chapter before continuing to other chapters in this document In this chapter dot PEE 30 Configuration EDS rele e ee de RR RE RICE Ru sens 30 30 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Overview Because the Picture Perfect applications build off one another it is important that the setup procedures follow a logical flow The steps below are listed in the preferred order to make the configuration of your system a smooth one Configuration steps Table 23 The steps for configuring a Picture Perfect system Step Task Menu Reference 1 Assign system parameters to be used by the system during Setup See Assigning system parameters operations System on page 40 Parameters 2 Create facility records in order to partition your database Configuration See Creating facilities on page 53 records Facilities Facility Tab 3 Create printer records for the printers configured during Setup See Setti
60. Date Time the note was created and the operator that created it Click on a column heading to sort by Date Time Operator or alphabetically by note Saved Notes l Date Time n Operator L Hotes V o Changed alarm enforcement 08 10 2006 10 26 09 Click to sort on the column due to new requirements 08 1 4 2006 13 08 46 install Changed password length 08 1 4 2006 13 07 05 install Changed default routing By hovering the mouse over the note the entire note displays Saved Notes k Date Time L Operator L Hotes v d Changed alarm enforcement 4 08 10 2006 10 26 09 install due to new requirements 08 14 2006 13 08 46 install Changed password length 08 1 4 2006 13 07 05 install Changed default routing ei Notes This is a free form text field where you can add information pertinent to System Parameter records Example Changed password length 12 12 09 Note Notes cannot exceed 210 characters they will be truncated if exceeded 49 50 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Related procedures To edit system parameters 1 From the Setup menu select System Parameters and then click the System Parameters tab 2 Edit the System Parameters form as necessary Note only certain fields can be edited See Table 24 Parameter Form Fields on page 42 for a description of each field 3 Click Save DI This icon is not available unless all required information is entere
61. Detailed communication status Event Micro to host response Micro ID Displays the micro s identification number Firmware Version The revision of application code currently flashed in the micro Next in Line Displays the ID number of the downstream micro Primary Port Displays the primary port of the micro Secondary Port Displays the secondary port of the micro Last Communication In the case of a downstream micro this field shows the last time a non ACK packet was received from the micro In the case of a head of line micro this field shows the last time any packet was received including ACK packets an acknowledgement that the last message was received Primary Channel A yes no Y N flag field indicating whether the micro is communicating via the primary port Secondary Channel A yes no Y N flag field indicating whether the micro is communicating via the secondary backup port Online A yes no Y N flag field indicating whether the micro is online Trace A yes no Y N flag field indicating whether the micro is traced Reset A yes no Y N flag field indicating whether the micro is resetting If the micro requests a mandatory reset during power up or if the host initiates a mandatory reset command by operator request this flag is set to Y until the micro is reset and a final synchronization message is sent to indicate that it is
62. Door Close 8 On Door Unlock Duration Save and exit the Door form To enable Occupancy Control l 2 Results 114 records D From the Control menu select Operators and then click the Facility Permissions Profile tab From the toolbar click on Find to locate the Facility Permission profile record you want to modify Under Page Level Permissions click on Areas and make sure the level of permission is set to Update Under Control Level Permissions click on Occupancy Control and make sure the level of permission is set to Update 359 360 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Figure 170 Facility Permissions Profile form 2 Operators Operators Modes Routings Backup Restore Operators Permission Groups Permission System Permissions Profile Description ai GE Q 4 i IE eA E x a Q Insert Facility Permissions Update Facility Permissions Facility Permissions View Facility Permissions INo Facility Permissions L GLOBAL FACILITY PROFILE Page Level Permissions MONITORING PERMISSION Hame I Hone Men Update Insert Delete BADGE OPERATOR TE Em i B E badge operator Alarm Events o Q o o ES MUNK Alarm Messages o o o FH Alarm Responses o o o Archive o o o Area Events o o o o Areas o o o o Area Status s o o o Backup Oo o o O fd Co
63. Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zone Doors Readers Reader Events Door Events Description y Computer Room Diser amp Al Wi X o 4 a X ZS Gi Lock Lobby Door 5 Nd Unlock Lobby Door NQ Reader Events State Function Computer Room En Pl x M Computer Room Disable APB Reader 01 1 00 Computer Room GLOBA e Mode Emergency GLOBAL Begin Event amp At Mode Start At Mode End O Time Wummss e Time Zone Context Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 85 Reader Event form fields Field name Description Description Type any alphanumeric combination 1 to 60 alphanumeric characters for Description Example Unlock Lobby Door at 08 00 Chapter 10 Schedules and modes Table 85 Reader Event form fields continued Field name Description Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box This field reflects the facility to which this record is assigned For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Rea
64. Facility Permissions Page Level Permissions Name Hon View Update Insert Delete Alarm Events o OC OO e Alarm Messages Oo Q EY e fe Alarm Responses o Oo fe e Archive o Oo fe e Area Events CH Q EY oO fe areas o o Area Status O Q EY oO fe Backup oO fe O e Control Level Permissions Name None View Update Lost Input Group el e Lost Routing o O e Occupancy Control o o Occupancy Count oO O Permission Group oO O Physical State e O Route Definition Qo e Scheduling o O Shuntina fat x E Gel 19 Results 10 records To enable Occupancy Counting for the area Note page 340 1 From the Access menu select Places and then click the Areas tab 2 From the toolbar click on Find to locate the area record you want to set up 3 On the Area tab under Occupancy Control enable the Occupancy Counting radio button In order to perform this function you must have Occupancy Control permission See To enable Occupancy Control on 341 342 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Figure 150 Areas form Occupancy Control Places 0 7777 1777707777777 People Badges Places L7 Areas Categories Area Events Description m um STLIGENERAL AREA Q 4 amp Wi xo 4 xX SC Q
65. Field name Description Assigned This is a list of all badges assigned to this badge holder personnel record regardless of facility If the Badges badge s facility is not in the operator s selected facilities the operator will only be able to view not edit the badge assignment If multiple personnel records are selected only those badges that are common to all records will be displayed Available This is a list of all available badges not assigned to this badge holder personnel record Only those records Badges in the operator s selected facilities will be displayed The operator must have Update permission to the Badge Manager Assign Button Click on this button to add a badge to a personnel record The badge will appear in the Assigned grid Remove Button Click on this button to remove a Temporary badge or to remove a permanent badge from a personnel record prior to the record being saved The badge will be removed from the Assigned grid Temp Issue Click to display the Temp Issue dialog This is used to assign an available badge to a personnel record with an expiration date Current active badges are suspended Badge Form See Table 92 on page 225 Fields 252 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Temp Issue You may replace a permanent badge with a temporary badge when an employee forgets or misplaces their permanent badge The permanent badge is suspended the categories and employee details are
66. HE GRULLON Jo JONAS ST JONES RC S dal H Results 500 records 8 Saveand exit the Personnel form Badge transactions for occupancy counting and 2MR Table 124 Badge transactions for Occupancy Counting and Two Man Rule features 2MR mode Badge event description Badge transaction generated DISABLED Invalid badge swipe Invalid badge Occupancy Unknown badge swipe Badge Unknown Counting is enabled Valid badge swipe on IN reader door is not opened Valid no passage Valid badge swipe on IN reader door is opened APB T amp A IN occupancy count incremented by one Valid badge swipe on OUT reader door is not opened Valid no passage Valid badge swipe on OUT reader door is opened APB T amp A OUT occupancy count decremented by one STANDARD 2MR Invalid badge swipe Invalid badge Unknown badge swipe Badge Unknown Two valid badge swipes on IN reader when room is empty within specified reader interval time door is not opened Valid no passage Two valid badge swipes on IN reader when room is empty within specified reader interval time door IS opened Two APB T amp A IN occupancy count incremented by two to two 363 364 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 124 Badge transactions for Occupancy Counting and Two Man Rule features continued 2MR mode Badge event description Badge transaction generated Two badge s
67. Inputs Outputs and then Inputs tab 2 Referto Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 163 164 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Controlling outputs Outputs are devices that can turn on or off due to an input condition or operator intervention An authorized operator can turn outputs on or off using the Control Outputs function for the duration of time entered on the Output form You can select a single input group output group or an individual output from this window Click the corresponding icon to display the Control Outputs window or the Control Output Groups window Figure 68 Control Outputs Form 4 Control Outputs ota E Operators Modes Routings Backup Restore Access Secure Control Outputs Input Groups Output Groups Outputs seh Sa Example The Control Output Groups window allows you to manually control all associated output devices such as lights or sirens For example you may decide to use a manual reset for a motion sensor that activates floodlights in a parking lot To control all outputs associated with the selected output group click the On or Off radio button Figure 69 Control Output Group Window Control Output Groups 00 1 00 READER On Off To control an individual output associated with the selected output group double click the output group to display the Control Outputs window Figure 70 Control Outputs Window
68. Manual for details 6 Setup cameras and lighting optional Refer to the following document on your documentation CD for helpful information on camera and lighting setup Image Quality Enhancements Setting up SSL Encryption Client SSL Encryption The activation and deactivation of SSL encryption for events and requests transmitted between the Picture Perfect host and its clients is controlled by the Perfect has been installed EnableSSL script This script can be run anytime after Picture Note Turning on Client SSL Encryption will have a negative impact on client performance 58 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual To activate client SSL encryption perform the following steps 1 2 12 13 14 15 Log on to the system as ppadmin At the command prompt stop Picture Perfect by typing rc pperf k If this is a redundant configuration stop Picture Perfect by typing pprscmd stop Log on to the system as root by typing su root Type the following command to enable SSL EnableSSL 1 Log on to the system as ppadmin Start Picture Perfect again by typing rc pperf If this is a redundant configuration start Picture Perfect by typing pprscmd start primary or backup From a client PC browser window type the following secure URL to connect to the server https hostname Picture Note Once SSL has been enabled operators should access the client using the secure HTTPS URL note
69. Micro 5 PX support 9600 baud only A dial up micro uses standard modem communication and standard telephone lines to dial up and respond to the host Each dial up micro has a dedicated phone line and a modem for communication with the host The modem connects via RS 232 cable at the micro s host port RS 232 serial port The host has a list of user definable phone numbers available for calling any dial up micro in the system likewise all dial up micros have a list of user definable phone numbers available for dialing the host You can configure modems without having to restart the Picture Perfect system You will need to refer to your modem manual when filling out the fields on the Modems form If a default value appears in a field you can accept that value if the modem type is Hayes compatible Figure 20 Modems form X Micros Micros Ports Modems Network Ports Keys Description Q fit gt D HAYES 2400 G ER amp l WS a X a HAYES 1200 Modem Error messages HAYES 9500 CardinalBoca Haye Description ISTAR Comm 144F 1 Hidex Hidex GLOBAL Id Lef EIE Faciity Autodialer Prefix Dial Stored Prefix ATDT ATDSO Attention Command Attention Response fox initialization Command ATEOX3V1 amp C18D2S0 1S7 80205aW Initialization Response ok Deinitialization Command ATE0x3
70. Note Do not set up the Door Event form to match the fields on the Door form Fields that do not need to be scheduled should not be selected for example if the door is already unlocked do not select Unlocked on the door schedule Example The lobby door can be accessed Monday through Friday from 8 AM to 5 PM To accomplish this an Unlock Door at 8 AM runtime event is paired with a Lock Door at 5 PM runtime event on weekdays only Figure 83 Door Event form Doors And Readers Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Doors Readers ReaderEvents Door Events Description d 7 o WuecktobyDow ju Qf MI E X o Yo xX amp SC Qo Lock Lobby Door GU Door Event Description Unlock Lobby Door lFacility GLOBAL iss t n E Door Lobby Door GLOBAL X n mia mc Door State 7 Do Nat Care Unlocked O Locked Held Open Sensing Forced Open Monitoring Do Not Care Do Not Care O Deter C e O Detected O Detected O ignored Ignored Mode NORMAL lt GLOBAL gt v E P Begin Event At Mode Start At Mode End Time HH mm ss 08 00 00 ic e Time Zone Context RES Micro K i M Friday dv D 210 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require
71. OER E EEEE EE cunts A uations 324 Fields GN controls dech Seen ged Sie EE Ee ENER ENEE PER 324 Related Kelte el 324 User interface customization eee cc ccc cee teen nn 329 OVERVIEW M m 330 xi xii Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Chapter 18 Creating and editing custom forms 330 e Ee ale ee TEE 330 Related Procedures creere nears utu OR M oo qad ed INIM NUN NEN mnseteses 331 Creating and editing custom lists 0 cece cece ec eee reece e eee enn nh 333 Fields ANd Kee TEE EES 334 Related Meet 334 Advanced access control features 37 eU M 338 OCCUPANCY control spreen erroe er rn hx ERENNERT EEN RN e T RR ATUS 338 How to set up occupancy Control 338 Twotnanrule RE 342 Modified two man r le4M2MRI ute der rn te een edat eddi etu ERE A 343 How to set up a two man rule 2MR controlled space 2 cee cece teen eee arreen 344 How to set up a modified two man rule M2MR controlled space with door com 348 How to set up a modified two man rule M2MR controlled space without door control 356 Badge transactions for occupancy counting and 2MR esses 363 Seed TEE 366 Double badge function ae Ke RR Pe eve bres ex NUR rre Rr onc bd STEEN ei 366 Double badge reporting bre eene E RE ee ERR OS pU Eb S UR SEM 368 Double badge configuration e e een 368 Elevator control esineen ne ieee ddaen
72. One strategy is to leave gaps between the priority numbers so that when you add alarms later you will not have to re assign priorities among the existing alarms The same priority number can be assigned to more than one alarm Route Definition Click to display the Route Definitions list box This list box allows the operator to restrict the display of alarms and activity to specific operators If this field is left blank this alarm will be routed to all operators Alarm Routing Click to display the Alarm Routing list box The monitor should always be included in the routing choice of an alarm If an alarm is not routed to the monitor the operator cannot respond to the alarm Online Toggle this button On if you want this alarm to occur when an associated Input Group is activated Do not click this button until the alarm is ready to be brought online Inhibit Schedule Changes Toggle this button On if you want to inhibit schedule changes for this alarm Otherwise the system implements alarm schedules created using the Alarm Events form You may want to inhibit schedule changes for an alarm if no schedules yet exist for alarms or if you are not ready to implement the schedules you have created Immediate Reset Input Click Yes if you want the system to reset this alarm as soon as an associated input group triggers this alarm Logical alarms such as invalid suspended unknown or lost badges must have this fe
73. Operator Permissions feature which controls using a login ID and password each operator s authorization to display or update forms and to print reports User Defined Schedules The system provides an interface for user defined schedules For example an area can be scheduled for general employee access during business hours but restricted to selected employees after hours All schedules can be manually overridden from the operator s console If the host and micros stop communicating the micros continue processing all resident schedule changes Operator Input Validation All system forms screens and menus provide extensive data entry error checking The system will reject a form if fields do not contain acceptable data therefore bad data cannot corrupt the database Field labels of required entries display in red Operator Activity Monitoring The activity of all system operators can be viewed and is saved to operator history User Defined Alarms Alarms may be assigned priorities to control processing in the event of simultaneous alarms Multiple action messages may be configured to notify the operator when and where the alarm is occurring and what actions to take Digital Outputs to Operate Output Devices Inputs digital or logical trigger digital outputs which can operate output devices door locks lights bells sirens Transaction History Processing The standard system stores history records online including badge alarm operator
74. Output 5 description of Floor 2 Floor 3 Elevator Button 4 GLOBAL v RE f 4 2 Floor 5 will ieee Output 6 ii display as Floor 3 and Elevator Button 5 GLOBAL v E PIT so On Set Default Floor Names Start Floor Number Value incridecr 4 Pb Increment Decrement To set up Example 2 in a Micro DO configuration 1 2 In Configuration Type select Micro DO Click the Micro button and select a micro from the list box If multiple readers are configured on an elevator micro the first reader controls the elevator For each floor click the appropriate button and select an output from the list box Make sure you select a different output for each floor This type of configuration supports up to 64 floors per micro For each floor define floor names See How to edit floor labels on page 376 To set up Example 2 Reader DO configuration l 2 3 In Configuration Type select Reader DO Click the Reader DO Config button Click the Reader button and select a reader from the list box The reader should be defined as an elevator reader For each floor click the appropriate button and select an output from the list box Make sure you select a different output for each floor This type of configuration supports up to 64 floors per micro For each floor define floor names See How to edit floor labels on page 376 To set up Example 2 in a Reader DI DO configuration 1 2 In Configuration Type select Re
75. Redundant system option allows two host systems primary and backup to operate in a fault tolerant configuration Imaging The Imaging option allows a picture of the badge holder to be captured imported exported displayed on screen and printed Swipe and Show can be configured where a valid badge swipe results in the display of an associated photo on a monitor with authorization to unlock the door Thumbnail images are displayed on the Badge Activity Monitor Enterprise The Enterprise option allows several hosts to operate together in a network environment Guard Tours The Guard Tours option allows you to monitor the progress of a security officer as he or she tours the facility premises at specified intervals and to obtain hardcopy reports that show a tour history Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Support services GE Security and its business partners offer a full range of customer support services including site surveys installation supervision systems acceptance and training with total turnkey installation capabilities These services are options at the discretion of the customer Enterprise consulting Enterprise Consulting is an engineering services team within GE Security that offers custom solutions to GE integrators and end users in areas where the standard products do not meet specific requirements Examples include custom software development including interfacing to third party systems backup and recovery solution consu
76. Room Team 4 Save and exit the Area form 5 6 the controlled area 7 it to Assigned Categories From the Access menu select People and then click the Personnel tab From the toolbar click Find to locate the Personnel records of the badge holders requiring access to Click the Category Manager tab and select an M2MR category from Available Categories and move Figure 174 Personnel form M2MR Category A0 People Chapter 18 Advanced access control features People Badges Places LI Personne personnel Type Department LastName gt om woo Woa A xX amp 54 x 5 4 x SC Gi ANDREW GE FEMIA RI Personal Address Properties Category Manager Badge Manager Images UserFields Notes RELLY Mi j FRANCOLINI Gi Assigned Categories Available Categories D me Ri Stot Category Category ADAMS e 1 Computer Room Team lt A Computer Room Team a ABRAMS ST JOH MOTION SHUNT KEYPAD ACCETTA RG JOH RECEPTION DOOR 7 24 ALEXANDER ELI gt JOH SERVER ROOM 7 24 AMEND ELI JOH STORE ROOM 7 24 AMMONDS BA Slt MIS 24 Hour ASHMAN AL MIS Shift 1 ASHTON M 2 HE Mss shift 2 BERSSON s NO ACCESS use wisched only DAMELIO A NO ACCESS use wischedule only DAVIS FRIEND A ES EnnpccaLLERES 7 24 EN DEBARGER cal EECH DELUCA vin DEROBERTS K SCHATZ M GIBNEY s GRAFF
77. SKA SKANEATELES NY STM ST MARYS PA STM NORMAL N A Mode Permit Schedule Mode Changes BCT HOLIDAY BCT BOCA RAT e 7 d Yes O No Email Send Email Do Not Send Email Default Mode Email Setting Change Mode Rollback Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in Chapter 10 Schedules and modes the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 82 Change Mode form fields Field name Description Current Modes for Facilities This pane reflects the mode that is currently in effect and the previous mode for each facility Select a facility from this pane to rollback or change a mode For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Select All Facilities Mode Click this button to select all active facilities Click to display the Modes list box Select the operating mode to which you want to change Permit schedule mode changes Select Yes or No to indicate whether you want the system to allow future mode changes to occur as scheduled You can change this option even if you don t change the mode itself Yes Select Yes to allow scheduled mode changes to occur No Select No to override scheduled mode cha
78. STL IDC GALLERIES STL 2ND FLR OCC Area Category Manager Input Groups Routings D STLNODE E Description STLIELEC ROOM STL TELCO ROOM ISTLNODE STLIPARKING LOT Faciity STLICORP SERVICE LS SS STLIENERGY CENT nd ga af STLIKITCHEN STLAL HALLWAY Permission Group STLIDOCK SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR GLO e 22s STLIDOCK VEST EE mA STLME DATA CENT STLATEST FACILITY DEE Occupancy Control STLISECURITY CO Enabled Occupancy Counting STLISECURITY OFF O Disabled ye STLIMASTERCOM S STLISFTW DIST Logical State Disabled STLAE GALLERY R Online Enabled STLIEMBOSS O otfine STLI2E PRD SPPRT EES STLIUNIX SUPPORT hunting o se STLIDATA CENTER 2 amp Enabled Two Man Rule ALS O Disabled O Do Not Care STLGEMBRLMP x T Scheduling Disabled Results Enabled Standard 36 records Disabled Modified Door Control Find Complete 4 Save and exit the Areas form Two man rule 2MR Some high security areas such as banks may require that a minimum of two people occupy an area Picture Perfect has the ability to control occupancy in an area by placing the area in Two Man Rule 2MR or Modified Two Man Rule M2MR mode and then monitoring the count of badge holders that enter and exit the area This type of area control can be set up through the Areas form or an area event can be scheduled for a specific time through the Area Events form The standard Two Man Rule 2MR
79. System Enables the operator to perform database backup and restore activities See Chapter 15 Backup and restore Custom Forms Enables the operator to create and edit custom forms See Creating and editing custom forms on page 330 Edit or Execute SQL Statements Enables the operator to create and modify SQL reports If this is not selected the operator can only view pre defined SQL reports See Creating and viewing reports on page 293 Force Logoff Enables the Force Logoff menu item on the User Monitor which allows the operator to force another operator to log off the system See Monitoring users on page 281 Form Preferences Enables the Preferences button on forms Log Monitor Enables operator access to the Log Monitor See Monitoring log file messages on page 289 Monitor Preferences Enables the Preferences button on monitors Performance Monitor Enables operator access to the Performance Monitor See Monitoring system performance on page 286 Purge All Alarms Enables the use of the Purge button on the Alarm monitor See Monitoring alarms on page 264 Send Message Enables the Send Message icon on the User Monitor which displays the Send Message dialog This dialog allows the operator to broadcast a message to an individual or to all users See Monitoring users on page 281 Status Monitor Enables operator access to the Status Monitor See Monitoring status on page 28
80. Table Names list pane select alarm Click Apply Chapter 14 Reports Figure 123 Example Report form G Repot Report Report Events Reports Import Archived Data GEES m ei Uncategorized Reports E 1g x 4 gt amp bi Default Report Ee Se SOL QueryParameters View Results Header Footer D MyR y M SQL Keywords and Operators Table Names is SELECT a alarm a SELECT FROM aler color Apply D ze X SQL Variables Column Hames Stextllabel bg_color Sfaciity set config online Lp min demie Mende nan a description Apply New Rename Delete Category Category Category Enter SQL Statement Select a Report SELECT alarm fg color alarm bg color FROM alarm e Jfdesired click the Header Footer tab and enter text that you want to appear at the top and bottom of each page of the report e From the toolbar click Run S From the toolbar click Save As J Select the report category and enter a Title for the report Click Print to display the Print Preview page From this window you may Save to pdf or Print to your local printer 297 298 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Figure 124 Print Preview Test Report igi File Navigation Zoom Help DBS lt gt AA mar Test Report fg color 16777218 e Clic
81. The queue of messages on the monitor scrolls upwards as new messages appear at the bottom You can control the amount of information the monitor displays by clicking Preferences from the toolbar and selecting the desired columns You can configure your system to control the inputs and outputs associated with these alarms and messages and the way in which an operator responds to them To see all the columns on a monitor stretch the window frame use the point and drag method Monitor toolbars The following icons appear on the toolbar of the various monitors Table 102 Monitor toolbar icons Icon Description Freeze Unfreeze To temporarily stop the Monitor from scrolling click Freeze The system continues to queue messages and will resume scrolling the stored information when you click Unfreeze Search The Search function is available when the number of incoming alarms cannot be displayed in a single screen If it is possible to display all alarms on a single screen this function will be disabled Click to open a Q search text criteria dialog box where you can enter a string of text Choose a column from which to search such as Valid Invalid Suspended The row containing the results of the search is highlighted in green Save Use the Save function to temporarily save the data in the Monitor to a file on the operator s workstation which can be used later for troubleshooting The next time the Save function is used the
82. Time and Attendance In Out Used to log a badge holder in and out using the same reader such as the Model 100 Wiegand reader by swiping the badge the normal way for in and reversing the badge or turning the badge backwards for out Time and Attendance In Used to log a badge holder in at the start of a work shift Time and Attendance Out Used to log a badge holder out at the end of a work shift Nested APB Used to configure APB on nested areas APB If the Logical Reader Function is set to APB In APB Out or Nested APB select the desired APB Type for this reader Global APB Used as the default this allows the host to share APB status nested APB area status with participating controllers Timed APB Used to designate the reader as a Timed APB reader in which a badge holder s APB status nested APB area will return to Neutral after a defined period of time A Timed APB reader is useful in a site where a badge holder may enter a site by going through an APB reader but is not required to exit the site by going through an APB reader If this option is selected a Timed APB Duration must also be defined A Timed APB status nested APB area is local to the micro Reset Timed APB Immediately Used to reset the Timed APB status nested APB area back to Neutral immediately following a badge swipe 185 186 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 79 Readers form fields c
83. UNIX based systems semaphores are a technique for coordinating or synchronizing activities in which multiple process compete for the same operating system resources A semaphore is a value in a designated place in operating system or kernel storage that each process can check and then change Server Generally a server is a computer program that provides services to other computer programs in the same or other computers In the client server programming model a server is a program that awaits and fulfills requests from client programs in the same or other computers Shunt Override an alarm on a door contact that detects an open state on the door A digital input device monitors the door state If the door opens with a valid read or exit device the input device a door contact detects a state change but does not report the change until a shunt time elapses The shunt time allows the badgeholder enough time to get through the door See Door Forced Open and Door Open Too Long To override a door sensor for a longer time enter a keypad override code a microcontroller dependent code set on the Micros screen Shutdown To stop running the application and the operating system SSL SSL Secure Sockets Layer is a commonly used protocol for managing the security of a message transmission on the Internet SSL uses a program layer located between the Internet s Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTP and Transport Control
84. Use File m5pe403 efl PXNplus Micros Use File n5npe403 efi eFlash M Flashing in progress please wait Use File PXNP7515 efl Browse DirecDoor Micros Network Map Use File DD7515 efl Browse Rets 2records Flash Micro s 9 Wait until the flash is complete You cannot flash another micro until the current selections are complete Note Only one instance of eFlash can be run on a system When eFlash begins it creates a lock file cas log eflash lt pid gt If the lock file exists indicating that the program is running when you attempt to launch eFlash an error message will display and the program will exit This file is normally removed automatically when the program closes however under some circumstances it may still exist and will need to be removed manually 153 154 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Operating eFlash from the command line One or more of the arguments listed in Zable 63 can be included in a command line Note If an option is repeated only the last value is used with the exception of m and l which may be repeated multiple times For example to flash micro id 0 and micro id 2 the entry would be eflash m 0 m 2 Table 63 eFlash command line arguments C Command line selection option p lt directory gt Specifies the source directory to search for flash files Th
85. When the Badges form appears enter search criteria in one or more fields and click Find o Click the Status field and select Deleted Although the badge no longer grants access the badge record remains in the database Click Save 230 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual To permanently remove a badge from the database A CAUTION This procedure removes badge records from the database Since it is possible to remove badge records that should be retained you should back up your database before running this procedure The Delete X button will be on the Badges form toolbar if the correct permissions have been set on the Permissions form for the current operator The Delete XxX button is used to permanently remove badge records from the Picture Perfect database This process also removes the badge records from all micros that have learned the badges and have the badge records in their database Before any badge can be removed it must have a badge status of Deleted To assign the Deleted status see 7o change a badge status to deleted on page 229 Note Badge delete on person delete is controlled by a setting on the Badge Manager control of the form by default it is set not to delete associated badges when a person is deleted All badge removal activity is recorded in the operator history table 1 Select Access Badges and then Badges tab 2 When the Badges form appears enter search criteria in one or more fields and cli
86. a reader the system will deny access Note The Status field on the Personnel form overrides this field on the Badges form For example if a personnel record has multiple badges assigned to it and that person is suspended you can change the status to Suspended on the Personnel form and all related badges will be suspended 226 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 92 Badges form fields continued Field name Description Print Badge Badge Design Select a badge design to print from the list box This option will be available if you have the optional Imaging package installed For more information on printing badges see Printing badges on page 242 Print Select this button to print a badge Note To print a badge that contains personnel data refer to Table 98 Badge Manager form fields on page 251 Preview Select this button to preview a badge before printing Note To preview a badge that contains personnel data refer to Table 98 Badge Manager form fields on page 251 Page Setup amp Select this button to view page setup options for a badge Options g Note To view the page setup options for a badge that contains personnel data refer to Table 98 Badge Manager form fields on page 251 Encode Click this button to encode a badge Refer to Gei Note If this button appears dimmed refer to Imaging troubleshooting on page 401 for assistance External Click to launch the
87. access messages and activate associated alarms Do Not Care See Radio buttons on page 27 Physical Reader Type There are four ways to define the physical reader type of a reader Badge Only Badge And Keypad Keypad Only and Badge Or Keypad A reader s physical type may be changed with a reader event Do Not Care See Radio buttons on page 27 Example To provide higher security at certain hours you can define a badge and keypad reader as a badge only reader from 8 AM to 5 PM and a badge and keypad reader from 5 PM to 8 AM To gain access after 5 PM a badge holder must swipe their badge and also use the keypad to enter a unique PIN code Number of Badges There are two badge controls available Single and Double Single Only one valid badge is required Double Two complete valid and distinct transactions are required Do Not Care See Radio buttons on page 27 203 204 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 84 Area Event form fields continued Field name Description Swipe and Show This feature is only visible if you have the Image package installed You can schedule a specific time Control period for any of the following functions to be active Select Enabled to enable Swipe And Show on this reader Select Disabled to disable Swipe And Show on this reader Note A reader cannot be defined as Toggle when Swipe And Show is Enabled See Toggle on page 186 If Toggle is set to Yes and eithe
88. additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 86 Door Event form fields Field name Description Description Type any alphanumeric combination 1 to 60 alphanumeric characters for Description This event may include more than one location if the facility has multiple entrances or buildings Example Unlock Door at 08 00 Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box Selecting a facility will allow the administrator to restrict operator access to those records in a specific facility For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Door Select the door where the event will occur Door State Unlocked To schedule an individual door in an area to unlock at the same time each day Locked Unlocked use a door event that sets the Door State field to Unlocked Note An area event that locks all area doors and occurs after this door event will also lock this individual door Locked To schedule an individual door in an area to lock at the same time each day use a door event that sets the Door State field to Locked Note An area event that unlocks all area doors and occurs after this door event will also unlock this individual door e Do Not Care See Radio buttons on page 27 Held Open Sensing Detected Ignored
89. an administrator Aknown problem in the EPIBuilder software allows it to be initialized only one time As long as the top level browser window is open subsequent initializations will fail causing imaging functionality to not be available Ib Verify that the operator workstation is correctly identified as an imaging workstation On the Workstation record see Setting up workstations optional on page 56 verify that The Imaging Workstation check box is enabled e The IP address entered in the etc hosts file matches the IP Address or Hostname value in the Workstation record and it is the true IP address of the workstation Possible causes include The flag was disabled by an administrator The host name or IP addresses of the workstation was changed The IP address and host name entry for the imaging workstation is missing from the etc hosts file The host name of the workstation was changed after it was configured as an imaging workstation lc Verify that the EPIBuilder imaging installation kit is installed and working correctly on the operator s workstation The correct installation sequence is specified in Chapter 4 of the Picture Perfect 4 5 Imaging User Manual and is briefly stated below Ensure that the operating system installed on the workstation meets the requirements specified in the Picture Perfect 4 5 Imaging User Manual Examine the c NavatarMlogsNavatar log log file on the workstation to see if EPIBui
90. and how to view format print and save reports Report Events An application used to create and edit report event records that schedule history or SQL reports to run at specific times Table 10 Window Menu Sub Menu Function Minimize All Reduces all windows to an icon Restore All Opens all minimized windows Cascade Arranges windows in an overlapped fashion Tile Horizontally Arranges windows in non overlapped tiles one on top of the other Tile Vertically Arranges windows in non overlapped tiles side by side Open windows Displays a list of open windows The window that is currently active displays a check mark next to it By clicking on a window in this list it becomes the active window Table 11 Help Menu Sub Menu Function Help Topics Displays an index of topics on which you can get help About Picture Displays the Picture Perfect version and patch levels of any packages installed It also displays license Perfect information memory usage and allows you to run the Garbage Collector utility which attempts to free up unused memory Table 12 Optional Pack age Menu Function Tours When the optional Guard Tours package is installed this application is used to define the characteristics of a tour the exception codes points definition and tour functions Table 13 Status Indicator Status Function A red LED indicates that
91. and then Layout Properties On the General tab click on the Encoding button The Card Encoding dialog opens In the Card Encoding dialog click on the Define button and then select the Security tab LB 0 BR By default a Mifare badge design has the GEKey Key Pair ID defined on sector 1 Once you have created your own key pair ID you must enter it here Refer to Mapping badge designs on page 257 Click OK 8 In the Card Encoding dialog click on the Define button and then select the Data tab 9 Inthe left hand pane click WiegandData Under Field or Expression Definition Badge ID 5502 is the default selected value If required click the list box to select Badge ID 26 bit Click OK Note Badge ID 5502 requires badge format Standard 16 Digit Badge Badge ID 26 bit requires badge format Standard 10 Digit Badge 10 Close all open windows and then close the Badge Designer Click OK to save all changes Mapping badge designs A design mapping allows you to select a badge design based on a field value in the Personnel record For instance all members of a certain department may require the same badge design Example A design mapping mapping personnel type links the following badge designs to the Personnel Type field Temporary Consultant Employee and Vendor 258 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Figure 105 Design Mappings form E5 Badge Designs lt 927 j 7 de E System Parameters Printers Imaging Termi
92. anti passback status However violations will still be reported See APB Control on the Personnel form Occupancy Occupancy Counting The ability to control occupancy counting is available only if the operator has Control occupancy control permission granted See Occupancy control on page 338 When enabled it allows the number of persons in a controlled space to be monitored The occupancy count is reset to zero and the two man rule radio buttons are enabled When disabled the two man rule mode is forced to disabled and the two man rule radio buttons are grayed out and not selectable Picture Perfect will update the occupancy count when a valid entry or exit to from the area occurs The default is for this to be disabled Occupancy Count The value in this field shows the current occupancy count for the area Reset This button is enabled only if the operator has occupancy control permission granted and occupancy counting has been enabled It allows the occupancy count for an area to be reset to zero Chapter 9 Area management Table 77 Areas form fields continued Field name Description Two Man Rule Control These radio buttons are enabled only if the operator has occupancy control permission granted and occupancy counting has been set to Enabled Two man rule 2MR or modified two man rule M2MR can only be enabled if the occupancy count is zero If the operator violates this rule an error message will a
93. are configuring a network dialup micro phonel Primary host number for a network dial up micro to call phone2 Secondary host number for a network dial up micro to call mmdmm_init Modem initialization string mdmm_dinit Modem de initialization string rx_idle_time The minimum number of characters 20 254 to process a buffer hop_count The number of hops network boards that must be crossed between the network micro and host ring_speed Specifies ring speed for token ring networks only Not supported source_ip The network micro s IP address destination_ip The Picture Perfect host s IP address alternate_ip gateway_ip subnet_ip_mask The backup machine s IP address in a Picture Perfect redundant system The network micro s gateway IP address to reach the destination_ip The network micro s subnet mask alt_gateway_ip The network micro s gateway IP address to reach the alternate ip Note The network micro will accept connections only from the host defined in this field If this field is updated incorrectly the network micro can only be configured from a laptop computer 157 158 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Defining outputs The Picture Perfect system monitors digital inputs DIs for contacts and digital outputs DOs for controlling output devices Outputs are triggered when associated inputs activate Outputs can operate devices such as door strikes bells and lights In
94. are displayed in the list box See Boolean Type on page 130 184 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 79 Readers form fields continued Field name Description Two man rule output A drop down list from which you may optionally select an output to associate with an indicator device such as a blinking light The indicator device will be activated when the first of two required valid badge reads for entry or exit from a two man rule enabled area has occurred at the reader When the indicator device is activated the second person should present their badge at the reader before the timeout period expires in order to unlock the door to permit entry or exit from the area The indicator will be deactivated when a timeout or a second valid badge read or an invalid badge read occurs at the reader The Two man rule output is a digital output DO point configured to control the indicator device The value in the drop down list may only be changed by an operator with Occupancy control permission granted Physical State Enabled means this reader is allowed to read badges Disabled means the reader cannot read badges Note Ifa reader is not operational set Physical State to Disabled Logical State Online permits the normal operating mode for this reader Offline means the reader is allowed to read badges pass badge data route and archive access messages and activate associated alarms but is not allowed to unlock associated d
95. based forms Profile ini Permission Groups fo Areas Categories and Reports Access to database records is determined when an operator is assigned a permission A permission consists of profiles paired with facilities Profiles and Permission Groups determine the level of access an operator has to Picture Perfect forms actions and applications Chapter 6 Operator administration After completing the initial system configuration records need to be created in order to assign the proper permission sets to each operator The following forms are required to create these records and are presented in the order recommended in Chapter 3 Configuration checklist Facility Permission Profile e System Permission Profile Form Profile Permission Groups e Permissions Operators Examples of the relationship of these records and how to link them is discussed in the section See Linking facilities facility profiles permissions and operators on page 98 Creating facility permission profiles A facility permission profile is a way of defining an operator s record and field level access permissions for the Picture Perfect forms that are partitioned by facility It defines for each facility what the operator can do with records assigned to that facility Example When the All Facility Permissions facility profile is assigned to the Global facility and assigned to an operator the operator has access to all databas
96. box for selection on the Inputs Outputs and Readers forms Facility You must assign a facility to a micro Other devices such as readers and inputs that are connected to the micro will default to this facility unless they are specifically assigned to another facility Micro Address Type a number from 0 to 4095 to identify the address of this micro as set in the micro s hardware address switches Once a micro s address is set it cannot be changed Upstream Displays the selected upstream micro Micro Click the Upstream Micro button to display the Micros list box Select the micro or host that is upstream from this micro Downstream Displays the selected downstream micro Micro Click the Downstream Micro button to display the Micros list box Select the micro or host or None that is downstream from this micro Type Normal Select whether this is a Normal micro or an Elevator micro type Only an M5 can be used with Elevator Elevator Control See Elevator control on page 369 for more details on this feature Note An Elevator micro configured with multiple readers uses Reader 1 to control the elevator Configure Select whether the micro is being configured Online Offline or Non existent If neither are Online selected the micro is configured as non existent that is not on the system Offline Non Select Online to bring a micro online that was either configured offline or non existent The existent micro will be auto
97. can assign categories to these areas to restrict access to certain authorized badge holders The readers and doors must be defined in the system and logically grouped according to their location and the categories of access required In order to accomplish these tasks the following forms need to be completed Categories e Areas e Readers Doors Creating categories Categories are both the locks and the keys of the Picture Perfect system A category assigned to an area can act as a lock on the doors in that area When you assign that same category to a badge the category functions as the badge holder s key to those doors There are 96 categories available for assignment to a badge and 32 categories for assignment to an area or an area event Use the Categories form to create descriptions of each group of people who use the facility Categories describe users by type title group or shift Then associate each category with a permission group The categories form a list box that is used on the Areas Badges Generator and Area Events forms Note A facility map helps identify categories of people who require access The permission assigned to an operator determines what categories that operator can assign See Chapter 6 Operator administration Example The cleaning crew is required to clean the building from 5 PM to 8 PM Create a category Cleaning Crew 17 00 20 00 Figure 73 Categories form Areas Categories AreaEvent
98. can use any device that has a TWAIN WINTAB or Video for Windows VFW driver installed Follow the instructions provided by the device manufacturer for installing the device 2 Install the print driver The Imaging package requires the installation of print drivers Refer to the instructions shipped with your printer 3 Install signature pad drivers optional Depending on the signature pad you are using you may need to install additional TWAIN or WINTAB drivers to make them compatible with or WINTAB driver for the pad 4 Install the Imaging software the Imaging package After installing the pad install a TWAIN The optional image package must be installed on the host to perform imaging activities on a client workstation See the Picture Perfect 4 5 Imaging User Manual for details A chent workstation that will be used as an imaging terminal requires the installation of the client imaging software on the workstation First install the Java Runtime Environment on the workstation Click the J2SE Java Runtime Environment JRE link on the host web page Then install the imaging software by clicking the EPIBuilder Imaging Installation link on the host web page Remember to add this workstation as an imaging terminal 5 Install the software licence key Obtain and install new Picture Perfect server license to activate the optional image package installed on host See the Picture Perfect 4 5 Installation
99. check the Hyperlink Visibility check box to view the selected application as a hyperlink on the toolbar 4 From the list of text options select from the following e Show text labels The text label displays below the icon e Selective text on right The text label displays to the right of the icon No text labels Only the icon displays The icons include tooltips 5 From the Digital Clock Settings pane select the time Operator Host or Custom that you want the toolbar clock to display Custom time allows you to select from a drop down list of time zones Chapter 2 23 Getting started 6 Click Save to save your toolbar preferences to the database The current settings are retained for your next login session Click Cancel to retain the settings for the current session only Note Ifa large number of applications are selected they could exceed the viewable area of the monitor The application window The majority of Picture Perfect applications specifically those that manipulate data contained in the Picture Perfect database tables are based on a common framework A typical Picture Perfect application window is made up of a title bar a toolbar a grid on the left and the form on the right similar to Figure 8 See Table 14 through Table 20 to view detailed information on these components The size of the data grid and the form window can be adjusted by dragging the splitter pane left or right or resizing the Application win
100. color based on its processing state and logical state The Alarm Color form is used to set foreground and background colors for each possible combination of alarm logical and processing states The logical states are Set Alarms that are in the active alarm state Reset Alarms that have been reset turned off and are no longer active Tamper The wiring of the alarm input has been cut or tampered with The processing states are Active Alarms that are not yet acknowledged Bumped Alarms received by the alarm monitor a specific terminal that are not acknowledged in a defined amount of time and are sent to another terminal defined by the user Remote Used by RAN Remote Alarm Notification alarms that are received by the alarm monitor but are not acknowledged in a defined amount of time and are forwarded to a configured remote non Picture Perfect system Pending Alarms that are acknowledged but not removed Completed Alarms that are removed still displayed on the monitor waiting for a physical reset 122 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Example Joe Smith is the system administrator at Global Corporation and he wants all alarms with a Logical State of Tamper and a Processing State of Bumped to reflect the background color Purple and the foreground text color Green Figure 50 Alarm Colors Processing State Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones Alar
101. copied to the temporary badge and the temporary badge is activated A pool of badges can be used for temporary reissues Figure 103 Temp Issue form Suspend Badge Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 99 Temp Issue form fields Field name Description Expires Date The date the temporary badge expires Expires Time The time the temporary badge expires Context The time zone context in which the badge expires Host Micro or Operator See Verifying time zones on page 168 Suspend Badge All ofthe active badges that are currently assigned to this personnel record are listed If desired select which badge to suspend By default the first badge in the list will be suspended Related procedures To create a pool of temporary badges 1 Select Access Badges and then Badges tab 2 Complete the Badges form Under Options click the Temporary button 3 Press Save II To issue a temporary badge 1 Select Access People and then Personnel tab Chapter 11 253 Badge management Click Find o to search for the badge holder record for which you are issuing a temporary replacement badge Click the Badge Manager
102. d 76 Iz ielunjo ae P PET E O TEE tree aaa ees 76 Fields and corittolS os tee EIE Er tren RI ERER ERE eere eer A a EA REA Ure 76 Related procedures v sors oceere SEET d vere dE NEEN KEE S i Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Defining personnel types 2 eelef RS coed wae e dE be vod Reuw be baddies see EE eee e UNE tea eee 77 EXCLAIMS cc 77 Fieldsand Det EE 78 Related precedufes ege a e d El add haa ate S e lle 78 Operator administration lessen hh 79 OVervieW ege pRVER Ee CONDE ERE ERO E uU uo ve RU E E T CH E EHE NER 80 Creating facility permission profiles 0 cece cece cece een Hh 81 ater 81 Fielde and controls 4 eoe te teo REIR beer E RE ERE Rh dans tubede b eb HU Ee PEEM ER Related Beie 85 Creating system permission profiles cc cece cece cece eee n eee meh 85 eent TEE 85 Eleldle0pgl CONUS EUNTES 87 Related Procedures E 88 Creating form profiles dE re eere et mme perra e EELER EES 89 S smieccp Pcr PM 89 Fields and controls eee one du ee NEE EE A ea d odd did t Aen 90 El E Beie 90 Setting up permission groupe 91 ante icra ae site bhag ease NEEE EE EEN Kaede ced bas taarnd oddee nee seaanagd Oakey Camas OENE ARE 91 RE ele Ke le 92 Related Deler 92 Setting UP EN E CEET 93 EXAMP EE ER Fields and controls EE 94 R lated Kellerei 94 Defining Operators 2 AN NN o em ewe cies E e T REF e va Yr ROTER edad ENEE Ne NEES dees 95 nios TE 95 alie xforeEooamel cT 96 Related proced
103. data record currently displayed to the database If you have created a new record it will be added to the database If you displayed an existing record and made changes to it this new version will replace B the old record in the database You must have Update record permission to save any changes Delete Click to mark the record currently displayed for deletion The record will be deleted from the database upon x saving You must have Delete record permission to mark a record for deletion and the record table must support deletion If the record has record dependencies a list displays indicating those records that are dependent on it Undo Click to cancel the previous action and restore the values of the previously edited data B Clear Click to clear the fields and selections on the form All option settings are set to an unselected state 4 Run Template p Click to display a list of master records that contain information that can be used as a starting point or rough draft for creating a new record The necessary links have already been defined You must have Run Template action permission to perform this function Chapter 2 Getting started Table 15 Toolbar continued Item Description Manage Click to display the Template Manager from which you can create edit or delete master records You can lock Template certain fields so that they cannot be changed when running the template Records created from a
104. date n operator_time operator_time n 302 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual utc_date utc_date n UI Control None Output Current date minus n days Current time minus n hours Example Query SELECT FROM badge history WHERE dept multiple choice Department SELECT id description FROM department translate lookup exclusive tablename UI Control Translates the view results lookup values for the specified table Output None column selection exclusive all possible columns columns selected by default UI Control Column Manager provides a control to select the columns to be included in the report results Output Comma delimited list of column names union_exclusive lt table1 gt lt table2 gt UI Control Expands the SQL query into two queries one against tablel and one against table2 Output None number_exclusive lt label gt lt field gt UI Control Text field with a label Output Replaces tag with user supplied number time_range_exclusive report DateAndTime report Device report Host report UTC dev_xac t host_xact utc_xact UI Control Date and time control Output Replaces tag with SQL clauses that correspond to Date and Time criteria selected in the control Chapter 14 Reports label exclusive text UI Control Displays a text heading only Output Replaces tag with 1 1 yes no checkbox exclusive text
105. default for any new record including those that were copied from an existing record Note Dial up micros are handled according to the Dial Up settings on the Micros form Chapter 11 Badge management Table 93 Personnel form fields continued Field name Description Person Trace Use this field only when you want to trace the activity of a particular badge Set to On to allow the Person Trace feature to track this badge The letter T is inserted in front of the transaction when it appears on the Badge Monitor Set to Off when you no longer need to trace the badge See Tracing badge holder activity on page 388 for details on this feature Person trace routing is defined on the System Parameters form Person Trace Alarm If Person Trace is enabled this check box is available for selection When checked an alarm is generated every time the badge is read Keypad Response Activation Deactivation Set to On to give this badge holder the ability to respond to special alarms requiring keypad input Set to Off if this feature is not required See Controlling alarms using a keypad code on page 384 for details on this feature Active Date Enter the date the personnel record became active If this field is left blank the system will automatically enter the current date Note Change of a person s Activation date time context so it falls ahead of its badges issue date time context will change all its bad
106. false input detections Type the number of seconds 0 to 65535 required for the delay Leaving this field blank or typing a 0 zero causes no delay Set this delay to 0 for an Exit DI This field overrides the Delay Time set on the Input Groups form See Delay Time on page 129 On to Off Delay The On To Off Delay Time delays the effect of the input described on this form when it changes state from Time On to Off This delay helps avoid false input detections Type the number of seconds 0 to 65535 required for the delay Leaving this field blank or typing a 0 zero causes no delay Set this delay to 0 for an Exit DI This field overrides the Delay Time set on the Input Groups form Routing Displays the selected routing where messages about this input are displayed Click Routing to display the Routings list box Select the desired routing The typical routing is None which means that it is not routed Input Group Displays the selected input group for this input Click Input Group to display the Input Groups list box Select the desired input group Note e In both single input groups and in a hierarchy of input groups all inputs in any given group or hierarchy must be associated with the same micro Use the Doors form to assign a door DI Assign a door exit button to the same input group as the reader for that door Do not assign a door DI to an input group e Ifan input group is unselected from an input and a new input
107. for detailed information on configuring this option 3 Click Execute to start the restore When the Media pop up window appears insert the tape 4 Click OK to start the restore Perform a restore using the command line option cbr The command line version of restore uses a configuration file restore cfg locatedin cas db text This file contains the flat files to be restored You can edit this file if you want to add or delete files to be restored The syntax of the contents of the restore cfg file is etc passwd etc group etc security The following table describes the cba command line options Table 119 CBA Command Line Option Command Description o htable Rollover then archive the selected history table b Backup specified table or group of tables a htable Archive the specified history table r Force rollover on history archive only rt Retry rollover of times default is 100 d file Write to the specified disk file t Tape write to dev pptape V Verify that data was written successfully np Do not prompt for tapes if specified with c nb Run from netback e table Backup specified tables 318 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 119 CBA Command Line Option Command Description I file Backup tables specified in file To launch the cbr restore option 1 2 Open a terminal window Type a command including options F
108. group is assigned to the input the micro has to be reset Route Displays the selected route definition for this input This route definition is used for Activity Monitor routing Definition Click Route Definition to display the Route Definition list box Select the desired route definition If this field is left blank this input s activity will be routed to all operators Chapter 8 Device management Table 70 Inputs form fields continued Field name Description Facility Click Facility to display the Facilities list box By default the input record will be assigned the same facility as the micro to which the input is assigned however you do have the ability to manually re assign an input s facility This might be desirable in a case where one micro controls more than one facility for instance two companies occupying the same building that use separate doors for entry exit For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Normally The inactive state of an input is either normally open or normally closed If it is Normally Open toggle this Closed button Off by deselecting it If it is Normally Closed toggle it to On by selecting it Note Ask your installer how the input point is wired Door Dis are usually wired normally closed and exit request Dis are usually wired normally open Input Enabled Toggle this button On by selecting it to allow this input to activate Note If an input is
109. has one or more assigned categories If a category on a badge matches any of the categories on an area the badge works as a key in readers assigned to that area A category assigned to an area functions as a lock a category assigned to a badge functions as a key CMENU A diagnostic program that runs on the console in order to monitor and control microcontrollers and X Terminals can also be used to monitor database activity and configuration in the host or micro Code Set A collection of character codes that express one or more languages Picture Perfect only supports code sets defined by the International Standards Organization ISO Western European languages use the ISO8859 1 code set Hebrew uses the 1508859 8 code set Console The host computer used for administrative functions also called host console Coordinated Universal Time UTC The mean solar time of the meridian of Greenwich England used as the basis for calculating standard time throughout the world Daemon A continually running background process that is not controlled by a terminal See Process Database Picture Perfect configuration transaction and historical data stored on the hard disk of the host computer or the resident memory of a microcontroller See Distributed Database and Relational Database Date Format The order that the system requires for month day and year Devices Physical peripherals such as disks tapes printer
110. have for a message to be routed to this operator A list of selected permissions is displayed To add a permission to the list click the arrow on the Permission drop down list One or more permissions may be selected for this route point As permissions are selected or unselected from the list box the Route to Permission window is updated Only operators with the selected permissions will receive activity and alarms that have this route point s route definition assigned This field should be ignored if you are creating a route point that is used only for Activity Monitor routing Bump to Permission This field identifies an alternate permission to use if the message is not responded to within the time specified in Bump Time A list of selected permissions is displayed To add a permission to the list click the arrow on the Permission drop down list One or more permissions may be selected for this route point As permissions are selected or unselected from the list box the Bump to Permission window is updated This field should be ignored if you are creating a route point that is used only for Activity Monitor routing Route to Email This field identifies which email addresses are associated with the route point A list of selected email addresses is displayed To add an address to the list click the arrow on the Email drop down list One or more addresses may be selected for this route point As addresses are selected or unselected from the lis
111. having to restart the Picture Perfect system If you change the tty name you must restart Picture Perfect Note The fields on the Ports form will differ when on a redundant system Refer to the Picture Perfect Redundant Edition User Manual for more information Chapter 5 67 System configuration Figure 21 Ports form idevatyso Results 1 records Figure 22 Network ports form Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms micros Ports Modems Network Ports Zu NW AX o4 Xx amp Netmicro 153 bctnetmicrot23 Network Ports bctnetmicro124 E T Description bctnetmicro154 Eri ES 4 Netmicro 153 Host Name petnetmicro153 i Facility bctnetmicro153 154 1 5 records Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 31 Port form fields Field name Description Description Type a port description up to 60 alphanumeric characters long The ports
112. in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 35 Badge Format form fields Field name Description Description Type a description 0 to 60 characters to identify the badge format Example 10 Digit Badge The badge formats that you define appear in a list box on the Parameters and the Badges forms Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box This field reflects the facility to which this record is assigned For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Badge Id Type a badge ID format 1 to 16 characters using the sequence Constant data optional Format 96 Variable data s Recommended To ensure the Auto Generate function produces a unique badge ID number the variable portion of the badge ID format must be at least 10 digits Related procedures To create edit or delete a badge format record 1 Select Access Badges and then Badge Formats tab 2 Refer to Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 76 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Defining departments Use the Departments form to define a department The department names entered here populate a list box that will be used on the Personnel form to assign a department to each badge holder Example Employees working in research and development are assigned to the Engineering department Figure 26 Department form jj People Personnel Personnel
113. inputs and Outputs 5 ki 25 S o I On Door Unlock Duration En 11 2 01 S S 141 3 00 El llFaclty ooo EA 11 3 01 S GLOBAL v bd P Door Area LM Computer Room GLOBAL v ges I mA EA B T Door State Unlock Time secs F Locked Unlocked 5 S Scheduling Allowable Open Time secs D Enabled Disabled 60 Keypad Alarm Response Keypad Shunt Time mins Disabled Enabled lo Exit Button Asserts Strike Pre Alarm Time secs O Disabled Enabled Forced Relock Forced Open Shunt Time secs Disabled Enabled 8 Door Strike Relock J a n On Door Open On Door Close Results 114 records I 9 Save and exit the Door form To allow an operator to view Occupancy Control 1 From the Control menu select Operators and then click the Facility Permissions Profile tab 2 From the toolbar click on Find to locate the Facility Permission profile record you want to modify Under Page Level Permissions click on Areas and make sure the level of permission is set to View 4 Under Control Level Permissions click on Occupancy Control and make sure the level of permission is set to View 351 352 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Figure 160 Facility Permissions Profile form 3 Operators Operators Mod
114. is enabled on the User Monitor which launches the Send Message dialog Click this icon to send a message to all logged on users See Monitoring users on page 281 263 264 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Monitoring alarms The Alarm Monitor displays incoming alarms and their priority count status and time of occurrence Alarms display on the Alarm Monitor in order of their priority The display of alarms within the Alarm Monitor is filtered by the operator s active facility set so that the operator will only see alarms that are tagged with a facility in their active facility set By default incoming alarms are assigned the facility of the micro from which they originate but this can be changed to assign the facility based on Input Input Group Alarm or Location using the Alarm Filter fields on the System Parameters form New alarms will blink for the time specified by the alarm s configuration When an alarm occurs the system beeps and displays a pop up window to notify the operator Instructions for the alarm are displayed by selecting the alarm from the Alarm Monitor The operator records a response to an alarm either by selecting pre written alarm responses from the Alarm Response window or by typing a response Figure 107 Alarm Monitor idi Alarm Monitor Lp og E Alarm Monitor Badge Monitor Input Monitor Operator Monitor Status Monitor User Monitor Performance Monitor Alarm Monitor 1 Q New
115. is granted access to Category 1 floors 1 through 5 because each floor FLOOR 5 contains category 1 or 5 Category 2 4 5 FLOOR 4 Category 2 2 OR 3 When the badge is read the buttons for floors 1 through 5 light up Category 1 FLOOR 2 d Category 1 17 4 L BADGE FLOOR 1 2 5 contains categories 1 k dE and 5 LEGEND Category 1 General Access Category 2 Accounting Category 3 Administration Category 4 Marketing Category 5 Computer Dept Method 2 When enabled this method is available on the following elevator configurations e Reader DI DO See Jo set up Example 2 in a Reader DI DO configuration on page 377 Following a valid badge swipe a floor button DI is used to enter a floor number A category match must exist between the floor selected and the badge before the DO digital output is fired to activate the elevator This method will generate a floor transaction valid or invalid which is stored along with the floor selected and can be used for history and reporting purposes For example a badge holder has General Access as the sole category on their badge The elevator allows floors 1 2 and 5 for General Access and floors 3 and 4 for Computer Department Therefore when this badge holder enters the elevator and pushes floor buttons 1 2 or 5 the elevator will be activated and a Valid floor transaction will be genera
116. is selected in Preferences a thumbnail image of the badge holder that generated the transaction displays in this column Classification The type of valid or invalid badge transaction displayed Example Badge Expired Type Displays B to denote badge activity or T to denote trace activity Device Date The date the badge activity occurred in the time zone of the device See Verifying time zones on page 168 Device Time The time the badge activity occurred in the time zone of the device See Verifying time zones on page 168 Host Date The date the badge activity occurred in the time zone of the host See Verifying time zones on page 168 Host Time The time the badge activity occurred in the time zone of the host See Verifying time zones on page 168 Operator Date The date the badge activity occurred in the time zone context of the operator See Verifying time zones on page 168 Operator Time The time the badge activity occurred in the time zone context of the operator See Verifying time zones on page 168 Employee ID The badge holder s employee number Initials The badge holder s initials Last Name The badge holder s last name First Name The badge holder s first name Reader The description of the reader that read this badge Category The description of the category that resulted in the valid transaction Area The description of the area where the reader is located Department The des
117. list box of SQL reports Select the desired report Click the Printer button to display a list box of printers Select the printer where this report should print Remember to consider the width specifications of the report when choosing a printer Click Save DI Wide carriage printing of report events Picture Perfect provides support for printing reports from report events to a wide carriage printer on the host However in order to do this a few changes must be manually made on the host Keep the following items in mind if you intend to use wide carriage printing 1 Prior to PP4 5 SP3 if you had a report wider than 80 columns it would print in landscape mode regardless of what type of paper was being used Report events use a program called enscript to facilitate printing This command only supports postscript printers If your printer does not support postscript it will not work 307 308 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual 3 Reports printed from Report Events use the full length of each field For example last_name and first_name in the person table are each 60 columns wide It may be necessary to use the truncate statement in your reports in order to setup a predetermined size If you only want to report the first 20 characters of the last name you use the syntax last name 1 20 instead of last name when selecting the last name column If this field is to be used in an ORDER BY clause then you must refer to it by it
118. magnetic locks with built in door open sensors On Door Closed When the door is closed after being open the door strike will immediately relock The door strike will relock after the Unlock Time set in the Door Values box has expired On Door Unlock Duration Chapter 9 191 Area management Related procedures To create edit or delete a Door record 1 Select Configuration Doors and Readers and then Doors tab 2 Refer to Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 To define a door sensor A door contact functions as a sensor for two door open conditions Door Open Too Long and or Door Forced Open If you are using the alarm shunting function on a door when a valid badge unlocks the door strike and the badge holder opens the door the system begins to count the number of seconds of Allowable Open Time If the door is still open when this time elapses an associated alarm can occur If you are using the monitoring function on a door when a door is forced open an associated alarm can occur immediately Note You must define this sensor input on the Inputs form before you can select the appropriate Door Sensor Input on the Doors form 1 From the Configuration menu select Doors and Readers and then click the Doors tab 2 Click New g 3 Complete the following fields of the Doors form e Description e Forced Open Shunt Time Allowable Open Time e Keypad Shunt Time optio
119. menu select the Report menu item and then click the Report tab Click New amp A Modified Report dialog box displays Click Yes to continue From the Select a Report Category list pane select a category for this report such as My Reports When you select a category the existing reports in that category display in the Select a Report list pane You can create a new category by clicking New Category or rename an existing category by clicking Rename Category From the Table Names list pane select the database table from which the data should be extracted such as alarm color Once you have selected the table the Column Names list pane displays the columns in the database Enter your SQL statement Refer to the topic SOL Syntax for more information on how to write an SQL statement The only required elements include the type of data to include SELECT and what database table the data is to be extracted from FROM in the format SELECT Column Name Column Name FROM Table Name For example From the Table Names list pane select alarm From the SQL Keywords and Operators list pane select SELECT and click Apply From the Column Names list pane select the columns that you want to include in the report such as Foreground Color fg color and Background Color bg color Separate the columns to be included with commas Click Apply From the SQL Keywords and Operators list pane select FROM and click Apply From the
120. micro parameter block configuration PXN only The ppnwmcfg command allows the ppadmin user to configure a network micro s parameter block from the host by connecting to the network micro Once connected the ppnwmcfg utility will put the network micro in maintenance mode and display the current settings To display the ppnwmcfe utility 1 Log on to Picture Perfectas ppadmin and type ppnwmcfg v microid micro hostname flag that turns on verbose output This is useful when roubleshooting connection problems The ID of the network micro The host of the micro The ppnwncfg utility will display Table 65 ppnwmcfg menus Menu Description S Show parameter block Displays the contents of the network micro s parameter block C Clear parameter Clears a specific value U Update parameter block Writes the current values to the parameter block l n Modify parameter Selecting a number will prompt you for a new value E Prompts you for each parameter block value Edit all Q Exits out of ppnwmcfg Once you have quit the ppnwmcfg utility the network Quit micro will require about 30 seconds of idle communication before it resets Chapter 8 Device management Table 66 ppnwmcfg parameters Parameters Description The fields shown below may vary depending on your firmware version address The micro ID which is not necessary unless you
121. of floors assign the elevator to a previously defined elevator micro or reader and then tie previously defined outputs and inputs in 374 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual the case of Reader DI DO configurations to the corresponding floors Perform this setup for each of the access controlled elevators in your facility Figure 177 Elevator Form m Elevators dp E Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms LU Elevators Category Floors TEE Q iw eo X a Q9 elev 2 elev 3 Elevator Description Define Floors Lobby Elevator Descripti Lobby Elevator Fi acility GLOBAL v geo 4 Configuration Configuration Type MicroIDO C Reader DO Reader DIDO Micro MICRO 10 D 1 6 NORTHEAST lt mmn m Ill Fire DO after Floor Sek Results 5 records New record is ready Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 125 Elevators form fields Field name Description Description Type any alphanumeric combination to describe the elevator up to 60 alphanu
122. operator assigned to this facility permission profile Some of these buttons affect the control field level permissions Example If the Page Level Permission for Update is toggled off the Control Level Permission Update column will be cleared and unavailable for selection Name The labels displayed correspond to the Picture Perfect forms Select the one you currently want to work with Example Badges Select the appropriate None View Update Insert or Delete radio button for each form If None is selected the form will not be available to the operator None Used to determine if the operator will be allowed access to the selected form If selected the Control Level Permission None column will be activated View Used to determine if the operator will be allowed to view a record associated with the selected form If selected the Control Level Permission View column is selected by default Update Used to determine if the operator will be allowed to update a record associated with the selected form If selected the Control Level Permission Update column is selected by default Insert Used to determine if the operator will be allowed to insert or add a record using the selected form If selected the Control Level Permission Insert columns will be selected by default Delete Used to determine if the operator will be allowed to delete a record using the selected form If selected the Control Level Permission D
123. or bottom is configurable by clicking Preferences on the form toolbar Clicking on a single row in the grid will highlight and select that record for editing The keyboard up and down arrows can also be used to move from one record to the next The record s field values appear in the various pages of the form More than one row can be selected in order to change a value for multiple records at one time for example updating a time value for all records Multiple rows can be selected by left clicking the first desired record then dragging the mouse and releasing it on the last desired record Non connected rows may be added to the selection by holding down the CTRL key on the keyboard while selecting the row with the mouse All selected rows will be highlighted When multiple rows are selected if the field data 1s the same for all records the field value displays However if the field data is not the same in all records the field value is replaced by an asterisk Changing a field value changes it for all selected records If any field value is changed the Edit icon D appears next to the selected rows Make the necessary changes to the form A detailed explanation of each field on the form can be found on the Fields and Controls section for each form in this guide Because all Picture Perfect forms are user customizable not all fields may appear on your form or they may appear in a different order When editing a form if you fail t
124. reader interval time MODIFIED 2MR Invalid badge swipe Invalid badge NOTE Door not opened case includes door release not pressed within specified time interval Unknown badge swipe Badge Unknown Two valid badge swipes on IN reader when room is empty within specified reader interval time M2MR category type not Team Member and is Valid GUEST Two Valid door locked Two badge swipes on IN reader when room is empty within specified reader interval time but second badge category type id not valid not on area Valid door locked and No Categ Match Chapter 18 Advanced access control features Table 124 Badge transactions for Occupancy Counting and Two Man Rule features continued 2MR mode Badge event description Two badge swipes on IN reader when room is empty within specified reader interval time but first badge category type id is not valid not on area Badge transaction generated No Categ Match and Not Validated Two valid badge swipes on IN reader when room is empty within specified reader interval time M2MR category type IS Team Member door is not opened Valid no passage Two valid badge swipes on IN reader when room is empty within specified reader interval time M2MR category type IS Team Member door is opened Two APB T amp A IN occupancy count incremented by two to two Two valid badge swipes on IN reader when room is empty but second swipe is not within
125. required for that reader to be operational with door control functionality Assigned The templates that make up this template group Templates Available A list of all defined templates not included in the template group Templates Related procedures To run a template group 1 From the Configuration menu select Data Generator 2 From the toolbar click Find Q The record list window or data grid displays a list of template groups defined in the system 3 Select a template group from the list For example the default GENERATE READER WITH DOOR CONTROL template group as shown below Figure 128 Data Generator Template group example 4 Click Data Generator Chapter 16 Data Generator and templates Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones Data Generator een GENERATE READER WITI Q amp Exo 4 ab G o Data Generator Description GENERATE READER WITH DOOR CONTROL Details Used for generating a new Reader and all of the associated records required for that Rader to be operational with door control functionality Assigned Templates Available Templates Template Template DOOR WITH DOOR CONTROL AREA READER WITH NEW AREA DOOR EXIT BUTTON INPUT DOOR SENSOR INPUT DOOR STRIKE OUTPUT DOOR WITHOUT DOOR CONTROL READER VALID OUTPUT GROUP READER WITHOUT AREA VALID READER INPUT GROUP
126. se es ered are dayne SEENEN NEES cme da nad dagen Y YR e ANNER eee 199 El Ee Belle ele 199 Events OVervIeW EE Ee EEN I RA esee ates ewes 200 RUAUMEZEVENTS EE 200 SUG GING event EE 200 Scheduling area events e ENNER EEN AN AUER REENERT REENEN e y ab ee der e DER ened es 201 Seil EE 201 Fields and CONOIS PT 202 Related Melle 205 Scheduling reader events isore ennnen cd RE EER eR UE TERRA REOR aU de 206 EOMP Esman E QUEE TEES TIUS Ee E 206 Fields aind coritrols reii nnee Erebi ba d wea ere ere HE ECHTE aaa as 206 Related procedures occ der RE EELER SE EE 209 Scheduling door events aeree etse extre EL E EERE wie EE RENE EE e EA dE Ses 209 EXIM ICs EE 209 Feldsand Eed 210 E Ee Heli 211 Scheduling alarm events oorr re y me te arena e veV ker hr ER E EET Y 211 EXAMP Er 211 ee ie Beete EE 212 Related procedures 55s dp N N Guiana Ae 213 Scheduling input group events 213 EOMP En eiert CTI 214 Fields and coritrols x uie RR rrr RI Yr RE RE en aaa ee PEREAT a ERO M 215 Related Procedures ss secsees irer ei t bidder dax rer hae erm PO PETI ee wea EPIIT NT Y REY 216 Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Scheduling output group events 217 EXAMP RT 217 Fieldsand COMMONS eM EE 217 Related precedutes x eere rero Bia Det eet id M RUE Qe pA b PSP Ua 218 Scheduling backup events 219 gi Plenaire cn a aa a ae a a A E AS 219 Fields and controls EE 220 RelatediprocedtreS eene ege a ENEE Ee 220 Trigge
127. search conditions include a column name a relational operator and a value enclose character values in quotation marks For example the following SQL select statement retrieves reader descriptions from the reader table that matches only the Cafeteria Reader description SELECT description FROM reader WHERE description Cafeteria Reader ORDER BY Use the ORDER BY clause to sort the ROWS FOUND data records returned The report can sort by any column name however it is faster to order by columns that are indexed such as last name and description If the SQL statement does not specify the sorting order Informix SQL creates an index in ascending order that is A to Z for character fields low to high for number and money fields from earlier to later in time and date fields and from smallest time span to largest time span for interval fields For example the following SQL select statement retrieves data from the reader table that matches all reader descriptions which appear in ascending alphabetical order SELECT description FROM reader ORDER BY description LIKE Use LIKE after a column name to specify a value or pattern that data must match in order to be found Characters typically used in a LIKE string are A percent character matches zero or more characters An underscore character matches any single character The following SQL select statement retrieves a list of reader descriptions from the reader table where the reade
128. tag with user supplied text Example Query SELECT FROM badge history WHERE last name text Last Name Chapter 14 301 Reports facility_set UI Control None Output Replaces tag with comma delimited list of active facility ids for the current operator Example Query SELECT FROM badge history WHERE facility IN facility_set single choice label query UI Control Drop down list with the given label and entries generated by the given query The query should select only two columns the first one is the value for the option the second is the label for the option to be displayed in the dropdown Output Replaces tag with value not label of choice selected by operator Example Query SELECT FROM badge history WHERE dept f single choice Department SELECT id description FROM department multiple choice labellquery UI Control Group of check boxes with the given label and check boxes generated by the given query The query should select only two columns the first one is the value for the check box the second is the label for the check box to be displayed in the drop down Output Replaces tag with comma delimited values not label of check boxes selected by operator Example Query SELECT FROM badge history WHERE dept multiple choice Department SELECT id description FROM department host date host date n host time host time n operator date operator
129. template d display in the custom format in which the template was created You must have Manage Template action permission to perform this function Preferences Click to display the Preferences form that allows you to reposition and filter the grid columns as well as vu reposition the entire grid d The Preferences button on the form applications is controlled by the Form Preferences action permission on the Operator s system permission profile Print Click to print records in a tabular or form format to your default printer of your client workstation amp Help Click to display online help about the current form and its fields To navigate the entire Picture Perfect help system click Show Table 16 Data grid Item Description Grid The record list window or data grid shows the results of search operations and allows you to quickly navigate through the records found by a search The data displayed in the grid columns consists of one or more fields of the Picture Perfect database table that is being manipulated The number and order of the fields displayed as well as the placement of the grid on the screen left right top or bottom is configurable by clicking Preferences on the form toolbar When an application is started the record list window is initially empty You use the data grid mainly for record navigation A single record or multiple records may be selected for manipulation Each row in the data grid repr
130. template group designed to generate a new reader 322 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Figure 127 Data Generator form Data Generator ta E Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones DataGenerator GENERATE READER WITI ii Results 1 records oO amp MUJE X o4 a OS e Data Generator Description GENERATE READER WITH DOOR CONTROL Details Used for generating a new Reader and all of the associated records required for that Rader to be operational with door control functionality Assigned Templates Available Templates Template Template DOOR WITH DOOR CONTROL READER WITH NEW AREA AREA DOOR EXIT BUTTON INPUT DOOR SENSOR INPUT DOOR STRIKE OUTPUT DOOR WITHOUT DOOR CONTROL READER VALID OUTPUT GROUP READER WITHOUT AREA VALID READER INPUT GROUP Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Table 120 Data Generator form fields Field name Description Description A description up to 60 characters to identify this template group for example GENERATE READER WITH DOOR CONTROL Details A synopsis of the kind of records that are created by this template group for example Used for generating a new reader and all the associated records
131. the s after http https lt hostname gt Picture If you are using Internet Explorer 7 and you receive a certificate warning screen follow these steps a Click on the Continue to this website not recommended hyperlink b Click on Certificate Error at the top of the window just to the right of the URL drop down list In the Certificate Invalid Alert window select View Certificate In the Certificate window select Install Certificate In the Certificate Import Wizard Welcome window select Next In the Certificate Import Wizard Certificate Store window select the Automatically select the certificate store based on the type of certificate radio button Click Next to continue and then click Finish In the Security Warning window click Yes to install the certificate The install is complete when the Certificate Import Wizard displays the message The import was successful Click OK to close the window In the Security Alert window click Yes to proceed In the Picture Perfect webtop click the Picture Perfect button in the upper left corner to display the Login screen Log on to the system Chapter 4 59 Setup 16 When logging on to Picture Perfect with SSL enabled the following window displays x The web site s certificate is invalid Do you want to continue Name bctrodeo Publisher bctrodeo The certificate cannot be verified by a trusted source Only continue
132. the color scheme reflects the alarm state Alarm Events An application used to create and edit records to define and schedule the desired characteristics of a single alarm during an event Alarm Messages An application used to create and edit records to define alarm instructions displayed on the Alarm or Activity Monitor Alarm Responses An application used to create and edit records to define alarm responses the operator can select when responding to an alarm Time Zone An application used to assign a unique time zone to each host device and operator in the system See Verifying time zones on page 168 Data An application used to add new readers doors and areas with all the necessary associated records Generator automatically created and properly linked See Running templates on page 320 Table 7 Control Menu Chapter 2 Getting started Sub Menu Function Operators Operator An application used to create and edit Operator records to define those individuals who will log on to the Picture Perfect system Permission Group An application used to create and edit Permission Group records to limit operator permission to specific categories areas and or reports Permission An application used to create and edit Permission records that combine system form and facility permission profiles This permission is then assigned to an operator System Permission Profile An applicati
133. the computer 9 10 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Logging on to the system In order to use Picture Perfect you must log on as an authorized Picture Perfect operator using a valid Login ID and Password The first time you log on to the system you will use the Login ID and password that were configured during installation To log on to Picture Perfect 1 Ina browser window type a URL in the address field to connect to the server for example http hostname Picture Note Ifyou are logging on to an Imaging workstation you must close all existing browser windows and open a new window The Picture Perfect Webtop displays from which you may launch Picture Perfect Figure 1 Picture Perfect Webtop 2 Picture Perfect Webtop Microsoft Internet Explorer Ele Edit view Favorites Tools Help O O HAG Pe dom 60 2 WM Address LEI http bctlondon Picture Your Picture Perfect Webtop vse Manual To start an application or to view a document click a link on the left Picture Perfect Release Notes GE Infrastructure Security Java TM 2 Runtime Environment Standard Edition 1 6 0_x includes Java Plugin Windows Platform Click to download JRE Java Runtime Environment JRE Picture Perfect Imaging installation kit EPIBuilder requires J2SE Java Runtime Environment Windows Platform Click to download EP Builder Imaging Installation Click to downioad GEMPlus Interface Installation Click to dow
134. the duration time expires The maximum value is 32 767 If O is selected the output will not reset but will remain activated continuously See Reset on Input on page 159 Micro Displays a description of the selected micro where this output is connected Click Select Micro to display the Micros list box Select the desired micro Table 68 M PX 2000 wiring chart Outputs Element Board number DO address Reader address CPU Door DO 1 2 Picture Perfect Board 1 159 160 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 68 M PX 2000 wiring chart Outputs Element Board number DO address Reader address Aux DO 1 2 Picture Perfect Board 1 0 1 0 1 Aux DO 3 4 Picture Perfect Board 2 0 1 0 1 Table 69 M5 wiring chart Outputs Element Board number DO address Reader address CPU 2RP 2SRP Board 1 4 0 1 0 1 8RP 1 0 1 0 1 Picture Perfect Board 1 4 2 0 1 0 1 Picture Perfect Board 5 8 16DO DOR Board 1 4 16 31 e Optional boards include four 20D boards 20 supervised input poi 2SRP boards 2 reader board and two 8RP boards 8 reader board e The M5 cabinet has a seven slot capacity Two slots are used by the mandatory Power Communications and CPU boards The remaining five slots may be configured to meet your site requirements with any combination of boards within the limitations listed above nts four 16DO boards 16 output points four 2RP Related pr
135. the record that was changed on the form Example Address 5 Value The change that was made in the field Example FL 280 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Related procedures To view operator activity 1 From the Monitor menu select Operator Monitor 2 Operator transactions include Inserts Updates and Deletes to records in the database tables Make sure that routing on the System Parameters screen is set up to the Operator Monitor If you want to create a report of this information click Save to save the reportasa txt file Monitoring status The Status Monitor lets you see a micro s current operating characteristics status for its areas categories readers doors inputs input groups outputs output groups alarms modes elevators category floors and or version You can also view the status of an area s readers and or doors Scheduled events change the micro database and can also be used to update the host database The Status Monitor allows the operator to view the micro database in real time to see any changes the scheduler has made You must first select to view by micro or by area Figure 115 Status Monitor S Status Monitor i ii Micro Status Area Status l 2847 Go Micro Status Micro ID MICRO 1 lt GLOBAL gt mmm Request Status on CT Badge Badge D Manage LJ Area Inputs J Alarm Version J Category 1 Input Group Modes vi Reader
136. the selected alarm if any associated with this input group Click the Alarm button to display the Alarm list box Select the desired alarm When this input group activates the selected alarm triggers Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box By default the output group record will be assigned the same facility as the micro to which the door is assigned however you do have the ability to manually re assign an output group s facility This might be desirable in a case where one micro controls more than one facility for instance two companies occupying the same building that use separate doors for entry exit For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Parent Input Displays a description of the selected parent input groups if any associated with this child input group Group Click a Parent Input Group button to display the Parent Input Group list box which is a list of input groups and select an input group to be the parent for this child You can select up to three parent input groups for a child input group For more information see Parent input groups on page 131 Output Group Displays a description of the selected output group associated with this input group Click an Output Group button to display the Output Groups list box Select up to five output groups one for each button When this input group activates all of the selected output groups trigger Chapter 8 Device manage
137. the trigger will effect To trigger an Emergency Mode using an Input Group 1 First create an Input Group record See Creating input groups on page 127 2 Next create an Emergency Mode record by selecting Control Modes and then Emergency 3 Enter a description for this Emergency mode 4 Select a Mode from the Mode list box 222 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual 5 Select an Input Group from the Input Group list box 6 Select the Facilities this Emergency Mode will be assigned to 7 Save the record 8 For detailed information on creating records refer to Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 Chapter 11 Badge management This chapter describes how to manage badge and personnel records Readers should familiarize themselves with the information in this chapter before continuing to other chapters in this document In this chapter EE EE 224 Defining badges Pr NEE Mics Oa RN hs Bw Ee 224 Defining ERNEST need dae 231 Capturing and displaying images cc ccc cnn 237 PRAHA DRESS 6 hd bead od paced aad bd dad ba done 242 CalesDry mGHHBSF ac ex Red ee ee ee eRe GRE Dae SUPR 244 251 ER 224 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Overview When a person attempts to access an area and at least one category on the badge matches at least one category of that area the system grants access if the person attempts to access an area and no categories on the badge match any categories o
138. to a temporary category schedule have an icon before their slot number Available This is a list of all available categories in alphabetical order To jump quickly to an item in the list use the type ahead search feature by clicking in any cell and typing the first letters of the item for which you are searching Add Click on this button to add a permanent category to a slot The category list on the form will be refreshed and will display the new category This button is enabled when an available category and an empty slot number are selected By default the next empty slot number is selected when you select an available category Note Double clicking will also move the category from the Available to the Assigned column Remove Click on this button to remove a permanent category from a slot The category list on the Badges form will be refreshed and will no longer display the removed category slot number This button is enabled if an active category or the corresponding slot number is selected Note Double clicking will also move the category from the Assigned to the Available column Slot This spin box displays the next available slot Click the up down arrow to select a specific slot Calendar When you click the calendar on the Category Manager the Category Scheduler displays From here you may define the properties of the schedule Filter Click Filter to enter search criteria to
139. to be used as an Exit Button input in an area designated as M2MR with Door Control the Normally Closed and Input Enabled buttons must be deselected the default Input Normal Toggle this button On to configure this input as a standard input point Tour Toggle this button On to configure this input as a Tour point This button will only be enabled if the optional Guard Tours package is installed Elevator Toggle this button On to configure this input as an elevator input Table 71 M5 wiring chart Inputs Element Board number DI address Reader address Exit DI address CPU 2RP Board 1 4 0 1 0 1 8 9 20DI Board 1 4 16 35 Optional boards include four 20DI boards 20 supervised input points four 16DO boards 16 output points four 2RP boards 2 reader board and one 8RP board 8 reader board The M5 cabinet has a seven slot capacity Two slots are used by the mandatory Power Communications and CPU boards The remaining five slots may be configured to meet your site requirements with any combination of boards within the limitations listed above Ona M5 the Tamper and AC Power Fail inputs must be wired to connector 6 on the Power Communications board The AC Power Fail input will always be defined as Board 0 Address 0 the Tamper input will always be defined as Board 0 Address 1 Related procedures To create edit or delete an Input record 1 Select Configuration
140. to dispatch a guard Figure 46 Alarm Messages Form Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zone Alarms AlarmColors AlarmEvents Alarm Messages Alarm Responses Q 4 d EX o4 x a Dispatch Guard u Messages Alarm Message Dispatch Guard Facility GLOBAL ka ES Results 1 records Chapter 7 115 Alarm activity configuration Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 50 Alarm Messages form fields Field name Description Alarm Message Type an alarm instruction for the operator to follow up to 60 alphanumeric characters You can assign up to five messages to each alarm Write generic messages that are common to most of your alarms Example A forced door alarm on a perimeter door should use a generic alarm instruction such as Forced Door Send Security Guard and a response message such as Guard Dispatched Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box This field reflects the facility to which this record is assigned For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Related procedures To create ed
141. to select a printer as a destination where you want messages to be routed From the Printer drop down list select the specific printer queue Monitor Select Yes to display the message on the alarm and activity monitor this choice does not create a history record Note Monitor must be selected as a routing destination in order for an operator to respond to an alarm History Select Yes to record the transaction message in the database history table this allows the message to be referenced for history reporting Email Select Yes to route messages to an email address or alias The Email drop down list contains all of the email addresses currently defined in the system Select the desired addresses from the list box Note Yes must be selected for Monitor in order for this feature to be enabled Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box This field reflects the facility to which this record is assigned For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Related procedures To create edit or delete a routing record 1 Select Control Routings and then Routings tab 2 Referto Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 73 74 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Defining badge formats The format of the encoded badge is identified by a special character sequence that optionally starts with constant data such as a facility code common to all badges and always ends with variable data tha
142. tours of a facility at specified intervals This badge will not operate for normal access control Reissue If the Seed Counter option is enabled every time a badge is issued to a person this incremental number is Count stored to the badge This field shows the issue number of this badge and the total number of badge issues for the badgeholder to whom this badge is assigned for example 3 of 5 If a badge has not been assigned to a person the Reissue Count is 00 The maximum number of badge issues allowed is 99 This field is view only you can perform a search but it cannot be edited For more information see Seed counter on page 366 Reprint If the Seed Counter option is enabled for non MIFARE badge designs this field indicates the number of times Count the badge has been printed For MIFARE badge designs this field indicates if the badge has been encoded A new badge will set the reprint count to 00 For non MIFARE badge designs any time the badge is printed or previewed the badge will increment the number store this number on the badge and allow a maximum reprint of 99 times For MIFARE badge designs when the badge is encoded the reprint count is set to 01 and is stored on the badge MIFARE badge designs can only be encoded once For more information see Seed counter on page 366 227 228 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 92 Badges form fields continued Field name Description Unique Id If the Seed Counter
143. transactions for granting access In addition the Interval Time field on this form must be completed The interval time specifies the number of seconds allowed between stages of the transaction See Chapter 9 Area management for details on the Readers form The double badge configuration can also be changed by scheduling This is done by setting the Number Of Badges field on the Reader Events form See Chapter 10 Schedules and modes for details on the Reader Events form A change to the definition will be reflected in a micro s local database The only micro affected by any change to a reader s Number of Badges definition is the one which is physically connected to the reader A change in the micro s local database does not affect any on going reader activity In other words changing a reader from double transaction to single transaction while the micro is processing the reader s activity does not affect that process two complete valid transactions are still needed before access may be granted After the two transactions are processed the micro will grant or deny access based on a single transaction A reader s Number of Badges definition is not limited by the reader s physical or logical type For example it is possible to define a double transaction badge and keypad anti passback in reader Reader status requests will display the reader s current Number of Badges definition Chapter 18 369 Advanced access control features
144. up the host and there are events usually operator activities such as updates or commands that cause the host to automatically dial up the micro Table 58 Events requiring micro to host calls Event Micro to host response Power on Reset After a power on reset the micro reads its DIP switch settings to determine its attached modem type and the required baud rate for communication to the modem assumes that the modem is connected to the host port and then tries to dial the host using the modem s hard coded phone number Alarm The micro immediately dials the host when a priority micro alarm activates Immediate Dial Up is user defined See Immediate Dial Required on page 118 142 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 58 Events requiring micro to host calls Event Micro to host response Alarm and Badge Threshold The micro dials the host when the micro s alarm or badge history buffer reaches its threshold user defined and requires uploading to the host Badge Table Request The micro dials the host when there is no micro database record for a badge just presented to a reader The micro s resident database reduces the requirement for micro to host calls for badge records Table 59 Events requiring host to micro calls Event Host to micro response Database Updates The host dials out to send database updates to micros Whether the host does this automatically never or on request i
145. your window to a larger size Close Click to exit the window Table 15 Toolbar Item Description Find Click to locate specific data records based on selection criteria entered into any of the fields This is useful if you Q want to change data of an existing record If you click Find without entering any search criteria the system will find all of the data records in that table The records found for the search will be displayed in the grid to the left of the form You must have View record permission to perform a search The number of results returned is limited to the settings on the Systems Parameters form New Click to add a new record as the last row in the record list Any default values are filled in or cleared if there is no 4l default You must have Insert record permission to create a new record and Update permission for all required fields Copy Click to create a new record and copy the values of the currently selected record to it This is a quick way to create a new record that is similar to an existing record A record must be currently selected in order to copy it If multiple records are selected a new record will be created for each one selected The copied records will be placed at the bottom of the record list and marked with the new record icon i You must have Insert record permission to copy a record Only fields that you have permission for will be copied to the new record Save Click to save the
146. zone of the operator See Verifying time zones on page 168 Description A description of the input usually including a wiring address and a written description Facility The facility of the input as defined in the Facility field of the Input form Related procedures To view input activity 1 From the Monitor menu select Input Monitor 2 To view input activity make sure that routing for each of the input transaction types as listed on page 278 is routed to the Input Activity Monitor 3 Ifyou want to create a report of this information click Save E to save the reportasa txt file Chapter 13 Alarm activity monitors Monitoring operator activity Select Operator Monitor to view the incoming operator activity transactions Operator transactions include Inserts Updates and Deletes to records in the database tables The system can log this activity and the operator s ID Make sure that an operator routing is defined on the System Parameters form Make sure that Global facility is chosen as part of the active facility set Figure 114 Operator Monitor S Operator Monitor zu E Alarm Monitor Badge Monitor Input Monitor Operator Monitor Status Monitor User Monitor Performance Monitor i E ih oO d dai J Table Pei Login ID Employee ID Action Operator Date OperatorTime Host Date Host mme Record Description Alz Fields
147. 0 Tour Functions Enables the operator to perform tour functions such as starting or stopping a tour See the Picture Perfect 4 5 Guard Tours User Manual User Monitor Enables operator access to the User Monitor See Monitoring users on page 281 87 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 41 System Permission Profile form fields continued Field name Description Page Level This section is used to set up the record level permissions for the selected form The toggle buttons allow you Permission to determine the level of permission of the operator assigned to this facility permission profile Some of these buttons affect the control field level permissions Example If the Page Level Permission for Update is toggled off the Control Level Permission Update column will be cleared and unavailable for selection Name The labels displayed correspond to the Picture Perfect forms Select the one you currently want to work with Example Badges Select the appropriate None View Update Insert or Delete radio button for each form If None is selected the form will not be available to the operator None Used to determine if the operator will be allowed access to the selected form If selected the Control Level Permission None column will be activated View Used to determine if the operator will be allowed to view a record associated with the selected form If selected the Control Level Permis
148. 00 STL OCC R 22 1 00 STL 3E180 14 3 00 STLF ACILI 14 3 01 STLILLDEC 14 4 00 STLILLDEC 40 3 00 STL 2N980 al Q 4 dX ESX o4 9x iz Reader Description Inputs and Outputs State Type Function Options Results 118 records Isl D Number of Badges amp Single Double Limited Usage Enabled Disabled Toggle amp No O Yes Shunting Disabled Enabled Scheduling 8 Enabled Disabled Elevator Reader Yes No 6 Optional If you want to activate a DO such as a blinking light between the first and second required badge swipes click Two Man Rule Output and select the output to be triggered 7 Save and exit the Readers form 349 350 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual To set up the area doors Note The door sensor input and the door output must be physically connected to the same micro 1 From the Configuration menu select Doors and Readers and then click the Doors tab From the toolbar click Find to locate the door record you want to set up Select the appropriate input from the list displayed 2 3 On the Inputs and Outputs tab click Door Sensor Input 4 5 Define an M2MR output on each door to the area that will be used for entry APB IN or T amp A IN Click M2MR Output and select an output to associate with a warning device such as a horn or strobe light 6 Define
149. 1 Select Configuration Micros and then Keys tab 2 Refer to Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 Note Due to the sensitive information presented on the screen you will be prompted for root s password if you attempt to perform any operations with the keys Chapter 8 151 Device management Flashing micros When the micro is powered up you may need to flash download the Picture Perfect application code into the micro You can use the eFlash utility which is included in Picture Perfect 4 5 Before you begin flashing your micros review the following Ifthe micro is configured for Micro Callback the Callback feature must be disabled the Callback field on the Micro form must be set to None in order to perform a flash download Upon completion of the download the feature can be enabled the Callback field can be set back to Micro e fthis is a dial up micro it must be disconnected from the host before attempting to flash A PXN or PX micro must already be flashed with firmware 4 03 or later to use the eFlash feature Micro firmware files Inthe cas flash eflash directory there is a separate directory for each type of micro s firmware hex file Flashing a micro using eFlash This download procedure can be used with Picture Perfect version 2 0 host systems or later The eFlash download program is installed as part of the base Picture Perfect 4 5 product and can be run on standalone systems network
150. 16 00 in New York 15 00 in Houston and at 13 00 in San Francisco This would effectively deny access immediately e Device Context If you select Device as the context to expire this badge at 16 00 the badge expiration will take effect at 16 00 in New York one hour later at 16 00 in Houston and 3 hours later at 16 00 in San Francisco Chapter 8 Device management Figure 72 Time Zone form anezS GE D zu E Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors AndReaders Elevators Alarms Time Zone Time Zone a 4 Wi E of X ZS Gi B US NI United Stat amp US NM United Stat Time Zone Daylight Savings Time amp US NY United Stat D amp US NC United Stat amp US ND United Stat amp US ND1 United St amp US OH United Stet amp US OK United Stat amp US OR United Stat amp US ORI United St amp US PA United Stat amp US RI United State amp US SC United Stat amp US SD United Stat IG US SD1 United St amp US TN1 United Sta D US TN United Stat amp UUS TX United Stat amp US TX1 United Sta amp US UT United Stat amp US VT United Stat amp US NH United Stat amp US VA United Stat amp US WA United Sta DST Bias 4 HHMM Ki E
151. 2 Normal Door Release Timeout O Passive b d Results 96 records 6 Save and exit the Area form To define categories for M2MR category types 1 From the Access menu select Places and then click the Categories tab 2 Click New 4 3 Define one or more categories groups of people who will access the controlled area and under Type enable the appropriate radio button None Guest or Team Member Figure 163 Categories form M2MR Places People Badges Places f Areas Categories Area Events Beserp on E egen a amp ES EI X o 4 ek x a a Categories Description Computer Room Team Permission Group 3 ALL GROUPS ALLOWED GLOB w pre j O None Team Member Guest Escort Required 4 Save and exit the Category form To assign M2MR categories to areas and badge holders 1 From the Access menu select Places and then click the Areas tab 2 From the toolbar click Find A to locate the area record to be controlled Chapter 18 355 Advanced access control features 3 Click the Category Manager tab and select an M2MR category from Available Categories and move it to Assigned Categories
152. 244 Note This field is position sensitive when used in conjunction with area category schedules Badge Manager The Badge Manager allows you to assign a badge to a person or to issue a temporary replacement badge For more details see Badge manager on page 251 Badge Form You can access the Badge Form directly from the Badge Manager tab on the Personnel Form For details on the Badge Form see Defining badges on page 224 Images This tab is available if you have the optional Imaging package installed For information on capturing images and signatures see Capturing and displaying images on page 237 User Fields Enter information up to 40 characters in one or more user fields to identify the badge holder Example license tag number The number of user fields that appear on the Badges form is set to 40 on the Parameters form The names of the user fields can be changed using Custom Forms Custom lists can be assigned to user fields when creating custom forms 235 236 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 93 Personnel form fields continued Field name Description Saved Notes All saved notes applicable to this record are listed including the Date Time the note was created and the operator that created it Click on a column heading to sort by Date Time Operator or alphabetically by note Saved Notes Date Time lotes Macation scheduled 9 1 08 10 2006 10 26 09 8 15 2006 Reviewe
153. 59 00 During these two time periods alarms and activity with this route definition will be routed to all operators in the system The Alarm Monitor will reflect any changes made to the Alarm Monitor Routing configuration Database updates will however only add entries to the Alarm Monitor they cannot remove entries 113 114 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual The Alarm Monitor Routing feature not only affects the Alarm Monitor it also affects the Alarm Alerts pop up The same rules that apply to the Alarm Monitor also apply to the Alarm Alert It will display only if alarms can be viewed on the Alarm Monitor Related procedures To create edit or delete a Route Point record 1 Select Control Routings and then Route Points tab 2 Refer to Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 Creating alarm instructions Use the Alarm Messages form to write instructions that will display when the various alarms occur and when they reset Keep in mind that the same alarm may occur at different times of the day or week Your instructions who to call who to dispatch may change depending on the shift These alarm messages appear in a list box that is used in the Alarms form Example The policy at Global Corporation is to dispatch a security guard whenever an alarm comes in indicating that a door has been forced open Therefore they have created a message that appears on all Door Forced alarms instructing the operator
154. 6 From the toolbar click Save In the Facility Permissions pane the Permission Profile column will reflect the newly selected profile In our example the Badge Admin permission record will now look like this Figure 41 Defining a permission amp Opertors aii Hau PH Operators Modes Routings Backup Restore Hosts Operators Permission Groups Permission System Permissions Profile Facility Permissions Profile Form Profile i e Q Al b i E o 4 2x L e Badge Admin o Permission Description Badge Admin Facility GLOBAL e ees P Form Profile Manufacturing GLOBAL E P System Permission Profile View System Permissions lt GLO eee E Faciity Permissions Facility Permission Profile Facility X Update Badge Faciity Y Faciliy Z GLOBAL View Operator Step 4 Assign the Permission to an Operator 1 er PO OSI I QUEM GR OBS Chapter 6 103 Operator administration From the Control menu select Operators and then the Operators tab From the toolbar click Add amp J In the User Name field type Mary Smith In the Employee ID field type 222333444 In the Login Id field type msmith Click the Permission button and select Badge Administrator GLOBAL Click the Locale button and select English in US Click the Time Zone button and select US FL United States Flor
155. 8 143 Device management A network micro requires an ethernet connection to the host A network micro with the optional dial up backup feature also requires a PCMCIA modem card in the other available slot a dedicated phone line and one or more compatible modems attached to the host port in addition to the network lines Figure 58 Sample Ethernet configuration Host Modem up host PXNPLUS down none down none Micro 5 PXN up host up host DirecDoor down none up host Micro 5 PXN Ethernet WAN Ethernet PCMCIA Modem up host Micro 5 PXN down micro down none DirecDoor up PXNPLUS down DirecDoor PXNPLUS up micro down PXNPLUS Micro 5 PX up micro down micro Micro 5 PX up micro down micro Micro 5 PX up micro 144 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Micro Network Map The network map on the Micro form provides a visual display of all the micros on the system and their relative position on their respective port lines To access the network map click the Network Map tab on the bottom of the navigation pane Figure 59 Network Map Micros Ports Modems Network Ports Keys Micro State Virtual Display jet Q Ali N a x giro Online Blue icon Nonexistent Micros 3 Micro Timing InputGroups AdvancedFeatures DialUp eFlash nm mm om o
156. 88 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 112 Performance Monitor fields continued Field name Description CPU Usage CPU Idle The percent of Server CPU clock cycles unused CPU Wait The percent of server CPU clock cycles waiting on resources CPU User The percent of server CPU clock cycles used by user processes CPU Sys The percent of server CPU clock cycles used by system processes BDG s The number of badge transactions currently being processed per second ALM s The number of alarm transactions currently being processed per second EVT s The number of event transactions currently being processed per second OPR s The number of operator transactions currently being processed per second TOUR s The number of tour transactions currently being processed per second Queues sndmgr Send Manager queue size dbmgr Database Manager queue size prmgr Print Manager queue size ui UI Manager queue size bdgmgr Badge Manager queue size almmgr Alarm Manager queue size oprmgr Operator Manager queue size rcvmgr Receive Manager queue size snddrv Send Driver queue size stsmgr Status Manager queue size netalm Network Alarm Manager queue size evtmgr Event Manager queue size moddrv Modem Driver queue size timer Timer Manager queue size tourmgr Tour Manager queue size mrtmgr Routing Manager queue size cfgmgr Configuration Manager queue size UC UCS M
157. 9 Cannot be Same as Login ID Check to require that passwords be different than the Login ID Alarm Email Include All Occurrences Check to include each occurrence of an alarm process state change for example active or pending in the email message generated By default this requirement is not available Include Priority Check to include the priority of an alarm in the email message generated By default this requirement is not available Include Condition Check to include the condition of an alarm for example alarm reset in the email message generated By default this requirement is not available Include Input State Check to include the input state of an alarm for example open closed in the email message generated By default this requirement is not available Tab Field name Include Process State Chapter 4 Setup Description Check to include the process state of an alarm for example active pending in the email message generated By default this requirement is not available Include Count Check to include the number of times an alarm has set and reset in the email message generated By default this requirement is not available Modes Number of Auths for Mode Change The number of distinct operator authenticators required to allow a mode change Notes Saved Notes All saved notes applicable to this record are listed including the
158. A Area A Neutral Reader 1 enters Area A Area A Badge at Area B Area B Area B Area A Area B Reader 3 enters Area B Area B Badge at Area C Area C Area C Area A Area C Reader 5 enters Area C Area C Badge at Area A Area A Area A Area A Area C Reader 7 enters Area A Chapter 9 177 Area management Nested APB Configurations Two APB configurations are supported e Global Nested APB Timed Local Nested APB Global Nested APB Host Broadcasts to Controllers The current area status of a badge is synchronized across all relevant controllers on a server for example in an Enterprise system at a subhost but not to the nethost or other subhost controllers On all valid APB legacy and nested transactions VALID APB IN VALID APB OUT PASSIVE APB IN PASSIVE APB OUT VALID NESTED APB PASSIVE NESTED APB FAIL SAFE that occur all controllers except dial up that know the badge and have at least one Host Broadcasts to Controllers type Global Nested APB reader are notified of the Current Area of the badge Global Nested APB Controller Requests from Host When Global Nested APB is configured to Controller Requests from Host every controller will request the Current Area for the person the badge belongs to since the person s current area may have been set from a different badge on that person from the host for each nested APB transaction that is about to occur prior to evaluating access when the badge i
159. An electronic data entry worksheet used to enter find view or update data A form may have input fields pop up lists and pushbuttons for various functions Gateway A network device or machine that connects a local private network to another network or the Internet A terminal using a graphical interface for logging on to a desktop environment such as Windows GNOME Desktop Manager GDM XDM and KDM 409 410 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 127 Picture Perfect 4 5 terms explained continued Term Definition Host A host is generally a device or program that provides services to some smaller or less capable device or program Host Console The host computer terminal used for AIX functions Informix The relational database management system RDBMS used by the Picture Perfect system See Relational Database Input A digital input DI or a logical condition detected by the microcontroller An input is assigned to an inputgroup Input Field An area of the screen where an operator can type in information Input Group A group of one or more digital inputs or logical inputs that can cause an alarm and or trigger output groups when any or all inputs in the group are detected as true Insertion Point A point marked by a cursor where the text that you enter will appear IP Address Anumeric address used by computer hosts to transmit and receive information over the Internet ISA
160. Authorization Required Yes Designate a reader that will display a photo on the Activity Monitor and require an operator to unlock a door No Designate a reader thot will display a photo on the Activity Monitor and will unlock a door without operator intervention Do Not Care See Radio buttons on page 27 Notes The Yes and No buttons are not available unless Swipe And Show Enabled is selected Access cannot be granted through readers defined as Authorization Required while communications to the micro are down Logical Reader Function To change the way the reader functions schedule a reader event that changes the logical reader function Normal Anti passback In Anti passback Out Time amp Attendance In Time amp Attendance Out or Time amp Attendance In out Do Not Care See Radio buttons on page 27 Example To provide higher security after hours you can set up certain readers as anti passback in readers and others as anti passback out readers or To provide data about shifts that badge in and out of an area you can set up a reader event that changes a normal reader to a Time amp Attendance In or Out reader APB Type To change the way the anti passback feature functions schedule an area event that changes the APB Type of all readers in the area Global APB or Timed APB Global APB Used as the default Global APB allows the reader to function as a normal APB reader Timed APB Used to designate t
161. Backup Events EIS Restore Restore from Tape Disk File Source file Badge Tabie _ Browse amp Backup Directory Archive Directory Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 118 Restore form fields Field name Description Restore from Select the media that contains the data to be restored Tape or Disk File Note If Disk File is selected any file or path selected is appended to the system configured backup directory Chapter 15 317 Backup and restore Table 118 Restore form fields Field name Description Source file If you chose to restore from a Disk File enter the name of the file system where the data is stored Select Backup Directory or Archive Directory and then click Browse to select from a list Related procedures To perform a restore 1 From the Control menu select the Backup Restore menu item and then click the Restore tab 2 Use the appropriate radio button to specify whether you are restoring from Tape or Disk File Note When Disk File is selected clicking Browse displays a list from which you can select the file from which the data will be restored See the User Manual
162. Count is 00 The maximum number of badge issues allowed is 99 This field is view only you can perform a search but it cannot be edited Reprint count This is the number of times the badge has been printed A new badge will set the Reprint Count to 00 Anytime the badge is printed or previewed the badge will increment the number storing it to the badge The Reprint Count is tracked a maximum of 99 times This field is view only you can perform a search but it cannot be edited Unique Id The seed counter assigns a unique number to each badge It is a global counter that is incremented each time a new badge is created The range is determined by the number of digits allocated to the counter This field is view only you can perform a search but it cannot be edited Double badge function This feature provides double badge control for access to high security areas Operator defined readers will require two badges or two badges with PINs to be presented before a door strike is activated Access through double transaction readers is granted only when two complete valid and distinct transactions are presented to the reader Complete means that both transactions have all necessary information Valid Chapter 18 367 Advanced access control features means that both transactions are recognized by the reader Distinct means that both transactions are individually distinguishable a single badge cannot be used twice to com
163. Default Routing MONITOR AND HISTORY lt GLOBAL gt Parson Trace Routing MONITOR AND HISTORY lt GLOBAL gt Max View Recs 500 Number of Fbors 64 Nanber of Tenporary Categories 96 Recond Remove Maxium 500 Recond Remove Interval gni s 1 Number of User Fields 40 Nube of Parson Categories 96 Number of Ares Categories 32 5 When you are satisfied with the preview click one of the following g To close and exit the print window m print an electronic file in pdf format A window similar to the following will display 40 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Figure 12 Print to a PDF Saving Report into a PDF File neren TJ See Fle me TI O Author 208036685 Encoding Cp1252 Windows Latin 1 Security Settings and Encryption amp No Security Encrypt with 40 bit keys Encrypt with 128 bit keys User Password Confirm Owner Password Confirm O Allow Copy O Allow Re jassembly O Allow Usage Of Screenreaders O Allow Modifications of Contents CO Allow Fill In of Formulardata O Allow Modification Of Annotations m amp To print to your default printer A window similar to the following displays Figure 13 Print to a default printer m Printer Name Properties Status Ready Type HP Laserlet 55i 55i MX PS Where bet3025p1 Comment Boca W ENG SRY LJ5si Print to file m Print range Copies All N
164. Designs and then click the Badge Designs tab 2 Refer to Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 Chapter 12 257 Badge design To encode a Mifare badge 1 From the Access menu select People Personnel and then the Badge Manager tab 2 Under Print Badge select the External Encoder Setup button 3 Inthe External Encoders Setup dialog select the Specialized tab Select the Mifare badge and then click the right arrow to move it from the Unused encoders pane to the Defined encoders pane 4 Click the Setup button to open the Mifare Generic Encoder Setup window 5 Select the Key Pairs tab to create a new key pair ID You must contact Customer Support to generate a new key pair ID Refer to Contacting Technical Support on page 406 Note By default a GEKey pair ID is already set in the Mifare badge design However for security purposes it is important to create a unique key pair ID and then set the Mifare badge design to use that key To create a Mifare badge design 1 From the Setup menu select Badge Designs and then click the Badge Designs tab 2 Click the plus sign to create a new record This will open the New Badge Design form 3 Complete the form and then check the Mifare Encoding check box Click OK The Badge Designer application opens to allow you to customize this badge Refer to the Credential Designer User Manual for more information on using Badge Designer In the Badge Designer select File
165. Displays a list of applications from which you can select deselect those that you want to display on your Toolbar toolbar Debug Displays a list of packages Debug levels can be set for each package to be used for troubleshooting The log Levels file avatarlog is written to c avatar logs Log off Closes all windows and displays the Login screen Table 4 Access Menu Sub Menu Form Function People Personnel Application used to create and edit Personnel records that identify each badge holder Personnel Type Application used to create and edit Personnel Type records to define different types of personnel that are assigned to each badge holder Department Application used to create and edit Department records to assign to each badge holder Badges Badges Application used to create and edit Badge records to control the functions and capabilities of the badge Badge Format Application used to create and edit Badge Format records to add custom formats in addition to the predefined 10 digit badge format Places Area Application used to create and edit Area records to describe areas of your site requiring the same level of access control Category Application used to create and edit Category records to identify groups of badge holders by type title function or shift Area Events Application used to create and edit Area Events records to define and schedule the desired characteristics for all t
166. E EE 227 366 Relational e E 412 Relational Operatots eoo ep eoo RORIS 306 Remove Alarm Only if Reset sese 263 Report Event cree er eere deret eco eps R 307 Report Events ec ote EE 21 33 200 300 306 307 Report Permission Group 91 94 Reports 5 16 21 33 80 91 92 93 293 296 298 299 306 307 379 Le EE Requires badge to print oon ede E a E E Reset om Duration EE Reset Outputs oL p eere eed eer eer Reset Timed ARB 3 sca eei pd en e RS Reset Timed APB Immediately RESPONSE Restore cione 20 220 296 309 311 315 316 317 318 Restores d X 21 ROllb aGk EE 197 Rollback on Input Reset neces eerte ERREUR 221 Route Definition sse 31 109 111 118 162 181 Route definition oid en e iW EEG 19 106 R te Polti secures ee 113 Ro te Points er iO er e avi DER 110 114 Dapur C 19 Route to Emal 5 aceite nter REES 112 Ro te TO Operators one e eene eee Ree SEEN I ER y 111 Route to Permission ei ee rhe e iH RR PAIR RE eee 112 e TEE 46 162 181 Ro tings eeetens 19 30 71 72 73 107 108 110 181 203 292 LE 269 LE 412 S Safety termis and EE xv Schedule Control rrt rtp RERO IR Schedule Event Schedule PY PO aeo tet ene trash ite east cde epe 248 Secondary Port Seed Counter 5 ee ed eee ee Session m Shared Meitioty EE Shared
167. ENTER 2 Enabled UE ZE O Disabled II Donaca STL 3E MBR LMP i ate qs Im Scheduling Disabled Results Enabled amp Standard 36 records Disabled Modified Door Control 5 Saveand exit the Area form How to set up a modified two man rule M2MR controlled space with door control You need to complete the following forms to set up M2MR with Door Control for an area e Reader form To configure the area readers Door form To configure the doors in the area Facility Profile form To enable Occupancy Control e Area form To enable Occupancy Counting M2MR and to assign M2MR Categories to the area Category form To define Categories for M2MR Category Types e Personnel form To assign M2MR Categories to Badge holders To set up the area readers 1 From the Configuration menu select Doors and Readers and then click the Readers tab 2 From the toolbar click Find to locate the reader record you want to set up 3 Onthe Function tab under Logical Reader Function enable the appropriate radio button APB In APB Out T amp A In or T amp A Out Note In an area with Occupancy Control enabled e All readers in the area must be assigned one of these logical functions APB In APB Out TSA In or T amp A Out e APB readers must be set to Global Timed APB is not allowed e The logical reader function T amp A In Out is not allowed for any reader Figure 156 Re
168. Ee beets ees es 36 Creating editing deleting and printing records liess 36 Assigning system parameters csse he 40 Erenin FACE MISS PP DEE E 53 Se UD DFIBIBER Loss aS eee ee ea REES qe RR CA ea Us 54 Setting up workstations optional 56 Setting up SSL Encryption 57 Database enr ypo o oa Koes E OO Sek ODE Sea RoR eee AE 60 36 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Overview When using Picture Perfect some of the forms contain default information that you can change as required All forms may be customized to display the fields you choose to display You may also create custom lists as needed such as a list box of company or division names This chapter includes information on setting your system parameters working with Picture Perfect forms and setting up optional items such as printers and imaging stations Creating editing deleting and printing records All Picture Perfect forms use a standard method to add edit or delete records Note You must allow appoximately 90 seconds for the cache to update when saving changes to a record Creating records To create a record 1 From the Primary menu such as Access Configuration Control or Setup select a Secondary menu item and then click the appropriate tab For example Access People Personnel 2 Click New l The record list window or data grid displays a row marked with the error record icon amp If a search has been performed the grid
169. Effects Fix Redeye Find face Capture Photo Reselect profile Accept and close Cancel 2 This offers the option to individually Enhance the current image which allows you to adjust the existing image without having to recapture it Figure 97 Image Enhancement Preview Image m Color Balance Red Green Blue Original Image TT Cyan Magenta Yellow KR e E k View Whole image C One to one Adjust OE N A 0 Exposure EH T pum m Reset All Cancel Contrast T Automatic contrast 3 When you have completed your changes click Ok Then from the Epi Capture menu select Accept and Close 4 From the Images tab toolbar click Save to save the record to your database 242 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Printing badges Once the optional Imaging package is installed the Print Badge dialog on the Badge form and on the Badge Manager of the Personnel form is enabled Figure 98 Print Badge Fields and controls Table 95 Print badge controls Bes Design Print Badge Le mifare badge GLOBAL v L T EX en RER Control name icon Description Badge Design za Edit Badge Design L CONSULT TEMP lt GLOBAL gt e INPAK FACILITIES GLOBAL WINPAK TEMP TEMP GLOBAL WINPAK TEMPORARY GLOBAJ franks 2nd designe 07 Costs franks desig
170. External Encoders Setup dialog Encoder Setup g Issued Date Type the date the badge was issued If this field is left blank the system will automatically enter the current date Note Type the slashes if the system date format requires them Time Type the time the badge was issued If this field is left blank the system will automatically enter the current time Note Type the colons if the system time format requires them Time Zone Select the time zone context in which the badge was issued For examples see Verifying time Context zones on page 168 Expires Date Type the date the badge expires Note Type the slashes if the system date format requires them Time Type the time the badge expires Note Type the colons if the system time format requires them Time Zone Select the time zone context in which the badge expired For examples see Verifying time Context zones on page 168 Chapter 11 Badge management Table 92 Badges form fields continued Field name Description Return Date Type the date the badge was turned in Note Typethe slashes if the system date format requires them Time Type the time the badge was turned in Note Type the colons if the system time format requires them Time Zone Select the time zone context in which the badge was turned in For examples see Verifying Context time zones on page 168 Last Access The system tracks the badge and display
171. GE Security Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual P N 460202008C e ISS 25MAR10 Copyright Disclaimer Trademarks and patents Intended use 2010 GE Security Inc This document may not be copied or otherwise reproduced in whole or in part except as specifically permitted under US and international copyright law without the prior written consent from GE Security Document number revision 460202008C March 2010 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE GE ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR INACCURACIES OR OMISSIONS AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITIES LOSSES OR RISKS PERSONAL OR OTHERWISE INCURRED AS A CONSEQUENCE DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY OF THE USE OR APPLICATION OF ANY OF THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT FOR THE LATEST DOCUMENTATION CONTACT YOUR LOCAL SUPPLIER OR VISIT US ONLINE AT WWW GESECURITY COM This publication may contain examples of screen captures and reports used in daily operations Examples may include fictitious names of individuals and companies Any similarity to names and addresses of actual businesses or persons is entirely coincidental GE and the GE monogram are registered trademarks of General Electric Picture Perfect and logo are registered trademarks of GE Security Other trade names used in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of the manufacturers or vendors of the respective products Use this product only for the purpose it was designed for r
172. GL Enabled 40 1 01 STONG Disabled 40 2 01 STLANIO4 40 3 00 STL 2N980 Toggle 32 41 00 STLILOBB amp No 8241 01 STLILOBB O Yes 32 2 00 STLILOEB 82 2 01 STLILOBB Shunting 31 2 00 STLIEMPL O Disabled 31 2 01 STL EMPL 31 3 00 STLIEMPL 31 3 01 STL EMPL Scheduling 53 01 01 DTRISE amp Enabled Ee dE e Disabled 53 02 01 DTRINNE Elevator Reader 53 02 00 DTR TAN Yes 53 01 00 DTRIBAD No C Enabled gt Results 118 records 6 Save and exit the Readers form 340 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual To set up the area doors Note The door sensor input and the door output must be physically connected to the same micro 1 From the Configuration menu select Doors and Readers and then click the Doors tab 2 From the toolbar click on Find to locate the door record you want to set up 3 On the Inputs and Outputs tab click Door Sensor Input Figure 148 Doors form Inputs and Outputs j Doors And Readers 7 7 co mas pu Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zone Doors Readers Reader Events Door Events Description rem Q A E o 4 X GE O Door Description Inputs and Outputs Door Sensor Input ese m nh Exit Button I
173. Global facility in order to properly use the system Category Permission Group List of permission groups used with categories Select the permission groups that designate categories this operator permission is allowed to assign to areas and badges You can select up to 20 Category Permission Groups or All Groups Allowed which gives operators of this group access to all categories A category cannot be assigned or removed from an area or badge if that category s permission group is not assigned here Area Permission Group List of permission groups used with areas Select the permission groups that designate areas this operator permission is allowed to assign to readers and doors You can select up to 20 Area Permission Groups or All Groups Allowed which gives operators of this group access to all areas An area cannot be assigned or removed from a reader or door if that area s permission group is not assigned here Report Permission Group If enforcement of report permissions is enabled the Report Permission Group button is available and will display a list of permission groups used with PPSQL reports Only those operators with a permission that has a report permission group selected that matches the report permission group assigned to a certain PPSQL report may access that report The selection of All Groups Allowed gives an operator of this permission access to all PPSQL reports Up to 5 report permission groups may be assigned
174. MIS Shift 2 H Assigned Categories _ Slot Category 1 MIS 24 Hour 2 NO ACCESS use wi sched only 3 MIS Shift 2 Assigned Categories Slot Category At 1 15 AM badges with the MIS 24 Hour category will have access to this area but MIS Shift 1 and MIS Shift 2 will have NO ACCESS 1 MIS 24 Hour 2 NO ACCESS use w sched only 3 NO ACCESS use w sched only Chapter 11 251 Badge management Badge manager Use the Personnel forms to assign new badges or to change or remove badges already assigned The Badge Manager tab displays the active badges assigned to the selected badge holder on one side and the badges that are available for assignment on the other Example In addition to his normal access control badge a security guard is issued a tour badge to be used when conducting a facility tour at specified intervals Figure 102 Badge Manager form Assigned Badges Available Badges Description j BID Status a Description BID Status 00000 Active Tour Badge 11223 Active DN gt Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 98 Badge Manager form fields
175. MT Greenwich Mean Time and is the basis for the worldwide system of civil time Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box This field reflects the facility to which this record is assigned For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 169 170 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 74 Time Zone form fields continued Field name Description Time Zone DST e Year YYYY The year that this DST is in effect e DST Start Date YYYYMMDD The date when Daylight Savings Time begins in local time e DST Start Time HHMMSS The time when Day e DST End Date YYYY The date when Day ight Savings Time begins in local time MMDD light Savings Time ends in local time e DST End Time HHMMSS The time when Day he date when Day he time when Day he date when Day light Savings Time ends in local time e UTC Start Date YYYYMMDD T ight Savings Time begins in UTC or GMT time e UTC Start Time HHMMSS T ight Savings Time begins in UTC or GMT time UTC End Date YYYYMMDD T ight Savings Time ends in UTC or GMT time UTC End Time HHMMSS The time when Day ight Savings Time ends in UTC or GMT time Edit Daylight Savings Time e Year YYYY The year that this D The date when Day The time when Day DST End Date YYYY The date when Day ST is in effect DST Start Date YYYYMMDD light Savings Time begins in local ti
176. Memory Free sess ie erreur ies Shared Memory SIZe eias i ame UhE e vinee ai Shared Memory Total erred eee neis Shared Memory Used 252 aot cn ee iei eei Short Conditions eege ENEE e e REVEERNR el M Shunt Code oie eH DERE Shunting e EE SQL Keywords and Operators SQL Variables eiie mentiti ren diete iere e EE Strike 8 e E stsmgr Support Services a ue uie tinte err read 6 Supported Language 5 ooo op Oe REB GIG RE Suspend Badge unen piter Ee E dre senators Suspended E aeo oneoboumon mda ien Suspended Routing d e ER e Ee E System Administrator 5 nitent iei as 413 System Dia QnOstics T EES 48 System HISTORY E 287 System Parameters20 30 40 50 53 85 91 233 249 260 263 264 265 268 2770 280 292 307 372 375 388 System Permission Profile 19 80 81 85 87 88 93 99 104 System Permissions Profile 4 eese tee tetnnn 85 94 Tab L yo t PIeVIeWw cire irme erm enn ame eerie 331 421 422 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Tab SequetiCe o eee atiete sided BERE 331 Table Names ee Eege Eeer 294 Taped Badge LE 136 Taped Badge Suspend i rrt er err eren 136 Team Member technical support Temp EE Templates ose terr nentes templates esoete ipta ER beet Audite Text Boxes Mile ee E 21 Til V rtically EEN 21 Time and Attendance TniOut 185 BER 43 Time Zone 14 18 96 112 126 134
177. OL ASCII Value Enter the character expressed in ASCII value that terminates every command string Hangup Enter the command string 0 to 30 alphanumeric characters used to disconnect or hang up the modem Command Low Speed For multi speed modems enter the lowest baud rate that this modem can use for a connection The line Baud speed can downgrade to this lower baud rate to accommodate older modems or poor line quality Lo speed Enter the message 0 to 30 alphanumeric characters that the modem returns when it connects using its Connect Msg low speed baud rate 66 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 30 Modem form fields continued Field name Description High Speed For multi speed modems enter the highest baud rate that this modem can use for a connection The Baud modem uses its highest baud rate when it first tries to connect If it does not receive a carrier using the high speed baud rate it steps down to lower baud rates until the connection occurs Hi speed Enter the message 0 to 30 alphanumeric characters that this modem returns when it connects using its Connect Msg high speed baud rate Error Message Enter the message 0 to 30 alphanumeric characters that this modem gives when it rejects an invalid command No Carrier Msg Enter the message 0 to 30 alphanumeric characters that this modem gives when it fails to connect this message differentiates between No Carrier No Answer and Busy No An
178. Oh can t open in O NONBLOCK mode errno 2 moddrv 10 23 42 936 jar http 3 11 eif load pipes Successfully read fds from file 10 23 45 954 jar http 3 11 generated SYN for host 1 micro 20 timerd 10 23 46 641 ljar http 43 11 generated SYN for host 1 micro 32 timerd 10 23 49 684 jiar http 4 3 11 generated SYN for host 1 micro 54 timerd 10 23 49 691 ljar http 43 11 generated SYN for host 1 micro 10 timerd 10 23 51 744 ljar http 43 11 generated SYN for host 1 micro 30 timerd 10 23 52 784 Fields and controls Table 113 Log Monitor fields Field name Description Type The type of message sent to the log file such as information warning or error Time The time the messages was generated Source The sub system that generated the message Message The text of the message sent to the log file Related procedures To view the log monitor 1 From the Monitor menu select Log Monitor 2 Ifyou want to create a report of this information click Save to save the reportasa txt file 290 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Chapter 14 Reports This chapter shows you how to create and schedule SQL and History reports In this chapter ER 292 Creating and viewing Peporisn oc oc ccd ev eee sr e m EE 293 ZeeChe A 299 Working with SOL Auge NEIEN EEN ee der ee p Ge a ee e res 300 Seheduling repris RP 306 292 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Overview The Reports f
179. Out is not allowed for any reader Chapter 18 339 Advanced access control features Figure 146 Reader form Reader Function j Doors And Readers Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zone Readers Reader Events Door Events z Q o Exo 4 Ce Reader Description inputs and Outputs State Tyne Function Options Reader Function Logical Reader Function Normal APBIn APB Out O T amp Alniout Or amp ARn OT amp AOu APB Type O Global APB O Timed APB Ill Reset Timed APB immediately APB Duration Days Hours 21 Mins Secs 4 On the Reader Description tab under Micro verify that all readers in the area are assigned to the same micro 5 On the Options tab under Number of Badges verify that all readers are set to Single Figure 147 Reader form Options Doors And Readers Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zone Doors Readers Reader Events Door Events iption 3 m Pat 6 EE x Se 21 2 00 STL OCC R k TE Reader Description inputs and Outputs State Type Function Options 14 3 00 STLFACLI 14 3 01 STLILLDEC 44 00STLALDEC 9 Single 15 1 00 STLMAINT Double 451 01 STLALEC 15 2 00 STLALLE C Himted Usage 45 201 STLALE
180. Output Elevator Door Output Group 17 Category Floors Fields and controls Table 110 Status Monitor fields Field name Description Micro Area ID Click to display a drop down list from which you can select the micro or area whose status you want to view Request status on Enable the check boxes of the characteristics that you want to include in the status report Chapter 13 281 Alarm activity monitors Related procedures To view status by micro 1 From the Monitor menu select Status and then click the Micro tab 2 From the Micro ID drop down list select a micro 3 From the Request status on selections check the characteristics that you want to view 4 Click Execute E 5 A report displays in the Results window at the bottom of your screen Use the scroll bar to view the entire contents of the report 6 Click Save to save the reportasa txt file To view status by area 1 From the Monitor menu select Status and then click the Area tab 2 From the Area ID drop down list select an area 3 From the Request status on selections check the characteristics that you want to view 4 Click Execute Lal 5 Areport displays in the Results window at the bottom of your screen Use the scroll bar to view the entire contents of the report 6 Click Save tosavethereportasa txt file Note You can also receive status information from the command line by typing s
181. Permission No View Update Insert All Backup and Restore Custom Form Edit SQL Statements Execute SQL Statements Force Logoff Log Monitor Performance Monitor Purge All Alarms Send Message Status Monitor Tour Functions User Monitor zl SI SI SI SI S S S S S SI S Page Form Permission Access Secure Alarm Colors Control Outputs Facilities Parameters A SI NY SIS NS SI NY NYS zl SI NYE NYS NS Np NY SIS Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are Chapter 6 Operator administration user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 41 System Permission Profile form fields Field name Description Administrator level such as Backup and Restore Description Enter a description up to 60 characters This description will appear in the System Permissions Profile list box of the Permission form Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box This field reflects the facility to which this record is assigned For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Actions This section can be used to restrict or enable certain actions that are typically performed at a
182. Protocol TCP layers Table 127 Picture Perfect 4 5 terms explained continued Term Definition Subnet Network nodes that are related by the same IP address range Example computers with an address beginning with 192 168 1 x are in the same subnet Subnet mask A 32 bit address used in conjunction with an IP address to segment network traffic used to restrict transmissions to certain subnets Status The current condition of something such as a badge or a micro The Status monitor is used for viewing a micro s current database to verify configuration and scheduling Supported Language A language that can be used in Picture Perfect All languages other than English and French must be translated and made available before they can be used SYN A message from the host that synchronizes the micro s clock System Administrator A full function operator an operator permission without any function restrictions TCP IP Communications protocol used to connect to a variety of different types of hosts on both private networks and carrier networks such as the Internet TPS Transaction Processing System the program that communicates with microcontrollers Transaction Microcontroller activity TIY In UNIX based operating systems any terminal at all sometimes used to refer to the particular terminal controlling a given job Also the name of a UNIX command which outputs the name of the curr
183. RIO E eee d dee see owed 306 seine CEP 306 Fieldsand controls 33S nete or BEEN AAA EE EE 307 Related procedures ooi Eb rre rp RR EE RP ebbe p Rua e bees eed prese ERR Ra 307 Wide carriage printing of report events 307 BSG EEN Aa ARA ERR p FIERA PET dS HIR PES REPE 309 SL P gad en 310 Backing up your dotoboase ee eh hme hh nnn 310 sonst H 310 Fielde and Ke lr 311 Related Kelte 311 Archiving your database esie ee e EES REEL EEN E EELER AER 313 el TEEN 314 Fields and CONT ONS Seene eege DOO I DUE PRO Bend EES EEN EE AEN 314 Related procedures uses EEN EE NEE dii o EEN 315 Restoring your database NENNEN EIERE NEIER ENER e eere epe P Ee re er sar E RPER 316 EOM Pl CEET 316 Fields and Ke EE 316 Related procedUreSs sosio dE dE EE EE EEN wink EEN 317 Data Generator and templates 4 ros eacus saxo EE ht NEE eg 319 eu MEM 320 Running templates 5 oes we iQu we De rv LU a e SER Caw ta ER eDHE SEEN VER EN ON FOROS E Rs 320 Related procedures susce eese aae er EEERENCDPUUA RO UUDO d ON DU Eon d EPA e 320 Data Generator cheers prre Ure SE ev EE KE e HEX GEI qua VRrYiber b r E 321 Data Gerierator EEN 321 Fields and controls c v ese oe teuer ED E AER EE 322 Related Procedures M EE 322 Managing templates ed EINEN NEE eg e ev E STE SEENEN REOS REP E ORE RE 324 EXOMPIO 285 50 25 iscusisdintahditaas mae strate E E
184. Red Hat Linux 5 3 es AIX6 1 Informix 11 5 Picture Perfect 4 5 new features e Removed the need for root access Nested Zone Anti passback Global and Timed Mifare Smart Card Encoding capability New fields for Dept and Category on Badge Monitor Enhanced LDAP for unique schemas e Permission Form Preferences button e New History Rollover Alarm e Configurable alarm for disk and database full Enable case insensitive data queries from GUI e Alarm Blinking user configurable options Informix Replication for Picture Perfect Redundant systems new method of synchronization Picture Perfect and Facility Commander 2 2 single server database install Client support on Microsoft Vista Support for Firefox web browser Improved robustness and reduced vulnerabilities New Lockdown mode e New database user accounts important for import export integrations Additionally supported fields for Badge Activity Monitor 3 A Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Operating features UNIX like Operating System AIX or Linux provides multitasking multi user capabilities Multiple tasks can be performed by multiple users simultaneously An operator can view several windows at once Host System architecture is powerful enough to support the operating system and relational database management systems Graphical Menu Driven Operator Interface almost completely frees you from the keyboard Primary and secondary menus lead to input
185. STORY 0 Individual Description almmar D Individual ot 1 00 Fire Emergency BADGE HISTORY N BADGE HISTORY D Individual O Individual ES GLOBAL bdgmgr D Individual Zei E M CHECK cas og ch D Individual CHECK cas og ch dbmar DOOR FORCED OP DOOR HELD OPEN evtmgr HOST TO MICRO 0 INVALID BADGE INVALID ESCORT LOST BADGE MO DOWNSTREAM MO READER COMM maamgr mumgr ONE OR MORE RE OPERATOR HISTO 0 Individual O Individual 0 Individual 0 Individual 0 Individual O Individual 0 Individual O Individual 0 Individual O Individual D Individual O Individual D Individual O Individual D Individual Input Group State Disabled Enabled Boolean Type OR Any AND All O indivi Broadcast State Changes No Q Yes j Alarm Open Condition Ignored Detected Short Condition Ignored Detected oprmgr D Individual Fire lt GLOBAL gt 1 laf PANIC BUTTON IN D Individual prmar D Individual rcvmgr O Individual Delay Time 0 Individua jsa 2 4 Results 34 records Save operation completed successfully Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order
186. Status Active Results 1records Search operation completed successful 278 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Monitoring input activity The Input Monitor displays input activity transactions Figure 113 Input Monitor 33 Input Monitor uu E Alarm Monitor Badge Monitor Input Monitor Operator Monitor Status Monitor User Monitor Performance Monitor Input Monitor lu E 8 o Activity Type State Device Date Device Time Host Date Host Time Operator Date l Operator Time Description Fields and controls Table 108 Input Monitor fields Field name Description Activity Type The type of input transaction displayed INPUT State The actual state of the input either open closed short ground or error Device Date The date the activity occurred in the time zone of the device See Verifying time zones on page 168 Device Time The time the activity occurred in the time zone of the device See Verifying time zones on page 168 Host Date The date the activity occurred in the time zone of the host See Verifying time zones on page 168 Host Time The time the activity occurred in the time zone of the host See Verifying time zones on page 168 Operator Date The date the activity occurred in the time zone of the operator See Verifying time zones on page 168 Operator Time The time the activity occurred in the time
187. The size of this highlighting box is fixed to the aspect ratio of the image type 4 x 5 for photos 5x 1 for signatures When the cropping area is sized to your satisfaction move the highlighting box so that it covers the portion of the image that you want to capture Click Ok When you have completed your changes click Ok Then from the Epi Capture menu select Accept and Close From the Images tab toolbar click Save to save the record to your database To load the images for a record l 2 3 From the Access menu select People and then click the Personnel tab Select the Images tab and then click Find o to display a current list of records Select the Personnel record that the image is to be associated with and then click Load The image associated with the record displays Figure 95 Personnel form Load Image ij People ofa BH People Badges Places Uf Personnel personnel Type Department pue oa xe 4 2X Gio Personal Address Properties Category Manager Badge Manager Images User Fields Notes Photograph Lan La lll Has Photograph Signature a gi J g J 8 1 records lll Has Signature a Chapter 11 241 Badge management To Crop and enhance Click Capture to display the Epi Capture menu l Figure 96 EPI Capture menu Enhance Image Gray Image Set
188. To activate database encryption on page 61 Ifthe libstdc so 5 library is not installed on the host continue to Step To download and install the compat libstdc 33 3 2 3 61 i386 rpm package To download and install the compat libstdct 33 3 2 3 61 1386 rpm package l 2 Log on to the system as ppadmin At the command prompt stop Picture Perfect by typing rc pperf k If this is a redundant configuration stop Picture Perfect by typing pprscmd stop Change to the tmp directory by typing the following command cd tmp Chapter 4 61 Setup Navigate to the following web address to obtain the compat libstdct 33 3 2 3 61 1386 rpm http rpm pbone net index php3 stat 4 idpl 12267595 com compat libstdct 33 3 2 3 61 1386 rpm html Right click on one of the mirrors and then select Properties Copy the Address URL and then type the following command Paste the URL in place of the mirror wget mirror Install the compat libstdct 33 3 2 3 61 1386 rpm package by typing the following command rpm i tmp compat libstdc 33 3 2 3 61 i386 rpm To activate database encryption l 2 10 Log on to the system as ppadmin At the command prompt stop Picture Perfect by typing rc pperf k If this is a redundant configuration stop Picture Perfect by typing pprscmd stop Log on to the system as root by typing su root Type the following command to enable database
189. Type L Departments Description Division 19 4 y E Xx o C 3 Engineering EntSol Department UserFields Description Engineering Facility BOCA RATON sl IS ft ro url Location Boca Raton Division EntSol Manager J Smith Phone Results 444 555 5555 D records New record is ready Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 36 Department form fields Field name Description Description Type a description 1 to 60 characters to identify the department Example Marketing Division Type a site specific abbreviation 0 to 3 characters Example ABC Location Type where the department is located 0 to 20 characters in a building or city Example Lower Level Manager Type the name of the manager of the department 0 to 23 characters User Fields Type comments 0 to 40 characters Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box This field reflects the facility to which this record is assigned For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Chapter 5 77 System configuration Related pro
190. Use the Area Events form to define area events for each mode You can create events that affect all doors and readers in an area Defining an event requires you to select a mode set the time of the event select an area and specify one or more changes to the area readers or doors Note Do not set up the Area Events form to match the fields on the Area form Fields that do not need to be scheduled should not be selected for example if the area is already online do not select Online on the Area Event schedule Example An area defined as General Access is made up of several readers and doors It can be accessed Monday through Friday from 8 AM to 5 PM To accomplish this an Unlock Door at 8 AM runtime event is paired with a Lock Door at 5 PM runtime event on weekdays only Figure 81 Area Event form People Badges Places Areas Categories Area Events Description ms Uniock Door atsAM Gy C Al b 2 X o HM e x a 9 Lock Door at SPM GU AreaEvent Category Manager Routings Reader Fields Door Fields Description Unlock Door at 8 AM Facility GLOBAL 208 SS Je Area General Access lt GLOBAL gt ess SES Je Area Online Do Not Care Online Offline Two Man Rule Do Nat Care Disabled Standard O Modified Door Control Modified No Door Control Mode NORMAL lt GLORAL x Ja
191. a eee e el E 3 GO E b z Weekly Backup Bi Backup Event Description Weekly Backup Facility GLOBAL AT EECH Backup Type M Badge Wf Base Wf History Guard Tours V Tour History Time HH mm ss 23 00 00 Qq E Sunday Monday H Tuesday E Wednesday Thursday M Friday E Saturday Media Type Tape Disk File Filename Browse 219 220 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 90 Backup Event form fields Field name Description Description Type an output group event description up to 60 alphanumeric characters long Example Parking Lot Lights On 18 00 M F Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box This field reflects the facility to which this record is assigned For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Backup Type Select the databases to be backed up on this schedule Begin Event At Mode Start If this is a Start End event click if you want the event to activate at the start of the mode At Mode End If this is a Start End event click if you want the event to activate at the end of the mode
192. a wide variety of bit mapped display devices 413 414 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Index Activity Monitoring ys cise ccagie eee rpg rein OPENS 4 Address Dd 183 AIX 3 407 Alarm 18 33 43 44 45 46 47 105 106 113 114 115 117 118 120 121 123 126 130 141 190 212 263 264 KEE 269 299 314 367 385 Alarm Alert EE 267 Alarm and Badge Threshold eterne 142 Alarm Colors eest Ane a a rien Alarm Delay Alarmi EV ents rosana iE EE Alarm History Alarni History Overflow zd eso rase CEEE EE 127 Alarm History Threshold rete he tereti 135 Alarmi Instructiotis rete frr eint tr ET EIE 114 119 Alarm Messages 4 Alarm Monitor 16 18 32 42 44 45 106 113 116 119 120 Eet e 87 Alarm Notification Message 407 Alarmi Priority neni rn EE A A 45 Alarm Response seesse 43 116 184 263 264 267 269 270 Alarm Response Code tiet ertt BE Enni 135 EE EN Alarm Shunting oi LAunCIM M EAE C C Alarms 4 31 32 113 115 116 117 119 120 121 123 213 266 384 ALALINS IEEE 117 Antipassback E 5 180 407 Antipassback Enforcement eene titre tenementa 178 AnitizPassback In oie nee YER Ee eterni 185 Anti Passback Ot ici iri rie pr E ER Flop beats 185 Antipassback Vio
193. ability to detect a sensing violation will not cancel the door s current timer 382 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual e Enabling or disabling Pre alarm using the radio button has no effect on an on going timing process If Pre alarm is disabled when the door opens it stays disabled until the door closes If Pre alarm is enabled when the door opens it stays enabled until the door closes e Creating a Pre alarm input group during a timing process will not affect the Pre alarm it continues to behave as if it were enabled Removing a Pre alarm input group during the timing process will have different effects based on when it is removed Removing it before Pre alarm activates will prevent activation Removing it after activation will prevent Pre alarm from resetting By removing the input group the door loses its pointer to the input group and its associated alarm and outputs e Changing the door s Allowable Open Time also has different effects based on when it is changed and the value to which it is changed The rules below are listed in priority order In other words the second rule has no effect when the first rule overrides it Changing the Allowable Open Time after Pre alarm activates has no effect When the old Allowable Open Time prevents Pre alarm from activating and it is changed after the door is opened the change has no effect Pre alarm will not activate when the new Allowable Open Time prevents it from doing so When P
194. ader DI DO Click the Reader DI DO Config button 377 378 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual 3 Select the Fire DO after Floor Selection button to enable Elevator Access Method 2 in which after a valid badge read a floor has to be selected and if it is an accessible floor the DO will be activated See page 370 for more information on this method of elevator access Otherwise the default Method 1 in which after a valid badge read the DOs for all accessible floors are activated will be employed See page 369 for more information on this method of elevator access 4 Click the Reader button and select a reader from the list box The reader should be defined as an elevator reader 5 For each floor click the appropriate button and select an input and output from the list boxes To appear in the list box the input must be defined as an elevator input Every input chosen must have a corresponding output chosen This type of configuration supports up to 39 floors per micro Click the Refresh Floor Defs button to update the floor labels if changes have been made since the Config window was displayed 6 For each floor define floor names See How to edit floor labels on page 376 The Category Floors form Use the Category Floors form to assign a category to certain floors of each elevator This category is used to establish a match between the badge and the floor when granting access The number of categories assigned to each elevator must
195. aders form Reader Function j Doors And Readers Chapter 18 Advanced access control features Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zone Doors Readers ReaderEvents DoorEvents Description n o 2 Q amp Ex ov x Dio Reader Description Inputs and Outputs State Type Function Options Logical Reader Function Normal APBIn APB Out OTS Ainiou OT amp An OT amp AOut Reader Function 4 On the Reader Description tab under Micro verify that all readers in the area are assigned to the same micro 5 Onthe Options tab under Number of Badges verify that all readers are set to Single Figure 157 Readers form Reader Control Doors And Readers ote E Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zone Doors Readers Reader Events Door Events Description 15 1 00 STLMAINT 15 1 01 STLILLE C 15 2 00 STLALE C 15 2 01 STLALE GI 40 1 01 STL 2N80 40 2 01 STL 2N104 32 1 00 STLILOBB 32 1 01 STLILOBB 32 2 00 STLILOBB 32 2 01 STL LOBB 31 2 00 STLIEMPL 31 2 01 STL EMPL 31 3 00 STL EMPL 31 3 01 STL EMPL 53 01 01 DTR SEI 53 03 01 DTR DBI 53 03 00 DTRISTE 53 02 01 DTRANNE 53 02 00 DTR TAN 53 01 00 DTRIBAD 54 01 00 DTRISTE 21 1 01 STL OCC R 21 2
196. adge Encode Number to be entered by swiping a badge in a local console reader assigned to the workstation used to issue the badge A prompt advises you when to swipe the badge The badge encode number appears in the Badge Encode Number field For information on setting up a badge issue workstation see To set up your Imaging workstations on page 57 Note Ifthe Seed Counter and the Copy to BID options are enabled the Badge Format BID and Reader Issue fields are disabled even on new records The Badge Format is set to the default chosen during Seed Counter installation and the BID is generated automatically See Seed counter on page 366 Badge Click to display the Badge Format list box Select the desired format This is not necessary unless the system Format has more than one badge format Note Ifthe Seed Counter and the Copy to BID options are enabled the Badge Format BID and Reader Issue fields are disabled even on new records The Badge Format is set to the default chosen during Seed Counter installation and the BID is generated automatically See Seed counter on page 366 Status Select one of the four badge status descriptions There is one type of Valid badge status Active and three types of Invalid badge statuses Suspended Lost Deleted You should update the badge status as needed Example If a valid badge is lost this status change should be indicated in the Badge Status box Then if the lost badge is later tried in
197. al Enter a response either click the RSVP button to select from a list of alarm responses or type a new response When you click Add the selected response appears in the Enter New Response box The maximum length of a response is 255 characters If the responses selected from the Responses list box exceed this limit a warning will pop up indicating this and the response will be truncated down to the maximum length The response may then be edited in the Enter New Response box to make the truncated response more presentable Log the response To log the response without clearing the alarm click OK You can continue to select this alarm again to enter new responses The previous responses appear in the Responses To Date box To log the response and clear the alarm click Remove on the Alarm Response window See Related procedures on page 266 Optional Click the close button X button to close the window without altering the state of the alarm Chapter 13 Alarm activity monitors Monitoring badge activity The Badge Monitor displays the following types of badge activities Table 105 Badge activities Valid Valid transactions APB In A valid read occurred in an Antipassback In reader APB Out A valid read occurred in an Antipassback Out reader Degraded Open A read occurred when an 8RP board was offline from the Micro 4 CPU Open A valid read occurred in a Normal reader or a Keypad reader and the door was opened
198. an input as the exit button Click Exit Button Input and select an input to associate with the exit button Figure 158 Doors form M2MR j voors Ang Keagers Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zone Doors Readers Reader Events Door Events LL Description a J es 4 X Door Description Inputs and Outputs amp g Door Sensor Input 22 Y Exit Button Input 22 Y 4 Strike Output 22 we M2MR Output v E Y Ef Held Open Sensing Ignored Detected Held Open In Group wend n Forced Open Monitoring Ignored Detected Forced Open In Group v eee ge 4 Pre Alarm Disabled Enabled Pre Alarm In Group 7 The input selected as the exit button input must be set to the following On the Inputs form under Input Control Setup the Input Enabled button must be de selected the default 8 Set Exit Button Asserts Strike to enabled Figure 159 Doors form M2MR Chapter 18 Advanced access control features Doors And Readers _ Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zone Doors Readers Reader Events Door Events M2MR Output Door 10 1 00 STL SEC C 10 3 00 S1 A Ur 5 S o a i Rx o 2 xX amp Door Description
199. an operator to use this field they must have at least View page level permission for the Time Zone form See Creating facility permission profiles on page 81 Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box This field reflects the facility to which this record is assigned For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Permission The functions the operator can perform Example System Administrator This list box reflects the permissions created with the Permissions form Receive Alarm Alert Select if this operator is to receive Alarm Alert messages Receive Reset Alarm Alert Select is this operator is to receive Reset Alarm messages Receive System Notifications Select if this operator is to receive System Notification messages LDAP Authentication Select to enable LDAP authentication See Configuring LDAP support on page 50 Permission to Change Password Select to allow this operator to change their password If this option is not selected the password can only be changed by the System Administrator Change Password on Next Login Select to force this operator to change their password the next time they log on to the system Password Expiration e Password Never Expires If checked the password has no expiration date Expires in days From the list of values in the drop down list select the frequency at which the password should expire Warn prior to Expira
200. an that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 117 Report Event form fields Field name Description Description Type a report event description up to 30 alphanumeric characters long Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box This field reflects the facility to which this record is assigned For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Report Type Select the report you want to schedule from the PPSQL Report drop down list Note If Enforcement of Report Permissions is enabled through the System Parameters form only those reports that the operator has permission to access will be displayed HHmmss Enter the time of day that this report is to run Days of the Week Select the days of the week that the report is to run Printer From the drop down list select a printer Remember to consider the width specifications of the report when choosing a printer Related procedures To schedule an SQL report l 2 Sb oa con cimo M From the Reports menu select Report and then click the Reports tab Define your query and report format through the Reports form and save it under the desired name From the Reports menu select Report Events and then click New Type the Description of this report event Enter the time this report is to run and select the days on which it is to run Click the PPSQL Report button to display a
201. anager queue size eflash eFlash Manager queue size timerd Timer Daemon queue size Chapter 13 289 Alarm activity monitors Related procedures To view performance 1 From the Monitor menu select Performance Monitor LI 2 Ifyou want to create a report of this information click Save tosavethereportasa txt file Monitoring log file messages The Log monitor allows an operator to view in real time the contents of the Picture Perfect log file cas log log xxxx where xxxx is the current month and day For example cas log log 1105 is the log file for November 5th Figure 121 Log Monitor jLegMonitor PRE P P R R le Alarm Monitor Badge Monitor Input Monitor Operator Monitor Log Monitor uH ame aso Type Message Source Time jar http 3 11 generated SYN for host 1 micro 56 timerd 10 23 18 399 jar http 3 11 generated SYN for host 1 micro 50 timerd 10 23 21 445 jar http 43 11 deviterm DOh can t open in O NONBLOCK mode errno 2 moddrv 10 23 22 935 jar http 3 11 dev term DOh can t open in O NONBLOCK mode errno 2 moddrv 10 23 32 935 jar http 3 11 generated SYN for host 1 micro 22 timerd 10 23 33 494 jar http 3 11 generated SYN for host 1 micro 41 timerd 10 23 35 545 jar http 3 11 generated SYN for host 1 micro 55 timerd 10 23 35 556 jar http 3 11 generated SYN for host 1 micro 33 timerd 10 23 39 597 jar http 3 11 dev term D
202. ance RAN Remote Alarm Notification An optional package which when installed routes alarms from the Picture Perfect system to a remote non Picture Perfect system The alarms can then be processed by and responded to from the remote system Readers Badge readers are devices connected to the system that read the encoded badge numbers They are usually located near doors or gates or in elevators that the system controls Redundant System A Picture Perfect redundant system detects faults and automatically transfers the workload to the backup host The transfer of control from the primary host to the backup host occurs rapidly to ensure that there is almost no loss of data or alarms Relational Database A database that uses a table structure to store data Relationships among tables are logically specified at the time of user access into the database they are not built into the data structures themselves Response Text that the operator selects or types when answering an alarm RS 232 A standard method of transmitting data across serial cables used by modems printers and other serial devices Schedule Event A time dependent change to a mode area reader door alarm input group or output group See Operating Mode SCSI Semaphore A high speed interface that can connect to computer devices such as hard drives CD ROM drives and tape drives SCSI is pronounced as Scuzzy In programming especially in
203. and a Cancel button The OK button unlocks the door and dismisses the dialog The Cancel button dismisses the dialog but does not unlock the door If the door is not allowed to be unlocked the dialog only shows a Close button which dismisses the dialog If the operator clicks the OK button to unlock the door the door strike output command event is recorded in operator history Any invalid transaction denies the operator the option of unlocking the door The monitor is frozen while the photo is being displayed to allow the operator to read the text description of the transaction The text description includes the name of the badge holder and the name of the reader where the transaction originated If a photo cannot be displayed a dialog advises the operator of the reason This dialog includes a Close button to dismiss the dialog and free the Activity Monitor Save Search and Print affect the contents of the window but not the photo New clears the monitor window but does not dismiss the photo Freeze freezes the monitor but will not free the monitor while it is frozen by a photo The monitor returns to normal when the operator dismisses the photo by clicking the Close box If Authorization Not Required is active the photo will appear and the door will automatically unlock if this was a valid badge read Related procedures To view badge activity 1 From the Monitor menu select Badge Monitor 2 To view badge activity make sure that rou
204. and controls Table 109 Operator Monitor fields Field name Description Operator Date Login ID The Login name the operator types to gain access to Picture Perfect as defined in the Login ID field of the Operator form Employee ID The company identification number assigned to the operator using the system as defined in the Employee Id field on the Operator form Action One of the following types of activity performed by the operator Log on Log off Update Delete Query Command Event Status request Shutdown request or Insert The date the activity occurred in the time zone of the operator See Verifying time zones on page 168 Operator Time The time the activity occurred in the time zone of the operator See Verifying time zones on page 168 Device Date The date the activity occurred in the time zone of the device See Verifying time zones on page 168 Device Time The time the activity occurred in the time zone of the device See Verifying time zones on page 168 Host Date The date the activity occurred in the time zone of the host See Verifying time zones on page 168 Host Time The time the activity occurred in the time zone of the host See Verifying time zones on page 168 Record The description of the record viewed updated or deleted Example Smith David Description Table The Picture Perfect table to which the record that was changed belongs Example person Field The field name of
205. and she has defined the Door Forced Open alarm as a priority 1 alarm to be routed to the Alarm Monitor on the Lobby workstation The instruction Forced Door Send Security Guard will display in red letters on a yellow background Figure 48 Alarms Form Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones L7 Alarms Alarm Colors Alarm Events Alarm Messages Alarm Responses l Description 1 fe a MICRO PLACED OF Q lei X04 X a Gi SCHEDULE DID NOT x TRACED PERSON A Alarm Description Instructions D DOOR FORCED OPEN Description UNKNOWN BADGE DOOR FORCED OPEN HOST TO MICRO D MO UPSTREAM MIC Facity MO DOWNSTREAM GLOBAL BS MO READER COMM mA E BADGE HISTORY ee ALARM HISTORY O Pere DOOR HELD OPEN d INVALID BADGE Route Definition GE Alarm Monitor Lobby Workstation e ess SUSPENDED BADGE a Y INVALID ESCORT L ANNEX FIRE ALARM Alarm Routing 3055 HALON 1ST S MONITOR AND HISTORY GLOB e z TPS RESPAWNED e Y P d FILE SYSTEM SPAC DATABASE SPACE Online Color Picker DURESS ALARM O No Color Picker M1 12 KATHY POT Yes M1 12 SHEILA SISK lt Color Sample M1 12516 NAN CUB Inhibit Schedule Changes M1 12M WILLIAMS No Background Foreground Oves Results f T 446 de Immediate Rese
206. arm to remain online until the system switches back to normal operating mode Note You may need to schedule a parallel mode end alarm event in case the system does not return to normal operating mode for other scheduled events to occur However the preferred way is to schedule the input group offline online This way no input activity ISC is sent to the host See Input Group Events Offline To ensure that normal daytime activity does not trigger an alarm use a runtime alarm event to put this alarm offline during the day Example Use an alarm event to set this alarm offline before the business day starts MTWTF at 07 30 Use a parallel alarm event to set this alarm online after hours MTWTF at 17 00 During the weekend between Friday at 5 PM and Monday at 7 30 AM this alarm is online and does not cycle daily Do Not Care See Radio buttons on page 27 Mode Select the mode in which the alarm event will occur An event will not take place if it is not assigned to a mode and it will only occur in those modes to which it is assigned Begin Event At Mode Start If this is a Start End event click if you want the event to activate at the start of the mode At Mode End If this is a Start End event click if you want the event to activate at the end of the mode Time If the event is a Run Time event click if you want the event to activate at a specified time HHmmss If the event is a Run Time event selec
207. as Emergency or Fire Emergency modes are usually activated by the operator using Mode Command and typically use start end events Remember that most mode start events require parallel mode end events Unless there are events that need to cycle during the emergency mode you do not need to set up runtime events Holiday modes Create Holiday modes to handle access requirement changes during scheduled holidays Define the mode on the Modes Tab gt Mode Creation form using a description such as Holiday or Vacation Holiday modes are usually activated automatically by scheduling them using Mode Events and typically use start end events Remember that most mode start events require parallel mode end events Be sure to schedule the start of a Holiday mode so that its events are timed properly in regard to events of the normal operating mode For example a setting of Holiday mode may be to leave the lobby doors locked Normal mode however always unlocks the lobby doors at 7 AM If Holiday mode starts on Monday morning at 8 AM and no schedule has been created to lock the doors when the Holiday mode starts the lobby doors will already have been unlocked by Normal mode an hour before therefore the lobby doors will remain in an unlocked state throughout the Holiday mode One way to keep the doors locked is to schedule Holiday mode to start when the doors are still in a locked state prior to 7 AM Another option is to make a mode start event that l
208. as an admini terminal not as a workstation Fields and controls strative The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 29 Workstation form fields Field name Description Description Type any alphanumeric combination 1 to 60 characters Example Command Center Workstation Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box This field reflects the facility to which this record is assigned For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 IP Address or Host Name operating system file etc hosts on the host system Type the IP address or hostname of the client workstation This must be specified in the Imaging Workstation Select this check box if this terminal will be used as an Imaging workstation Reader Issue The reader used as the Badge Issue reader See Reader Issue on page 225 Related procedures To create edit or delete a workstation record Chapter 4 57 Setup 1 From the Setup menu select Workstations and then click the Workstations tab 2 Refer to Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 To set up your Imaging workstations 1 Install the capture card optional To capture your images you
209. assign the facility profile to a new facility for each operator that may have been using the deleted facility Deleting an existing facility will effectively remove an operator s access to that facility Setting up printers Use the Printers form to add each printer configured during installation for server side printing This only applies to Activity Routing and Report Events Figure 18 Printers form Printers System Parameters Printers Imaging Terminals Badge Designs Custom Lists Queue Hame 1 Ip Results 1 records Fields and controls LJ GLQ 1 Facility Q 4 x Exo xX SC e Printers Queue Name Ip Description Ip1 GLOBAL Print Manager w into Refresh Status Stop Queue Clean Queue Start Spooler Queue Jobs Status Queue Dev Status Jop Files User PP Percent Bks Cp Rnk Chapter 4 Setup The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 28 Printer form fields Field name Description Description characters A description of the printer includ
210. at is wired to the same micro as the associated door strike output The system displays an operator message if you select an input point on the wrong micro Do not attach an input group to the input unless the input is a supervised input Exit Button Click Exit to display the Inputs list box Select the desired input for this exit button Be sure the Exit Button Asserts Strike field in the Door Control box is set to Enabled Note Select an exit button input that is wired to the same micro as the associated door strike output The system displays an operator message if you select an input point on the wrong micro Make sure the exit input is tied to the reader s valid input group Forced Open In Group Held Open In Group Click to display the Input Groups list box Select an input group to activate The associated alarm will be triggered when a Forced Open condition occurs Be sure the Forced Open Monitoring field is set to Detected Note Only Trigger on Input non boolean input groups are displayed in the list boxes Click to display the Input Groups list box Select an input group to activate The associated alarm will be triggered when a Held Open condition occurs Be sure the Held Open Sensing field is set to Detected Note Only Trigger on Input non boolean input groups are displayed in the list boxes 189 190 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 80 Doors form fields continued Field
211. at server To shut down the server type Linux var www apache tomcat 5 5 12 bin shutdown sh AIX usr HTTPServer apache tomcat 5 5 12 bin shutdown sh To start up the server type Linux var www apache tomcat 5 5 12 bin startup sh AIX usr HTTPServer apache tomcat 5 5 12 bin startup sh e Check the catalina out log file for any Java exceptions during startup Linux var www apache tomcat 5 5 12 10gs catalina out AIX usr HTTPServer apache tomcat 5 5 12 1logs catalina out Listed below is a sample printout of a proper startup 11 Chapter 19 397 Troubleshooting maintenance support 2006 05 16 09 50 30 301 INFO Executing size 2277 query DropDownForeignControlPanel category main db QueryUtil QueryUtil java 255 2006 05 16 09 50 30 563 INFO Executing size 2277 query DropDownForeignControlPanel category2 main db QueryUtil QueryUtil java 255 2006 05 16 09 50 32 578 INFO initializeStaticDatacache semi static10 number queries run 2 main server ServerCache ServerCache java 158 ay 16 2006 9 50 35 AM org apache coyote httpll HttpllBaseProtocol start NFO Starting Coyote HTTP 1 1 on http 8075 ay 16 2006 9 50 35 AM org apache coyote httpll HttpllBaseProtocol start NFO Starting Coyote HTTP 1 1 on http 8443 ay 16 2006 9 50 36 AM org apache jk common ChannelSocket init NFO JK ajp13 listening on 0 0 0 0 8009 ay 16 2006 9 50 36 AM org apache jk server JkMain start NFO Jk running ID 0
212. at the URL on the browser s address field is https lt hostname gt Picture and not http hostname Picture e Also verify that the SSL certificate used on the server has not expired Use the following command on the server to check the certificate usr bin openssl x509 in cas db text hostname crt text Chapter 19 Troubleshooting maintenance support Imaging troubleshooting Problem Exception output is shown in the Java Console and Imaging functionality is disabled in the client There is a known limitation whereby a client PC that is an imaging workstation the ImageWare software has been installed can only run one client at a time to a host where the image package is installed Only one imaging client can be run at a time on a PC Problem The Print and or Preview buttons on the Badge or Personnel form are not active dimmed See Printing badges on page 242 for more information 1 Verify the following la Verify that the operator has permission to print badges in the facility in which the particular badges they are working with reside If the operator had been logged on previously to an account that did not grant imaging permissions the operator should log out close all browser windows and open a new browser window to log on again Note The operator must always log on for imaging operations from a newly opened top level browser window Possible causes include Permission profiles were changed by
213. at time If you assign a different category to each computer operator shift then you can control when certain staff members can access the computer room MIS Start Shift 1 GLOBAL NORMAL 7 45 00 Comput MIS Start Shift 2 GLOBAL NORMAL 4 45 00 Comput End Shift 1 GLOBAL NORMAL 5 15 00 Comput End Shift 2 GLOBAL NORMAL 1 15 00 Comput Four area events are defined one to start Shift 1 at 07 45 AM one to end it at 5 15 PM one to start Shift 2 at 4 45 PM and one to end it at 1 15 AM Example 2 Control how long they have access to the area A series of area events that add and change a single category can control the time frame in which a contractor s job is performed For example one area event adds a category to the R amp D Lab at 4 00 PM to allow the cleaning crew access another area event replaces the category at 4 30 PM to restrict the time spent in this area You can use the same strategy to restrict access to a computer vault where daily backups are stored Clean Reasearch a GLOBAL NORMAL 4 00 00 Research an End Clean Researc GLOBAL NORMAL 4 30 00 Research and Two area events are defined one to allow access to the Clean ing crew at 4 00 PM one to end it at 4 30 PM Chapter 11 249 Badge management Example 3 Control when they can enter An area event can change the categories of an area at a specific time For example two MIS shifts need to access the computer room d
214. ate Do Not Care Do Not Care Yes On O No O ott Mode Ee Leslie Begin Event At Mode Start At Mode End O Time HH mm ss Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow 218 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 89 Output Group Event form fields Field name Description Description Type an output group event description up to 60 alphanumeric characters long Example Parking Lot Lights On 18 00 M F Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box Selecting a facility will allow the administrator to restrict operator access to those records in a specific facility For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Enabled Output groups such as lights or perimeter cameras can be enabled to operate as required at scheduled times Yes To allow an output group to operate as required at scheduled times No To disable an output group during scheduled times Do Not Care See Seed counter on page 366 State The outputs in the output group such as emergency lights or sirens can be turned on or off Note Remember to define the duration of the output using t
215. ate associated alarms Do Not Care See Radio buttons on page 27 Two Man Rule Mode These radio buttons are enabled only if the operator has Occupancy Control permission granted To leave Two Man Rule unaffected when the event is triggered none of the radio buttons should be selected See Radio buttons on page 27 Note Ifthe micro is unable to activate a scheduled Two Man Rule event an alarm Schedule did not run will be sent to the Alarm Monitor This could occur if the area configuration changed since the schedule was set up For example if the Logical Reader Function of a reader in the area was inadvertently changed to Normal the micro would be unable to activate the schedule Disabled Select this radio button to deactivate Two Man Rule mode Standard Select this radio button to activate the standard Two Man Rule mode which ensures that at least two badge holders occupy a given controlled space Modified with Door Control Select this radio button to activate the Modified Two Man Rule mode which restricts badge holder access to a controlled area based on their M2MR category type The first two badge holders to enter a controlled area must be team members At least two team members must be present in the controlled space until all Guests have exited Additionally a team member within the controlled space must press a door release button to allow entry to any subsequent badge holders The door release button m
216. ategory When you select a category the existing reports in that category display in the Select a Report list pane You can create a new category by clicking New Category rename an existing category by clicking Rename Category or delete a category by clicking Delete Category Select a Report A list box from which you can open a predefined report Select the desired report Note If report permissions are enabled only the reports that the operator has access to will be displayed SQL Keywords and Operators This list box displays SQL reserve words relational operators and logical operators which you select and apply to an SQL statement When you select a name and click Apply the name appears wherever your cursor is located in the Enter SQL Statement window See Working with SQL on page 300 for more information SQL Variables This list box displays pre defined variables See SQL variables on page 300 for a description of the syntax of these variables 293 294 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 114 Reports form fields continued Field name Description Table Names Select and apply table names to SQL statements after FROM This list box includes all the table names in the Picture Perfect database and each contains different types of data that you may want to include in your report When you select a table name and click Apply the name appears wherever your cursor is located in the Enter SQL Statem
217. ation first occurs its Condition is alarm and its Process State is active When a valid keypad response occurs the violation s Condition goes to reset Process state Active No alarm response has been made Pending Partial alarm response has been made Complete Final alarm response has been made 386 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Selecting the alarm on the Alarm Monitor pops up a window which displays the alarm s instructions and allows the operator to enter a response The instructions are the only means of notifying the operator that keypad alarm response is required The ways in which the operator can exit the pop up are listed below Cancel Response is ignored and the Process State stays the same OK Response is saved and the Process State goes to pending The alarm remains on the Alarm Monitor e Remove Response is saved and the Process State goes to complete When the alarm s Condition is reset the alarm is removed from the Alarm Monitor When the alarm s Condition is alarm the alarm remains on the Alarm Monitor Multiple access violations It is possible for the same access violation to occur more than once during a keypad alarm response For instance a door can be forced open then closed and then forced open again all before the keypad alarm response is completed for the first violation In this situation only one alarm appears in the Alarm Monitor The alarm firs
218. ature set as there is no reset condition for this type of alarm Immediate reset allows the operator to remove clear an alarm without waiting for the reset condition Immediate Dial Required This feature is used for dial up micros only Click Yes if you want the associated micro to dial the host immediately when this alarm condition occurs Table 52 Alarms form fields continued Tab Field name Reset Outputs Chapter 7 Alarm activity configuration Description e Auto Reset Outputs Select to allow the system to automatically reset any output groups associated with this alarm when the input resets The system resets any devices lights sirens etc operated by outputs in an output group Example You may decide to use an auto reset for an output device such as a camera that requires toggling on or off Manual Reset Outputs Click this button to require an operator to manually reset any outputs associated with this alarm The system resets any devices associated with the alarm Any devices lights sirens etc operated by outputs stay on until manually reset Example You may decide to use a manual reset for a motion sensor that activates floodlights in a parking lot The manual reset requires the operator to turn the output off using the Output button on the Alarm Response window Duration Reset Outputs Click this button to allow the system to reset any outputs associated with this alarm when the outpu
219. automatically at the specified day and time Backup page 219 Backup Events Tab 45 Create report event records to schedule SQL reports to run Reports See Scheduling reports on at specific times Reports Events Report Events Tab page 306 33 34 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 23 The steps for configuring a Picture Perfect system continued Step Task Menu Reference 46 Create badge records to control the functions and Access See Defining badges on page 224 capabilities of the badge Badges Badges Tab 47 Create personnel records to identify each badge holder Access See Defining personnel on People page 231 Personnel Tab 48 Optional Setup See Setting up badge designs on Set up badge designs Badge Designs page 256 Badge Designs Tab 49 Optional Setup See Creating and editing custom Create custom forms Custom Forms forms on page 330 Custom Forms Tab 50 Optional Setup See Creating and editing custom Create custom lists Custom Lists lists on page 333 Custom Lists Tab 51 Optional Any Form Toolbar See Managing templates on Create master templates for generating new records with the necessary links predefined Manage Templates page 324 Chapter A Setup This chapter describes information related to using the Picture Perfect forms It also includes information on optional setup procedures In this chapter DyerWeW 2 nel ees NEEN NEEN el 4 Re de
220. b visitor tables if installed vhist ba visitor history if installed alarm a alarm history oper a operator history To launch the cba backup option 1 Open a terminal window 2 Type a command including options For example to backup and verify the base Picture Perfect package to a disk file type cba c b v d tmp basebackup base badge The cba backup option will back up the files contained in the backup cfg file Archiving your database The system prompts you by way of an alarm to perform a specific archiving function for Badge History Alarm History or Operator History when the primary table for that history reaches 95 percent capacity At that time the system takes the records stored in that primary history table and moves them to a temporary history table When an archive is performed for a particular history it uses the information in its temporary table that way the primary table is free to start collecting new information right away If an archive is not performed before the primary table 95 percent capacity again the data in the temporary table will be overwritten and the original archive data lost It is therefore important to perform the indicated archive when the system notifies you through an alarm Since the time needed to reach a history threshold varies with activity levels it s hard to predict when a particular threshold will be reached A Force Rollover option exists therefore whi
221. be selected by left clicking the first desired record then dragging the mouse and releasing it on the last desired record Non connected rows may be added to the selection by holding down the CTRL key on the keyboard while selecting the row with the mouse All selected rows will be highlighted When multiple rows are selected if the field data is the same for all records the field value displays However if the field data 1s not the same in all records the field value is replaced by an asterisk Click Delete x The selected records appear in the data grid with the deleted icon ff next to them Click Save This icon is not available if all required information is not entered or if you do not have the required permissions for the form If any record dependencies exist for the record you are deleting a list of those records displays The list must be cleared before the record can be deleted from the database Printing records To print a record l Figure 9 From the Primary menu such as Access Configuration Control or Setup select a Secondary menu item and then click the appropriate tab For example Access People Personnel From the toolbar click Find Q The record list window or data grid shows the results of search operations and allows you to quickly navigate through the records found by a search When an application is started the record list window is initially empty Select a record from the list in the da
222. between the first and second required badge swipes click Two Man Rule Output and select the output to be triggered 7 Save and exit the Readers form 357 358 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual To set up the area doors Note The door sensor input and the door output must be physically connected to the same micro 1 From the Configuration menu select Doors and Readers and then click the Doors tab From the toolbar click Find to locate the door record you want to set up Select the appropriate input from the list displayed 2 3 On the Inputs and Outputs tab click Door Sensor Input 4 5 Define an M2MR output on each door to the area that will be used for entry APB IN or T amp A IN Click M2MR Output and select an output to associate with a warning device such as a horn or strobe light 6 Define an input as the exit button Click Exit Button Input and select an input to associate with the exit button Figure 168 Doors form M2MR j voors Ang Keagers Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zone Doors Readers Reader Events Door Events LL Description a J es 4 X Door Description Inputs and Outputs amp g Door Sensor Input 22 Y Exit Button Input 22 Y 4 Strike Output 22 we M2MR Output v E Y Ef Held Open Sensing Ignor
223. cedures To create edit or delete a department record 1 From the Access menu select People and then click the Departments tab 2 Refer to Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 Defining personnel types Use the Personnel Type form to define different types of personnel These entries populate a list box used on the Badges form to assign a personnel type to each badge Four personnel types are already entered into the system Permanent Temporary Contractor and Visitor Additional types can be entered as described in 7o create edit or delete a personnel type record on page 78 Note Available Categories and Temporary Categories When a category is assigned to a person as a temporary category that category will continue to remain in the Available list This is to allow for the operator to set up multiple schedules for that category on the same person An example A cleaning crew needs access from 5pm 10pm Tuesday Friday on Saturday they need access from Noon 5pm Example Full time employees are assigned a Personnel Type of Permanent Figure 27 Personnel Type form People People Badges Places Q Personnel Personnel Type Department ree ree Temporary Contractor Type Visitor Description Permanent Facility GLOBAL EN miim ra Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Fields and controls The fol
224. ces between digits in the Phone field Phone2 Enter the badge holder s alternate phone number up to 30 characters You may type dashes or spaces between digits in the Phone field Download Upon Save WARNING Use of this feature can severely impact system performance and is recommended for GE Security Support personnel only If you select this button any time a badge record is saved it is downloaded to all micros subject to the following conditions New Records New records that are created by copying an existing record that has this field set to On will be automatically changed so thot this field is set to Neutral This prevents accidental downloads to all micros when using the Copy feature of the New button You must manually set this field to On Updated Records Updated records are only downloaded to all micros if the previous setting was set to Off The next time a badge record field is changed for a badge record that previously had this field set to On the record will only be sent to those micros that have learned this badge To resend an updated badge record to all micros 1 Setthe Download Upon Save field to Off 2 Savethe record 3 Make any other field changes if needed 4 Setthe Download Upon Save field to On 5 Savethe record If you select Off any time a badge record is saved it is only sent to those micros that have learned this badge record which is the normal method of operation This is the
225. cess without a badge The free access without a badge method allows anyone to walk onto an elevator and have free access to designated floors without using a badge in any way For this method to work you must configure a Door State of unlocked for the door to each floor you want included then associate a digital output to the door When this is in place the free access floor buttons will always be lit regardless of a badge swipe When a badge is swiped access is given to all floors for which the badge is valid along with the free access floors Free access without a badge can be scheduled as described in Scheduling elevator free access on page 379 How to set up elevator control To implement elevator control follow these steps for each access controlled elevator in the system 1 Define the maximum number of floors you want to control using the System Parameters form Depending on the configuration this number is based either on a per elevator micro basis or is divided between all elevator readers on a micro 2 Depending on the configuration define a Micro 5 as an elevator micro on the Micros form or define a Micro 5 as a normal micro and a reader on that micro as an elevator reader on the Readers form 3 Define an output for each floor on the Output form 4 Fora Reader DI DO configuration define an input for each floor on the Input form 5 Define the type of elevator configuration the number of floors for the elevator an
226. ch allows you to archive data on a regular schedule such as once a week This task can then be incorporated into your normal backup procedure The Force Rollover option takes data in the primary table and transfers it to the temporary table even if the primary table is not full The Force Rollover option will only be displayed on the Backup window if the data currently in the temporary table has already been archived This prevents un archived data from being erased when new data overwrites it This data will however be overwritten when the primary table becomes full Note In Picture Perfect 4 1 in addition to the Archive Notice pop up an alarm is triggered to notify that it is time to perform an archive 314 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Example The following example is an archive of the Alarm table to a Disk file Figure 123 Archive Form Backup Restore Backup Archive Restore Backup Events EX Archive Include history data for Save to Badge Farce Rollover C Tape vi Alarm Force Rollover DiskFie Destination File alarm Archive Browse Operator orce ove Tour v Generate Verification Report Event Force Rollover NOTE If your backup file is expected to exceed 2 GB the location where the file is to be stored MUST BE defined as a Large File System to ensure that the backup file will be complete Fields and c
227. checked value unchecked value field UI Control Displays a check box with the text label Output Replaces tag with either checked value or unchecked value SQL keywords In an SQL select statement only the SELECT clause and the FROM clause are required The other clauses are optional SQL is case sensitive For example if you specify Door the query finds anything with the word Door in initial caps but does not find the word DOOR in all caps To include both type WHERE description Door OR DOOR The SQL database stores information in tables A table is a collection of information organized into columns and rows Each table contains one or more columns A column contains one specific type of information such as last_ name Each row contains all the data about one of the records the table describes A row contains one or more columns In your SQL select statement the SELECT clause limits the columns and the WHERE clause limits the rows You can create direct relationships between tables when you query a database to generate a report The report displays data from several different tables as if the data belongs to a single table See Logical operators on page 305 and Relational operators on page 305 for information on describing relations between two values SELECT Use the SELECT clause to find data from selected columns in a table The report retrieves columns of data and lists the data under each column headin
228. cify the way the hour minutes and seconds appear in the time of day HH MM SS or HHMMSS Time displays in military 24 hour format Click a radio button to select the system time format Even though the system will display time in one format or the other it should be noted that a time value can be entered in either format It should also be noted that time values can be entered in abbreviated format The only abbreviated formats supported for data entry are the following SS MMSS HH MM Alarms Enforce UL Specification This field will alter the operation of the Remove button in the Alarm Response window If the No button is selected the Remove button will operate normally that is it will always be available If Yes is selected recommended the Remove button will be grayed out unless the alarm is in reset state This means that the operator will be unable to remove the alarm until it has been reset The exception is alarms with the Immediate Reset Input control option set Because these alarms move instantly into reset state the Remove button will always be available 43 44 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Tab Field name Alarm Filter Description Micro If this radio button is selected the alarm will be assigned the same facility as the micro record from which it originated Input If this radio button is selected the alarm will be assigned the same facility as the input recor
229. cility as the micro to which the door is assigned however you do have the ability to manually re assign an output group s facility This might be desirable in a case where one micro controls more than one facility for instance two companies occupying the same building that use separate doors for entry exit For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Enabled Select Yes to allow this output group to activate when triggered by an input group Select No to prevent the outputs in this output group from activating when triggered by an input group Note An output cannot belong to more than one output group but more than one output can be assigned to one output group Related procedures To create edit or delete an Output Group record 1 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs and then Output Groups tab 2 Referto Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 Creating input groups Before defining individual inputs you must create input groups to which individual inputs can be assigned Input groups trigger output groups when all or any of the inputs assigned to the group are detected Input groups are needed for physical inputs such as readers and sensors and for logical events determined by the system or micro Logical Input Events for a micro are Badge History Overflow Alarm History Overflow Upstream Communication Failure Downstream Communication Failure Reader Communica
230. ck Find amp Select Deleted in the Status field as part of the criteria when using the Find button to select a range of records 3 Click the Delete button The Badge Removal popup asks if you want to remove the records If record dependencies exist for example 1f the badge is assigned to a Personnel record a list of these records displays You must remove the dependencies before the badge record can be deleted 4 Ifno dependencies exist click OK to confirm your intention to remove the badge records If you do not want to proceed with the removal process click Cancel Note If you are removing a large number of records the system removes records in increments according to the Record Remove Maximum and Record Remove Interval set on the Parameters form See Assigning system parameters on page 40 Chapter 11 231 Badge management Defining personnel Information on the Personnel form identifies the badge holder by name employee number address and badge ID and also controls the function and capabilities of the badge We recommend that Picture Perfect operators ensure that every modified Person record is saved after every individual action of assignment of a badge or un assignment of a badge Separating these workflow steps into two save operations is a recommended best practice that ensures integrity of data between host and micro controller Note A search FIND using indexed fields improves the time required to find the records
231. ck the door for the keypad response Since the door does not open keypad response is independent from anti passback This means that keypad response cannot fail due to the badge s anti passback status It also means that keypad response cannot change the badge s anti passback status As with all other reader activity keypad response is reported in the host s badge monitor and or badge history The transaction explicitly reports that it is keypad response When keypad response is valid a report is made that the transaction was valid but did not gain access Invalid keypad responses report the reason for failure In addition to usual failure reports the keypad response feature also reports the following Invalid alarm response code Badge is not authorized for keypad response Door is not secured the door is physically open Operator response Operators respond to alarms requiring keypad alarm response in the same manner as any alarm associated with a physical input The only difference is that the keypad alarm response resets the alarm rather than a physical change in an input The vehicle for operator response is the Alarm Monitor Its operation is not changed by keypad alarm response The Alarm Monitor presents information to the operator on each alarm that is routed to it The information includes the alarm s Condition and Process State Condition Alarm Alarm is logically on Reset Alarm is logically off When the viol
232. communication with the server has been lost Green A green LED indicates that the client is communicating with the host 21 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual The toolbar When Picture Perfect is initially launched in your browser window the desktop is comprised of a menu bar and a toolbar The toolbar is user configurable and can be used to display your most frequently used applications Note Prior to configuration the toolbar will appear empty Figure 6 Custom Toolbar METTE CDs A i H Pesos EM RE To add an application icon to the toolbar 1 From the File menu click Customize Toolbar The Customize Toolbar window displays a list of applications and a list of text options Figure 7 Customize Toolbar _ Customize Toolbar S LE O CH Al Applications E vj E Access vi ij People vi Badges vi ij Places vi C Monitor vi Za Alarm Monitor vj E Badge Monitor 7 389 Input Monitor Operator Monitor O H Status Monitor v a User Monitor Hyperlink Visibilty Text Options No text labels G Digital Clock Settings v Operator Time Iv Host Time vj Custom Time UTC UTC GMT GMT 0 00 2 From the list of applications expand the directories and select deselect those applications that you want to display on your toolbar Selecting the main branch selects all of the sub branches 3 From the Toolbar Settings pane
233. continued Field name Description Employee Id Enter an alphanumeric employee identification up to 36 characters Example social security number PIN Enter a personal identification number 1 to 10 digits for the badge holder to use with a badge and keypad reader Type Click to display the Personnel Types list box Select the desired type Status Select one of the three personnel status descriptions There is one type of Valid status Active and two types of Invalid badge statuses Suspended and Deleted You should update the status as needed Note The Status field on the Personnel form overrides this field on the Badges form Example If a valid personnel record is suspended this status change should be indicated in the Status box Then if the suspended person s badge is later tried in a reader the system will deny access Department Click Department to display the Departments list box Select the desired department for this badge holder Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box This field reflects the facility to which this record is assigned For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Address 1 Enter the badge holder s address up to 60 alphanumeric characters per field The Address 1 through through Address 5 field names can be changed using the Custom Form option Address 5 Phone1 Enter the badge holder s phone number up to 30 characters You may type dashes or spa
234. continuing to other chapters in this document In this chapter Alarms GVEFVIEW EN es eh ox Rer EES EE er de PR OS 106 Alarm activity routing Ouere 106 Defining routings 2 AN aa b ee eer rosi ERR RR de CRY 107 Craig route definitions ENNEN E eo EE X ba 109 Defining route points 0 00 eet nes 110 Creating alarm tiStrucHons AE dere err Se ee I rr ree 114 Creating alarm responses cessisse 115 Delbling EE 117 DICE Gian ge nce vie nine Ce i AEN ces SE RIP M wed 120 106 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Alarms overview Alarms are used to notify an operator of an exceptional condition by displaying the information on one or more monitors The alarm display can be configured to include what caused the alarm the action required the alarm priority the way it looks on the screen as well as the operators by whom it will be viewed The Picture Perfect system monitors digital inputs DIs such as sensors or contacts for alarm conditions and then activates digital outputs DOs such as horns or lights as alarms and output devices The system notifies the operator of alarms using pop up windows and in a scrolling window called the Alarm Monitor When an alarm occurs the system beeps and displays a pop up window that notifies the operator The operator then displays alarm instructions by selecting the alarm from a scrolling list on the Alarm Monitor The operator records a response to an alarm either by selecting a pre written alar
235. control automation database administration and report management in a single unified system Picture Perfect integrates access control photo identification and credentialing video surveillance alarm monitoring intrusion detection and visitor management Picture Perfect uses industry leading products such as the Linux and AIX operating systems Informix Dynamic Server and a Java RunTime Environment JRE The Picture Perfect platform functions in large measure as a database server The majority of access alarm and time of day decisions are made locally by intelligent micro controllers Data necessary to make these intelligent decisions is downloaded from the host to the micro controller or micro as they will be referred to in this document as required Since the majority of the decisions are performed at the micro the host is free to concentrate on operator functions such as data entry database queries requests for data and report generation The system controls access readers using various technologies including magnetic stripe barium ferrite Wiegand bar code and proximity technologies Smart Card readers and readers with keypads for user defined PIN entry are also accommodated The smallest system will monitor thousands of badge records transaction history records digital inputs alarm contacts and digital outputs Capacity limits depend on system resources The system supports multiple operator work stations and printers an
236. control features of the physical door These include mechanical and electronic locking devices that keep the door opened or closed such as door strikes magnetic locks exit buttons and push bars They also include sensing and monitoring devices such as door sensors exit requests and alarm points The Doors form fields required for activation of particular features are listed with those features below Depending on the features required for each door all fields may or may not be applicable Note To ensure proper operation when the micro runs offline the door sensor reader door strike and exit button must be wired to the same micro Example The vault area of ABC Bank is accessed through a door equipped with an exit button 188 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Figure 77 Doors Form zu E ReaderEvents DoorEvents a i vo 7 xXx Q Door Description Inputs and Outputs Description Vaut Door Lobby Door IE Vaut Door Facility GLOBAL Ke of Gare Unlock Time secs po Door State amp Locked Unlocked Scheduling Allowable Open Time secs Enabled Disabled Keypad Shunt Time mins Keypad Alarm Response Disabled Enabled Exit Button Asserts Strike Pre Alarm Time secs Disabled Enabled Forced Open Shunt Time secs Forced Relock Disabled
237. cription Example Emergency Emergency Mode Click the Emergency Mode button if you want to designate this mode as an Emergency mode Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box This field reflects the facility to which this record is assigned For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Related procedures To create edit or delete a Mode record 1 Select Control Modes and then Modes tab 2 Referto Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 Changing modes by command Modes can be changed by command using the Change Mode form or by schedule using the Mode Events form Use the Change Mode form to change your system operating mode immediately For example emergency events such as fire accident or work disruption require an immediate change to a different operating strategy Mode Command lets you do this Example While in Normal mode change to Holiday mode Figure 79 Change Mode form E Modes PPR ji ia is iis om E Change Mode Modes Modes Email Mode Events Emergency EIEI 4 9x 20 Change Mode Current Modes For Facilities Select All Facilities Facility i Mode Previous Mode BCT BOCA RATON FL BCT HOLIDAY BCT NORMAL ISRQ BRADENTON FL SRO NORMAL N A LN LINCOLNTON NC Message LEA LEAGUE CITY TX COS COSTA MESA CA YD Mode Change Successful FRE FREMONT CA MDT LEWISTOWN PA
238. cription of the department that the badge holder belongs to BID The unique identification number associated with this badge Facility The facility of the input as defined in the Facility field of the Badges form Monitoring Swipe and Show activity When properly configured for Swipe and Show the Activity Monitor displays a photo when a valid badge read is received from a reader The photo is imported from the photo database For double badge transactions the photo is displayed when the first swipe is detected and the door is allowed to be unlocked when the second swipe is detected To enable the Swipe And Show function the reader must be designated as Authorization Required or Authorization Not Required on the Reader form Enable Swipe And Show Monitor must be selected on the Image Options tab of the Badge Monitor Preferences window This option is available only when the Image package is installed in the system Chapter 13 275 Alarm activity monitors Figure 112 Swipe and Show Monitor Z Badge Monitor Preferences Grid Table Management Active Facility Set Image Options J Show Thumbnails in Monitor vi Enable Swipe and Show Monitor save o ce Restore Defauts If Authorization Required is active a dialog allows the operator to unlock the door or advises the operator why the door cannot be unlocked If the door is allowed to be unlocked the dialog includes an OK button
239. cs and Swipe and Show record changes to output state You can control which activities go to history The History log is online history and is one of the destinations specified by routing instructions used throughout the system You can set up routing control information to direct selected operator activity and badge activity to selected destinations Printer Monitor or History The routings that you define on the Routings form appear in the Routings list box on the Areas Inputs and Alarms forms If the current routing on a form includes History the activities defined on that form are captured in history If there is no current routing assigned the activity routes to the default routing as defined on the System Parameters form If the default routing does not include History in its setting the activity will not be captured in history Chapter 14 Reports Creating and viewing reports Example The following example is a Badge History report Figure 122 Reports Form Reports Import Archived Data Select a Report Category 3 Uncategorized Reports D Default Reports History Reports D Alarm History DN Badge History DN Operator History anaxy 80 SOL Query Parameters View Results Header Footer SOL Keywords and Operators Table Names SELECT a alarm SELECT FROM EI alarm color Apply JA Column Hames SQL Variables Stextllabel Sfacility set Apply JP Enter SQL Statement _
240. ct 4 5 terms explained continued Term Definition BID The hidden number that uniquely identifies each badge BIOS Basic Input Output System The BIOS is a set of system instructions on a chip built in the computer Backup To copy tables from the database to magnetic tape A backup can be used to restore the system to a previous state or to recover from a failure Badge A plastic card issued to each person who uses the facility The system reads the information on the badge to determine whether or not to grant access to a person Badge Encode Number The hidden number that uniquely identifies each badge Badge Issue Reader A reader assigned to a workstation used to issue a badge Badge Learn Occurs when a micro checks with the host on an unknown badge and stores that badge information in its database The next time the badge is presented to a reader connected to that micro it will have the needed badge information Badge Reader A device usually located near a door used to read badges When a badge is presented to a badge reader the system reads it and determines whether or not to unlock the door Badge Status Indicates either the intended use of a badge such as permanent or temporary or its current condition such as active or lost BAUD A unit that measures the speed of transmission such as for data through a modem Category A lock and key that controls access Each area and badge
241. ct Control Routings and then Routing tab 2 Referto Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 Chapter 7 109 Alarm activity configuration Creating route definitions This feature can be used in conjunction with route points if you want to restrict the display of alarms and activity If you want all alarms and activity to be displayed for all operators you do not need to configure this feature Note also that activity routing is restricted to badge activity and digital input DI activity Other activity such as operator activity cannot be routed to a specific operator Your site should be partitioned into sections that represent various sets of alarms and activity inputs input groups output devices and alarm priorities A route definition corresponds to one section of your Picture Perfect site For example assume a Picture Perfect site consists of two buildings Building A and Building B In each of these buildings there is an operator at an alarm monitoring station Operator A and Operator B During the day two operators monitor the site one operator in Building A and one operator in Building B At night only one operator monitors the site from Building A One possible configuration could be that the day shift operators monitor alarms and activity that occur in their respective building and the night shift operator would monitor alarms and activity that occur in both buildings This configuration could be
242. cupancy Counting and to assign M2MR Categories to the area Category form To define Categories for M2MR Category Types Personnel form To assign M2MR Categories to badge holders To set up the area readers l 2 From the Configuration menu select Doors and Readers and then click the Readers tab From the toolbar click Find to locate the reader record you want to set up On the Function tab under Logical Reader Function enable the appropriate radio button APB In APB Out T amp A In or T amp A Out Note In an area with Occupancy Control enabled e All readers in the area must be assigned one of these logical functions APB In APB Out TSA In or T amp A Out e APB readers must be set to Global Timed APB is not allowed e The logical reader function T amp A In Out is not allowed for any reader Figure 166 Readers form Reader Function j Doors And Readers Chapter 18 Advanced access control features Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zone Doors Readers ReaderEvents DoorEvents Description n o 2 Q amp Ex ov x Dio Reader Description Inputs and Outputs State Type Function Options Logical Reader Function Normal APBIn APB Out OTS Ainiou OT amp An OT amp AOut Reader Function 4 On the Reader Description tab under Micro verify that a
243. current file is E overwritten by the new file Print Click to preview the data displayed in the monitor in a report format You have the option of printing to a default printer or saving the report in electronic format pdf file amp Preferences Click to display the Preferences window where you can manipulate the columns that you want displayed o Example If you do not want to view alarms in Host time you can remove those columns by moving them Chen from the Active to the Inactive column You can also access the Active Facility Set window where you can change the facility set and the time zone selection for the current session See Verifying time zones on page 168 Note Active Facility Set settings selections from the preferences dialog apply only to that page The Preferences button in the Monitor applications is only available if the Monitor Preferences action permission is enabled for this operator s system permission profile Chapter 13 Alarm activity monitors Table 102 Monitor toolbar icons continued Icon Description Clear Click to clear the contents of the monitor Click to display online help about the Monitor To navigate the entire Picture Perfect help system click Show Execute Status Monitor E Purge Alarm Monitor only X Click Execute to generate a status report of the selected characteristics The report displays in the Results window at the bottom of your scre
244. d click in any cell and begin to type the first letters of the item for which you are searching See Type ahead search on page 28 25 26 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 17 Form Description Form The Form window provides the primary interaction between an operator and an application It allows direct access to all fields within a single record or a selection of records from a host database table A standard form is provided however it may be customized to display only those fields an operator needs to see or the fields can be arranged differently Table 18 Progress bar Item Description Progress Bar The current status of operations performed Table 19 Status bar Description Status The number of records retrieved as well as any errors encountered during creation are displayed here Table 20 Drop down lists Item Description Drop down List A drop down list has an arrow at the right of the box and when clicked displays a list of options The contents of a list consist of items you added using other forms Example If you have not defined any micros in the system using the Micros form the Micros drop down pick list will be empty Selecting an item from a drop down list will limit the search to records with matching selections Drop down lists will auto complete allowing you to type in leading characters of a desired item to jump to that point A blank or an empty drop down list does
245. d or if you do not have the required permissions to use the form 4 To implement the system parameters you have changed perform shutdown and restart procedures using the command line See Starting and stopping Picture Perfect on page 8 Configuring LDAP support Picture Perfect supports the use of the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP interface to provide single sign on SSO where one password for a user is shared between many services LDAP is configured on the LDAP Server and LDAP DN forms Figure 15 LDAP form System Parameters System Parameters Printers Workstations Custom Lists Custom Forms System Parameters LDAP Server LDAP DN I Beseription a so EI 46 LDAP Server DL x iq IP Address or Hostname Port Address Enable SSL Yes No Version Priority Search operation completed successfully Fields and controls Chapter 4 Setup The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 25 LDAP Server form fields Tab LDAP Server Field name Description Description A description of
246. d routing for a lost badge read and then click Close Unknown Routing Click the Unknown Routing button to display the Routings list box Select the desired routing for an unknown badge read and then click Close Antipassback Routing Click the Antipassback Routing button to display the Routings list box Select the desired routing for a valid anti passback transaction and then click Close Escort Routing Select the desired routing for a valid escort transaction See Escort required on page 390 for more information Valid Routing Click the Valid Routing button to display the Routings list box Select the desired routing for a valid badge read and then click Close When you assign an area to a door or a reader the categories and controls defined for the area become valid for all doors and readers that belong to that area Some of the controls on the Areas form are also available on the Doors form and the Readers form In some cases this may allow an individual door or reader to have controls that differ from the assigned area Table 78 lists the controls that Areas Readers and Doors have in common Table 78 Common controls Areas Readers Doors Scheduling Scheduling Scheduling Shunting Shunting Physical State Physical State Logical State Logical State Note A setting of Disabled in any of these fields on any of these forms overrides a setting of Enabled in the sa
247. d assign an output and an input in the case of a Reader DI DO configuration to each floor on the Elevator form 6 Define sets of floors for categories on the Category Floors form Defining the number of floors Use the System Parameters form to specify the maximum number of elevator floors on a micro This number could be per elevator Micro DO configuration or it could be distributed between up to 16 elevators Reader DO or Reader DI DO configurations The maximum number of floors serviced by a micro elevator is 64 See Assigning system parameters on page 40 Defining micros Required for Micro DO Configuration Only Chapter 18 373 Advanced access control features Use the Micros form to define the micro type as an Elevator for each micro used with an elevator in the Picture Perfect system See Defining micros on page 132 Defining readers Required for e Reader DO Configuration e Reader DI DO Configuration Use the Reader form to define the reader type as Elevator for each reader used with an elevator in the Picture Perfect system See Defining readers on page 182 Defining outputs Use the Output form to define a digital output for each elevator floor button This output will light and activate the button for a floor to which access 1s allowed For more information see Defining outputs on page 158 Keep the following in mind when defining elevator floor outputs At least one 16 digital output 16 DO DOR board mu
248. d on every day at 8 AM it must be turned off at some time later that day Time Zone Context Select the time zone context in which the schedule should execute Host Micro or Operator See Verifying time zones on page 168 Days of the Week If the event is a Run Time event select the days of the week that the event will occur Output Group Click to change the output group associated with an input group during the input group event Output groups are position sensitive and follow the same scheduling rules as categories on the Area Events form It is possible to overwrite an existing output group depending on which output group slot is changed so familiarize yourself with the existing output groups associated with the input group being changed Notes When you add a new output group make sure you don t overwrite something such as the existing door unlock output group e If scheduling outputs they must reside on the same micro Remember to define the duration of the output using the Outputs form A duration of zero turns on the output indefinitely Related procedures To create edit or delete an Input Group Event 1 From the Configuration menu select Inputs Outputs and then click the Input Group Events tab 2 Referto Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 Chapter 10 217 Schedules and modes Scheduling output group events Use the Outgroups Events form to define output group event
249. d safety policy 08 14 2006 13 08 46 install Temporary badge issued 08 1 4 2006 13 07 05 install Reviewed security By hovering the mouse over the note the entire contents of the note displays Saved Notes Date Time Vacation scheduled 9 1 08 10 2006 10 26 08 install 9 5 2006 Reviewed safety policy 08 14 2006 13 08 46 install Temporary badge issued 08 14 2006 13 07 05 install Reviewed security Notes This is a free form text field where you can add information pertinent to Badge or Person records Example Employee work visa will expire on 12 12 10 Related procedures To create edit or delete a Personnel record 1 Select Access People and then Personnel tab 2 Referto Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 Chapter 11 237 Badge management Capturing and displaying images Once Imaging is installed you can capture import and view photographs and signatures from a variety of sources including digital cameras video cameras and signature pads During normal operations images are not downloaded from the host In order to view an existing image for a badge record the image s must be loaded to the PC Figure 91 Personnel form Images People Badges Places Uf Personnel Personnel Type Department LastHame Fi Potter Tim a Ai xg o 2 x SC Personal Address Properties Category Manager Badge Manager Images UserFields No
250. d the Picture Perfect configuration that is deployed Scheduling features allow time allocations for use of readers and alarms Micros such as the MS have the capability to perform the majority of scheduling tasks This provides the user with full scheduling capabilities even when a communication problem has caused the micro and host to temporarily stop talking to each other The user interface is menu driven and user friendly The menus provide the operator with various options which lead to input screens providing the ability to add change or delete information By assigning operator levels to individuals operators can be restricted in their control of the system They can be denied the authority to change previously set parameters and may be able to view information on a screen but may not be permitted to modify or print out the information All conditions sensed by the system can be assigned unique messages which can be displayed on the computer screen and made available to the operator A sensor on a door can be coded within the system not only to activate an alarm if the door is opened but to notify the operator of where the breach occurred and what action to take Alarms can be given priorities for action in the event that multiple alarms occur All alarms are provided with an audio display tone and a flashing alert to warn security personnel of severe conditions The system maintains a history of all occurrences reported by its micros
251. d with which it is associated Input Group If this radio button is selected the alarm will be assigned the same facility as the input group record with which it is associated Alarm If this radio button is selected the alarm will be assigned the same facility as the alarm record with which it is associated Location The Location column in the Alarm Monitor displays the name of the door reader input or micro that the alarm originated from If this radio button is selected the alarm will be assigned the facility of the door reader input or micro displayed in the Location column Alarm Monitor Color Scheme Select one of the two radio buttons depending on how you want to implement alarm color Processing State Select this button if you want all alarms of one state to be of the same color The Processing States are Active Bumped Notified Remote Pending and Completed Example if you want all Active alarms to be white text on a red background and all Completed alarms to be white text on a green background select this button See Alarm monitor color scheme Processing state on page 121 Alarm Description Select this button if you want to select text and background colors on an individual alarm basis If you choose this option the Alarm Color window will be displayed on the Alarms form See Defining alarm colors on page 120 Duress Code Enter the PIN number used to signal duress situatio
252. data grid navigate to the type of custom form you want to create for example Department Figure 139 Data Grid 1 Access B People D Personnel Personnel Type Department El CC Badges C Places 7 Contiguration E contrat a Tours Dos 0 default dept form Note default dept form is shown in the bottom portion of the grid If you select it the preview pane displays the current default Department form 331 332 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Figure 140 Blank Preview pane Custom Form System Parameters Printers Imaging Terminals Badge Designs Custom Lists Custom Form Custom Form access EI f People D Personnel Personnel Type D Department Badges Places CI Contiguration C Control Reports C Packages j Workspace rtment UserFields amp M EX Description Faciity Location Ciel inim Default Departments Form Select an item Division Manager Phone 3 From the toolbar click New 4 to display a blank preview pane 4 Click the Workspace tab to begin creating your custom form 5 Inthe Description field highlight New Custom Form and type a name for the custom form such as Accounting Department Form 6 Click the Facility drop down list to assign the custom form record to a facili
253. der Select the reader where the event will occur Mode Select the mode in which the reader event will occur An event will not take place if it is not assigned to a mode and it will only occur in those modes to which it is assigned Begin Event At Mode Start If this is a Start End event click if you want the event to activate at the start of the mode At Mode End If this is a Start End event click if you want the event to activate at the end of the mode Time If the event is a Run Time event click if you want the event to activate at a specified time HHmmss If the event is a Run Time event select the time of day that the event will start Remember to schedule another event as the pair of this one Example If something is turned on every day at 8 AM it must be turned off at some time later that day Time Zone Context Select the time zone context in which the schedule should execute Host Micro or Operator See Verifying time zones on page 168 Days of the Week If the event is a Run Time event select the days of the week that the event will occur Physical Reader Type There are four ways to define the physical reader type of a reader Badge Only Badge And Keypad Keypad Only and Badge Or Keypad A reader s physical type may be changed with a reader event Do Not Care See Radio buttons on page 27 Example To provide higher security at certain hours you can define a badge and keypad reader as a badge only reade
254. dge read occurs A suspended badge is one that has been identified in its badge record as suspended Click the Suspended Grp button to display the Ingroups list box Select the desired Input Group for a suspended badge read and then click Close Lost The input group to trigger when a lost badge read occurs A lost badge is one that has been reported and identified in its badge record as lost Click the Lost Grp button to display the Ingroups list box Select the desired Input Group for a lost badge violation and then click Close Unknown The input group to trigger when an unknown badge read occurs An unknown badge is one whose BID The hidden number that uniquely identifies each badge is not recorded in the Badges table of the Picture Perfect database and therefore is not recognized by the system Click the Unknown Grp button to display the Ingroups list box Select the desired Input Group for an unknown badge violation and then click Close Antipassback The input group to trigger when an anti passback violation occurs When used in conjunction with anti passback readers the anti passback status In Out or Privileged of a badge plus a category match regulate its ability to open a door Example If a badge holder starts to enter an anti passback area by swiping their badge then allows the door to close without entering he will not be able to re enter that area because the system has already registered him as In Click the An
255. dmin RISVDSHEIE 3 137 169 188 8086 09 01 2006 13 49 49 GLOBAL i Send Message Jump To Operator 2 Select the User ID of the operator to whom you want to send a message and right click to display a context menu 3 Select Send Message Under Selected Operators only the UserID of the operator you selected displays 285 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual 286 Note You can not send a message to the user that you are logged in as The Send Message option will appear dimmed Figure 119 Send Message Selected Operator Send a Message to Other Operator Selected Operators jadoe RIS VDSHEIE Available Operators badams LGPXLISDWPU Type your text You will be logged off the system in 5 minutes Send Message Cancel 4 Type the message in the Type your text area 5 Click Send Message to send or Cancel to quit Monitoring system performance The Performance monitor allows an operator to view the overall performance characteristics of the Picture Perfect host Vital statistics such as memory usage history usage CPU usage and queue sizes are refreshed periodically and are logged temporarily on Picture Perfect s system history table This data can be useful when optimizing the system or when diagnosing host related performance issues Figure 120 Performance Monitor Performance Monito il Ba ee System Memory Management TPS Mode TPS Network Mode Comm Serial Message Co
256. dow When you close the Application window the window size and splitter location settings last used will be retained Figure 8 Application Window Grid Shortcut Links Tabbed Panes Toolbar Form Title Bar ip People zu E ic Badges Places Y sonnel Personnel Type Department Last Name First Name 2 d a Pola Usha 244 E X o 4 X Q iz Kesian Peter Bola Usha al Address Properties Category Manager User Fields Badge Manager Images Notes Mola Dave irst Name Polan Usha Wm 1 Person Test MM Persont Testi Last Name Y Doe Jane Pola Doe John Carcillo Vince Initials Franzblau Michael lup Falkanbridge Roger Hartman Eric _ Employee Id e n beraer Wed Type Permanent GLOBAL zl A 1 Manage Faciity GLOBAL v aj Manage Department Engineering lt GLOBAL gt Ga aj Manage Active d Status z LH Active wel i Results 13 records Filter List Manage Results Tab Splitter Pane Drop down List Progress Bar 24 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 14 Title bar Title Bar Description The Title Bar runs across the top of the window It displays the label of the primary navigation menu item and contains three buttons Minimize Click to resize your window to a smaller size Maximize Click to resize
257. ds of that particular table If you prefer to archive data on a regular schedule a Force Rollover option can be used instead This lets you archive a table even if it hasn t reached its threshold point Backing up your database A backup of your access control database should be performed periodically The system allows you to back up the database to tape or disk file If your system has optional packages installed use separate tapes to back up each database because each backup initializes the tape Example The following example is a backup of the Badge table to a Disk file Figure 122 Backup form Backup Restore Backup Archive MH 5 Je Backup Base Tables Advanced Other Tables Advanced Include Save to Badge Tape Disk File Destination File Base e Badge Table Browse History v Generate Verification Report Image Guard Tours NOTE If your backup file is expected to exceed 2 GB the location where the file is to be stored MUST Guard Tours History BE defined as a Large File System to ensure that UCS the backup file will be complete vi EJ Graphics Maps Chapter 15 Backup and restore Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the
258. e Based on the input device selected the proper interface will come up for capturing or loading a new image When the new image is captured live capture or loaded from a database the Image Enhancement dialog box displays Figure 94 Image Enhancement screen Image Enhancement o x Original Image Preview ltd m Color Balance Red Green Blue ER ETT Cyan Magenta Yellow KEE C One to one J T Automatic contrast Reset All Cancel 2 Note the eight sizing handles around the center of the image Size the image as desired and press Ok 3 At this point you can either capture the portion of the image as is or adjust the highlighting box to capture a different portion of the image To move the crop box 1 Place your mouse pointer within the highlighting box s cropping area 2 Press and hold down your left mouse button and drag move the cropping area to the desired location on the image Release the left mouse button when you are satisfied with the new location of the highlighting box 3 Click Ok 240 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual To resize the crop box l 6 Place your mouse pointer directly over one of the highlighting box handles The pointer will change from a four headed arrow to a two headed arrow This allows you to resize the cropping area Press and hold down your left mouse button and drag move the handle toward the center of the cropping area
259. e A partition or segment of a storage disk that can be integrated into a one logical volume and controlled by logical volume management LVM PIN A Personal Identification Number that identifies a person If a facility uses both a keypad and badge reader employees present their badge to the reader then enter their PIN on the reader keypad Port Group Asingle line of microcontrollers connected to a port Port Group Leader Primary Language Priority The first microcontroller in the port group See Port Group Language used by Picture Perfect for alarm notification archive notification describing alarms in the Alarm Monitor and describing badge input and status activity in the Activity Monitor These are always described in the primary language even when viewed by operators working in a different language A number used to indicate the response priority of an alarm The lower the priority number the more serious the alarm 411 412 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 127 Picture Perfect 4 5 terms explained continued Term Definition Process One of many independent programs running at the same time in the computer Provided Language A language whose translations are provided by GE All provided languages are available at installation RAID The use of two or more disk drives in a single computer system which can provide better disk performance error recovery and fault toler
260. e Facility Per amp View Facility Permi Description amp No Facility Permissi Update Badges Update Badges S Facilty Actions GLOBAL i E C Change Mode C Change Threat Level C Encode Badges C Encode Setup vi Manage Templates C Print Badges Z Run Templates Page Level Permissions Areas IBackup Events Badge Activity Monitor Badge Designs Badge Format Badges Categories Category Floors Custom Lists Hone View Update O O e insert Delete Q oO Control Level Permissions Badge Format BD Description Expired Context Expired Date Expired Time Faciity Results 6 records View Update E e To create the View Operator facility profile l 2 3 4 5 From the Control menu select Operators and then the Facility Permission Profile tab From the toolbar click Add In the Description field type View Operator From the list of forms in the Page Level Permissions pane select Operator and click View To set the desired Control Level permissions click View for all the fields you want the operator to be able to see From the toolbar click Save The View Operator facility profile record will look similar to the following Chapter 6 Operator administration Figure 40 Defining a facility profile O Al Facility Permissi
261. e Facility list box of the Permission form Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box This field reflects the facility to which this record is assigned For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Actions This section can be used to restrict or enable actions that affect Picture Perfect forms globally such Change Mode Clicki Changing modes by command on page 196 for more information ng this box enables the Change Mode feature for this operator See Encode Badges Clicki ng this box enables the operator to encode smart cards Encode Setup Manage Templates Print Badges Clicki User interface customization for more information Clicking this box enables the operator to access the Encoder Setup button ng this box allows the operator to manage templates See Chapter 17 Clicking this box enables the operator to print badges if the optional Imaging package is installed See Printing badges on page 242 for more information Run Templates Clicking this box allows the operator to run templates See Chapter 17 User interface customization for more information 83 84 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 39 Facility Permission Profile form fields continued Field name Description Page Level Permission This section is used to set up the record level permissions for the selected form The toggle buttons allow you to determine the level of permission of the
262. e activity record to indicate that the badge holder is being traced If the Person Trace is routed to the History Log the data is identified as a normal badge transaction To configure the Person Trace feature select a routing for traced badge holders using the Person Trace Routing field of the Parameters form See Assigning system parameters on page 40 for details on completing this form When you want to trace a particular person badge holder you must enable Person Trace on the Personnel form When you no longer want to trace them you must disable Person Trace If you want an alarm to be generated every time the badge is read enable the Person Trace Alarm option Chapter 18 389 Advanced access control features To enable or disable Person Trace l From the Access menu select People and then click the Personnel tab Click Find amp to display the desired Personnel badge holder record Click the Properties tab Enable the Person Trace button to begin tracing or disable it to discontinue the Person Trace Additionally if you want an alarm to be generated every time the badge is read enable the Person Trace Alarm button Figure 184 Personnel form Person Trace 3 ER NN NE E RIEN RELLY FRANCOLINI Personal Address Properties Category Ma
263. e and a floor or floors Depending on the elevator control configuration one of the following methods will then activate the elevator floors Method 1 This is the default and is available on all configurations Following a valid badge swipe the badge is checked for category floors for this elevator For each badge category that matches the elevator s categories access is granted to the set of floors denoted by the matched category Therefore the set of accessible floors will be the combined set of matched category floors For example a badge holder has General Access and Computer Department as categories on their badge The elevator allows floors 1 2 and 5 for General Access and floors 3 and 4 for Computer Department Therefore when this badge holder enters the elevator floors 1 through 5 will be activated Refer to Figure 175 For a double badge transaction configuration each badge must first have access to the reader then the same access validation as above takes place The difference is that the final set of accessible floors will be denoted by the union of the two badges matched categories which correspond to floors In other words if the elevator category matches a category found on either badge access is granted See Double badge function on page 366 370 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Figure 175 Example of Elevator Control Method 1 Category 3 FLOOR 6 Since this badge has categories 1 and 5 this badge holder
264. e epe etae eue d A 115 s wmjife EP 116 Ee ale Kl TEE 116 Related Procedures uus ENEE de Ae ed EELER RENE 116 Defining COKIN TEE 117 ee 117 Elelde gp EP Whe ee Edel SNE 118 Related Heli 120 Defining alarm colors EENS AG Vu rur p EIERE ENEE ENEE Ee H 120 Alarm monitor color scheme Alarm description 120 Example zcv beber Eeler E E et SE 120 Related procedur s ssamen aor AE EE AE 120 Alarm monitor color scheme Processing state 121 EOMP Enen RE 122 Fields and corittols eter ERR nere ante aig Beete need bbb OR AURI ebe 122 Related procedures cessere tiet breed Ra ose EEN A AANER 123 Device management EE 125 OVER EE 126 Creating Output groups iiiv e e I mere a rev e GaN ENEE A eg EEN e 126 EOMP E ET 126 Fieldsand Kee 127 Related Deler 127 Creating input groups Ee dE EE EELER A A A DE 127 Seu 128 Fields Gnd Ke TEEN 129 POREHUINDUL ell 131 Related Melle 132 Beleeg EE 132 eu e EE 133 Fielde dnd controls eher A elt det Sheet E EE E ERR EE yee URS 133 ene Tee le e LEE 139 Direct CONNECEIMICKOS RR MI 140 DialUp ele EE 140 Non disc 143 MicroNetwork Map mos 3e Ret ee I RE aed bo PE pA ebvbPE INN E Ed Idas 144 Related procedures xsscesececece t ebbe dae ehe a ER NN PILTRMr T Ye Era 146 Chapter 9 Creating encryption Keys 22 5 eI ete i0 ww e t Ro cR Rez E ue AREE ee E ideas 149 np m 149 Fieldsand CONT ONS PEE 149 Related precedufes ss eere erupit ameta dE Dept D
265. e fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 26 LDAP DN form fields Tab Field name Description LDAP DN Description A description of the DN entry For example Headquarters Security Personnel DN An LDAP distinguished name DN is an LDAP entry that identifies and describes the full path on the LDAP server used to authenticate an authorized user Distinguished names consist of the name of the entry itself as well as the names in order from bottom to top of the objects above it in the LDAP directory Supported DNs ou people dc mycompany dc com cn operator user name ou people dc mycompany dc com cn operator login_id ou people dc mycompany dc com cn operator employee id ou people dc mycompany dc com When an authorized user types in their username this path is used by Picture Perfect to authenticate the user s password Priority When there are multiple LDAP servers this is the priority by which to attempt access Related procedures To configure LDAP 1 2 8 9 Add the IP address and host name of the LDAP server to the local host file From the Picture Perfect Setup menu select System Parameters and then click the LDAP Server tab Fill in the fields with the appropriate data as described in Table 25 Click Save This icon is unavailable if all required infor
266. e has defined the Door Forced Open to display in red letters on a yellow background She is considering changing the background color to blue Figure 49 Alarm Color Form Editing Background Color Click here to edit foreground color Editing Background Color Swatches HSB RGB Editing Foreground Color Click here to edit background color Swatches HSB RGB Related procedures To define alarm colors 1 From the Configuration menu select Alarms and then click the Alarms tab From the toolbar click Find A amp A Select an alarm record from the list in the data grid Click Change Colors to open the color palette Cie ee a Toggle the button at the top of the palette to set the foreground color for the text and the background color for the background of the alarm message that you want displayed on the Alarm Monitor Chapter 7 121 Alarm activity configuration 6 Click Save Once these changes are made the next alarm that comes in will be displayed with the new colors Alarm monitor color scheme Processing state It is possible to define the colors that will be used in the Alarm Monitor so that the color scheme reflects the alarm state This option will be used 1f Processing State is selected in the Alarm Monitor Color Scheme box of the Parameters form Each alarm in the Alarm Monitor will have a foreground and background
267. e level of permission is set to Update 4 Under Control Level Permissions click on Occupancy Control and make sure the level of permission is set to Update Figure 154 Facility Permissions Profile form 3 Operators Chapter 18 Advanced access control features Operators Modes Routings Backup Restore Operators Permission Groups Permission System Permissions Profile Description All Facility Permissions Insert Facility Permissions Update Facility Permissions View Facility Permissions No Facility Permissions GLOBAL FACILITY PROFILE MONITORING PERMISSION BADGE OPERATOR badge operator JUNK amp Q Q 4 Exo x Facility Permissions Page Level Permissions Name J None I View J Update __Insert_ Delete emmer mormor w e e e Alarm Events O O o OC EI ben Messages o o e o o N Alarm Responses o o o o Archive o o o O Area Events o o o o Areas o o o o Area Status o o O O Backup Oo o o O a Control Level Permissions Hame Hone View Update Lost Input Group o o Lost Routing O o Occupancy Control O Occupancy Count o Oo Permission Group o o Physical State Q Oo EX Route Definition Oo o Scheduling o o IShuntinct O m 5 Saveand exit the Facility Permissions Profile form To enable Occupancy Counting for the area Note
268. e primary and backup hosts All other functions such as editing and creating must be performed from the primary host Figure 138 Custom Form CustomForm a Access e Y El 1 People 28 bl x Z 3 Personnel Preview Workspace IN Personnel Type Ee 3 Description Tabs Tab Layout Preview 3 Department Ate ooo e Kc EE Badges Mu Custom Badges Form My First Tab My Second Tah Badges Facility TN Badge Format GLOBAL Places Configuration L E Control 4 default badge form My Custom Badges Form Tab Sequence 4 vl New Tab Rename Delete Width H Height LE Available Form Fields Form Fields on Tab Field Settings facility description BadgePrint Badge ID E ccess I erson id Ie Select an item Alz LA Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Table 122 Custom form fields Field name Description Description The name used to describe the custom form Facility This is a required field Assigning a facility to a custom form record allows the administrator to filter the records that can be viewed Chapter 17 User interface customization Table 122 Custom form fields continued Field name Descript
269. e reader that the badge is being used at get out of sync either because of some violation of the system e g a person has previously climbed over a turnstile or for a legitimate reason e g a person has passed through a fire exit during a fire drill some means is required to bring the two back into sync This can be accomplished from the Person form by resetting the last access area to NEUTRAL so that the next transaction at a nested anti passback reader is always accepted without violation and the reader s To area becomes the badge s new area To accommodate different performance requirements the system supports two methods of obtaining the Nested APB status of a badge prior to allowing access These methods are only to support the Nested APB feature available on the Reader form when the reader is the Global Nested APB type Host Broadcasts to Controllers This method broadcasts the badge s last access area status to all associated controllers for each incoming valid APB legacy and nested transaction at the host this is primarily used for individual high traffic readers that need to avoid longer wait times Controller Requests from Host This method relies on the controllers requesting the badge s last access area status on a per transaction basis before evaluating access this involves less overhead network traffic at the host but imposes a longer wait time at the reader for the badgeholder if the host is processing many learn request
270. e records in the Global facility only The term Global defines a default facility it does not encompass other facilities 81 82 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Figure 29 Facility Permissions Profile form 3 Operators Operators Permission Groups GA Ee i GU Q dba E o o v X amp Insert Facility Permi GU Facility Permissions amp Update Facility Per GU amp View Facility Permi GU amp No Facility Permissi GU s Update Badges eu z Actions vi Change Mode vi Change Threat Level vi Encode Badges vi Encode Setup vi Manage Templates vi Print Badges vi Run Templates Page Level Permissions Name None View Update insert Delete Alarm o o O o lAlarm Activity Monitor o o o Alarm Events o o Oo Alarm Messages o o o Alarm Responses o Oo Area Events o Oo Areas o o Backup Events Oo S o D Badge Activity Monitor Q Q Q Oo amp v Control Level Permissions Name Mone View Update 4 Results Trecords ation completed successfully Default facility permission profiles are created during installation and when paired with a facility give an operator varying levels of access to the associated database records as referenced in Table 36 This feature allows an administrator to grant an operator a different lev
271. e selected form The Page Level Permission Update Insert or Delete button must be selected for this column to be active Related procedures To create edit or delete a System Permission Profile record 1 Select Control Operators and then System Permissions Profile tab 2 Refer to Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 Chapter 6 89 Operator administration Creating form profiles A form profile is a way of associating custom forms with an operator s permission Each Picture Perfect form can have multiple custom forms that display different fields One operator may need access to different fields than another operator By assigning a Form Profile to a permission you can have specific fields display on the various forms when an operator with that permission accesses them Example Jane Doe is responsible for issuing badges to the Manufacturing personnel She is assigned a Form Profile that displays a custom badge form designed specifically for Manufacturing Figure 31 Form Profile Form 3 Operators Operators Modes Routings Backup Restore Hosts Operators Permission Groups Permission System Permissions Profile Facility Permissions Profile Form Profile Feet OG th Exo x Se Default Form Profile GU Da Eric Form Profile Gu Manufacturing GL FormProfile Description Manufacturing Facility GLOBAL Em dL
272. e2 Facility etoBaL j SE E M Vf Requires badge to print Edit Badge Design Results 6 records Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 100 Badge Designs form fields Field name Description Description The name used to describe the badge design Example Temporary Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box This field reflects the facility to which this record is assigned For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Requires badge By default this toggle button is checked which requires a badge record be associated to the design in order to print to print There may be cases where you want to print a badge design for identification purposes only such as a temporary paper badge in which case you should toggle this button off Edit Badge Click to access the Badge Designer When you have completed your changes save the new badge design Design For further information see the Credential Designer Manual included on your documentation CD Related procedures To create edit or delete a Badge Design record 1 From the Setup menu select Badge
273. ea code or country code or other prefix to be pre pended to the backup host phone number in order for the micro to call the backup host Micro Phone Number Enter the phone number to be used to call this dial up micro from the host including area code PBX prefix or country code as necessary Micro Backup Phone For redundant configurations in which the primary and backup servers are located in two different area codes enter the phone number to be used to call this dial up micro from the Connect Time Number backup host including area code PBX prefix or country code as necessary dle Time Enter the number of days hours minutes and or seconds that the line must be idle before the line is dropped This field must be greater than Host micro retries x Host micro retry interval 1 Maximum Enter the maximum number of days hours minutes and or seconds 0 to 65536 that the micro and host may be connected After a reset to allow for badge download the default maximum connect time is one hour 137 138 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 56 Micros form fields continued Tab Field Description Callback Specify whether a callback is required from the host the micro or neither In a callback situation the host or micro receiving the call flags the sender for a callback then disconnects without a data transaction taking place This strategy prevents a foreign system
274. ead of line f an end of li None 1 Otherwise anything except Host 2 Otherwise anything except Host or None micro Host 1 Select Configuration Micros and then Micro tab micro None micro Host micro None Direct Port Direct Port If a head of line fanend of line None micro Host micro Host None None If a head of line fanend of line Anything except None micro Host micro None or Downstream Dial up None Anything except If an end of line Downstream Dial up Host or None micro None and the Callback field is set to None Network Port None If a head of line If an end of line None micro Host micro None Network Port None If a head of line If an end of line If a head of line micro anything except None or Downstream Dial up Otherwise Downstream Dial up 2 From the toolbar click Find 9 to retrieve all the micro records or enter specific search criteria to limit the search and then click Find 3 Refer to Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 The updated micro will be reset automatically if the Configure field has been changed to Online After the micro resets it requests its new configuration from the host so that it can operate according to its new parameters The host downloads the new micro configuration System operations and communications continue normally during a micro reset Chapter 8 149 Device management Creating encrypti
275. ear or may appear in a different order than that shown inthe following table There is no required sequence to follow 42 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 24 Parameter Form Fields Tab Parameters Field name Node Name Description Node name of the host normally set to NODE 1 This field is pre set and should only be changed as directed by your customer support representative xon Threshold Xoff Threshold The number of queued messages that control TPS message buffering Xon must be smaller than Xoff This field is pre set and should only be changed as directed by your customer support representative The number of queued messages that control TPS message buffering Xoff must be larger than Xon This field is pre set and should only be changed as directed by your customer support representative Shared Memory Size The size KBytes of shared memory used This field is pre set and should only be changed as directed by your customer support representative Diagnostic Buffer Size The size KBytes of the diagnostic buffer This field is pre set and should only be changed as directed by your customer support representative Alarm Monitors This field is reserved for future use Default is 2 for the current version Diagnostic Monitors This field is reserved for future use Default is 1 for the current version Event Monitors This field is reserved for future use Defa
276. eating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 Chapter 10 Schedules and modes Scheduling backup events The Backup Events feature allows you to schedule a system backup to pre selected media The backup will then run automatically at the day and time settings specified on the Backup Events form The backup can go to either tape or disk file and can include one or more of the following backup types Badge table base system history tables and any optional packages such as Alarm Graphics tables The scheduled backup will not span multiple tapes and there will be no prompt for inserting the backup media Before the backup is to take place an operator must make sure that the correct media is properly inserted All error messages and completion messages generated as a result of the scheduled backup process will be written to a log filein the cas log directory called bak mmdd where mmdd system date For example 0302 March 2nd You must check the bak log file for messages after the scheduled backup process has executed since there are no pop up window messages associated with this feature Archives of Badge Alarm or Operator History cannot be scheduled Example Define a backup event that schedules an automatic tape backup of the Badge Base History Guard Tours and Tour History database tables to occur at 11 PM every Friday Figure 87 Backup Event form Q9 Backup Restore Backup Archive Restore Backup Events
277. ecedence e Ifan alarm is supposed to be bumped to a given operator and two different bump times are given in two different route points for the alarm s route definition the shortest length of time determines when the alarm is bumped Once an alarm is displayed on an operator s monitor only the operator can remove it The disabling of a scheduled route point will not remove an existing alarm from the Alarm Monitor e When a scheduled route point is enabled affected operators are updated immediately This event may cause alarms that were already in the system to appear on the Alarm Monitor Alarms and activity with no route definitions are sent to all operators and printers Email addresses on the alarm routing Alarms and activity with a route definition that has no route points defined are sent to all operators and printers Email addresses on the alarm routing e Ifa route definition consists of scheduled route points every time slot throughout the day and week must be accounted for by a scheduled route point Times that are not accounted for will default to all operators in the system This means that if a route definition has a scheduled route point from 8 00 00 to 17 00 00 then alarms and activity with that route point s route definition will be routed to only those operators listed in the route point during that time period But there are two other time periods for which there are no route points 23 59 00 to 8 00 00 and 17 00 00 to 23
278. ech 330 Creating and editing custom forme 330 Creating and editing custom lists Lecce 333 330 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Overview All Picture Perfect forms support custom forms and templates that can be created based on an existing record or by modifying a blank record The templates can then be used to generate new records with the necessary links already set up saving the operator time Custom lists can be created to appear in the user fields on your Personnel forms to satisfy specific requirements Creating and editing custom forms In addition to required fields Picture Perfect forms can be customized to include the fields and tabs of your choice For example if your facility does not use expiration dates times on badges you could exclude those fields You can use names that are more meaningful to your particular business Once you have designed your form in the Workspace you can preview the results by clicking the Preview tab A custom form may be set as the default Note Inan Enterprise system the following restrictions apply e The default Custom Form may be set for the network host and each subhost However functions such as editing and creating must be performed from the network host e Custom Forms cannot be deleted from any host in an Enterprise system Note In a Redundant system the default Custom Form can only be set from the primary host This will set the default Custom Form to be used by both th
279. ecords Chapter 9 183 Area management Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 79 Readers form fields Field name Description Description Type a reader description up to 60 characters long Example 00 1 00 LOBBY DOOR Board Type the board number of the reader board where this reader is connected See Table 69 M5 wiring chart Outputs on page 160 of Chapter 8 Device management Address Type the physical address of this reader on its reader board See Table 69 M5 wiring chart Outputs on page 160 of Chapter 8 Device management Micro Click the Select Micro button to display the Micros list box Select the micro where this reader is wired Facility Click the Facility list box to display a list of available facilities The facility set determines which facility will be able to view the associated badge and trace activity on the Activity Monitor if the Badge and Trace options are selected By default the reader record will be assigned the same facility as the micro to which the reader is assigned however you do have the ability to manually re assign a reader s facility This might be desirable in a case where one micro controls more
280. ed Detected Held Open In Group wend n Forced Open Monitoring Ignored Detected Forced Open In Group v eee ge 4 Pre Alarm Disabled Enabled Pre Alarm In Group 7 The input selected as the exit button input must be set to the following On the Inputs form under Input Control Setup the Input Enabled button must be de selected the default 8 Set Exit Button Asserts Strike to enabled Figure 169 Doors form M2MR 9 Chapter 18 Advanced access control features Doors And Readers _ Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zone Doors Readers Reader Events Door Events M2MR Output Door 10 1 00 STL SEC C 10 3 00 S1 Dr p19 S E LM ps B IT L D Q 4 x Exo x Door Description Inputs and Outputs D scription Computer Room GLOBAL Door Area Computer Room GLOBAL Door State Unlock Time secs Locked Unlocked 5 Scheduling Allowable Open Time secs Enabled O Disabled po Keypad Alarm Response Keypad Shunt Time mins Disabled Enabled d Exit Button Asserts Strike Pre Alarm Time secs Disabled Enabled Forced Relock Forced Open Shunt Time secs Disabled Enabled B Door Strike Relock On Door Open On
281. ed a bd dO deat bya ela 150 Flashing micros ene etre Ir enr eae wee eg nes danse edd rer EN E SUE PEE E IE FEES 151 Micro firmware Ies as issensoc Uto eR ERIS UeER IEEE E MM A PU ER HI UN ER RE 151 Flashing aimicro sing eFlashi 2 3 cerris eR Ebr I Rr ees ed ide PY ER uA RPERERTA A 151 Network micro parameter block configuration PXN on 156 Defining outputs EE EE ER RU SE PRIV ERE RUPUME IE NAM TO E ME 158 Eet beleen 158 Fields and Ke le EE 158 Related procedufes 5 3 us erecti NERA hid dhs be easter a adandagougeebarecuannabhheanes 160 Defining in BUS e sechs ded ug E RER theese dames sae Meme Ga eek EE EE ERE ROUES 161 Ee DOE geen Ee e Nott tendu is EE ne wooed Ada aetna e fd 161 Fields and coritrols eere t e DEER ele 162 RELATED Beie 163 Controlling outputs 2 e dE NEEN y E Ee rte 3G e xe NEET eo Gav SEENEN RES 164 zie blei T E 164 Fields arid controls 32 565 uve eter rer eet or pte EE DURO ee EE 164 Related procedures ooo E onore pede gre bhe pre EEN 165 Controlling Access Secure operations cece cece cece eee eee hh eh nen 166 Example M E 166 Fields and coritrols i sss Sege A bd ddd SER ER pU dE e Ae Ae M a SERIE a 167 Related procedures i5 ees veces ov e te Had b eee eee ut epa id c OO TT ROTER PEE REY 167 Verifying time zones sereset ceneri EE AER AE EIERE EE Red qe eR ERPRE ERE 168 sans E 168 Field GAC CONT ONS e 169 Related proacequtes EEN 170 Areg mObDOdOe
282. ed in the first position slot on the Areas form since categories are position sensitive when you add a category do not overwrite an existing category Notice that categories entered on previous forms do not display on the current Events form so you must be familiar with what is already in place MIS Start Shift 1 GLOBAL NORMAL 7 45 00 Comput MIS Start Shift 2 GLOBAL NORMAL 4 45 00 Comput End Shift 1 GLOBAL NORMAL 5 15 00 Comput End Shift 2 GLOBAL NORMAL 1 15 00 Comput Four area events are defined one to start Shift 1 at 07 45 AM one to end it at 5 15 PM one to start Shift 2 at 4 45 PM and one to end it at 1 15 AM 4 When the area events occur the Category Manager on the Areas form will reflect the new categories Note The Schedule Updates Database field on the System Parameters field must be set to Yes See Table 24 Parameter Form Fields on page 42 250 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual At 7 45 AM badges with Assigned Categories MIS 24 Hour and MIS Shift Stot Category 1 categories will have 1 MIS 24 Hour access to this area Assigned Categories At 4 45 PM badges with MIS 24 Hour MIS Shift 1 and MIS Shift 2 categories 2 will have access to this area At 5 15 PM when Shift 1 ends badges with MIS 24Hour and MIS Shift 2 categories will have access to this area but MIS Shift 1 will have NO ACCESS Slot Category 1 MIS 24 Hour MIS Shift 1 3
283. ed means established schedule changes will control this reader Disabled means established schedule changes will not affect this reader Shunting Enabled means this reader allows the use of keypad override of shunt time Disabled means the reader will not allow shunting When enabled the Alarm Shunting feature allows a valid badge holder to keep a door open for the time specified in minutes in the Keypad Shunt Time field of the Doors form without getting a Door Held Open alarm The badge holder enters the shunt code defined on the Micros form using the reader keypad presents their badge and then enters their PIN number Toggle A reader used in special applications only in which a badge swipe toggles the reader s valid input group non boolean On yes or Off no such as to arm disarm a burglar alarm system Toggle readers are not intended for door control but can be used that way with some limitations To do this the door must be configured without a sensor and the doorstrike output must be configured to reset with an input rather than on duration With this configuration the reader can toggle the door between locked and unlocked but since there is no sensor there can be no detection of the door being forced open or held open too long For an example of toggle reader use see Creating input groups on page 127 of Chapter 8 Device management Note If Toggle is set to Yes and Authorization Required is set to Yes photos are di
284. ed to begin from midnight until the current time If the event that was in progress when the micro reset was scheduled to start before midnight the micro will not recognize it and will default to the normal mode To ensure that a schedule is restored when a micro resets schedule events to begin after midnight for example 00 01 If you schedule or command the system to return to normal operating mode after the time when scheduled runtime events for normal mode are supposed to occur it is a good idea to schedule start end events such as unlocking or locking the lobby doors See Start end events on page 200 Itis important to note that if there are three or more modes in the system activating an event at mode end does not determine the mode to which the system is switching For example assume the following three modes are in the system Normal Holiday and Emergency If the system is currently in Holiday mode at the end of Holiday mode the system could switch to either Normal or Emergency mode Therefore it is recommended that you activate an event at mode start if there are three or more modes in the system Example The New Year Holiday mode could be triggered by a New Year Start mode event scheduled at 5 AM on New Year s Day then returned to Normal mode by an New Year End mode event scheduled at 7 AM on the day after New Year s Day Chapter 10 Schedules and modes Figure 80 Mode Events form Modes Email Mode Events Emergency
285. ed until a badge read with a non Escort category match occurs If a valid non Escort access badge read does not occur within the Interval Time set on the Reader form the Escort Transaction will time out An Escort Transaction is time extended by the presentation of another badge with a matching Escort category even if the Escort category is different between consecutive visitors Example If visitor A gets a match on Escort Cat 1 and is followed by Visitor B who gets a match on Escort Cat 2 then the time is extended An Escort Transaction can be terminated by one of three circumstances A badge with a non Escort category match to the area is presented after the transaction begins and before the transaction timeout value is reached valid termination case The transaction timeout condition is reached e A badge without a category match is presented before either one of the conditions above are met intervening badge case A group of visitors can be accompanied by a single escort There is no limit to the number of Escorted badge holders visitors that can be processed as long as they all occur within 20 seconds of each other Badge History will be sent to the host as each badge is processed An Escort category match will generate a Badge History message sent to the host with Escort Requested status and the matching category ID The transaction will be displayed on the host s Badge Monitor A terminating badge read non Escort category
286. ee Creating facilities on page 53 Time Zone Select the time zone in which the micro is located from the drop down list This allows Picture Perfect to display badge and alarm activity in the micro s local time See Verifying time zones on page 168 Note In order for an operator to use this field they must have at least View page level permission for the Time Zone form See Creating facility permission profiles on page 81 New Mode Click New Mode to display the Modes list box Select the mode that is to go into effect during this mode event and then click Close to close the list box Date Type the date this mode event begins or click the calendar button Time Type the time this mode event begins or click the clock button Related procedures To create edit or delete a Mode Event 1 From the Control menu select Modes and then click the Mode Events tab 2 Referto Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 199 200 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Events overview Use the Events forms to define and schedule the desired characteristics for Area Events Reader Events Door Events Alarm Events Input Group Events Output Group Events Backup Events or Report Events and assign the appropriate mode to each of them Two types of event scheduling options are available Runtime and Start End Runtime lets you schedule an event to cycle within a mode and can occur at a particular time on any days of
287. eege 46 Maximum Connect Time ee oa onn s 137 Media Type e Memory Managemelit Lien Por Ie t tire ek EE ponen 287 Menu Bars cictijensiiies E 16 KEE 18 115 410 Message Count E 287 Messages Processed c iod tenore We 287 Micro Parameter Block Configuration sss 156 Micro Phone Numbers 4st hts erp TLE 137 ter Eet TR 142 Micro Reset Request Command sse 142 Microcontroller 411 Micros 17 30 32 64 65 66 68 69 126 130 132 134 139 140 143 146 s 147 148 150 151 372 386 411 Micro Dials p s aie etr HP Pe er e ees 133 Micro Direct Connect on interrete iamen rre rotes ire reden 133 Micro Downstream dal up 133 Micro NetWOTI s e IEEE REVUE RE CDI E SER YEN ERR Micro Network dial up Micro Non existent sarengan iti agree re di REESE Ea Micro KEE uhr P Mitimiz All restet e De ete p e guinea Modem Lyp6 ei Ote RR Modems d X PL Monitoring mrtmgr Multiple Access Violatong essere 386 M2MR Category EE 343 MOMR Outputs eter lar EO STEE Ee 189 358 M2MR Type acad ee retten e e deren PE eias 173 N DER oso eeh dead esda 288 Network Ports re EHE iin e Ht e cepi eere sue uu 69 Network Ports e EN 17 30 Networking Option e a SESTO URN 5 TE E 234 No Answer Message ic cccsccscisssssstcecstvasssteaceisvesstatesssvesseistsesteste
288. efer to the data sheet and user documentation For the latest product information contact your local supplier or visit us online at www gesecurity com Contents Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 NK ele cp EPIIT xV Conventions used in this document e HEEN NEEN NENNEN NEEN ENNEN SEENEN XV Safety terms dnd Bue EE XV Related documentation xvi InEFO UEM OT da doen 0923 ET ebades 1 OVERVIEW 2 New in Picture PerfecE4 5 wd dE AER teats te ERE EUR EA WE e He RU ana 3 Operdting fedtures ve eounex DES D Debe e EYE e Ae old Ee MENDA UE ee e eee o as are 4 Optionalfedt res e enneg D Uere D Rr hed coed USA Re P ogame MALE 2 ere naues pu eee ud 5 S pportserviCces x5 sccneceeeeserespese teer E DP PEU S E EGG NA ORAE WEE ox US RI eoe 6 Enterprise consulting suene RE REPRE M GENEE EE AE NERA 6 ica mI 6 National language support s 3o ERR eU br Ehe eere beo E E E ERE 6 Getting ln ecd 2o bb4R T eR E Ead EE 7 el M 8 Starting and stopping Picture Perfect cece ccc cece cece eee een hh hn 8 Related procedules aseene dt eda EE 8 Logging on to the system 5 2 eere deg oM eer pe nee p tan eda eee dor ea eq ie a UNS e e adeo 10 Fields and corittols icit tet rE REIHE ANE re pee SU OD EE A He 12 Related Kelte el 12 Selecting one or more facilities 14 F
289. efining departments on badge holders People page 76 Department Tab 12 Create personnel type records in addition to those Access See Defining personnel types on provided by the system so you can assign a personnel type People page 77 to badge holders Personnel Type Tab 13 Create facility permission profile records in addition to Control See Creating facility permission Global provided by the system that describe an operator s Operators profiles on page 81 level of access to the various forms and fields The Facility Permissi functions included on this form are filtered by facility Ree Profile Tab 14 Create system permission profile records in addition to Control See Creating system permission Global provided by the system to describe the functions Operators profiles on page 85 each operator level is permitted to perform The functions Ss System Permission included on this form are system related and are not Profile Tab filtered by facility TEE 15 Create form profile records to associate custom forms with Control See Creating form profiles on an operator s permission Operators page 89 Form Profile Tab 16 Create permission group records in addition to the default Control See Setting up permission groups record All Groups Allowed to be used to limit operator Operators on page 91 permission to specific categories areas and or reports A Permission Groups Tab 17 Create permission records that combine system form and Contr
290. el network the polling interval is interpreted as is If however the secondary channel dialup is being used the polling interval is shifted seconds are interpreted as minutes minutes as hours and hours as days One side effect of this is that secondary channel communication failures are reported at the shifted interval For example A network dialup micro is configured with a polling interval of 30 seconds The polling interval is actually 30 minutes when running on the secondary channel and communication failures are only detectable every 30 minutes Input Select the appropriate input group for each error condition field Badge History Overflow Alarm History Overflow Groups Upstream Comm Failure Downstream Comm Failure Reader Comm Failure Note Only Individual input groups which are non boolean are displayed in the list box Advanced Lock on This feature allows you to configure a micro to lock a door when a special PIN number used to Features Duress signal emergency situations is entered on a keypad reader Passive Time Used to log a badge holder In and Out using the same reader by swiping the card the normal way amp Attendance for In and reversing the card or turning the card backwards for Out Taped Badge Suspend This feature can be configured to ignore multiple consecutive badge reads or to suspend the badge when multiple consecutive badge reads occur If this option is enabled the Taped Badge Count field is ac
291. el of permission for each set of records Facility to which he has access For example an operator may be assigned the facility permission profile A Facility Permissions at the one facility which allows full access or the ability to view update insert and delete at the record level on all Picture Perfect forms Full access also grants view and update permission at the field level At another facility that same operator may be assigned the No Facility Permissions which does not allow the operator any access to the records at all Table 38 Default Facility Permissions profiles Profile No View Update Insert All Page Form Permission Delete Insert Update SI NE S S View Y None Action Permission Manage Template Y Table 38 Default Facility Permissions profiles Chapter 6 Operator administration Profile No View Update Insert All Run Template Y Change Mode Y Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 39 Facility Permission Profile form fields Field name Description as Description Enter a description up to 60 characters This description will appear in th
292. elect Disabled if an exit button is not allowed to unlock this door but will shunt the door DI Pre Alarm Select Enabled to allow the Pre alarm Notification feature to activate See Pre alarm notification on page 381 for details on this feature Select Disabled if the Pre alarm Notification feature is not used Note Input groups for the above can be generic that is one input group and alarm can be used by all doors for forced held and pre alarm Keypad Select Enabled to allow the Keypad Alarm Response feature to activate See Controlling alarms using a keypad Alarm code on page 384 for details on this feature Select Disabled if the Keypad Alarm Response feature is not used Response Forced If enabled this feature provides further security by locking a door if a second person presents a badge to the Relock reader before the first person opens the door Example If a person badges into a reader but does not open the door and a second person badges into the same reader before the first person s Unlock Time expires the door will immediately lock This will show on the Activity Monitor as two Double Door Locked transactions one for each person Door Strike Door Strike Relock provides additional security by incorporating the ability to relock the door upon a door Relock opening or closing or after a specified period of time On Door Open When the door is opened the door strike will relock Do not use this option if you are using
293. elect this button if the output should reset after the number of seconds specified in the Duration field Duration There is a possible alarm override for a duration reset See Reset Outputs on page 119 Example You may want an output to reset on duration if the output device is a door strike and you want it to stay on for a limited duration of time Reset on Input Select this button if the output should reset as soon as the input resets Note If neither Reset On Duration nor Reset On Input is selected the output stays on If Reset On Input is selected the door does not unlock with a valid badge read Enable Output Toggle the button On if this output is to be activated when its output group triggers Normally Open The inactive state of an output is either normally open or normally closed Toggle this button On if it is normally open Note X Ask your installer how the output point is wired Door DOs are usually wired normally open Board Type a board number from 0 to 8 The micro controller s power comm board is always board 0 Use Table 69 on page 160 to find the board number and address where an output point is located Verify the board number with your installer Address Type 0 1 8 9 or 16 to 31 for the digital output address where the output is wired to the connector on the board Duration Type the number of seconds this output remains on when activated if this output is allowed to reset when
294. elected template Modify Duplicate Delete Cancel Click the appropriate button based on the action you want to perform Related procedures To add a template 1 From the Primary menu such as Access Configuration Control or Setup select a Secondary menu item and then click the appropriate tab for the form that you are creating a template For example Configuration Elevators Elevators Chapter 16 325 Data Generator and templates 2 To create a template from a blank record click oz The example that follows is based on a blank record Note Ifyou want to create a template from an existing record first perform a search and select the record that you want to base the template on A screen similar to the following displays Figure 131 New Template C Manage Templates for Elevators Create a New Template Use a blank record form to create a new template Use the currently selected record to create a new template Modify Duplicate or Delete an Existing Template Select a Template Template Description Name 1 Facility Modify Duplicate Delete Cancel 3 Click New Template from Blank Form A screen similar to the following displays Figure 132 New Template from blank form CE Template Management You are creating a new template for Elevators Template Hame E i Template Description Elevator De
295. elete columns will be selected by default Control Level This section is used to set up the field level permissions This window becomes active with data when Permission a form has been selected from the Page Level Permission section The data in the Control Level Permission window is shown in three columns None View and Update This window should be used to set the field level permissions for the selected form by selecting one of the columns Name This column contains the field description of each of the fields that can be selected None This column determines if the field displays on the selected form Vlew This column determines if the data in this field is viewable on the selected form The Page Level Permission View Update Insert or Delete must be selected for this column to be active Update This column determines if the field can be edited or not from the selected form The Page Level Permission Update Insert or Delete button must be selected for this column to be active Chapter 6 85 Operator administration Related procedures To create edit or delete a Facility Permission Profile record 1 Select Control Operators and then Facility Permission Profile tab 2 Refer to Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 Creating system permission profiles A system permission profile is a way of defining an operator s record and field level access permissions for Pic
296. en Use the scroll bar to view the entire contents of the report If you are having hardware problems and need to clear alarms that will not reset click Purge in the Alarm Monitor The system logs the alarms and deletes them all from the monitor even if they are not reset Remove Alarm Response Window x To clear a single alarm that is not in a reset condition highlight the alarm and click Remove in the Alarm Response window The system logs the alarm and its responses and deletes it from the Alarm Monitor The Alarm Response window can be configured to have the Remove button unavailable unless the alarm is in reset state or has the alarm control Immediate Reset Input set done on the Alarm form The configuration is determined by the Enforce UL Specifications parameter in the System Parameters form The default is No indicating the Remove button is always available When set to Yes the Remove button will be grayed out when an alarm is not in a reset condition Kai W Purge If you are having hardware problems and need to clear individual alarms that will not reset click Purge in Alarm Response the Alarm Response window Window Outputs An alarm may have associated outputs that require manual reset You can turn the entire output group on Alarm Response or off or turn each individual output on or off See To control Alarm Outputs on page 268 Window CH If you have Send Message permission this icon
297. enable Occupancy Counting and 2MR for the area To set up the area readers 1 From the Configuration menu select Doors and Readers and then click the Readers tab 2 From the toolbar click Find to locate the reader record you want to set up 3 Onthe Function tab under Logical Reader Function enable the appropriate radio button APB In APB Out T amp A In or T amp A Out Note In an area with Occupancy Control enabled e All readers in the area must be assigned one of these logical functions APB In APB Out TSA In or T amp A Out e APB readers must be set to Global Timed APB is not allowed e The logical reader function T amp A In Out is not allowed for any reader Figure 151 Readers form Reader Function Doors And Readers Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zone Doors Readers Reader Events Door Events L Description eg x E 4 x E e Reader Description Inputs and Outputs State Type Function Options Reader Function Logical Reader Function O Normal O APB In O APB Out O T amp A In Out OTA OT amp AOut 4 On the Reader Description tab under Micro verify that all readers in the area are assigned to the same micro 5 On the Options tab under Number of Badges verify that all readers are set to Single Chapter 18 345 Advanced access control features Figure
298. encryption DbSecComm 1 Log on to the system as ppadmin Start Picture Perfect again by typing rc pperf If this is a redundant configuration start Picture Perfect by typing pprscmd start primary or backup Log on to the Picture Perfect application Check the Picture Perfect log file for database errors by typing the following command logtail Press CTRL C to exit and return to the command prompt Query the database by typing query operator Observe the output If an error occurs due to the CSM module or Picture Perfect configuration it may appear here The correct output will resemble the following 1 Systems Adminstrator 0000 install 1 1 1 89fb511ffe93ee7826661cale3bb468dclad0ff2 0011 1 20041006 170806 1 System System system 1 1 1 0 0 1 20041018 194738 ER Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual To deactivate database encryption perform the following steps l 2 Log on to the system as ppadmin At the command prompt stop Picture Perfect by typing rc pperf k If this is a redundant configuration stop Picture Perfect by typing pprscmd stop Log on to the system as root by typing su root Type the following command to disable database encryption DbSecComm 0 where 0 zero Log on to the system as ppadmin Start Picture Perfect again by typing rc pperf If this is a redundant configuration start Picture Perfect by typing pprscmd start primary or backup Log on to the Picture Perfec
299. ent Configuration parameters of the output included in the email message can be set using the Parameters form See System Parameters Form on page 40 Note In order for the Email feature to work properly the Sendmail subsystem must be properly configured See your System Administrator or your IS department for assistance Example Alarms that are assigned a routing of Email are sent to Emily Lee xyz com Figure 23 Email Recipients form 9 Routings i Routings Route Definitions Route Points LI Email Recipients 2ggHxs r x 3 Emily Lee Email Description Emily Lee Facility GLOBAL hd f Phone Number sss 444 0000 Email Address Emily Lee xyz com Results 0 records New record is ready Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 33 Email form fields Field name Description Description The name of the person to whom the e mail is to be sent or a description of the group if using an alias up to 60 alphanumeric characters Email Address The e mail address to which the alarm is to be sent If you want the message to go to multiple addressees
300. ent There are eleven predefined routings already entered The system lets you use these routings to send messages to a printer history log e mail and or to the monitor The routings you create populate list boxes that are used in various aspects of the system Example The ABC Corporation is comprised of a single facility Global Therefore they use the default routings supplied with the system Figure 43 Routings Form Operators Modes Routings Backup Restore Access Secure Control Outputs Routings Route Definitions Route Points Email Recipients Alarm activity configuration MONITOR AND HIST HISTORY PARALLEL PRINTER NONE ALL ell MONITOR AND PRIN GL PRINTER AND HIST Ja 4E X o V Xx Routings o Dan Description MONITOR Yes Printer Facility a EN Ls pe PRINTER MONITOR GU Monitor O No No Qv Results 11 records B 107 108 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 47 Routing form fields Field name Descriptio
301. ent controlling terminal UDP A communications protocol for the Internet network layer transport layer and session layer which makes it possible to send a datagram transmissions from one computer to a recipient computer UNIX A multi user multitasking network operating system developed at Bell Labs in the early 1970s Linux is based on and is highly compatible with UNIX Unlock Time The length of time a door latch is to remain unlocked after a valid badge read or after an exit button activates This time allows the badgeholder to open and pass through the door Upstream A relative position on a communication line originating at a host computer Example the second micro on a line is upstream from the third micro because the second micro is relatively closer to the host Workstation An X Terminal that displays the forms that the operator uses to interact with the system connected to the host computer using an Ethernet LAN Local Area Network See LAN xdm The login utility used to allow an operator to log on to an X Terminal The operator uses an xdm window to enter a Login ID and a Password The X Window Display Manager xdm is the program that controls workstation windows X Terminal The computer monitor that displays the screens that the operator uses to interact with the system Also called a workstation X Window System A portable network transparent window system that handles graphics and multiple fonts in a hierarchy of windows on
302. ent window Column Names Select and apply column names from the Column Names list box which includes all the column names in the selected database table When you select a column name and click Apply the name appears wherever your cursor is located in the SQL window Enter SQL Enter the following SQL reserved words in the SQL window to form the beginning of each SQL clause Use Statement all caps to differentiate the reserved words from the rest of the clause Only the SELECT clause and the FROM clause are required WHERE and ORDER BY are optional SELECT FROM WHERE ORDER BY Instead of typing these names you can select and apply words from the SQL Keywords and Operators list box Query Parameters The Query window allows you to specify search criteria for your report If you do not specify any criteria the report will contain all information from the selected database table If you have a large database table the report may run out of space requiring you to limit your query by specifying search criteria Text fields You can insert or edit text in these fields by selecting the field and typing the desired text Text can contain wild card characters The asterisk is a wild card indicating 0 or more characters The question mark is a wild card indicating a single character Example You could query alarm history for all records with associated badge encode numbers starting with 123 by typing 123 in the Badge Encode Numb
303. ents on desired characteristics for all the readers doors and Places page 201 routings in an area for the duration of the event Area Events 39 Create reader events records to define and schedule the Configuration See Scheduling reader events on desired characteristics of a single reader for the duration of Doors and Readers Page 206 th t Seite Reader Event Tab 40 Create door events records to define and schedule the Configuration See Scheduling door events on desired characteristics of a single door for the duration of Doors and Readers Page 209 th t on Door Events Tab 41 Create alarm events records to define and schedule the Configuration See Scheduling alarm events on desired characteristics of a single alarm for the duration of Alarms page 211 th t SCH Alarm Events Tab 42 Create input group event records to schedule placing an Configuration See Scheduling input group events input group online or offline and to control the output Inputs Outputs on page 213 groups or alarms that are triggered for the duration of the but Event Ven nput Group Events Tab 43 Create output group event records to schedule enabling or Configuration See Scheduling output group disabling a specific output group and or to change its state Inputs Outputs events on page 217 to off or on for the duration of the event Output Group Events Tab 44 Create backup event records to schedule a system backup Control See Scheduling backup events on to run
304. er 10 Schedules and modes Figure 85 Input Group Event form CS Inputs Outputs mug Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zone Input Groups Inputs Output Groups Outputs Input Group Events Output Group Events Description Beserp on Motion Detector On Gu amp ES Bx o 4 xX SC Q Motion Detector Off GU Input Group Event Output Groups Description Motion Detector Off Faciity input Group 01 01 00 Motion Detector GLOB e Online Do Nat Care Online Offline Mode Iesse 2 Ei 4 M Begin Evert O At Mode Start At Mode End Time HH mm ss 06 00 00 9 Time Zone Context Micro xj E Sunday W Monday W Tuesday W Wednesday Mf Thursday MfFriday Saturday amp Results 2 records Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 88 Input Group Event form fields Field name Description Description Type any alphanumeric combination 1 to 60 alphanumeric characters Example Lobby AC Fail Off 17 00 M F Facil
305. er field Combo Boxes Clicking one of these buttons causes a list box to appear From this list you can choose an item or you can enter your own text by editing the text field at the bottom of the window Example If you want to query the history database by micro click the Micro button and the list box will list all defined micros for the system You can select one of these micros from the items list Click Ok in the list box to specify which micro the report will cover Chapter 14 Reports Table 114 Reports form fields continued Field name Description Date Time History contains a date and time stamp of when the transaction occurred Use the date Ranges and time range boxes to specify date and or time ranges for the report You can specify either a Daily or Continuous date time query Daily refers to what happened between a start and end time each day from start to end date Continuous refers to what happened from start date at start time through end date at end time Example Suppose you want to know what happened between 8AM and 5PM during the month of December 2003 Enter 12 1 03 as the start date 12 31 03 as the end date 8 00 as the start time and 17 00 as the end time and click Daily In contrast leave the dates and times as specified for the Daily example but click Continuous Now you would get all information on what happened starting at 8AM on the 1st of December through 5PM on the 31st List Boxes So
306. erator See Verifying Context time zones on page 168 Days of the Week If the event is a Run Time event select the days of the week that the event will occur Category This tab contains the active categories ordered by slot number that can be assigned to an area or an Manager area event To access an area a badge must match at least one category that is assigned to that area You may add remove or replace a category in a slot Click Filter to enter search criteria to limit the category list or use the type ahead search feature by clicking in any cell and typing the first letters of the item for which you are searching For more information see Category manager on page 244 Note This field is position sensitive when used in conjunction with area category schedules Routings Routings for selected badge activities valid invalid suspended lost unknown anti passback in an area can be routed to one or all destinations log monitor printers Example e For after hours in a high security area you can set up an area event that routes all badge activity to the Activity Monitor or e You can set up an area event to route selected activities to a printer or to online history files to be examined later Reader Online Offline Online All readers in the area operate online during the event Offline All readers in the area to operate offline not able to unlock doors but able to read badges pass badge data route and archive
307. es Routings Backup Restore Access Secure Control Outputs Operators Permission Groups Permissions System Permissions Profiles Facility Permissions Profiles Form Profiles Description P B AIFocity Perissi Si A Koo x OSC amp Insert Facility Permi GL et cee Pere ed _FacilityPermissions amp View Facility Permi GU Name j Hone View Update insert amp No Facility Permissi GU Alarm o o o Update Badges GU Alarm Activity Monitor View Operator Gi MyFacility Permissio GU Alarm Events Alarm Messages O oO oO Alarm Responses O Oo Area Events CH o O o fareas Backup Events C o D O Badge Activity Monitor Q CH Q a Q Control Level Permissions Cugicar rare Lost Input Group Lost Routing Occupancy Control j Update Permission Group Physical State Route Definition Scheduling hunting Results 8 records 5 Saveand exit the Facility Permissions Profile form To allow an operator to enable Occupancy Control 1 From the Control menu select Operators and then click the Facility Permissions Profile tab 2 From the toolbar click on Find to locate the Facility Permission profile record you want to modify 3 Under Page Level Permissions click on Areas and make sure the level of permission is set to Update 4 Under Control Level Permissions click on Occupancy Co
308. escription NOT IN Engineering Antipassback Reader Relational operators Relational operators describe a relationship between two values Use the following characters as relational operators ina WHERE clause lt gt Equal to Not equal to Not equal to Greater than Less than Greater than or equal to Less than or equal to For example the following SQL select statement retrieves data for employees with last names that start with the letter A or above and also start with letters below G in other words last names that start with the letters A through F 306 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual SELECT last name employee FROM badge WHERE last name gt A AND last name lt G Table 116 Data type relational operators Data type Greater than means Less than lt means DATE Later in date Earlier in date TIME Later in time Earlier in time INTERVAL Longer span of time Shorter span of time CHAR Later in the alphabet Earlier in the alphabet Scheduling reports If there are certain history reports that you want to run at specific times you can use this scheduling feature to run these automatically The scheduled report will follow the day and time settings specified on the Report Events form All error messages and completion messages generated as a result of the scheduled report process are written to a log file in the cas log directory called log mmdd where mmdd system date For exa
309. esents a record The records are obtained by performing a search by creating a new record or by copying a record When a search is performed the grid is filled with all of the records matching the search criteria All previous records that were in the grid are removed When adding new records the records are placed at the bottom of the grid and are marked with the new record icon D Clicking on a single row in the grid will highlight and select that record for editing The keyboard up and down arrows can also be used to move from one record to the next The record s field values appear in the various pages of the form If any field value is changed the Edit icon D appears next to the row More than one row can be selected in order to change a value for multiple records at one time for example updating a time value for all records Multiple rows can be selected by left clicking the first desired record then dragging the mouse and releasing it on the last desired record Non connected rows may be added to the selection by holding down the CTRL key on the keyboard while selecting the row with the mouse All selected rows will be highlighted When multiple rows are selected the pages of the form window will be cleared and the values replaced by asterisks Changing a field value changes it for all selected records If any field value is changed the Edit icon D appears next to the selected rows To quickly access an item in a long list in a gri
310. essage that you want displayed on the Alarm Monitor Chapter 7 123 Alarm activity configuration Related procedures To set Processing State colors l 2 3 4 5 From the Configuration menu select Alarms and then click the Alarm Colors tab From the toolbar click Find amp Select an alarm state from the list in the data grid Click Change Colors to open the color palette Toggle the button at the top of the palette to set the foreground color for the text and the background color for the background of the alarm message that you want displayed on the Alarm Monitor Click Save DI Once these changes are made the next alarm that comes in will be displayed with the new colors 124 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Chapter 8 Device management This chapter describes how to manage and control the various devices that comprise your Picture Perfect system such as digital inputs door contacts push buttons or sensors digital outputs bells horns lights and the micro controllers that control them Readers should familiarize themselves with the information in this chapter before continuing to other chapters in this document In this chapter EE DEDE 126 Creating output groups csse he 126 Crediing input pFONBS 1 Ae ee da abe stata da a 127 REENEN 132 Creating eHcrFVDIOH Keys 2 ond cin oa hes che Seen Seen dr d 149 ER 151 Defling tte E bb td eae chew eeh A DEP 158 la coo o7 PE 161 Control
311. evel of access the operator will have Example Full access View only Insert only or Monitor Define the permission records required using the Permissions form to describe what function the operator will perform Example System Administrator Site Administrator Badge Administrator or Guard Then assign a facility profile to the permission for each facility required You can assign the same facility profile to multiple facilities and permission records Example You could assign the Monitor facility profile to a Guard permission in Facility X and Facility Y as well as to a Badge Administrator in Facility Z Assign the permission to an operator using the Operator form Example An operator may be assigned as a Guard at Facility X with a Monitor profile and at Facility Y with a Full access profile On the following pages we will perform the steps necessary to achieve the following result for operator Mary Smith Mary Smith Badge Update Badges Facility X This combination allows operator Mary Smith to Administrator allows update access to update all records assigned to Facility Y on the records on the Badges form Badges form View Operator Global This combination allows operator Mary Smith to allows view access to view all records assigned to the Global Facility on records on the Operator the Operator form form Step 1 Define Facilities 1 2 From the Configuration menu select Facilities and then the Facilities
312. example if a break occurs between Micro 1 and 2 the host will communicate with Micro 0 and 1 from ttyl and it will communicate with Micro 3 and 2 from tty2 No communication is lost Figure 56 Example of direct communication Bi directional micros Host tty 1 Primary Port Micro 0 Micro 1 Micro 2 up host domm 1 up 0 down 2 up 1 downs ty 2 _____ i Secondary Port Micro 3 up 2 down noit Dial up micros A dial up micro requires an attached modem a dedicated phone line and one or more compatible modems attached to the host ports Chapter 8 141 Device management There is only one possible configuration for dial up communication uni directional which is detailed in Figure 57 Example of Dial up communication Figure 57 Example of Dial up communication Micro 5 The table below shows the micros that are supported downstream from dial up micros Table 57 Dial Up micro downstream support Dial Up micro Downstream support Micro 5 PX Micro 5 PXN M PX 2000 M PXN 2000 liegt PXNPlus DirecDoor No No No No PXNPlus Yes No No Yes Micro 5 PX Yes No Yes No M PX 2000 Micro 5 PXN with dial up Yes No Yes Yes M PXN 2000 with dial up 1 If the network connection fails and the micro has the dial up option it will behave as a dial up Micro 5 PX after it connects to the host for the first time There are events that cause the micro to automatically dial
313. extended such that during the day if an operator did not respond to an alarm in his building the alarm would be bumped to the operator in the other building Note Changes made to route points will not take effect until Picture Perfect is restarted Example The ABC Corporation is comprised of a single facility Global This facility is made up of two buildings Buildings 1 and 2 and the route definitions are defined as Building 1 and Building 2 Figure 44 Route Definition Form Routings Operators Modes Routings Backup Restore Hosts Routings Route Definitions Route Points Email Recipients Description T Route Def 1 a A amp b5 X o 4 a gt x H another route dei Fa Building 1 GU Route Definition Building 2 GU Description Building 2 J Facility GLOBAL e ditl lal 4 ssi LU Results 4 records 110 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 48 Route Definition form fields Field name Description Description Enter a description up to 60 characters This description will appear in the Route Definition list bo
314. f Jump To Operator 3 Select Jump to Operator The operator record associated with that user displays such as the following Operators Permission Groups Permissions System Permissions Profiles Facility Permissions Profiles FormProfiles T7 TY Q 4 amp EX o4 x G oe Systems Admin 0000 Operators User Name Systems Adminstrator Login ld Employee Id instat 0000 Locale English in the United States Time Zone HOST GLOBAL Facility GLOBAL Permission System Administrator GLOBAL E Receive Alarm Alert E Receive Reset Alarm Alert Receive System Notifications JL LDAP Authentication 284 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual To force a selected user to log off the system Note In order to perform this action you must have Force Logoff permission From the Main menu select Control Operators System Permissions Profile Make sure the Force Logoff action is selected on your System Permission profile Note You can not force the user that you are logged in as to log off The option will appear dimmed 1 From the Monitor menu select User Monitor 2 Right click the user entry to display the following menu User Monitor Alarm Monitor Badge Monitor Input Monitor Operator Monitor Status Monitor User Monitor User Monitor 1 9
315. f that area the system denies access This chapter explores various methods of managing the badges badge holders and the categories in your system You will need to become familiar with the following forms Badges e Personnel e Category Manager e Badge Manager Defining badges Information on the Badges form identifies the badge ID and format and also controls the function and capabilities of the badge Example In addition to his normal access control badge a security guard is issued a tour badge to be used when conducting a facility tour at specified intervals The guard stops at pre determined tour points along the way where he swipes the tour badge in a reader so the system can track his progress Figure 89 Badges form Ei SE IE x a I pe Badges Dates Options Notes Descriion Facility GLOBAL wel i Print Badge Badge Design Active LEJ mifare1 lt GLOBAL gt v 49 3 th ation completed successfully Chapter 11 225 Badge management Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 92 Badges form fields Field name Description Descrip
316. field http lt hostname gt Picture is either the host IPsuchas http 192 9 200 1 Picture or the fully qualified hostname b Verify that you have a valid Picture Perfect license Run skver on the server c Try removing the cache folders for both Picture Perfect and Java If the Picture Perfect cache data is stale the client requires a new Avatar jar file This will force the Picture Perfect client and Java to download and build new cache files from the server d On the Client workstation remove all folders under c avatar e Clear the Java cache from the Java Control Panel under the Cache tab by pressing Clear f Close all browser windows and retry logging on 6 Verify that the user logged into the client workstation has read write privileges to the local drive c Avatar folder If it is an Imaging workstation then also check the read write privileges on c Documents and Settings lt user gt Local Settings Temp GE SECURITY 7 Verify that the following inbound outbound TCPIP ports are not blocked between the client workstation and the Picture Perfect server See Figure 186 Note The default ports used can be over written by user defined port entries Figure 186 Troubleshooting ports Client Ports 8088 eifreqmgr outbound 9088 JDBC outbound 9089 JDBC DES outbound 8075 Tomcat Server outbound 8443 Tomcat Server SSL outbound Server Ports 8089 eifreqmer inbound 9088 JDBC inb
317. fies the operators to whom the message is to be routed A list of selected operators is displayed To add an operator to the list click the arrow on the Operator drop down list One or more operators may be selected for this route point As operators are selected or unselected from the list box the Route to Operator window is updated This is not a required field however if no operators are selected alarms with this route point s route definition cannot be responded to This field should be ignored if you are creating a route point that is used only for Activity Monitor routing Bump to Operators This field identifies an alternate operator to use if the message is not responded to within the time specified in Bump Time A list of selected operators is displayed To add an operator to the list click the arrow on the Operator drop down list One or more operators may be selected for this route point As operators are selected or unselected from the list box the Bump to Operator window is updated This is not a required field however if no operators are selected alarms with this route point s route definition will not be bumped This field should be ignored if you are creating a route point that is used only for Activity Monitor routing 111 112 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 49 Route Point form fields continued Field name Description Route to Permission This field specifies the permissions that an operator must
318. fo 4 El p Off to On Delay Time Results b 1 records 162 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 70 Inputs form fields Field name Description Description Type a description of the input usually including a wiring address and a written description Board Type a board number from 0 to 8 The micro controller s power comm board is always board 0 Use Table 71 on page 163 to find the board number and address where this input point is located Verify the board number with your installer Address The Address field indicates what digital input point on the board this input is using Type a number O 1 8 to 9 or 16 to 35 for the M5 The address depends on how the input is wired to the connector on the board Ask your installer Micro ID Displays the selected micro where this input point is located Click to display the Micros list box from which you can select the desired micro Off to On Delay The Off To On Delay Time delays the effect of the input described on this form when it changes state from Time Off to On This delay helps avoid
319. following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 114 Backup form fields Field name Description Include Select the database whose files you want to back up It is strongly recommended that you only Badge Base History back up one database at a time If the Badge database is not large then you can combine Base Optional Packages and Badge Each package should be backed up to a separate tape or disk file Save to Select the media to use for the backup Tape Disk File Note If Disk File is selected any file or path selected is appended to the system configured backup directory Destination File If you chose to save to a Disk File enter the name of the file system to store the backup Click Browse to select from a list If your backup file is expected to exceed 2 GB ensure that the location where the file is to be stored is defined as a Large File System Otherwise the backup file will be incomplete Generate Verification Click to generate an on screen verification report Report Base Tables This is an advanced option that allows you to select only certain tables in the Base database for backup or you can click Check All to select all the tables Other Tables This is an advanced option that allows you to select only certain tables in the various databases on your system for backup You can click Check All to select all the tables Related procedures To perform a backup l 2 From the Co
320. form The same area may be assigned to a door using the Area button on the Doors form Additional readers and doors may be assigned to the same area but an individual reader or door can only belong to one area The permission assigned to an operator determines which areas that operator can assign to readers and doors See Chapter 6 Operator administration Example The following areas require restricted access Computer Room the Archive Tape Room and the MIS Equipment Room Create an area called High Security Figure 74 Areas form fg Places Areas Categories Area Events pte IERT ee Area Category Manager Input Groups Routings Notes A ny Description OUTSIDE Facility E MEER GLOBAL E Permission Group ALL GROUPS ALLOWED lt GLOB e Physica State Occupancy Control amp Enabled spur cord Se Do Not Care Logical State O Disabled Onine C Enabled Offline Occupancy Count Shunting Enabled Disabled Two Man Rule Scheduling Enabled Disabled Antipassback Enforcement Normal Passive 4 Results 3 records Chapter 9 Area management Nested anti passback Nested anti passback requires that readers be used only in a designated sequence to enter or leave a highly secured area For each reader that is defined as a nes
321. forms screens where you can add change or delete information These forms can be customized to include only those fields necessary for your specific site Pop Up Window Alarm Messages appear on whatever form screen is currently displayed You can continue with the current form or exit to an alarm response form Online Help can be accessed by clicking the Help button to display a pop up help window for any form or field Help constitutes an online reference manual that explains every form and field in each form Powerful Query Function Picture Perfect uses Informix Dynamic Server a relational database management system RDBMS with a query function that reduces the need for printed reports The RDBMS frees you from canned search criteria Use the Find function to query and display data As an alternative to printing a report you can display the report on screen and scroll back and forth through data The RDBMS allows you to define direct relationships between separate database tables so that a single report joins multiple tables The report function also lets you customize reports with Structured Query Language SQL so you can pinpoint just the data you need Real Time Monitoring Badge activity displays in real time on a scrolling window with image thumbnails where you can scroll backward and forward through the transaction data or perform a transaction search Database Protection The system database is protected from unauthorized use by the
322. from communicating with the host or micro This strategy may also be cost effective if host to micro calls are less expensive than micro to host calls or vice versa Host The host will call back the micro Micro The micro will call back the host Note Acontroller configured as Micro Callback cannot be flashed with upgraded application code If you need to update the application code set Callback to None prior to running the flash program Upon completion set it back to Micro None No callbacks are required Dial on Specifies when the host should dial the micro with record changes Updates Always The host always dials the micro for any record changes that affect it Never The host will not dial the micro for any record changes Updates are made during the next communications session Ask Operator The host will prompt the operator to see if it should dial the micro for each record change Dial on Specify whether the host should dial the micros whenever the system is started Startup Always The host always dials the micro whenever the system is started Never The host will not dial the micro immediately whenever the system is started Rather it will wait a random amount of time no greater than the polling period before it dials the micro Dial Host op Specify whether the micro should dial the host whenever changes occur due to a micro schedule Schedule Always Update The micro always dials the host for any schedule update
323. g History Routing Default Badge Encode Format Standard 16 Digit Badge lt GLOBA v lt 7 f Default Badge Design LEJ mifaret lt GLOBAL gt Image Types Related procedures To set a default badge design 1 From the Setup menu select System Parameters and then click the System Parameters tab 2 Under Badging click Default Badge Design and select a design from the list 3 Click Save DI Chapter 13 Alarm activity monitors This chapter shows you how to view and control incoming alarms and messages that display on the various system monitors Readers should familiarize themselves with the information in this chapter before continuing to other chapters in this document In this chapter DyaFWeW oe ep NENNEN She cose Hed eRe Seda PE cease eens 262 EE 262 Monitoring miam E Rene ta eae chew eth Lewes cabin 264 EE 269 Monitoring badge activity eee 271 Monitoring Inpul oeM d e E dE ae ROC e ee e 278 Monitoring operator gc 279 MOI ERES Ae Oh does C dC eos eee Ze abba edes 280 Romi ECCL 281 Monitoring system performance csse 286 Monitoring log file messages 289 262 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Overview Picture Perfect allows you to monitor various aspects of your system using alarm and activity monitors as well as system monitors that monitor file systems database usage and TPS alarms Real time activity displays in a scrolling window
324. g ee EE e 280 Monitoring e TEE 280 Fields Gnd COMUGIS PEE 280 E Ee Helge ele 281 Monitoring USers cor ios cece sannu e fesuimelesde saspe yr Pene ex a Dd de O seks enkattesence 281 Fields dridiconttols uoi e bee etd b RR bus t bL LUE OE UR te adiens 282 Related procedures este ERRARE 95 Rd E SEENEN EET we bec AED titans 283 Monitoring system performance 286 Fields and Controls Lcd Eeer tiros 287 Related procedules occ err PEPPER DPI p RE E r EEA ED QA QE dur t canes 289 Monitoring log file messages s rosi kee cee cence e hh hh hmmm 289 Fields and corittols nd ENNER cede sad ENN e ENEE ache EEN ENN UE E eb RR e ane 289 Related procedures eee Etre et ed b eb keene Ee ee DE VR ERRAT VH 289 ENEE et EE EE EE NEE 291 EE 292 Creating and viewing reports 06 cece ccc OEKE KEE EDER EANET e eee tenn hh 293 EXOMPE eer EE te eeh 293 Fields and Eet TEE 293 Related procedures Eo See EE E d EE 296 Chapter 15 Chapter 16 Chapter 17 Importing archived dota 52 zr cose tar e dws be Dh dur VER de UNCLE TER dee ee VU dean ee 299 sns 299 Fields and coritrols s iiu 64sec na aru rre nnd xar rr RUE E rr pese ERAN E RES 299 Related DECHE E 299 Working With SQL cece dic ENEE le ul HES EA ec ure Teu rica mra Dad sedate ERE NOTE DRE EE de 300 Eene EE 200 ele EE 303 eelere 305 Relational Gperators s vss ases sk eu doo ddaenes uen een EEN AEN 305 Scheduling reports escrevi nero terr ore esa de TENENTEM
325. g in the report The sequence of column names in the SELECT clause determines the sequence of column headings on the report title bar FROM Use the FROM clause to name the tables where the selected data is located You can include join multiple database tables For example the following unfinished SQL select statement retrieves data from the category badge and department tables Notice that each column name in the SELECT clause has a table indicator If there is more than one table identify each column name with the table name since identical column names that belong to different tables cause an ambiguous error SELECT badge last_name category description department description FROM badge department category 304 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual The above SQL statement is unfinished because it requires a WHERE clause The WHERE clause is discussed next Note When selecting columns with the same name from multiple tables make sure to specify the display table For example SELECT reader description reader area description area FROM reader area WHERE Use the WHERE clause to set conditions on the select statement so that the query finds only selected not all rows in a table The WHERE clause describes acceptable values for one or more columns Use relational operators after the WHERE keyword followed by search conditions or descriptions of the rows you want to find See Relational operators on page 305 When your
326. g up permission groups Another step in restricting operator access is by defining permission groups which are assigned to areas categories and reports Note Permission Groups are not groups of permissions They are simply a way of grouping areas categories and reports to restrict access by operators There are two types of permission groups Area Category and Report e An Area Category permission group defines the categories and areas that an operator is permitted to assign The system requires at least one permission group in addition to the default permission group All Groups Allowed The All Groups Allowed permission group gives an operator full access to all Category groups and all Area groups Each permission group created with the Area Category type will appear on both the Area Permission Group and Category Permission Group list boxes of the Permissions form along with the default All Groups Allowed A Report Permission Group can be assigned to reports if the Enforce Report Permissions option is enabled through the System Parameters form This offers the capability to assign reports to report permission groups and to restrict operator report access to only those reports that the operator permission record specifies The All Groups Allowed permission group gives an operator full access to all Report Groups Each permission group created with the Report type will appear on the Report Permission Group list box of the Permissions form al
327. ge holder can open the door and not get a Door Forced Open alarm Allowable Enter the number of seconds that this door may be open due to a valid badge read before an alarm condition Open Time exists Be sure to set the Held Open Sensing button to Detected in the Door Control box to activate this secs feature Chapter 9 Area management Table 80 Doors form fields continued Field name Description Keypad Enter the number of minutes that this door may remain open due to a badge holder entering an override code Shunt Time into a keypad reader mins Example Shipping and Receiving may use the override time to keep a shipping door open beyond the Allowable Open Time Door Area Click Door Area to display the Areas list box Select the desired area for this door If a reader is associated with this door select the same area that is assigned to the reader Strike Output Click the Strike Output button to display the Outputs list box Select the desired door strike output associated with this door and then click Close The door output is a digital output DO point associated with the door strike Note Select a door strike output that is wired to the same micro as the associated door sensor input The system displays a popup message to the operator if an output point is selected on the wrong micro Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box By default the door record will be assigned the same facil
328. ges issue date time context to be the same as person s activation date time context Note Typethe slashes if the system date format requires them Active Time Enter the time the personnel record became active If this field is left blank the system will automatically enter the current time Note Type the colons if the system time format requires them TZ Context The time zone to which the Activate Date and Time apply See verifying time zones on page 168 Deactive Date The date when the personnel record becomes deactivated by the system If the date is in the past none of the badges belonging to this badge holder will be usable Note Change of a person s Deactivation date time context so it falls before its badges expiration date time context will change all its badges expiration date time context to be the same as person s deactivation date time context Deactive Time The time when the personnel record becomes deactivated by the system If the date is in the past none of the badges belonging to this badge holder will be usable TZ Context The time zone to which the Deactivate Date and Time apply See verifying time zones on page 168 233 234 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 93 Personnel form fields continued Field name Description APB Control When used in conjunction with anti passback readers the Antipassback status of any badge belonging to this badge holder plus a categor
329. gh the toggle reader Control s input is deactivated therefore the Vault input group cannot trigger an alarm even though the motion detectors will activate the Motion input group while the guard 131 132 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual is in the area When the patrol of the vault is finished the guard swipes their badge through the toggle reader again this time to activate it Figure 53 Example of a Parent Input Group Input Group 1 motion detector Input Group 2 Output Group motion detector Input Group ses Vault Motion Boolean type ANY Input Group 3 motion detector Parent Input Group Vault Boolean type ALL Alarm Vault Input Group Control Non boolean TRIGGER ON INPUT WW Related procedures To create edit or delete an Input Group record 1 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs and then Input Groups tab 2 Refer to Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 Defining micros Each micro controller micro controls specific input and output devices such as readers doors and alarms For the micro to work correctly you must define communication port characteristics such as communication retries polling interval port assignment and micro address The micro address set in the software must match the micro address in the hardware Micro error conditions need to be associated with alarms input groups and output gro
330. gured Devices Click Refresh to display the total number of devices currently connected to the host Alarm State Click Refresh to display information about the most recent alarm as well as the current total number of active and pending alarms 47 48 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Tab Field name History Flags Description Click Refresh to view an archive indicator for each history type Yes indicates it is time to archive History Counts The total number of history records in the database for each history type System Diagnostics A list of all Picture Perfect sub systems from which you may select to generate diagnostic information to a log file Password Minimum Length Cannot Begin with Numeric Character The minimum number of alpha numeric characters that a password must contain within the range of 6 to 60 Check to require that passwords begin with an alpha character they can not start with a numeric character Cannot End with Numeric Character Check to require that passwords end with an alpha character they can not end with a numeric character Must be Mixed Case Check to require that passwords contain both upper and lower case characters Must Contain Alpha Numeric Characters Check to require that passwords contain both alpha and numeric characters If selected enter the minimum number of numeric character required within the range of 6 to 5
331. h Notes Description MICRO 1 Facility Time Zone GLOBAL rf HOST lt cLOBAL gt Y L Micro Address Configure 1 amp Online j Pee Offline amp Normal C Elevator Nonexistent Fields and controls Upstream Micro Primary Port i Firmware Version Shunt Code Badge History Threshold il es HOST GLOBAL Downstream Micro NONE GLOBAL Missing Record 1 Secondary Port Missing Record 1 Facility Code 12345 Alarm Response Code Alarm History Threshold 95 i Controller Type O PXN Plus Direc Door Legac Controller Features Nested Antipassback The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow 134 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 56 Micros form fields Tab Micro Field Description Description Type a micro description up to 60 alphanumeric characters long Example Building 1 Micro 0 This micro description appears in a Micros list
332. h gives this operator permission to issue badges to all area and category permission groups without restrictions 92 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Figure 33 Permission Groups Form 3 Operators Operators Modes Routings Backup Restore Operators Permission Groups Permission System Permissions Profile Facility Permissions Profile Form Profile Description e gd m anaana d a 4 ME X o 4 x a Q NULL GROUP G PURCHASE SECUR G Permission Groups SYSTEM ADMINIST o STL BADGE OPERA G SYDNEY AUSTRA o PUR SHIFT SUPERY G Faciity BOGOTA COLUMBIA Gi T JOHANNESBURG G EE gn P d MIS Manager ol Manutacturing G Permission Group Type amp AreaiCategory Description Manufacturing O Reports Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 43 Permission Groups form fields Field name Description Description Type a description to identify the area category or report type permission group 0 to 60 characters Example Manufacturing Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box This field reflects the facility to which this record is assigned
333. h special attention to the items below The following fields must be set to the given value For the primary port you must select a network micro port For the secondary port you must select None Chapter 8 147 Device management CAUTION If the micro is configured as Network Dialup the polling interval is interpreted differently based on the current communications channel open to the micro If using the primary channel network the polling interval is interpreted as is If however the secondary channel dialup is being used the polling interval is shifted seconds are interpreted as minutes minutes as hours and hours as days One side effect of this is that secondary channel communication failures are reported at the shifted interval For example A network dialup micro is configured with a polling interval of 30 seconds The polling interval is actually 30 minutes when running on the secondary channel and communication failures are only detectable every 30 minutes Select the modem type of the host s modem 4 Complete the remainder of the Dial Up screen To add a configuration for a micro that is downstream from a dial up micro For micros downstream from dial up communication micros ports must be configured before adding or changing a micro and the head end dial up micro must be configured Refer to Table 61 on page 148 for a list of the type of micros that can be downstream 1 Select Configuration Micros and then M
334. he Outputs form A duration of zero turns on the output indefinitely On To turn the outputs in an output group On at scheduled times Off To turn the outputs in an output group Off during scheduled times Do Not Care See Radio buttons on page 27 Mode Select the mode in which the output group event will occur An event will not take place if it is not assigned to a mode and it will only occur in those modes to which it is assigned Begin Event At Mode Start If this is a Start End event click if you want the event to activate at the start of the mode At Mode End If this is a Start End event click if you want the event to activate at the end of the mode Time If the event is a Run Time event click if you want the event to activate at a specified time HHmmss If the event is a Run Time event select the time of day that the event will start Remember to schedule another event as the pair of this one Example If something is turned on every day at 8 AM it must be turned off at some time later that day Time Zone Context Select the time zone context in which the schedule should execute Host Micro or Operator See Verifying time zones on page 168 Days of the Week If the event is a Run Time event select the days of the week that the event will occur Related procedures To create edit or delete an Output Group Event 1 From the Configuration menu select Inputs Outputs and then click the Output Group Events tab 2 Referto Cr
335. he Run Template Group option on the toolbar of the Data Generator form The Data Generator guides you through the necessary templates required for all the associated records Running templates All Picture Perfect forms with the exception of the system forms such as Facilities and the various monitors allow you to run a wizard to create new records based on a template Your system is installed with some default templates that you may use or you can create your own See Managing templates on page 324 Related procedures To run a template 1 From the Primary menu such as Access Configuration Control or Setup select a Secondary menu item and then click the appropriate tab to access the form for which you are creating a new record For example Access People Personnel 2 Click A screen similar to the following will display Figure 125 Personnel Template 5 Run a Template for Personnel Choose a Template to Run Select a Template Template Description Name Facility his is a template for creating personnel records for laintenance Contractor GLOBAL iaintenance contractors 3 From the Select a Template pane highlight a template A description of what this templates creates displays in the Template Description pane 4 Click Run A Wizard similar to the following displays Chapter 16 321 Data Generator and templates Figure 126 Template Wizard Step 1 You are using the Personnel
336. he flash file After the flashing has completed one of the following messages will be displayed Flashing is successful or Flashing is unsuccessful See the log file lt filename gt for details Chapter 8 155 Device management The eFlash configuration file This is an optional file eflashrc that resides on the host in the root user s home directory The purpose of the file is to allow a Picture Perfect operator to define flashing requirements for the entire system once and then use part or all of the definition to flash or reflash micros as needed This file can be used for scheduling unattended flashing This file can contain a combination of command line arguments processing rules and comments Table 64 eFlash configuration file Arguments All of the following command line options can be included either one per line or you may concatenate many options per line p lt directory gt Specifies the source directory to search for flash files This replaces the default directory of cas flash eflash f lt filename gt Specifies a flash file to use instead of the default flash used for direct connect type micros PX n lt filename gt Specifies a flash file to use instead of the default flash used for network type micros PXN r lt filename gt Specifies a flash file to use for the DirecDoor controller s lt filename gt Specifies a flash file to use for the PXNPlus controlle
337. he list Update Select an item in the Custom List box It will be displayed and available for editing in the Item box When you have completed your edits click Update Set Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box This field reflects the facility to which this record is assigned For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Related procedures To create a custom list 1 From the Setup menu select Custom Lists and then click the Custom List tab 2 ClickNew amp 3 Entera meaningful description to represent the list such as Eye Color 8 Chapter 17 335 User interface customization Assign the record a facility from the Facility drop down list Click Manage to display the Facilities form where you may add or delete facilities from this drop down list You must have Manage permission to perform this function In the Element field type an item to be added to the list Click Add to add the item to the Custom List box Repeat steps 5 and 6 as necessary to complete the list Click Save to save your custom list To delete a custom list l 2 From the Setup menu select Custom Lists and then click the Custom List tab From the toolbar click Find o The record list window or data grid shows the results of search operations and allows you to quickly navigate through the records found by a search When an application is started the record list window Is initially empty
338. he reader as a Timed APB reader a badge holder s APB status will be set to In or Out and will return to Neutral after a defined period of time A Timed APB reader is useful in a site where a badge holder may enter a site by going through an APB In reader but is not required to exit the site by going through an APB Out reader If this option is selected a Timed APB Duration must also be defined A Timed APB status is local to the micro Reset Timed APB When selected this option sends a message to the micro to reset Immediately the Timed APB status back to Neutral immediately following a badge read APB Duration A value that represents how long a badge holder s Timed APB status In or Out is set when the badge is used on a reader before being returned to Neutral Chapter 10 209 Schedules and modes Related procedures To create edit or delete a Reader Event 1 From the Configuration menu select Doors and Readers and then click the Reader Events tab 2 Refer to Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 Scheduling door events When you want to change the characteristics of a single door rather than a group of doors in an area use a door event instead of an area event Use the Door Event form to define door events for each mode Defining an event requires you to select a mode set the time of the event specify a door and change one or more of the operating characteristics of the door
339. he readers doors and routings in an area during an event Table 5 Monitors Menu Sub Menu Function Alarm A monitor used to view respond to and remove alarms Badge A monitor used to control and view real time badge activity Table 5 Monitors Menu continued Chapter 2 Getting started Sub Menu Function Input A monitor used to control and view the states of input devices such as door sensors or exit requests Operator A monitor used to view operator history transaction activity Status A monitor used to view the current operating characteristics status for a micro controller s areas categories readers doors inputs input groups outputs output groups alarms modes elevators category floors and or version You can also view the status of an area s readers and or doors User A monitor used to view who is logged on and using the system Performance A monitor used to view server system performance Log A real time monitor that lists the contents of the Picture Perfect log file cas log log xxxx where xxxx is the current month and day Example cas log log 1105 for the log file for November 5th Tour If you have the optional Guard Tours package this monitor will display tour activity Table 6 Configuration Menu Sub Menu Function Facilities An application used to create and edit Facility records that group you
340. hich you want to assign Category Floors and then click Close Select Floors These toggle buttons are available only after an elevator is selected Toggle the buttons on for each floor that is to be assigned this category Scheduling elevator free access In order to schedule elevator free access a door must be defined on the Doors form and a digital output corresponding to a floor number must be assigned to the Door Strike Output field By using this setup a door can be scheduled to Lock or Unlock through the Schedule Door Events form When the door is scheduled to unlock the digital output is triggered and the associated floor s button is activated See Defining doors on page 187 and Scheduling door events on page 209 If a door is unlocked by a Door Event a badge is not required to activate the digital output corresponding to that floor This button may be selected by anyone not necessarily an authorized badge holder The digital output can be deactivated in the same manner by scheduling a door to lock using the Door Events form The button will not be lit and a valid badge will be required to access the elevator s floors For each floor requiring a scheduled free access its digital output must be associated with a door and each door must then be scheduled for a specific action Floor tracking When Method 2 is employed for Elevator Access floor transactions are generated and stored along with the floor selec
341. ical Alarms Alarms Tab 24 Define the colors that will be used in the Alarm Monitor so Configuration See Defining alarm colors on that the color scheme reflects the alarm state Alarms page 120 Alarm Colors Tab 25 Create output group records to be used to activate all Configuration See Creating output groups on outputs assigned to the same group Inputs Outputs page 126 Output Groups Tab 26 Create input group records to be used to trigger output Configuration See Creating input groups on groups when any individual inputs in the input group are Inputs Outputs page 127 detected Input Groups Tab 27 Create micro records to identify each micro controller and Configuration See Defining micros on page 132 define how it operates and communicates Micros Micros Tab 28 Create encryption keys to encrypt data between the host Configuration See Creating encryption keys on and the micro Micros page 149 Keys Tab 29 Flash the Picture Perfect application code into the micro eFlash See Flashing micros on page 151 controllers MicTool Micro Flash Utility 30 Create an output record to define the characteristics and Configuration See Defining outputs on page 158 the purpose of each output point and the output group to Inputs Outputs hich it bel Kee Outputs Tab 31 Create an input record to define the characteristics and the Configuration See Defining inputs on page 161 purpose of each input point and the input group to which it inputs Outputs bel
342. ich allows her to update all badge records assigned to Facility X and to view all operator records assigned to the Global facility When Mary Smith logs on to Picture Perfect Ifshe selects Facility X from the Facility Manager she will have access to the Badges records assigned to Facility X Access Configuration Control Setup Window Badges crs Ifshe selects Global from the Facility Manager she will have access to the Operators records assigned to the Global facility File Access Configuration Control Setup Window 33 Operators ctio Ifshe clicks Select All she will have access to the Badges records assigned to Facility X and the Operators records assigned to the Global facility File Access Configuration Control Setup Window D Badges up MM Operators ctio Depending on the System Permission Profile assigned there may be other menu options those not partitioned by facility available such as the following File Access Configuration Control Setup Window g Facilities 3 Alarms On File Access Configuration Control Setup Window af System Parameters Oz Chapter 7 Alarm activity configuration This chapter describes how to configure alarm and activity messages how to define alarms and how to control the way they display on the monitors Readers should familiarize themselves with the information in this chapter before
343. icro tab 2 Referto Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 3 Complete the Micros form with special attention to the items below The following fields must be set to the given value e Review the items that directly relate to direct connect micros e Callback None Modem type Downstream Dial up To configure a micro before it is on the system Picture Perfect allows you to configure a micro without the micro being on the system by configuring it as Non existent 1 Select Configuration Micros and then Micro tab 2 Referto Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 3 Complete the Micros form The Configure field must be set to Non existent To change a micro configuration Changing a micro is simply locating the record and changing the necessary fields Keep in mind that if you change the port or modem setting you may be changing the type of communications that this micro is using Before you modify a micro s configuration you may want to check the initial settings There are basically five fields on the Micro form that determine the type of micro communications being used Primary Port Secondary Port Upstream Downstream and Modem Type Refer to Table 61 on page 148 to determine what type of micro communications is being used 148 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 61 Micro communication Type of micro communication Micro form fields Direct Port None If a h
344. ida Click Facility and select Global Figure 42 Assigning a permission to an operator 3 Operators Operators Permission Groups Permissions System Permissions Profiles Facility Permissions Profiles Form Profiles Mary Smith Olga Xx Operators Notes e ECT AT User Name Mary Smith Employee Id l Login Id 1222333444 nsmith Locale English in the United States Time Zone acili GLOBAL Permission El Receive Alarm Alert T Receive Reset Alarm Alert E Receive System Notifications E LDAP Authentication E Permission to Change Password E Change Password on Next Login Password Expiration E Password Never Expires Expires in days 120 e Warn prior to Expiration days po US FL United States GMT 5 0 System Administrato lt GLOBaL gt YF The facility Global here is a reference to where these records are stored It has no bearing on the facilities this operator can access when assigned this permission Idle Session Time fo Results Orecords Change Password 10 Click Change Password and set a password for this operator 11 Click Ok to return to the Operators form 12 From the toolbar click Save 104 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual The operator Mary Smith has the permission of Badge Administrator wh
345. ields Oplage nat Ate EE EEN di d AER eh 14 Related procedures sy aca a hana MERA NSA ea dean pa en da BR E RN 14 Navigating Picture Perfect ccc ccc cece eee een en hh hh enhn hn 15 Terme bai cession Ee bh m EE EA RES EE IUS 16 Wars e r 22 The application wipndow I e e ee ena 23 MI 27 Conliurdapon CNOCKISE EE 29 OVCIVIEW O TUTTTT 30 Config ratior Steps eet ege Ee Mer EE Ne EN Reger E TEN VERNIS ERE EN D e QE qam 30 ci e M 35 EE EE 36 Creating editing deleting and printing recorde cece cece eee e eee e eee ee 36 CHEGLING MECOPAS E 36 elle EE 36 Deleting Meel 37 Printing Mee 38 iv Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Chapter 5 Assigning system parameters 0 Se EEN a by RE eR waded TE ER EEN SN EDEN EE wa CH A0 System Parameters Form EEN ENNER NENNEN NNN ENNEN EINEN NN ent reete EN ena 40 Fields and Control S eege EEN seca e aguas oul ENNEN EEN 41 Related procedures deieren EEN Ee 50 Configuring LDAP SUPPOTE eg EE eebe os mere reg ads eae bv OR bie eden ERAN a RT 50 Fields and Controls eigent bh See NEE ng el SE AER SES wooed EN Fields dand corittols 2 Nee ANEN EE Late de ME Ee EEN ER Related Procedures e del AE non ZA Ed EE eg ER Creating Ree UE ER Fields and COMPOS ege Stee e EE eer da gea RR OR EE 54 le Ee Melle elt 54 Setting p printers EE 54 Fields cnd coritt
346. if you trust the origin of the application More Information 17 In the Warning Security window check the Always trust content from this publisher check box and Note then click Yes This window appears because Picture Perfect self signs the SSL certificates and does not obtain them from a third party If you wait too long to click Yes the application will time out and you will be denied access If the timeout occurs close Picture Perfect and try again When toggling between SSL disabled to SSL enabled a client may encounter the following error message when logging in K SSL encryption failed to initialize Please shutdown the web browser and restart the Picture Perfect desktop In order for the client to successfully login it will be necessary to first close down the client applet window and close down all open web tops and perform the login again This only needs to be done once To deactivate client SSL encryption perform the following steps l 2 Log on to the system as ppadmin At the command prompt stop Picture Perfect by typing rc pperf k If this is a redundant configuration stop Picture Perfect by typing pprscmd stop Log on to the system as root by typing su root Type the following command to disable SSL EnableSSL 0 where 0 zero Log on to the system as ppadmin Start Picture Perfect again by typing rc pperf 60 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Note If this is a redu
347. ific input group and or to change its state to off according to a schedule Output Group An application used to create and edit Output Group Event records to enable or disable a Events specific output group and or to change its state to off according to a schedule 17 18 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 6 Configuration Menu continued Sub Menu Function Doors and Doors An application used to create and edit records that define how each door operates Readers Readers An application used to create and edit records that define the readers to which the doors are connected Reader Events An application used to create and edit records that define and schedule the desired characteristics of a single reader during an event Door Events An application used to create and edit records that define and schedule the desired characteristics of a single door during an event Elevators Elevator An application used to create and edit records to control access to floors serviced by an elevator Category Floors An application used to create and edit records to assign a category to certain floors of each elevator which is then used to establish a match between a badge and a floor when granting access Alarms Alarm An application used to create and edit records to define both physical and logical alarms Alarm Colors An application used to create and edit records to define the colors used in the Alarm Monitor so that
348. ified reader interval time door is opened Two APB T amp A OUT occupancy count decremented by two to zero Two valid badge swipes on OUT reader when occupancy count is two but second swipe is not within specified reader interval time NO Transaction 365 366 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Seed counter The seed counter option provides a way to e Automatically generate a unique Id number for each badge Automatically generate the badge Id BID number for each badge optional Keep count of the number of badges a person has been issued Keep count of the number of times a person s badge has been printed In order to use this feature the seed counter feature must be selected at the time of base installation The base installation will ask you a series of questions to help you set up the seed counter options The setup can only be done at installation For more information refer to the Picture Perfect 4 5 Installation Manual Changing the option settings later can cause difficulties If enabled three new fields will appear on the Badges form Reissue Count Reprint Count and Unique Id Reissue count Every time a badge is issued to a person this incremental number is stored to the badge This field shows the issue number of this badge and the total number of badge issues for the badgeholder to whom this badge is assigned for example 3 of 5 If a badge has not been assigned to a person the Reissue
349. igned the same modem type as the micro that port becomes compatible Note A port used for direct communication micros does not require a phone number Leave this field blank for direct connection micros The port used for dial up communications requires a phone number Baud Rate For direct communication micros select the desired baud rate For dial up micros 9600 is the required line setting for the Micro 5 PX Data Bits The required line setting is 8 Stop Bits The required line setting is 1 Parity The required line setting is None Chapter 5 System configuration Table 31 Port form fields continued Field name Description tty AIX Type the full path name of the port as defined in AIX such as dev ttyN where N line number This must be typed in lower case characters and must not be the port assigned to the operator s console Typically ttyO is assigned to the console Linux Refer to the following for Port Device Naming conventions for Linux systems Com Ports com1 dev ttySO com2 dev ttyS1 PCI 8 16 Serial Port Adapter 1 dev ttya01 2 dev ttyad2 3 dev ttya03 Table 32 Network port form fields Field name Description Description Type a port description up to 60 alphanumeric characters long The ports that you define here will appear in a list box on the Micros form so that you can assign a network port to network micros None will automatically appear in the list box
350. igure 84 Alarm Event form TR lll zu E Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zone Alarms AlarmColors Alarm Events Alarm Messages Alarm Responses j Description e 1 D ee Reuteto History cu Q amp MI EI wx o Xx m Route to printer Gu Alarm Event Description F Route to History Facility GLOBAL E E Alarm Invalid Badge GLOBAL e gee Routing MONITOR AND HISTORY lt GLOB e m EE E Online Do Not Care Online O Offline Mode NORMAL GLOBAL PS elle Begin Evet At Mode Start At Mode End Time HH mm ss 08 00 00 C Time Zone Context Micro v sg LN m E Sunday M Monday MfTuesday Mi Wednesday Wf Thursday MfFriday E Saturday _ Results x 2 records VM Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 87 Alarm Event form fields Field name Description Description Type an alarm event description up to 30 alphanumeric characters long Example Door Held Offline 08 00 M F Facility Click Facili
351. ill be logged off the system in 5 minutes Send Message Cancel 3 Alloperators that are currently logged in display under Selected Operators If you do not want one or more operators to receive the message highlight the login IDs and click the right arrow to move the selections to the Available Operators column Note You can not send a message to the user that you are logged in as Your user ID will not display in the list 4 Type the message in the Type your text area 5 Click Send Message to send or Cancel to quit To broadcast a message to a selected user that is logged into the system Note Inorder to perform this action you must have Send Message permission From the Main menu select Control Operators System Permissions Profile Make sure the Send Message action is selected on your System Permission profile 1 From the Monitor menu select User Monitor Figure 118 User Monitor Send Message User Monitor Alarm Monitor Badge Monitor Input Monitor Operator Monitor Status Monitor User Monitor User Monitor il PA Le e Totallicenses 100 Total Users 3 Licenses Available 97 Image User ID UserName Employee ID Permission Session IP Address Port Login Date Login Time Facility dmin 0000 System Administr ONZEBMEHKS 3 137 169 188 8087 09 01 2006 13 50 58 GLOBAL E Jee 5 888999000 Badge Admin LGPXUSDW 3 137 169 188 8085 09 01 2006 13 48 34 GLOBAL j 555666777 Badge A
352. in lieu of a badge swipe Press or enter the badge encode number and then press 8 Table 79 Readers form fields con Field name Description Swipe and Show Control inued This feature is only visi Chapter 9 Area management ble when the optional Image package is installed See Monitoring Swipe and Show activity on page 274 for more details on Swipe and Show Swipe and Show Select Enabled to enable Swipe and Show on this reader Select Disabled to disable Swipe and Show on this reader Note A reader cannot be defined as Toggle when Swipe and Show is Enabled See Toggle on page 186 Authorization Required Select Yes to designate a reader that will display a photo in a popup window beside the Activity Monitor and require an operator to unlock a door Select No to designate a reader that will display a photo in a popup window beside the Activity Monitor and will unlock a door without operator intervention Note The Yes and No buttons are not available unless Swipe and Show is Enabled Access cannot be granted through readers defined as Authorization Required while communications to the micro are down Logical Reader Function Select the desired Logi cal Reader Function for this reader Normal Used to grant access into an area Anti Passback In Used to log a badge holder in when entering Anti Passback Out Used to log a badge holder out when exiting
353. ine an operator routing for operator activity Click Operator Routing to display a list box of routings Select the desired routing and then click Close Person Trace Routing Define a routing for traced badges Click Person Trace Routing to display a list box of routings Select the desired routing and then click Close See Tracing badge holder activity on page 388 for details on this feature Max Records Max View Recs Enter the maximum number of records the system will have the ability to find and view This is usually set to 500 If this value is not defined the system will assume a value of 500 If this value is greater than 2500 the system will assume a value of 2500 This field controls the number of records shown in a list box Note This figure is dependent on system memory and number of users Do not change this field to a higher number unless authorized to do so by your customer support representative If set too high the system will use excessive memory and may slow down and become non responsive Tab Field name Record Remove Interval Chapter 4 Setup Description Specifies a period of time in minutes during which a group of badge records may be removed The system removes badge records for this period of time or until the number of badge records set under Record Remove Maximum has been reached whichever comes first If more badges are to be removed the system waits un
354. ing type quality location etc as required up to 30 alphanumeric Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box This field reflects the facility that this record is assigned to For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Queue Name The exact name of the print queue specified when printers were configured in the Picture Perfect installation procedure on the server The print queue name matches the printer name Example If the printer name is IpO then the printer queue should be IpO Related procedures To create edit or delete a Printer record 1 From the Setup menu select Printers and then click the Printers tab 2 Refer to Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 55 56 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Setting up workstations optional Use the Workstations form to configure terminals that may be used by Picture Perfect as badge issue workstations or if you have the optional Imaging package installed as Imaging workstations Figure 19 Workstations form Note Imaging Work LO NR Workstations Description Facility IP Address or Hostname 2 Imaging Workstation I Reader Issue HES Results 0 records Clear is now complete Do not define the host console terminal as a Workstation The host terminal functions only
355. iolation a valid reader transaction will restart the timing and reset the Pre alarm When the Pre alarm interval expires the Pre alarm resets and the sensing violation activates Typically the sensing violation is reset by closing the door Pre alarm notification methods There are three methods of Pre alarm notification An alarm can be sent to the host which if routed will be displayed on the Alarm Monitor e An audible warning signal can be activated e A combination of the above an alarm and an audible warning signal Disabling pre alarm Pre alarm can be disabled in the following ways Do not configure a Pre alarm input group for a door Disable Pre alarm on the Doors form e Configure the door with an Allowable Open Time less than or equal to the Pre alarm interval Disable the Pre alarm input group This entirely disables the Pre alarm by preventing the Pre alarm input group and its associated alarm and outputs from changing state Disable the Pre alarm input group s alarm This only disables Pre alarm notification It does not affect the outputs associated with the Pre alarm input group e Disable the Pre alarm input group s associated output groups and or outputs This only disables the Pre alarm outputs it does not affect Pre alarm notification When a Pre alarm is associated with more than one output they can be individually disabled using the separate outputs and output groups Note e Disabling a door s
356. ion Tabs The labels of the tabs that you create are displayed in this box Tab Sequence The order in which the tabs display can be manipulated by using the Tab Sequence arrows New Tab Click to create a new tab The label New Tab will display in the Tabs window Rename Click to rename a selected tab Example Rename New Tab to a descriptive label such as Personal Info Select the current text rename as desired and then press lt Enter gt Delete Click to delete a selected tab Tab Layout Preview Once fields have been added to a tab the layout is displayed in this window Width To adjust the width of a field select the field label in the Form Fields on Tab window The selected field layout will be highlighted and you can make adjustments using the Width spin box Height To adjust the height of a field select the field label in the Form Fields on Tab window The selected field layout will be highlighted and you can make adjustments using the Height spin box Available Form Fields The fields that you can choose to place on a tab Form Fields on Tab The fields that you have chosen to place on a tab Field Sequence The order in which the fields display can be manipulated by using the Field Sequence arrows Field Settings The field attributes are listed in this window such as maximum length Related procedures To create a custom form 1 From the Setup menu select Custom Form 2 From the
357. ion up to 60 alphanumeric characters long that defines a logical grouping such as a group of buildings a building a floor in a building or a room on a particular floor in a building Example Headquarters E mail Select the target e mail recipients to receive mode change notifications Note If it is necessary to send a notification to a large group of recipients for example all employees then an e mail alias should be used Related procedures To create edit or delete a Facility record 1 From the Configuration menu select Facilities to display the Facility tab 2 Referto Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 Note Before deleting a facility you should ask yourself two questions a What do you want to do with the records that have the facility assigned to them You will be given the opportunity to re assign the facility for those related records to Global or to change them to an existing facility If you choose to re assign them to an existing facility you should keep in mind who has access to that facility because that operator will now have access to those records using their existing facility profile What operators are already using that facility When a facility is deleted it will remove the facility to facility profile relationships for any operator using that facility The facility record is deleted but the facility profile record is left intact This means you may need to re
358. ion used to create and edit Route definition records to define where alarm and activity messages are routed Route points An application used to create and edit Route point records to specify when and to which operators alarm and activity messages are routed Email Recipients An application used to create and edit E mail records to allow alarms to be routed to e mail addresses 19 20 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 7 Control Menu continued Sub Menu Function Backup Restore Backup Events An application used to create and edit backup event records that schedule a system backup to run automatically at a specified day and time Backup An application used to generate a backup of your system to one of the following media tape or diskfile Archive An application used to archive your history data to one of the following media tape or diskfile Restore An application used to restore data from one of the following media tape or diskfile Access Secure Doors Inputs Input Groups An application used in lieu of scheduling an event to accommodate situations that require operator control It allows state changes for multiple devices rather than applying the change to each device individually through the applicable form Hosts Hosts An application used to configure hosts in an Enterprise Picture Perfect system Control Outputs Control Outputs An application used to al
359. is filled with all of the records matching the search criteria When adding new records the records are placed at the bottom of the grid and are marked with the error record icon e 3 Complete the form A detailed explanation of each field on the form can be found on the Fields and Controls section for each form in this manual Because all Picture Perfect forms are user customizable not all fields may appear on your form or they may appear in a different order All required fields are indicated by red text When all required information is complete the error icon amp is replaced by the new record icon i and the Save icon is enabled 4 Click Save This icon 1s unavailable if all required information is not entered or if you do not have the required permissions for the form Editing records To edit a record 1 From the Primary menu such as Access Configuration Control or Setup select a Secondary menu item and then click the appropriate tab For example Access People Personnel 2 From the toolbar click Find Q Chapter 4 Setup The record list window or data grid shows the results of search operations and allows you to quickly navigate through the records found by a search When an application is started the record list window is initially empty Select a record from the list in the data grid The number and order of the fields displayed as well as the placement of the grid on the screen left right top
360. is one Example If something is turned on every day at 8 AM it must be turned off at some time later that day Time Zone Context Select the time zone context in which the schedule should execute Host Micro or Operator See Verifying time zones on page 168 Days of the Week If the event is a Run Time event select the days of the week that the event will occur Related procedures To create edit or delete a Door Event 1 From the Configuration menu select Doors and Readers and then click the Door Events tab 2 Refer to Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 Scheduling alarm events When you want to change the characteristics of a single alarm without changing the input group or output group assigned to the alarm use an alarm event Use the Alarm Event form to define alarm events for each mode Defining an event requires you to select a mode set the time of the event select an alarm and specify one or more of the changes to the alarm Example During the business day you want invalid badge alarms to route to the log and monitor but after hours and weekends you want them to route to the monitor and a printer Set an alarm event for MTWTF at 17 00 to start routing invalid badge alarms to the alarm monitor and to a selected printer Set a parallel alarm event to occur on MTWTF at 08 00 to start routing the alarm to the history log and monitor 212 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual F
361. is replaces the default directory of cas flash eflash f lt filename gt Specifies a flash file to use for the 5PX micro instead of the default flash n lt filename gt Specifies a flash file to use for the 5PXN micro instead of the default flash r lt filename gt Specifies a flash file to use for the DirecDoor controller s lt filename gt Specifies a flash file to use for the PXNPlus controller x lt number gt Specifies the maximum number of micros that can be flashed at one time h Starts the HTML based online help u or Prints out the usage message m micro selection Specifies the micro to be flashed This option can be repeated multiple times To flash all active micros in the Picture Perfect database use eflash m a e To flash a specific micro use eflash m microid where microid is the ID of the micro you wish to flash microid Specifies a line of micros to be flashed e To flash a line of micros use eflash 1 microid Enter where microid is the ID of any micro on the line eFlash adds all other micros on the line to the flash list in the correct order To flash a micro using eFlash from the command line 1 Logonas root and open a terminal window 2 At the command prompt enter a command using the following parameters eflash c m01 p cas flash eflash f mspel70 dfl where m01 is the micro id and mspe170 df1 is t
362. issued To set up pre alarm notification 1 From the Configuration menu select Doors and Readers and then click the Doors tab 2 From the toolbar click Find 9 to locate the door record you want to set up 3 Onthe Inputs and Outputs tab enable Pre alarm 4 Click the Pre alarm button to display a list box of input groups Select the desired input group Ifa warning signal is required at the host an alarm must be associated with that input group Ifan audible warning signal is required an output group containing at least one digital output must be associated with that input group See Defining doors on page 187 Chapter 18 383 Advanced access control features Figure 183 Door form Pre Alarm C ntl CO CO 5 Click Save to save your changes 384 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Controlling alarms using a keypad code Keypad Alarm Response allows alarms to be cleared only after an input has been physically reset such as closing a door that has been forced open and an authorized badge has been swiped and a keypad code entered The use of this feature is intended for strict controlled resets by authorized card holders only This feature requires a response to access violations at both the host and reader levels The alarm response consists of two actions a response at the host or sub host and a response badge swipe and keypad code at the reader The badge must be specially au
363. it or delete an Alarm Message record 1 Select Configuration Alarms and then Alarm Messages tab 2 Refer to Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 Creating alarm responses Use the Alarm Responses form to write alarm responses that the operator can select when responding to an alarm The system allows the operator to enter multiple responses to each alarm Create at least one response message that is appropriate for all alarms Example Alarm Acknowledged 116 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Example In keeping with Global Corporation s Door Forced alarm policy once the operator on duty has dispatched the guard he selects the response Guard Dispatched from the list box on the Alarm Monitor Figure 47 Alarm Response Form A Alarms Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Alarm Colors AlarmEvents Alarm Messages Alarm Responses FERE guiExo x Responses Alarm Response Guard Dispatched Facility GLOBAL v lz D Results 1 records Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 51 Alarm Response form fields Field name De
364. ity Click Facility to display the facilities list box This field reflects the facility to which this record is assigned For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Input Group Select the input group that will be triggered by the event Online Online To allow an associated alarm and or output group to trigger if the input is triggered use an input group event to place an input group online Offline To prevent an associated alarm and or output group from triggering if the input is triggered use an input group event to place an input group offline Do Not Care See Radio buttons on page 27 Mode Select the mode in which the alarm event will occur An event will not take place if it is not assigned to a mode and it will only occur in those modes to which it is assigned 215 216 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 88 Input Group Event form fields continued Field name Description Begin Event At Mode Start If this is a Start End event click if you want the event to activate at the start of the mode At Mode End If this is a Start End event click if you want the event to activate at the end of the mode Time If the event is a Run Time event click if you want the event to activate at a specified time HHmmss If the event is a Run Time event select the time of day that the event will start Remember to schedule another event as the pair of this one Example If something is turne
365. ity as the micro to which the door is assigned however you do have the ability to manually re assign a door s facility This might be desirable in a case where one micro controls more than one facility for instance two companies occupying the same building that use separate doors for entry exit For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 M2MR Click M2MR Output to display a list box from which you may optionally select an output to associate with a Output warning device such as a horn or a strobe light The device is used by the Modified two man rule with door control to notify the team members in an area that a person desiring access has presented a valid badge at the reader The M2MR output is a digital output DO point configured to control the warning device The value in the list box may only be changed by an operator with Occupancy control permission granted When the warning device is triggered team members in the area should press the button connected to the exit button input before the door time out has elapsed at which point the warning will terminate to cause the door to unlock and allow entry to the area The M2MR output must be physically located on the same micro as the strike output Door Sensor Click Door Sensor to display the Input list box Select the desired input for this door sensor A door sensor is associated with a digital input DI point connected to a door sensor Note Select a door sensor input th
366. k Save This icon will not be available if all required information is not entered or if you do not have the required permissions for the form To view an existing report 1 From the Reports menu select the Report menu item and then click the Report tab 2 From the Select a Report Category list pane select the category for this report such as My Reports When you select a category the existing reports in that category display in the Select a Report list pane 3 To open an existing report select it from the Select a Report list pane Then from the toolbar click a Run 4 Click Print to display the Print Preview page From this window you may Save to pdf or Print to your local printer 5 Click Save 4 This icon will not be available if all required information is not entered or if you do not have the required permissions for the form Note Chapter 14 Reports Importing archived data You can restore archived data from backup tapes This data can then be used to run archived data reports for Badge Operator and Alarm history Example The following example is a restore of the Badge history archive Figure 125 Import Archived Data form Restore from Tape Disk File Source file faiarmbak Browse amp Backup Directory Archive Directory Delete Imported Data Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you
367. l 2 From the Access menu select Places and then click the Area tab Under Two Man Rule enable the Standard radio button In order to perform this function you must have Occupancy Control permission From the toolbar click on Find to locate the area record you want to set up On the Area tab under Occupancy Control enable the Occupancy Counting radio button 347 348 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Figure 155 Area form 2MR if Places People Badges Places Uf Areas Categories Area Events Description ES 5 o STLIGENERAL AREA a l ei X 5 L X a STLAIDC GALLERIES STL 2ND FLR OCC Area CategoryManager Input Groups Routings D STLNODE E Description STLELEC ROOM STLNODE STL TELCO ROOM STLIPARKING LOT Faciity STLICORP SERVICE GLOBAL v ess STLIENERGY CENT ga STLIKITCHEN Se STLILL HALLWAY Permission Group STLIDOCK SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR GLO e ees STLIDOCK VEST ate 4 STLAEDATA CENT SSS STL TEST FACILITY possis Occupancy Control ll Hr Sieg ES Si GE Occupancy Counting Disabled E STLIMASTERCOM UE A Det Cae STLISFTW DIST Logical State Disabled STLAE GALLERY R Online Enabled STLIEMBOSS les C Offline STLI2E PRD SPPRT Occupancy Count STL UNIX SUPPORT Shunting H STLIDATA C
368. lation Exin Area 16 47 80 91 92 93 94 106 110 128 130 135 174 178 179 181 183 184 189 194 200 201 202 203 224 234 235 244 249 274 280 292 338 341 343 344 347 348 351 352 353 354 PE EE IE 356 360 362 407 Area Events 33 172 200 205 244 249 342 Atea ENNER ES 271 Atea Permission Groups ss iei UR RD UE eege 94 Area Permission group 91 Attention Command ccssesesceseesserescevessseccesovevsaeceavensensdesadeadersiesnessvaseads 65 ER EE 65 Authorization Not Required ss essere 275 Authorization Reoutred sene 185 204 208 275 Autodialer Prefix iecore eee Hetero pe o e ree e EE 65 Available Lang ge i i cocer it mie erbe 407 B Backup 20 33 287 311 312 313 315 317 318 408 Badge Expired Badge opt oie tre eee ede e S PERI E Badge Fotti t aeter di renes Badge History ertet tte dene e D RODA ERI Etre rS Badge History Overflow ANEN 127 Badge History Thresliold iret es 135 Badge ld Form t ege e ie oed etre 75 Badge E 408 Badge Lost ie eee EE uetus arde tecto does 271 416 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Badge Mania get isc iciatis a rr E PRERE UN IEEE HERR 235 242 Badge Mem ee Ee tre ta eee PEE Pe rp ERG 385 388 Badge Only zustande edd 184 Badge or K yp d ee mre re E E RERA AEE 184 Badge Reader 408 Badge Stas caetera et E BR rede 408 Badge Suspended s e e
369. lder initialization errors are written to the log 401 402 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual 1d e Verify that all Java versions were removed prior to installation of the EPIBuilder package on the workstation If in doubt reinstall e Verify that the operating system is at the correct service pack level Windows XP professional SP3 or Windows Vista SP2 If the problem still persists remove and reinstall the EPIBuilder Imaging installation kit 2 EPIBuilder Imaging Kit Installation and Verification Sequence 2a Verify workstation meets minimum software standards e Windows XP professional SP3 e Windows Vista SP2 Note Windows 2003 Server or Advanced Server have not been certified for EPIBuilder Imaging software 2b 2c 2d 2e 2f 2g 2h 21 2j 2k 2 Remove all currently installed Access Vision packages From the windows taskbar select Start Settings Control Panel Add Remove Programs e Select any installed Language or Service Packs click Remove e Select Imaging Option 2 0 click Remove e Select Access Vision 2 0 click Remove e Select EPIBUILDER 5 3 Redistribution click Remove Select EPI Builder Runtime files for Picture Perfect click Remove Remove any existing versions of EPIBuilder 6 3 from the workstation Remove all currently installed versions of Java from the workstation Open the web browser and navigate to the Picture Perfect web page Do not launch the clie
370. limit the category list The following wildcards can be used to help delimit the search An asterisk can expand the search in either direction around a string of characters For example map would return map maps mapped mapping etc A period replaces a specific character For example map would return maps A question mark can replace a single character if one exists or ignore it if it does not For example map would return map and maps Related procedures To add a category to the next available slot 1 Click the Category Manager tab A list of all assigned categories in alphabetical order will display on the left pane If a category has been assigned a slot the slot number will be displayed beside it All available categories will display on the right pane 2 Select the desired category from the Available column on the right Slot The next available slot will be highlighted 3 Click _ or double click the selected category The new category and the slot number to which it was assigned displays in the Assigned column on the right 245 246 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual To add a permanent category to a specific available slot l Click the Category Manager tab A list of all assigned categories in alphabetical order will display on the left pane If a category has been assigned a slot the slot number will be displayed beside it All available categories will display on the right pane
371. line QU DIES Loose ey EIE ee AES ART EIER 164 Controlling Access Secure operations ccc cece 166 Verifving finie ZORES 2 sese Ee ae ade Gia gen Rc eos 168 126 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Overview The Picture Perfect software monitors input devices connected to one or more micro controllers and when an alarm condition is detected outputs such as horns lights or door strikes are activated Each of the inputs and outputs as well as the micro controllers must be defined in the system In order to accomplish these tasks the following forms need to be completed Output Groups Input Groups Micros Keys e Outputs Inputs e Time Zones Creating output groups Before you define individual outputs you must create output groups to which individual outputs can be assigned When an output group triggers all outputs assigned to the group activate An input group triggers one or more output groups Link selected outputs together by assigning the same output group to each output using the Outputs form Example The sprinkler system in Building 1 is assigned to the output group 0 1 00 Fire Output Device The first part of the description indicates the wiring address to which the system is connected 01 Microl Reader board 1 00 the address on the board The second part of the description tells the function of the output group Fire Output Device Figure 51 Output Groups Form 43 Inputs Outputs
372. lities This requires you to select an Emergency mode Input Group and one or more facilities This will allow an input group to trigger a mode change to the assigned facilities Chapter 10 221 Schedules and modes Figure 88 Emergency Form Modes Email Mode Events Emergency EY LOCKDOWN BOCA SH 2 A EN Exo 4 mii BUILDING IS ON FIRE S i Emergency Description BUILDING IS ON FIRE Mode 4 Input Group goo goo Fire in building BOCA RATON v Y Ee 01 1 00 Fire Emergency GLOBA e N nm i Rollback on Input Reset Assigned Facilities Available Facilities BOCA RATON BRADENTON Results i 2 records Table 91 Emergency Form Field name Description Description Type an emergency trigger description up to 60 alphanumeric characters long Example CAMPUS LOCKDOWN Mode Select the Emergency mode that will take effect when the emergency trigger occurs Input Group Select the input group that will trigger the emergency mode Only input groups with Broadcast State Change selected on the Input Groups form will be available in this list box Rollback on Input Reset Check to rollback to the previous mode when the input is reset Facilities Available Facilities Displays the active facilities available to the operator Assigned Facilities Displays the assigned facilities that
373. ll readers in the area are assigned to the same micro 5 On the Options tab under Number of Badges verify that all readers are set to Single Figure 167 Readers form Options Doors And Readers ote E Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zone Doors Readers Reader Events Door Events Description 15 1 00 STLMAINT 15 1 01 STLILLE C 15 2 00 STLALE C 15 2 01 STLALE GI 40 1 01 STL 2N80 40 2 01 STL 2N104 32 1 00 STLILOBB 32 1 01 STLILOBB 32 2 00 STLILOBB 32 2 01 STL LOBB 31 2 00 STLIEMPL 31 2 01 STL EMPL 31 3 00 STL EMPL 31 3 01 STL EMPL 53 01 01 DTR SEI 53 03 01 DTR DBI 53 03 00 DTRISTE 53 02 01 DTRANNE 53 02 00 DTR TAN 53 01 00 DTRIBAD 54 01 00 DTRISTE 21 1 01 STL OCC R 21 2 00 STL OCC R 22 1 00 STL 3E180 14 3 00 STLF ACILI 14 3 01 STLILLDEC 14 4 00 STLILLDEC 40 3 00 STL 2N980 al Q 4 dX ESX o4 9x iz Reader Description Inputs and Outputs State Type Function Options Results 118 records Isl D Number of Badges amp Single Double Limited Usage Enabled Disabled Toggle amp No O Yes Shunting Disabled Enabled Scheduling 8 Enabled Disabled Elevator Reader Yes No 6 Optional If you want to activate a DO such as a blinking light
374. ll records assigned to Facility Z on all forms allows full access on all forms John Smith Site Administrator Update Facility X This combination allows operator John Smith responsible for the to perform update functions on all records system administrative al dot assigned to Facility X on all forms functions for Facility X MOVIS UPELE access on all forms View Global This combination allows operator John Smith allows View only to view all records assigned to the Global access on all forms facility on all forms Jane Doe Badge Administrator Update Badges Global This combination allows operator Jane Doe to allows update update all records assigned to the Global access to records Facility on the Badges form on the Badges form View Operator Global This combination allows operator Jane Doe to allows view access view all records assigned to the Global Facility to records on the on the Operator form Operator form To link facilities profiles permissions and operators 1 Define the facilities in your system using the Facility form to describe the group of records Example Facility X Facility Y and Facility Z Note If your system consists of a single facility you do not need to create additional facility records H Chapter 6 99 Operator administration Define facility and system profiles using the Facility Permission Profile form and the System Permission Profile form to describe the l
375. llowing error messages during the login process please follow the steps below to troubleshoot and help resolve the issue An error occurred during login Please try again later Unable to transmit login message to host 1 Verify that the client workstation WS OS is Windows XP professional SP3 or Windows Vista SP2 and that the WS has a minimum of 2 GB of RAM 2 Verify that you are using Internet Explorer IE Internet Explorer 6 0 with Service Pack 1 or later Internet Explorer 7 0 or Firefox 3 0 3 Verify that the Java plug in used by your Web Browser is ava Runtime Environment JRE 6 0 update 13 Turn off Automatic Updates in the Java Control Panel under the Update tab 4 Verify that the client Java Runtime Parameters Specification for the JVM is using the recommended memory typically Xms256m Xmx512m for a system with 512 MB of RAM and not the default setting of 100 MB Chapter 19 395 Troubleshooting maintenance support Open and check the Java Console Panel Advanced tab Java Runtime Parameters Specification settings Right click the Java icon coffee mug on the Windows taskbar and then select Open Console Panel s The JVM memory settings can also be checked from the Picture Perfect client under Help About Picture Perfect About tab Max Memory field 5 Ifyou receive the error message Unable to transmit login message to host a Verify that the hostname in the URL on the browser s address
376. logical alarm caused when the door opens without a valid badge read and the door contact reports the door open state Door Open Too Long Downstream Duress Code A logical alarm caused when a door unlocked by a valid badge read remains open longer than the Allowable Open Time a shunt time that starts when the door contact reports the door open state A relative position on a communication line originating at a host computer Example the second micro on a line is downstream from the first micro See Microcontroller micro A special PIN number used on a keypad reader to signal emergency situations Enabled Reader A condition in which a reader is enabled to read badges An enabled reader can be online or offline See Online Reader and Offline Reader Encryption The encoding of data for security purposes by converting standard data code into a proprietary code ENQ An inquiry message to poll a micro to see if it is responding Facility A facility is a partitioning of the records of the database of the security system Facility Profile A facility profile is a permission set that an operator can access The operator s facility profile can be different based on the facility to which it is assigned Graphical Terminal Firewall A firewall is a set of related programs located at a network gateway server that protects the resources of a private network from users from other networks Form
377. low an authorized operator to turn outputs on or off for the duration of time entered on the Output form Table 8 Setup Menu Sub Menu Function System Parameters An application used to assign system parameters used by the system during the setup procedures Printers An application used to create and edit Printer records to define the printers configured during installation Workstations An application used to create and edit workstation records to define client terminals that will be used as imaging stations Badge Designs Badge Designs An application used to create and edit Badge design records to be used for printing Design Mappings An application used to create and edit design map records used for linking a person to one or more badge designs Custom Lists An application used to create and edit custom lists to appear on your forms to satisfy specific requirements Example You can create a drop down list of hair or eye color Custom Form An application used to create and edit Picture Perfect forms that include the fields and tabs of your choice in addition to required fields Example If your facility does not use expiration dates times on badges you could exclude those fields A custom form may be set as the default Table 9 Reports Menu Sub Menu Reports Chapter 2 Getting started Function An application used to control which activities are stored in history
378. lowing is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 37 Personnel Type form fields Field name Description Description Enter the identification name of the personnel type to be added up to 60 alphanumeric characters Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box Selecting a facility will allow the administrator to restrict operator access to those records in a specific facility For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Related procedures To create edit or delete a personnel type record 1 From the Access menu select People and then click the Personnel Type tab 2 Refer to Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 Chapter6 Operator administration This chapter describes how to control the operations that an operator can perform and the applications in which they can be performed Readers should familiarize themselves with the information in this chapter before continuing to other chapters in this document In this chapter 4071 Dc 80 Creating facility permission proiiles ccce eese 81 Creating system permission profile 85 Creating form profiles cocco esee eee ie eee eee Seas 89 Setting up permission groupe 91 Setting up pe
379. lse redirectPort 8443 acceptCount 100 connectionTimeout 20000 disableUploadTimeout true gt lt l lt Connector port 8443 maxHttpHeaderSize 8192 maxThreads 150 minSpareThreads 25 maxSpareThreads 75 enableLookups false disableUploadTimeout true acceptCount 100 scheme https secure true clientAuth false sslProtocol TLS keystoreFile cas db text tomcat key keystorePass install keystoreType PKCS12 gt gt For SSL connections the section in blue port 8443 needs to be uncommented no XML tags lt gt around the block of code listed below and the standard connections section in green commented out XML tags lt gt around the block of code listed in the next section lt Connector port 8443 maxHttpHeaderSize 8192 maxThreads 150 minSpareThreads 25 maxSpareThreads 75 enableLookups false disableUploadTimeout true acceptCount 100 scheme https secure true clientAuth false sslProtocol TLS keystoreFile cas db text tomcat key keystorePass install keystoreType PKCS12 gt lt 5 lt Connector port 8075 maxHttpHeaderSize 8192 maxThreads 150 minSpareThreads 25 maxSpareThreads 75 400 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual enableLookups false redirectPort 8443 acceptCount 100 connectionTimeout 20000 disableUploadTimeout true gt 13 If there is a problem connecting to the server via SSL connection e Verify th
380. ltation and implementation database merge and migration from one technology platform to another Enterprise Consulting takes the worry out of custom software development by handling the full project management delivery cycle from requirements gathering to project completion including delivery of documentation Training Training is extensive and all inclusive It provides for the needs of customer personnel at all levels management technical and system operations Classes are conducted by expert training personnel and provide extensive hands on experience National language support Language translations of Picture Perfect and the online help are installed as part of the standard product installation New languages will be provided as they become available through standard product maintenance releases If you require support in languages other than those provided by GE please contact your System Integrator Chapter 2 Getting started This chapter describes how to log on to and out of the Picture Perfect system and how to navigate the interface and common elements Readers should familiarize themselves with the information in this chapter before continuing to other chapters in this document In this chapter EE 8 Starting and stopping Picture Peiect 00 ccc cence 8 Logging on to the system 10 Selecting one or more facilities ccce ees 14 Navigating Picture Perfect scene 15 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual
381. ly when the associated package is backed up The syntax of the contents of the backup cfg file is package name directory or file to back up base etc passwd base etc group base etc security The following table describes the cba command line options Table 115 CBA Command Line Option Command Description o htable Rollover then archive the selected history table b Backup specified table or group of tables a htable Archive the specified history table r Force rollover on history archive only rt Retry rollover of times default is 100 d file Write to the specified disk file t Tape write to dev pptape v Verify that data was written successfully np Do not prompt for tapes if specified with c nb Run from netback e table Backup specified tables I file Backup tables specified in file The following tables can be backed up b or archived a Table 116 Tables that can be backed up or archived Table b or a Description badge ba badge table badge history base b basic database hist ba all three history tables image b badge photos and related files graph b alarm graphics if installed tour b guard tours if installed Chapter 15 313 Backup and restore Table 116 Tables that can be backed up or archived continued Table b or a Description thist ba tour history if installed visitor
382. m oon on Pending online Blue flashing icon 7 x Meng g g Che x Offline Orange icon Y 4 pe H e Micro Address Pending offline Orange flashing icon b g Upstream Micro Downstream Micro Flash failure Red icon HOST GLOBAL MICRO 1 GLOBAL T Resetting Purple flashing icon oira Elevator Flashing in progress Yellow flashing icon EEN amp Online Configured nonexistent Grayed out dimmed icon O ottine Nonexistent Micro with resent list Blue icon with hourglass UE 4 ll Host sekoa EN i eos Place your cursor over the micro to display a tooltip containing detailed communication status as shown in Figure 60 Figure 60 Detailed micro status Micros Ports Modems NetworkPorts Keys Micros Online Micros Offline Nonexistent Micros 0 Network Map 1 records ILS ExXxo s amp Micro Timing InputGroups AdvancedFeatures DialUp eFlash Description MICRO 0 Firmware Version Next In Line Primary Port Secondary Port Last Communication Primary Channel Secondary Channel Online Trace Reset Connected Nonexistent Downstream Micro NONE GLOBAL Time Zone HOST lt GLOBAL gt Primary Port Search operation completed successfully Chapter 8 Device management Table 60
383. m response from the Alarm Response window or by typing a response Alarm activity routing overview The Picture Perfect administrator may configure the system so that one set of alarms and activity is routed to a given operator while another set of alarms and activity is routed to another operator This allows Picture Perfect operators to monitor alarms and activity that affect their own areas It should also be noted that activity routing is restricted to badge activity and digital input DI activity Other activity such as operator activity cannot be routed to a specific operator To route all alarms and activity to all operators 1 Define alarm routings that describe where messages are sent See Defining routings on page 107 2 Assign a routing to each alarm See Defining alarms on page 117 To restrict the display of alarms and activity to specific operators 1 Define alarm routings that describe where messages are sent See Defining routings on page 107 2 Create route definition records that generally correspond to an area of your site such as a building See Creating route definitions on page 109 3 Create and schedule route point records that indicate the operators and when the alarms and activity are routed See Defining route points on page 110 4 Assign a route definition and an alarm routing to each alarm See Defining alarms on page 117 Defining routings Use the Routings form to define where messages are to be s
384. m should read the chapters which relate to their duties The material in this document has been prepared for persons responsible for and familiar with the security needs of the customer facility Read these instructions and all ancillary documentation entirely before installing or operating this product Refer to Related documentation on page xvi A qualified service person complying with all applicable codes should perform all required hardware installation Conventions used in this document The following conventions are used in this document Bold Menu items and buttons Italic Emphasis of an instruction or point special terms File names path names windows panes tabs fields variables and other GUI elements Titles of books and various documents Blue italic Electronic version Hyperlinks to cross references related topics and URL addresses Monospace Text that displays on the computer screen Programming or coding sequences Safety terms and symbols These terms may appear in this manual A CAUTION Cautions identify conditions or practices that may result in damage to the equipment or other property A WARNING Warnings identify conditions or practices that could result in equipment damage or serious personal injury xvi Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Related documentation Picture Perfect 4 5 Release Notes 460621001F Picture Perfect 4 5 Installation Manual
385. mat of your system time as set on the Parameters form The enabling and disabling of temporary categories is logged in operator history 247 248 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 97 Category Scheduler form fields continued Field name Description Context Specify a context of either Host Micro or Operator This allows you to schedule categories in any of those contexts Schedule Type Choose a schedule type of Daily or Continuous A Daily schedule type means that the category will be enabled each day at the Start Time and will be disabled each day at the Stop Time The default schedule type is Daily A Continuous schedule type means that the category will be enabled at the Start Time of the Start Date and will be disabled at the Stop Time of the Stop Date Days You can restrict the days of the week that a category schedule will be enabled A week day that is selected means that the schedule can run on that day A week day that is not selected prevents the schedule from running on that day This has no effect on the Continuous schedule type Related procedures Examples of how to use category assignment The categories on an area control who can enter the area when they can enter and how long they have access to the area Example 1 Control who can enter An area event can change the categories on an area for a specific time to control which badge holders have access to the area during th
386. match will generate a Badge History message with Escort Provided status and the matching category The transaction will be displayed on the host s Badge Monitor Timeout or any other termination condition will cancel the LED indication and post an Invalid Escort alarm which will be recorded in Alarm History on the Host Figure 185 Categories form Escort Required People Badges Places Areas 7 Categories Area Events Chapter 18 Advanced access control features Descripti 1 pg iz ALL CATEGORES A G f X o A X a NO ACCESS use Al fS Visitor all Categories Description Visitor Facility GLOBAL Permission Group ALL GROUPS ALLOWED GLOB e Type None Team Member Guest Escort Required Results 3 records New record is ready To enable or disable Escort Required l From the Access menu select Places and then click the Categories tab Click Find 9 to display the desired Category record Enable the Escort Required button Click Save 9j 391 392 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Chapter 19 Troubleshooting maintenance support This chapter provides information to help you troubleshoot problems as well as technical support contact information in case you need assistance with your GE equipment In this chapter EE rm 394 Troublesh
387. matically reset when configured online Select Offline to allow this installed and connected micro to be configured before it goes online This allows normal operations to continue without interruption by a flood of unexpected error messages related to this micro Select Non existent to configure a micro that is not yet installed physically connected Once the micro is installed bring up this form and select Online to put the micro online Time Zone Select the time zone in which the micro is located from the drop down list This allows Picture Perfect to display badge and alarm activity in the micro s local time It also allows schedules that span multiple time zones to execute in the respective local times See Verifying time zones on page 168 In order for an operator to use this field they must have at least View page level permission for the Time Zone form See Creating facility permission profiles on page 81 Primary Port Displays the selected primary port for micro communications Click the Primary Port button to display the Ports list box Select the primary port to which this micro is wired Uni directional micros require a primary port assignment and None specified for the secondary port Bi directional micros require both a primary and a secondary port assignment Dial up micros do not require a port assignment assign None to both the primary and secondary port Chapter 8 Device management
388. mation and archive that data If you want to generate an on screen verification report click Generate Verification Report Use the appropriate radio button to specify whether you are backing up to Tape or Disk File Note When Disk File is selected clicking Browse displays a list from which you can select the destination file for the backup archive Click Execute to begin archiving 316 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Restoring your database Use the Restore function to restore a database from disk files or tapes Keep the following in mind before you restore your database CAUTION Do not restore non history data on a running system Note The Restore function does not overwrite existing data To clear your tables contact your support representative Before you restore a database you should perform a database initialization For instructions on how to perform this task contact your support representative The Restore function restores database files only not regular files To restore non database files use the command line database restore option cbr or the database restore utility restore sh When a database is restored please note that data is not downloaded to the controllers until the controllers are reset Archives are restored to tmp tables Example The following example is a restore of the Badge table to a disk file Figure 124 Restore form Backup Restore 7 77 7 7 E Backup Archive Restore
389. mation is not entered or if you do not have the required permissions for the form From the Picture Perfect Setup menu select System Parameters and then click the LDAP DN tab Fill in the fields with the appropriate data as described in Table 26 Click Save J This icon is unavailable if all required information is not entered or if you do not have the required permissions for the form Under Test Connection fill in the DN and Password fields and click Test From the Picture Perfect Control menu select Operators 10 For each operator record required enable the LDAP Authentication check box Chapter 4 53 Setup Creating facilities The Picture Perfect system allows you to group your system database records according to facilities A facility is comprised of records associated with a group of buildings in a city a building a floor in a building a tenant or a room on a particular floor in a building Facility records are text descriptions of these places Database records can be grouped together by assigning them to a common facility All Picture Perfect forms support facilities A facility field 1s displayed on each form with the following exceptions Although the Monitor forms do not have a Facility field incoming messages are filtered by facility Although the following forms do not have a Facility field access to them is governed by system permissions profiles Backup and Restore Custom Edit SQL Statements Force Log
390. md stop To restart Picture Perfect Use the following command sequence to restart the Picture Perfect application The third step is a command to stop Picture Perfect and is used to verify that Picture Perfect is not already running 1 Logonas ppadmin atthe console terminal Chapter 2 Getting started Make sure that no one is logged on as an operator Stop Picture Perfect For standalone or host subhost systems type rc pperf k For redundant systems type pprscmd stop Wait a minimum of 30 seconds for all processes to stop Start Picture Perfect For standalone or host subhost systems type rc pperf e For redundant systems type e pprscmd start primary e pprscmd start backup To shut down the entire system Software or hardware maintenance on the Picture Perfect system may require a complete system shutdown If this is necessary perform the following command sequence l 2 Log on as root at the console terminal Make sure no one is logged on as an operator To verify 1f anyone is logged on from a new window type smutl o 1 Perform the shutdown e For AIX systems type shutdown Fh now e For Linux systems type shutdown h now Note Type shutdown h to halt the system type shutdown r to reboot the system The shutdown command also stops Picture Perfect before shutting down the system Wait until the halt completed AIX or Power Down Linux message appears and then turn the power off on
391. me DST Start Time HHMMSS ight Savings Time begins in local time MMDD light Savings Time ends in local time DST End Time HHMMSS The time when Daylight Savings Time ends in local time he date when Day he time when Day UTC End Date YYYY T he date when Day The time when Day e UTC Start Date YYYYMMDD T ight Savings Time begins in UTC or GMT time e UTC Start Time HHMMSS T ight Savings Time begins in UTC or GMT time MMDD ight Savings Time ends in UTC or GMT time UTC End Time HHMMSS ight Savings Time ends in UTC or GMT time Related procedures To create edit or delete a Time Zone record 1 Select Configuration Time Zone to display the Time Zone tab 2 Refer to Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 Chapter9 Area management This chapter describes how to manage the different areas of access control in your system Readers should familiarize themselves with the information in this chapter before continuing to other chapters in this document In this chapter E 7 EET 172 Credling CETT ES ooir aa Re ERR n eh que hr e e eee 172 dioc IOI UC 174 Defining readers A d IN tees ceo eR eR RR DODGE A UR 182 Deminas UDOFE EEN e baa xm odes op eus 187 172 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Overview Your Picture Perfect system uses readers to control access to doors An area contains a group of one or more readers and doors You
392. me field on another form For example if Shunting is Enabled for an area but a reader in that area has Shunting Disabled the Shunting feature will not work for that reader Shunting must be set to Enabled on both the Areas and Readers forms 181 182 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Related procedures To create edit or delete an Area record 1 Select Access Places and then Areas tab 2 Refer to Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 Defining readers Use the Readers form to define how each reader operates and to associate the reader with an area a micro and input group so that the system can process reader activity Example A bank vault employs the added security offered by the Two Man Rule option requiring a minimum of two occupants in the area The door to the vault room is controlled by a reader The vault reader is wired to the following address 07 Micro 1 Reader board 1 00 the address on the board Figure 76 Readers form H Doors And Readers Doors Door Events Readers Reader Events mae Xo 7 x gio Reader Description inputs and Outputs State Type Function Options Notes Description 00 1 00 READER FFaciity S GLOBAL AT C r A To Area From Area EE ae 8 8 nt terval Time seconds Board Address Micro MICRO 0 GLOBAL X Y LUES gt Results 1 r
393. me query windows contain list boxes that allow multiple selections for valid and invalid transactions By selecting any of the items in the list you will be querying for only those records that satisfy that condition Toggle Toggle buttons allow you to specify values for various conditions By clicking any of these Buttons buttons you will be querying only those records that satisfy that condition Submit Accepts your changes and runs the report View Results Click to view a list of the data records included in the report Header Specify text to be used as a header to be printed at the top right of every page Footer Specify text to be used as a footer to be printed to the left of the page number at the bottom of every page New Click to create a new report Save Saves the current report with the existing title and current changes Use the Save As command to assign a new title to a new report Save As Allows you to save the current report under a different name with the original report still existing under the previous name The Save As window will appear Type a new name for the current report and then click Save As to save it and exit the window Delete Select the desired report and then click Delete Click OK to exit the window This option appears only if you have operator permission to delete Note If report permissions are enabled only the reports that the operator has access to will be displa
394. med APB Global APB Used as the default this allows the host to share APB status nested APB area status with participating controllers Timed APB Used to designate the reader as a Timed APB reader in which a badge holder s APB status nested APB area will return to Neutral after a defined period of time A Timed APB reader is useful in a site where a badge holder may enter a site by going through an APB reader but is not required to exit the site by going through an APB reader If this option is selected a Timed APB Duration must also be defined A Timed APB status nested APB area is local to the micro Reset Timed APB Immediately Used to reset the Timed APB status nested APB area back to Neutral immediately following a badge swipe APB Duration A value that represents how long a badge holder s Timed APB status In or Out is set when the badge is used on a reader before being returned to Neutral Chapter 10 205 Schedules and modes Table 84 Area Event form fields continued Field name Description Door State You can set up area events to open all doors in an area during normal business hours Unlocked Locked Example Lobby doors or common interior doors such as hallways Do Not Care See Radio buttons on page 27 Held Open You can set up area events to ignore doors that are held open Example Lobby doors or common interior Sensing doors such as hallways that are held open in an area during peak bu
395. ment Parent input groups Keep the following in mind when working with Parent Input Groups e An input group that is connected to a parent input group becomes in essence an input of that parent input group and is subject to the parent s boolean or non boolean settings Each input group can have up to three input groups as its parents and each input group can be the parent of any number of input groups An input group cannot be its own parent e Atree like hierarchy of input groups can be built with each input group propagating its state changes on to its parent input group Do not create a circular hierarchy such as A is a parent of B and B is a parent of A e An input group s alarm and output groups are not affected by its association with a parent They will all work independently Note Changes to parent input groups through schedules will only take effect on the child input groups after the controller has been reset Example of a parent input group A high security vault is equipped with three motion detectors and a security guard patrols the vault periodically Any one ofthe motion detectors must be able to activate the alarm but the alarm must be disabled during the patrol This scenario can be resolved as follows See Figure 53 Example of a Parent Input Group on page 132 1 Assign the three motion detectors inputs 1 2 and 3 to a Motion input group This input group would have a boolean type of Any so any single mo
396. meric characters Example Lobby East Wing 1 West Wing 3 Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box This field reflects the facility to which this record is assigned For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Configuration Select one of the following types Type Micro DO See To set up Example 2 in a Micro DO configuration on page 377 e Reader DO See To set up Example 2 Reader DO configuration on page 377 e Reader DI DO See To set up Example 2 in a Reader DI DO configuration on page 377 Micro When using the Micro DO configuration type click to select a micro from the list box If multiple readers are configured on an elevator micro the first reader controls the elevator Reader When using the Reader DO or the Reader DI DO configuration type click to select a reader from the list box Fire DO after When using the Reader DI DO configuration type select the Fire DO after Floor Selection to enable Elevator Floor Selection Access Method 2 in which after a valid badge read a floor has to be selected and if it is an accessible floor the DO will be activated Otherwise the default Method 1 in which after a valid badge read the DOs for all accessible floors are activated will be employed Chapter 18 Advanced access control features Table 125 Elevators form fields continued Field name Description Define Floors Click Define Floors to specify the number
397. more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Autodialer Enter the command string 0 to 30 alphanumeric characters used to tell the modem to dial the number that Prefix follows Dial Stored Enter the command string 0 to 30 alphanumeric characters that tells the modem to dial the phone number Prefix stored in the modem s non volatile memory Note Some modems can store phone numbers at multiple memory locations On your modem location 0 is not available for stored phone numbers because it is reserved for the host phone number Attention Enter the wake up string 0 to 30 alphanumeric characters required to put the modem into command Command mode so that it can receive other configuration commands and eventually the hang up command Attention Enter the string 0 to 30 alphanumeric characters that the modem returns to indicate that it received the Response attention command nitialization Enter the command string 0 to 30 alphanumeric characters used when preparing to dial out or answer Command nitialization Enter the string 0 to 30 alphanumeric characters that the modem returns to indicate that it received the Response initialization command Deinitialization Enter the command string 0 to 30 alphanumeric characters used to de initialize the modem when hanging Command up Deinitialization Enter the string 0 to 30 alphanumeric characters that the modem returns to indicate that it received the Response de initialization command E
398. mple 0302 March 2nd You must check the log file for messages after the scheduled report process has executed since there are no pop up window messages associated with this feature This scheduling feature can be used for both History and SQL reports and they can be run together or separately Each report type will have a prefix in the log file to indicate its execution History reports will have a prefix of hist and SQL reports will have a prefix of ppsql Note This feature will not support variables An audit routine that detects variables in the Report Events form prevents reports from being scheduled Example Define a report event that schedules a history report of the Badge database tables to occur at 8 PM every Friday Figure 126 Report Event form E Report Events 7 7 4j EXOowY 95 Report Event Badge History GU Description Badge History lFaciity GLOBAL man Report E Time of Day HH mm ss 09 23 22 Qq E Sunday Wf Monday W Tuesday Wf Wednesday W Thursday W Friday Saturday Printer PARALLEL PRINTER lt GLOBAL gt el AP af ave operation completed successfully Chapter 14 Reports Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order th
399. ms 7 Alarm Colors Alarm Events Alarm Messages Alarm Responses Logical State Processi Q Panes oJ ZS d ge Ki X E Set Pending S E EE Alarm Color Set Removed i Set Purged Logical State Reset Active j Tamper Reset Bumped Processing State Reset Notified Bumped Reset Remote Reset Pending Color Picker Reset Completed i Reset Removed poer Poen Reset Purged Color Sample Tamper Active EIL NM Ur Tamper Bumped Background Foreground Tamper Notified Tamper Remote Tamper Pending Tamper Completed Tamper Removed Tamper Purged Results 24 records Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 53 Processing alarm states State Description Logical State This field reflects the logical state Set Reset or Tamper of the selected alarm Processing State This field reflects the processing state Active Bumped Remote Pending or Completed of the selected alarm Color Picker Click Change Colors to display a palette of colors Toggle the button at the top of the palette to set the foreground color for the text and the background color for the background of the alarm m
400. munications micro requires direct connection to the host Communication can be uni directional as in Figure 55 or bi directional as in Figure 56 In uni directional communication each line of micros is connected to the host from a unique port In the example below Micro 0 through 3 are connected to ttyl Micro 4 through 5 are connected to tty2 If communication is lost between downstream micros the host continues to communicate only with those micros upstream from the break An alarm is generated indicating the loss of communication For example if a break occurs between Micro 1 and 2 the host will only have communication with Micro 0 and 1 from tty1 and it will maintain communication with Micro 4 and 5 from tty2 Communication with Micro 2 and 3 is lost Figure 55 Example of direct communication Uni directional micros Host i tty 4 reen n Micro 0 Micro 1 Micro 2 Micro 3 up bot down 1 up 0 down 2 up i dowis up 2 downnons Micro 4 Micro 5 up hort down up 4 down none In bi directional communication the micros are connected to the host using a primary port at one end tty1 and an alternate port at the other end tty2 If communication is lost between any micros the host will communicate from the primary port to all micros upstream from the break and from the alternate port in the opposite direction to all micros upstream from the break Using this method communication with all micros is maintained For
401. n Description Type a description 0 to 60 characters to identify the type of messages to be routed Example Badge Activity Operator Messages Overnight Messages or ALL A single routing description can include multiple routing destinations Example You may want messages received overnight to be routed to the printer the monitor and the history log Printer Select Yes to select a printer as a destination where you want messages to be routed From the Printer drop down list select the specific printer queue Monitor Select Yes to display the message on the alarm and activity monitor this choice does not create a history record Note Monitor must be selected as a routing destination in order for an operator to respond to an alarm History Select Ves to record the transaction message in the database history table this allows the message to be referenced for history reporting Email Select Yes to route messages to an email address or alias The e mail drop down list contains all of the email addresses currently defined in the system Select the desired addresses from the list box Note Yes must be selected for Monitor in order for this feature to be enabled Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box This field reflects the facility to which this record is assigned For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Related procedures To create edit or delete a Routing record 1 Sele
402. n 1 GLOBAL ES fS 8 9 amp amp lookup field test design GLOBA E73 mht empty badge design lt GLOg If mapping personnel type GLOB v Select a badge design or a design mapping from the drop down list Beside each design one or two icons appear The Person icon indicates the design references a field on the Personnel form and therefore a personnel record must be selected in order to print a badge using this design The Badge icon indicates the design references a field on the Badge form and therefore a badge record must be selected to print a badge using this design e If both icons display both a personnel and a badge record must be selected in order to print the badge Print m Click to print a badge Note If this button appears dimmed refer to Overview on page 394 for assistance Preview Page Setup and Options b Click to view a badge without printing to a printer Note If this button appears dimmed refer to Overview on page 394 for assistance Click to display the Print Options dialog from which you can select the following options Page Setup Click to select the page orientation Portrait or Landscape and the number of badges to be displayed across and down a page Note The page orientation must match the badge design orientation for the badge to print correctly Encoder Setup Displays the Card Printer Encoder Setup dial
403. n Manage Templates must be enabled on the Facility Permissions Profile form This function allows users to create a new template from a blank form or use an existing record as the basis for a new template Existing templates may be modified deleted or duplicated Example The following example reflects the Manage Templates dialog for the Categories form Figure 130 Manage Template Manage Templates for Categories Create a New Template New Template from Blank Form Use a blank record form to create a new template New Template from Record Use the currently selected record to create a new template Modify Duplicate or Delete an Existing Template Select a Template Template Description Hame Facility Duplicate Fields and controls Table 121 Manage template form fields Field name Description Create a New Template New Template from Blank Form Click to create a new template from a blank form with all fields initially empty New Template from Record Click to create a new template based on an existing record The fields in the new template are populated with the information from the existing record Modify Duplicate or Select a Template From the list of existing templates select the template you want to modify Delete an Existing duplicate or delete Template Template Description This field is view only and reflects the description of the s
404. n e cnet een rrr rnrn 386 Keypad alarm response configuration 06 e cece cece cece ea 386 Tracing badge holder activity cece ccc ccc eee cence LEREN E eee nmn 388 Escort required cese ERR Re GR ver RE EEN RE te eed EN e SE EEN ERE E 390 Troubleshooting maintenance support 393 ov PTT 394 Troubleshooting your Picture Perfect 4 5 system cece cece cece eee eee n nnn 394 Troubleshooting T lee eu ny asses ademas PE Ta estre om anes E HEEN 394 Log on troubleshootitiguss or dd nete lge e e dls poterat E p mand dd d E MIB eus 394 Imaging troubleshooting ee he hh hn 401 Contacting Technical Support 406 WERiddd RATE ARM ERE EAS TT OT E d ag aee TTT dine TTT Pee ee es qas Eod 407 DUpPSUS Sd pde QURE QR E DES IUE NA Ves scd EE 415 xiii xiv Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual XV Preface References to Picture Perfect 4 5 for AIX are subject to availability currently planned for late 2010 This document provides instructions for initial setup and configuration of the Picture Perfect system and for configuration changes to an existing system It also contains information for operating the system once it is installed This document is intended for system administrators who are responsible for the planning and implementation of the system design and who perform system configuration and setup using Picture Perfect forms that are accessible only to the master level operator Operators using the syste
405. n either direction around a string of characters e Text searches are not case sensitive Table 21 Wildcards and operators Item Function Son The system will find records such as Sonesta sonya SONNY son The system will find records such as Robinson jackson NELSON son The system will find records such as Masonry seasonal Other symbols and their functions include the following Table 22 Other symbols Symbol Function Equal to no symbol required Not equal to gt Greater than lt Less than x Match string Match a single character amp Logical and Logical or gt Greater than or equal to lt Less than or equal to Radio buttons Selecting radio buttons limits the search to records with matching selections e Radio buttons cannot be cleared Therefore when a radio button selection is not required an additional button Do Not Care is included in case a radio button is selected in error 27 28 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Check boxes e e Checking a check box limits the search to those records that have those options enabled Clearing a check box limits the search to those records that do not have those options available Leaving the check box as is with the indicates the value in this field does not participate in the search Schedule control When searching for scheduled events when an Event Time is selected
406. nager Badge Manager Images User Fields Notes EE Download Upon Save ADAMS E ABRAMS M Person Trace ACCEITTA F ALEXANDER __ Person Trace Alarm AMEND AMMONDS eye rieponte ASHMAN ASHTON an Keeser IBERSSON MMiddiyyyy MMiddlyyyy DAMECIO Active Date 0971971995 Eg Deactive Date 12 51 2005 Eg DAVIS FRIEND DEGARGER HH mm ss HH mm ss DELUCA i DEROBERTIS Active Time 14 07 04 WEE Deactive Time 23 59 00 ScHaTZ m m GIBNEY Time Zone Context Time Zone Context GRAFF Host Host GRULLON JONAS JONES D KENNEDY LISKER Netra EET Reset Timed App 500 records Click Save 9j 390 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Escort required Escort Required is a feature that can be used when a person or group must be escorted into an area by a person with valid access Escort categories are assigned as other categories to Area records and Badge Records A maximum of 10 Escort categories per Area record will be permitted The Escort category does not change access to areas where a badge holder already has access however attempted access to an area where the Escort category is the only match will start an Escort Transaction Note For PXN controllers you will see two additional valid normal transactions at the end of the escort sequence An Escort Transaction causes an LED on the door reader to blink indicating that it is waiting for an additional badge read The door remains lock
407. nal so the badge holder can use a code to override the Allowable Open Time e Held Open Sensing Forced Open Monitoring Input Groups Forced Open Held Open Pre Alarm Inputs Door sensor associated with a DI point wired to the door sensor 4 Click Save DI To define a door strike setting A door strike associated with a reader and or an exit device releases to unlock a door when a valid badge read occurs or when an exit device is pushed When the door strike releases the system starts counting the Unlock Time set for the door strike and then closes the door strike when the time elapses The badge holder opens the door during the Unlock Time 1 From the Configuration menu select Doors and Readers and then click the Doors tab 2 Click New Al 3 Complete the following fields of the Doors form 192 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual e e Description Unlock Time Strike Output DO digital output point wired to the door strike 4 Click Save To define an exit device An exit device releases the door strike on a door Exit devices are often used on lobby doors The exit button is associated with a door strike so that the latch unlocks and the sensor is shunted when the exit button is pushed You can enable the exit button and define how long the latch remains unlocked using the Doors form l 2 From the Configuration menu select Doors and Readers and then click the Doors tab Click New am
408. nals Badge Designs i Custom Form Badge Designs Design Mappings Fe EEATT E o mapping personnel GU a Design Mapping Deeg 00000 mapping personnel type 4 GLOBAL cara Map Values Map Field Field Value Desis 4 ARG TEMPORARY GLOBAL Temporary lt GLOBAL gt ARG CONSULTANT lt GLOBAL gt Consultant GLOBAL ARG EMPLOYEE GLOBAL Employee GLOBAL ARG VENDOR GLOBAL Vendor GLOBAL IE gt ee ese LJ ee Design Mappings Field Value Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 101 Design Mappings form fields Field name Description Description Facility The name that identifies the design mapping Example Facility Mapping to map all badge records belonging to a specific facility This is a required field Assigning a badge design record a facility allows the administrator to filter the records that can be viewed See Creating facilities on page 53 Map Values Map Fields The field to be used for mapping Department Facility or Per
409. name Description Asserts Strike Pre Alarm In Click to display the Input Groups list box Select an input group to activate The associated alarm will be Group triggered when a Pre Alarm condition occurs Be sure the Pre Alarm field is set to Enabled Note Only Trigger on Input non boolean input groups are displayed in the list boxes Door State Indicate whether the door is normally Locked pending a valid badge read or other event or Unlocked Scheduling Select Enabled to allow scheduled changes set for this door to take place Select Disabled to prevent scheduled changes set for this door from taking place Held Open Select Detected to allow an alarm condition to occur on this door when the door remains open with a valid Sensing badge reader or exit button for too long based on the Allowable Open Time set in the Door Values box Select Ignored if the sensing function on this door is not used Forced Open Select Detected to allow an alarm condition on this door to occur immediately when the door is forced open Monitoring without a valid badge read or exit device Select Ignored if the Monitoring function on this door is not used Exit Button Select Enabled to allow an exit button to unlock this door for the number of seconds in the Unlock Time field and remain open for the number of seconds in the Allowable Open Time field both set in the Door Values box Be sure to make a selection in the Exit Button field in the Inputs box S
410. nclude person fields These are indicated by a blank badge icon in the pulldown list No badges will be printed 4 Click Print B The badge will print to the printer designated as the default printer for the Imaging terminal Note If a secondary Printer Setup dialog box displays in the background access the window either from the Windows taskbar or by typing Alt Tab Then close the window Note If this button appears dimmed refer to Overview on page 394 for assistance To print a badge from the Personnel form 1 From the Access menu select People and then click the Personnel tab 2 Click Find o to display a current list of records 3 Select the personnel record whose badge you want to print 4 Click the Badge Manager tab The active badges assigned to the selected badge holder are displayed 5 Select the badge to print and under Print Badges select a badge design or a design mapping from the drop down list 6 Click Print B 244 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual The badge will print to the printer designated as the default printer for the Imaging terminal Note If a secondary Printer Setup dialog box displays in the background access the window either from the Windows taskbar or by typing Alt Tab Then close the window Note If this button appears dimmed refer to Overview on page 394 for assistance Category manager Use the Areas Badges and Area Events forms to assign new categories or to change or rem
411. nd at least two Team Members must be present in the controlled space until all Guests have exited Modified two man rule with door control The first two badge holders to enter a controlled space must be Team Members and at least two Team Members must be present in the controlled space until all Guests have exited Additionally before any subsequent badge holders are allowed entry a Team Member within the controlled space must press a door release button The door release button must be pressed within the time specified in the Door Release Timeout field on the Areas form or the door will not be unlocked A warning device such as a horn or a strobe light can be activated to notify the team members in an area that a person desiring access has presented a valid badge at the reader and is awaiting entry A digital output DO point is configured to control the warning device through the Doors form by selecting an M2MR output When the warning device is triggered team members in the area press the door release button before the door timeout has elapsed to cause the door to unlock and allow entry to the area 343 344 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual How to set up a two man rule 2MR controlled space You need to complete the following forms to set up standard 2MR for an area e Reader form To configure the area readers e Door form To configure the doors in the area Facility Profile form To enable Occupancy Control e Area form To
412. ndant configuration start Picture Perfect by typing pprscmd start primary or backup From a client PC browser window type in the following URL to connect to the server http hostname Picture When the Picture Perfect webtop displays click the Picture Perfect button in the upper left corner to display the Login screen Log on to the system Note Once SSL has been disabled operators should access the client using the standard HTTP URL http lt hostname gt Picture Database encryption The activation and deactivation of encryption for client server database connections is controlled by the DbSecComm script This script can be run anytime after Picture Perfect has been installed The Informix CSM module for database encryption requires the Libstdc so 5 library which is installed by the compat libstdct4 33 3 2 3 61 1386 rpm package Note Turning on database encryption will have a negative impact on client performance You do not need to have database encryption enabled in order to have client ssl enabled or vice versa To determine if the Libstdc so 5 library is installed l 2 Log on to the system as ppadmin At the command prompt type the following rpm qa grep libstdc If compat libstdct4 33 3 2 3 61 1386 rpm appears in the list of packages then libstdc so 5 is already installed on the Picture Perfect host Ifthe libstdc so 5 library is already installed on the host continue to
413. ne feature associates a time zone with items in your database that have a physical location such as micros operators or hosts Monitors display dates and times in the three time zones Host Micro and Operator and can be configured to display only the one you specify Date and time entry fields on event forms and on the Category scheduler specify a context of either Host Micro or Operator which allows you to schedule events or categories in any of those contexts Templates You can create master templates for generating new records with the necessary links predefined When a template is run a Wizard guides you through the necessary steps to create a new record for the form Optional features e Graphics Monitoring and Control The Graphics Monitoring and Control option allows you to use site maps of your premises and associate symbols graphic images or icons to object types such as doors readers micro controllers or digital inputs When the condition of a device property changes on or more of the symbols changes it s appearance based on the condition if configured to do so Import Export The Import Export option enables the transfer of Picture Perfect database information to and from external databases such as a personnel database It allows other applications to interface with the Picture Perfect database You can also use odbc and jdbc database connectivity to connect to the Picture Perfect database and make changes Redundant The
414. ne is the default In order to activate this feature one of the following must be selected DES Both sender and receiver use a single key Key 1 to encrypt and decrypt data Triple DES Both sender and receiver use three keys Key 1 Key 2 and Key 3 to encrypt and decrypt data Encryption Key System Encryption is performed using the default system keys Type Custom Encryption is performed using user customized keys This method is more secure Encryption Key 1 This key is used for a single DES algorithm as well as the first key used to encrypt the Data Keys in the Triple DES algorithm before transmitting those keys to the micro Encryption Key 2 The second key used to encrypt the Data Keys in the Triple DES algorithm before transmitting those keys to the micro Encryption Key 3 The third key used to encrypt the Data Keys in the Triple DES algorithm before transmitting those keys to the micro Data Key 1 The length of this field must be eight alphanumeric characters This key is used for a single DES algorithm as well as the first key used in the Triple DES algorithm Data Key 2 The length of this field must be eight alphanumeric characters This is the second key used in the Triple DES algorithm Data Key 3 The length of this field must be eight alphanumeric characters This is the third key used in the Triple DES algorithm Related procedures To manage the DES keys used
415. ng up printers on page 54 installation Printers Printers Tab 4 Optional Setup See Setting up workstations Set up imaging workstations Workstations optional on page 56 Workstations Tab 5 Create modem records to define the types of modems that Configuration See Configuring modems on you intend to use for dial up micro controller Micros page 64 communication Modems Tab 6 Create a port record to define a serial port for micro Configuration See Configuring ports on page 66 controller communications Micros PortsTab 7 Create a network port record to define a port for network Configuration See Configuring ports on page 66 micro controller communication Micros Network Ports Tab 8 Create e mail records to allow alarms to be routed to e Control See Configuring email on page 70 mail addresses Routings Email Recipients Tab 9 Create routing records in addition to the predefined Control See Defining routings on page 72 routings to define where certain types of messages are Routings t SE Routings Tab 10 Create badge format records to define formats required in Access See Defining badge formats on addition to the predefined 10 digit and 12 digit badge Badge page 74 formats Badge Format Tab Table 23 The steps for configuring a Picture Perfect system continued Chapter 3 Configuration checklist Step Task Menu Reference 11 Create department records to assign departments to Access See D
416. ng ways e Disable Keypad Alarm Response on the Doors form This prevents Keypad Alarm Response for both types of access violations on that door The following situations inhibit an access violation completely The violation is not reported to the host and Keypad Alarm Response does not function Access Violation input group not configured Access Violation input group disabled Access Violation input group not associated with an alarm e Disabled alarm associated with the Access Violation input group Disabling or enabling Keypad Alarm Response does not affect an active access violation Therefore enabling Keypad Alarm Response while a door is forced open does not change the fact that the violation resets as soon as the door closes The change has no effect until the current violation ends Tracing badge holder activity This feature allows an operator to trace an individual badge holder and route activity to a specific routing location regardless of the routing definition for each of the area s input groups When the traced badge holder swipes a badge through a reader a record of the transaction is sent to the Person Trace routing destination usually to the Badge Monitor and the History Log The routing for Person Trace transactions is set up on the System Parameters form Specific badge holders that are to be traced are identified on the Personnel form If Person Trace is routed to the Badge Monitor a T 1s displayed in front of th
417. nges in an emergency Example If you change to an emergency mode on the day before a scheduled holiday and you permit scheduled mode changes to occur the system will switch to holiday mode as scheduled If you do not permit scheduled changes to occur the system will stay in the emergency mode until you use the Mode Command form to change the mode again Email Send Email Select Send Email to send a notification to all email addresses associated with the selected facilities Do Not Send Select if sending an email notification is not necessary Email Default Select to send an email as defined on the Modes form Mode Email Setting Change Mode Click the Change Mode button to tell the system to change to the selected mode and or to allow or disallow scheduled mode changes Rollback Select the Rollback button to revert back to the previous mode Note Rollback from Emergency mode is not allowed Related procedures To change mode by command 1 From the Control menu select Modes then click the Change Mode tab Select one or more facilities that you want to change to the new operating mode 2 3 Select the operating mode to which you want to change 4 Select Yes or No on the field titled Permit Scheduled Mode Changes to indicate whether you want the system to allow future mode changes to occur as scheduled You can change this option even if you don t change the mode itself e Yes all
418. nload GE MIF are Encoder Installation Picture Perfect Imaging Language Packs EP Builder Imaging must be installed first Windows Platform Click to download EP Builder French Language Support Click to downioad EP Builder German Language Support Click to download EP Builder Italian Language Support Click to download EPIBuilder Portuguese Language Support Click to download EPIBuilder Spanish Language Support Click to download EP Builder Simplified Chinese Language Support Click to download EP Builder Traditional Chinese Language Support Click to download EP Builder Arabic Language Support Click to download EP Builder Russian Language Support Click to download EP Builder Japanese Language Support Click to download EPIBuilder Polish Language Support Click to download EP Builder Thai Language Support Click to download EP Builder Korean Language Support 2 Local intranet 2 Click the Picture Perfect button in the upper left hand corner The button color will display white if the server is active red if it is inactive and yellow if it is the backup server The system prompts you to acknowledge the signed Java certificate after which the Picture Perfect Operator Login window appears Chapter 2 Getting started Figure 2 Login window 2 TM Welcome to Picture Perfect aaa Advanced access control for global organizations Login ID jinstall Password 3 Type your Login ID and Password They tell the s
419. not be greater than 128 The number of floors displayed on this form is determined by the Number Of Floors field defined on the Elevator form Figure 181 Category Floors form Elevators zu E D Elevators Category Floors Facility Cat e GLOBAL 000 wll A al b i X 2 4 gt x SC GLOBAL 10001 GLOBAL 10002 Category Floors Facility GLOBAL Category 10001 CHL EMPLOYEE ACCESS Elevator elev 2 GLOBAL Elevator Select Floors M Floor 1 ll M Floor 2 M Floor 3 Chapter 18 379 Advanced access control features Fields and Controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 126 Category Floors form fields Field name Description Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box This field reflects the facility to which this record is assigned For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Category Click the Category button to display a list box of categories Select the category to which you want to assign floors for this elevator Elevator Click the Elevator button to display a list box of elevators Select the elevator to w
420. not limit the search Note You must have at minimum View permission to the form to which the drop down list corresponds to view that drop down list Note Only drop down items that are part of the active facility set are available Manage Picture Perfect forms contain various drop down lists such as Facility Input Group and so on that are populated with records created from other Picture Perfect forms The Manage button next to these lists allows you to access the appropriate form and create or delete records You must have Manage permission to perform this function Filter Picture Perfect forms contain various drop down lists such as Facility Input Group and so on that are populated with records created from other Picture Perfect forms The Filter button next to these lists allows you to filter the list by description and or facility using wildcards and operators as described in Search criteria on page 27 From the results of the search select and click Ok Chapter 2 Getting started Search criteria When performing a search for data you may want to view all records or only certain records Prior to clicking Find Q search criteria may be entered as follows Text boxes A blank text box returns all records A text box containing text only returns records that contain the text specified Wildcards and operators can be used to help delimit the search For instance the asterisk can expand the search i
421. nput 225 im n Strike Output Di im nd M2MR Output D end Held Open Sensing Ignored Detected Held Open In Group IEN Forced Open Monitoring Ignored Detected Forced Open In Group v NA d Pre Alarm Disabled Enabled 4 El gt r E Pre Alarm In Group Results _ Orecords Y Ee 4 Select the appropriate input from the list displayed 5 Save and exit the Doors form To enable Occupancy Control 1 From the Control menu select Operators and then click the Facility Permissions Profile tab 2 From the toolbar click on Find to locate the Facility Permission profile record you want to modify 3 Under Page Level Permissions click on Areas and make sure the level of permission is set to Update 4 Under Control Level Permissions click on Occupancy Control and make sure the level of permission is set to Update Figure 149 Facility Permissions Profile form 5 Save and exit the Facility Permissions Profile form 3 Operators Chapter 18 Advanced access control features Operators Modes Routings Backup Restore Descript ion Al Facility Permissions Insert Facility Permissions Update Facility Permissions View Facility Permissions No Facility Permissions IGLOBAL FACILITY PROFILE MONITORING PERMISSION BADGE OPERATOR badge operator JUNK Qf du A xX 5 4 9x fs e
422. ns Tab Field name Alarm Delay sec RAN Chapter 4 Setup Description This field will only appear if the optional RAN Remote Alarm Notification package is installed The Alarm Delay field defines the length of time the operator is given to acknowledge the alarm Once the notify time is reached and the operator has not responded to the alarm a message will be sent to the Alarm Monitor The Alarm Monitor process state for that alarm will be changed to Remote in the case of RAN Alarm Priority RAN This field will only appear if the optional RAN Remote Alarm Notification package is installed The Alarm Priority field sets the upper limit for the priorities of alarms that will be sent to RAN Any alarms with an alarm priority between 1 and the setting specified here will be examined Badging Default Badge Encode Format This is a required field that represents the default badge encode setting for the system Click Default Badge Encode Format and choose a badge encode format from the list box If the operator does not set a badge encode format on the Badges form this default setting is used Default Badge Design The system default for a badge design is set in a manner similar to setting a printer default When selected the system default will be used when no other design is specified For more information on this field see Setting a default badge design on page 260 Image Types
423. nt at this time If you do so repeat step 2d Click the link to install the Java Runtime environment Click the link to install the EPIBuilder Imaging installation kit Reboot the workstation Verify that you have the correct host name and IP address for the workstation Open the web browser and navigate to the Picture Perfect web page Click on the client button to launch the client and log on as the administrator Create a workstation record for the imaging workstation Be sure to enter the correct host name and to enable the Imaging Workstation check box Save the record Log out completely and close all browser windows On the Picture Perfect server edit the etc hosts file and add the IP address and host name entry for the imaging workstation Create the operator account or update an existing operator account and grant Badge Print and other imaging permissions as appropriate On the imaging workstation open the web browser and then navigate to the Picture Perfect web page Click on the client button to launch the client and log on Verify that the permissions granted to the operator are reflected in the client software The operator should be able to perform badge capture and print functions if they were granted to the operator Chapter 19 403 Troubleshooting maintenance support Problem When using the Reselect profile button to select the image device to use in capturing an image the first attempt at setting the device fails
424. ntrol Alarm Outputs 1 From the Monitor menu select Alarm Monitor 2 Select the alarm The Alarm Response window appears and the instructions for this alarm will be listed The alarm type is displayed in the title bar of the window 3 Click Outputs Lol on the Alarm Response window toolbar to display the Control Outputs window Figure 109 Contro Output Groups ili MICRO PLACED OFFLINE Control Output Groups 20 3 00 W DR OCC Q On oft 4 Click a radio button to turn the entire output group on or off and then click OK Chapter 13 269 Alarm activity monitors Responding to alarms The system allows the operator to respond to acknowledge alarms and to manually reset alarm outputs if manual reset was selected using the Alarms form Open the Alarm Monitor window and select the alarm to display the Alarm Response window The alarm type is displayed in the title bar of the window Pre written alarm responses appear in the Responses list box When you select a response and clear the alarm the system will archive the alarm record and the response The pre written response saves time If none of the responses on the selection list are appropriate the operator can type a unique response Figure 110 Alarm Response window W UPSTREAM MICRO COMM FAIL 22 EI H xv zw e Instructions Casi rusco system alarm has been received tify Rick Appelbaum at 1 800 skytel2 PIN 1300530 jf no response notify Jim Olinger at
425. ntrol Level Permissions Name Hone View Update Lost Input Group o Oo Lost Routing Oo o Occupancy Control Q Occupancy Count Oo o Permission Group o o Physical State Oo o D Route Definition o C Scheduling Oo Oo Results IShuntinc O ea m 40 records 5 Saveand exit the Facility Permissions Profile form To enable Occupancy Counting for the Area Note Inorder to perform this function you must have Occupancy Control permission 1 From the Access menu select Places and then click the Areas tab m From the toolbar click Find to locate the area record you want to set up e On the Area tab under Occupancy Control enable the Occupancy Counting radio button Under Two Man Rule enable the Modified radio button Am Figure 171 Area form M2MR without door control ig Places People Badges Places STL VEHICLE CONT STLILOBBY ENTRA STLICGS OUTER M STL CGS REAR DO JOH RECEPTION DO JOH SERVER ROOM JOH STORE ROOM JOHAMOTION SHUN STLAST FLOOR D STL 2ND FLOOR D STL SETTLEMENT STLIFACILITIES OFC STL SWITCH ROOM STL GENERATOR R STL GIT LAB STL SETTLEMENT F STLALN180 CORP STL SECURITY REAR STLIHR STL 2N80 SYST DE STL 3N MCIDEAS STL 3N MOL STL 3W ARCH DVLP IS Computer Room Research and Deve D Areas Categories Area Events scite o ganxos A PO _Area Category Manager wu Group
426. ntrol and make sure the level of permission is set to Update Figure 161 Facility Permissions Profile form 5 3 Operators Chapter 18 Advanced access control features Operators Modes Routings Backup Restore Operators Permission Groups Permission System Permissions Profile Description s Ora Al Facility Permissions Q i i lj QE NE 4 EI x ZC Q Insert Facility Permissions Update Facility Permissions Facility Permissions View Facility Permissions INo Facility Permissions L GLOBAL FACILITY PROFILE Page Level Permissions MONITORING PERMISSION Name j Hone View Update insert Delete IBADGE OPERATOR rm Steg momor Kei vi w J i a badge operator Alarm Events Oo Oo e Oo Oo m JUNI Alarm Messages O o E o Alarm Responses o o o o Archive o o o o Area Events o o o Areas o o o o Area Status o o O o Backup Oo o o o fa b Control Level Permissions Hame Hone View Update Lost Input Group o O jS Lost Routing o o Occupancy Control ei O Occupancy Count o o HH Permission Group o Physical State o Route Definition D Scheduling H Shuntines im Ki Save and exit the Facility Permissions Profile form To enable Occupancy Counting for the area Note 1 2 3 4 5 In order to perform this function you must have Occ
427. ntrol menu select the Backup Restore menu item and then click the Backup tab From the Include section select one or more of the options Badge Base History or an optional package corresponding to the tables you want to back up If you want to see exactly which tables are included in your selection you may click the Base Tables Advanced or Other Tables Advanced tabs These tabs display a listing of all the tables in the database The tables included in your selection will be toggled on Note Do not toggle any of the individual table buttons unless instructed to do so by your support representative If you want to generate an on screen verification report click Generate Verification Report Use the appropriate radio button to specify whether you are backing up to Tape or Disk File Note When Disk File is selected clicking Browse displays a list from which you can select the destination file for the backup archive Click Execute to start the backup 311 312 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Perform a backup using the command line option cba The command line version of backup uses a configuration file backup cfg locatedin cas db text This file contains the flat files to be backed up You can edit this file if you want to add or delete files to be backed up You must precede each file or directory name with a package name followed by a colon and a space or tab This will cause the specified files to be backed up on
428. o aw ers KEEN ERG ae parete rm KAESCH 257 eent 257 FleldS ONd COMPOS EH gaia see wilde EE on saree eae aaa ean Many mame Reo 258 Related procedures ANS Seen dE det EU BEN eu e Rs 259 Setting a default badge design 260 EXahtiples secos dein A dek ere pe ge A hc hha Ee E 260 Related procedures eg sorer dacs MER paghvediareraunaaaadasiadedosrerver eee D EEE EEY 260 Alarm activity Monitors 00 ccc ccc cece eee ehh 261 Derek E AER AEN Nd AE AE at ve E Od ade eK ena et T 262 Monitor LEE EEN 262 Monitoring alarms Ae tana cond Eeer Ee efi reale ba Cems ove Peet ten EE reed SAM 264 Flelds and Controls DEP EE Re EEN 264 Related procedures secsec sorer sonnit nnt DES ar raga ee Ee EEE AA NENNEN 266 Responding to alarms NEE turdan nir Ry Eh REST dw Rides ees EIERE da Meee G 269 Fields and conttols 2 553 e hesee c ettet nid on AE EE ENEE 269 Relatedprocedures o so eto erEoIv P ue 269 Monitoring badge activity ehh hh hh sh nnn 271 Fields and corittols ae 274 Monitoring Swipe and Show activity n peer meret ENEE EEN DE D ERR RR a 274 Related procedures isses e RR chberansaneatacneddcuenworedaesadwane semana aides 275 Monitoring input activity A 0 sk he RR aes eee diseeeste ghee SEELEN Hees EE 278 E Ee ale ee TEE 278 Relatedipracedures SE MR PIN QU Ped pate cease dda ean AE 278 Monitoring operator activity 8 ENEE EELER ERR ewes BENENNEN ER AN GE EY dee d 279 eet Bee TEEN 279 Related procedures e AA deel Eech e
429. o supply required information the Error icon amp appears in the Function tab label as well as next to the record in the data grid The field that requires correction is labeled in red Click Save This icon is unavailable if all required information is not entered or if you do not have the required permissions for the form Deleting records To delete a record l From the Primary menu such as Access Configuration Control or Setup select a Secondary menu item and then click the appropriate tab For example Access People Personnel From the toolbar click Find Q The record list window or data grid shows the results of search operations and allows you to quickly navigate through the records found by a search When an application is started the record list window is initially empty Select a record from the list in the data grid e The number and order of the fields displayed as well as the placement of the grid on the screen left right top or bottom is configurable by clicking Preferences on the form toolbar 37 38 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual 4 Clicking on a single row in the grid will highlight and select that record for editing The keyboard up and down arrows can also be used to move from one record to the next The record s field values appear in the various pages of the form More than one row can be selected in order to delete multiple records at one time Multiple rows can
430. obal nested APB reader configured for Controller Requests from Host and the micro was offline Additionally the offline operation mode was configured for Fail Safe Table 106 Badge activities Invalid Invalid transactions Area Offline The area was selected as offline Badge Deleted Badge Expired A deleted badge was used in a reader An expired badge was used in a reader Badge Lost A lost badge was used at a reader 271 272 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Invalid transactions Badge Suspended A suspended badge was used at a reader Badge Unknown An unknown badge was used at a reader Invalid APB In An invalid read occurred in an APB IN reader Invalid APB Out An invalid read occurred in an APB OUT reader Invalid Code The number entered was not a valid code for a Shunt or Keypad reader Invalid Floor An invalid floor number was selected with elevator DI DO configuration Invalid KR BDG The badge used at a Keypad reader was not a keypad response badge Invalid PIN The pin entered at the Keypad reader was invalid Invalid Shunt The shunt value was entered at a reader not enabled as a Shunt reader Invalid T amp A In An invalid read occurred at a T amp A IN reader Invalid T amp A Out An invalid read occurred at a T amp A OUT reader KR INVLD Open DR A keypad response was given while the door was still open KR Not Enabled A keypad
431. ocedures To create edit or delete an Output record 1 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs and then Outputs tab 2 Referto Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 Chapter 8 161 Device management Defining inputs Physical inputs such as sensors or detectors must be described to the system Use the Inputs form to define where each input point is connected how it is wired to activate what kind of state changes activate it how long it remains detected before it activates which input group is associated with it and where messages about this input are routed Example An input controls a door sensor The sensor detects when the doors is open or closed A description for this input could be 01 1 00 Door DI The first part of the description indicates that the input is connected to DI point 00 on DI board 1 of Micro ID 01 The last part of the description indicates the purpose of the output Figure 67 Inputs Form Input Groups Inputs Output Groups Outputs Input Group Events Output Group Events s a 9x SC Inputs Routing Notes Description 00000 90 1 00 DOOR o 00 1 00 DOOR DI Facility GLOBAL Input Group n Input Board Address 8 Normal e a Board Tour Elevator ES Address Input Enabled b Micro MICRO 0 lt GLOBAL gt M Normally Closed On to Off Delay Time
432. ocks the doors when Holiday mode goes into effect When you set up a Holiday mode you do not need to set up runtime events unless you want weekly and daily cycles to occur If you want any of the runtime events in your normal operating mode to occur during your holiday mode you must duplicate those runtime events within Holiday mode Example An Emergency mode allows you to conduct fire drills as needed to comply with safety requirements Figure 78 Modes form Change Mode Modes Modes Email Mode Events Emergency Description a i x8 x B L P x m NORMAL E BCT HOLIDAY Mode Creation MSP NORMAL MSP HOLIDAY Description LIN NORMAL Fire Drill in Progresss LIN HOLIDAY BCT EMERGENCY M Emergency Mode SKA NORMAL MDT NORMAL MDT HOLIDAY BCT NORMAL SRG NORMAL SRQ HOLIDAY BOS NORMAL TIJ NORMAL ANA NORMAL HOU NORMAL DESS Results 35 records Facility GLOBAL New record is ready 196 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 81 Modes form fields Field name Description Description Type any alphanumeric combination 1 to 60 alphanumeric characters for Des
433. odes are Normal or Holiday mode examples of emergency modes are Fire or Lockdown When you initially set up the system make sure that all the values and schedules that you define for readers doors areas etc are associated with your normal operating mode Weekdays and weekends occur within your normal operating mode so the system does not need a unique weekend mode An evening mode is not required either as the normal mode can contain schedules for multiple shifts and weekends To operate the system in a different mode during holidays or other special events based on the calendar you must create a mode re define the schedules to occur during that mode and then schedule the mode to become active on a selected date and time When a mode becomes active it remains active until changed by an operator Change Mode another scheduled Mode Event or by a DI triggered emergency mode A Mode Event is a scheduled change to one or more of the operating characteristics Events can occur when a mode starts when a mode ends or at a given time of day and day of week within the mode Typical events are locking and unlocking lobby doors for general access turning on motion detectors after hours and changing categories on areas to control access for shift workers Administrative procedures can also be scheduled such as performing backups and running reports For details on these procedures see Scheduling backup events on page 219 and Sched
434. of an area at a specific time For example two MIS shifts need to access the computer room during separate times but the MIS Manager needs access 2 hours a day The two shifts also require a 30 minute overlap during shift changes To provide 24 hour access for the MIS manager create a category such as MIS 24 Hour on the Areas form and do not overwrite this category with an area event The two shifts will require separate categories such as MIS Shift 1 and MIS Shift 2 which will be used on the Area Events form Use the None category pre defined to remove an existing category from its slot Figure 100 Category Manager form Assigned Categories Available Categories Slot Category Category 1 ALL CATEGORIES e ALL CATEGORIES Cleaning Crew 1700 2000 2 Cleaning Crew 1700 2000 NO ACCESS use w sched only Slot Chapter 11 Badge management Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 96 Category Manager form fields Field name Description Assigned This is a list of all assigned categories in alphabetical order Categories which have already been assigned have their slot number indicated to their left Active categories assigned
435. of floors which in turn will determine how many floor buttons will display for that elevator on the screen Number of Floors An entry is required in this field for the Floor label input and output controls to be displayed If no entry is made an error message will display when the record is saved Valid entries are based on the type of elevator configuration chosen and the number of floors on other elevators on the same micro Micro DO Maximum 64 floors only one elevator per micro Reader DO Maximum 64 floors distributed among the elevators defined for that micro Reader DI DO Maximum 39 floors distributed among the elevators defined for that micro Note The real maximum number of floors allowed is defined on the System Parameters form Floor Labels The default floor labels are Floor 1 through Floor x where x the maximum number of floors There are two ways to edit the floor labels See How to edit floor labels on page 376 Figure 178 Define Floors Window Time Zone Elevators CategoryFloors im o i D A o gt x Q elev 1 GU Elevator Description Define Floors Number of Floors B Jj pot 1 ees 00 READER GLOBAL oF TIS MM Ee foar 2 Dees READER GLOBAL a NN m a SC RA a Set Default Floor Names Start Floor Number Value incr decr Increment Decrement
436. off Form Preferences Log Monitor Monitor Preferences Performance Monitor Purge All Alarms Send Message Status Monitor Tour Functions User Monitor Access Secure Alarm Colors Control Outputs Data Generator Emergency DI Facilities LDAP DN LDAP Server and Parameters At installation a facility Global is created and by default all database records are assigned to it If an existing Picture Perfect system 1s being upgraded all existing database records will be assigned to this facility unless they are already associated with a facility Use the Facilities form to create and delete facility records These records combined with Facility Profiles and Permissions allow you to restrict operator access to records assigned to those facilities Figure 17 Facilities form a Facilities Description d GLOBAL Od 6 El BOCA RATON Facility MIAMI BRADENTON Results 4 records Search operation completed successfully 54 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 27 Facility form fields Field name Description Description Enter a text descript
437. og which allows you to set encoding parameters specific to your Magstripe Smartchip or Proximity cards Show print setup dialog When this option is selected the Print Dialog displays before printing a badge This allows you to change the printer selection and properties prior to printing Print Badges to Select the printer to be used for printing the badge design Encode Ea Click this button to encode a MIFARE badge Note If this button appears dimmed refer to Overview on page 394 for assistance Chapter 11 243 Badge management Table 95 Print badge controls Control name icon Description External Click to launch the External Encoders Setup dialog Encoder Setup m Related procedures To print a badge from the Badges form 1 From the Access menu select Badges and then click the Badges tab 2 Click Find to display a current list of records 3 Select the badge record that you want to print Then under Print Badges select a badge design or a design mapping from the drop down list Note Make sure there is not a Person icon beside the design If the design is associated with a Personnel record an error message similar to the following displays Figure 99 Error message RS i EI The CONSULT TEMP 1 requires a person selected to be printed 2 This design can only be printed from the Badge Manager in the Personnel page Please select a badge design that does not i
438. ol See Setting up permissions on facility permission profiles This permission is then assigned Operators page 93 to an operator Permission Tab 18 Create operator records for those individuals who willlog Control See Defining operators on page 95 on to the Picture Perfect system Operators Operators Tab 19 Create route definition records to define where alarm and Control See Creating route definitions on activity messages are routed This is typically a physical Routings page 109 locati h building ocation such as a building Route Definition Tab 20 Create route point records to be used to specify when and Control See Defining route points on to which operators alarm and activity messages are Routings page 110 routed S Route Points Tab 21 Create message records to define alarm instructions that Configuration See Creating alarm instructions on will display on the Alarm or Activity Monitor Alarms page 114 Alarm Messages Tab 31 32 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 23 The steps for configuring a Picture Perfect system continued Step Task Menu Reference 22 Create response records to define alarm responses that the Configuration See Creating alarm responses on operator can select when responding to an alarm Alarms page 115 Alarm Responses Tab 23 Create alarm records to define each alarm both physical Configuration See Defining alarms on page 117 and log
439. ols sii entrer E eet eet hee A 55 Related Mel ele 55 Setting up workstations optional 56 Fields gleeft PTT 56 Related Beleeg 56 Setting up SSL ENCryPtIOR ssi marss ch Eee EE E E RER EE ERG Meas QE 57 Client SSEEncryptiom unsaeeer vaanii ni a Aea AERE RRE 57 Datdbdse encryption 428 eg MER EE AE eg tend ANEREN E Gi ele e 60 System COOH OHO EE 63 MEIER NEIER e ER eects MN NEE Eder E e dE 64 Configuring modems EEN 64 Fields and corittols ue Ser ret dod ime pre ER RR VER DAN dx edid qa EE e 65 Related procedures ssec e raster oo bib Mq der 3 que dr E E e4q E REPRERIPPIPC CC ETDAN 66 Configuring TEE 66 Fields and Controls cec tAv vro rr BENENNEN EE 68 Related proOCedules deele Ee qd 69 Configuring email 2 es lU RE Ee RF d dees eG Sad ote tad hues Gidea NIE RS pene Me enis 70 EOMP Eae ato torta Ges ox Ee 70 Fields cridicorittols cue i WEE A beet ER eee ad EUR E RA RR detis 70 Related Procedures scs d de bod Lda ab oe Re UTI GR ER E REENEN 71 Defining routings iro ner rrr ee hene exer RITU ERR ER e e APER ERA e ERA UE RC 72 zi ieinnio PR 72 Field gplus C e Seen GEREENT ENER e 73 le e Helene 73 Defining badge formats NS ER ENEE Rr a y ER E ENER ETE PEPEE OSEE ENEE EA tenis 74 EXAMP eR PL T 74 Fields and corittols uis siuwiaganet ask acacte cussed pho hte EE AE URDU FREE CU UE RODEO ECCO P n 75 Relatedptoced res soe bud Ee ENNEN 75 Defining departments 221 pel eve ee I RI EUR CHER UR Ee AE D PER
440. on Schedule Update BS Diallon S e EE 138 Di l on E EE 138 Dial Stored Pretax EN 65 Door Events sereo ni 18 33 200 209 211 379 Door Forced Open EE 128 409 Door Held Open 1128 Door Open AE 409 Door EE 128 Door Release Timeout tr eee meti erede R 179 Door SCnSOP DE 189 Door SENSOR EE 358 IR 190 210 T EE 205 Door Strike Relock eter ertet ree eye lehren ege 190 Doors 18 33 94 130 135 162 172 181 187 188 209 210 211 338 340 344 345 346 348 350 358 359 379 Stee de e 382 387 388 Doubl Door Locked rrt ettet tires 272 Double Badge Function seen 366 Double Badge Reporting scissors 368 Download Upon Save iecit hee e REI HERO Mp 232 Downstream e 409 Downstream Communication Failure eese 127 Downstream E E Downstream Retries Downstream Retry Interval eee ie seg 135 Drop DOWHtf Liste sete eerie e Sere e eben EA 28 DST EE 169 DE ENTER ERR PII NERONE UE 128 180 Duress e 44 184 384 409 Dynainic Configuration co eec eec n tt gc 139 Edit Badge Design eben rene e EP 256 Elevator Configuration Micro 374 Elevator Configuration Reader DI DO sse 374 Elevator Configuration Reader DO sss 374 Email E Email Recipients Emergency Modes Emergency modes Enable E Enable Output 25 eon eni menda ee eed eres Enabled Reader c aieo edite et doen I ore
441. on as install is used to configure Picture Perfect for your site This user performs such tasks as creating operators configuring micros and administrating personnel data 1 2 At the prompt for user name in the client workstation login window type install At the prompt for password type the install operator s password After the system loads the Primary Navigation menu displays the Picture Perfect menu items you are authorized to use 14 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Selecting one or more facilities Picture Perfect allows you to create and delete facility records These records combined with Facility Profiles and Permissions allow you to restrict operator access to records assigned to those facilities Selecting a facility allows the user to view records within that facility that they have permission to view Following a successful login the Facility Set Manager window displays a list of those facilities included in your facility profile If you have access to only one facility it is automatically enabled Figure 4 Facility Set Manager B Facility Set Manager Select All GLOBAL Lee Unselect All Time Zone Host zl oo pee J Fields and controls Table 2 Facility Set Manager form Fields Description Select All Click to select all of the available facility sets Unselect All Click to de select all of the available facility sets Time Zone By default
442. on keys In order to secure transmission between the host and the network micro the data is encrypted using DES Data Encryption Standard This is accomplished by means of a key to create the encryption pattern for transmission Example Triple DES encryption is used between the micro and the host Figure 61 Keys form Alarms Time Zones Df Micros Ports Modems Network Ports Keys d z o DES abcdefgh Q A ES Exo x a Q Triple DES 11111111 2222 Keys Micro Exchange Key Exchange Key Type System Custom Encryption Mode Encryption Mode Type O None DES amp Triple DES Data Key 1 Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow 150 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 62 Keys form fields Field name Description Micro The micro that will be transmitting data to from the host Encryption Mode This is a required field which defines the encryption mode to be used It can be set to one of three values None No encryption is used the original or plain text is transmitted Note No
443. on used to create and edit System Permission records that define the functions each operator level is permitted to perform The functions included on this form are system related and are not filtered by facility Facility Permission Profile An application used to create and edit Facility Permission Profile records that describe an operator s level of access to the various forms and fields The functions included on this form are filtered by facility Form Profiles An application used to associate custom forms with an operator s permission Modes Change Mode A function that allows you to change your system operating mode when a different operating strategy such as an emergency requires an immediate change Modes An application used to create and edit Mode records to define operating modes in addition to the system defined Normal Mode that are activated either by schedule or by command Modes Email Mode Events An application used to create an email notification for a mode event An application used to create and edit mode events Emergency An application used to create and edit emergency mode records to assign the mode input group and facility that will define the emergency mode Routings Routings An application used to create and edit Routing records to define where certain types of messages are sent in addition to the predefined routings Route definition An applicat
444. one of its inputs has changed state This is an individual input group that activates each time one of its inputs changes state To the system this input group is transparent because the message sent by this input group actually reflects the description of the input itself not the input group Notes Logical alarms must always use Individual Non Boolean Only Individual Non Boolean input groups appear on the Input Group list boxes of the Readers Areas Doors and Micros forms Input Group State Select Enabled to allow this input group to activate Select Disabled if this input group should not activate Open Condition Select Detected to allow this input group to trigger associated outputs when the input group detects an open condition state change This field is for supervised input Select Ignored if this is not a supervised input Short Condition Select Detected to allow this input group to activate associated outputs when the input group detects a short condition state change This field is for supervised input Select Ignored if this is not a supervised input Broadcast Select Yes to broadcast any input state changes in this input group to all micros on the system Select Yes if State Changes you want the inputs in this input group to trigger outputs on other micros or if you want an input from this input group to trigger an Emergency mode Normally this is set to No Alarm Displays a description of
445. ong with the default All Groups Allowed Use the Permission Groups form to divide responsibilities among operators by creating a separate permission group for each group of categories and or areas For example Building 1 Building 2 Building 3 Then remove the special permission group All Groups Allowed and assign one or more of the newly created permission groups An operator can have permission to assign up to 20 category and area groups and if enabled 5 report groups Figure 32 Relationship Between Permissions and Permission Groups Categories and Category and Area Areas Permission Groups Report Permissions Example Operator Jane Doe works in a facility made up of two buildings The personnel working in this facility are divided into different categories such as Manufacturing General Access High Security Maintenance Executive staff Jane is responsible for issuing badges to the Manufacturing personnel in both buildings She is assigned the permission Badge Administrator This permission is assigned to the Area Cat Manufacturing permission group which restricts badge issue functions to those records in that permission group no permission is granted to issue badges for other permission groups If your site does not require this kind of operator restrictions use the default permission group All Groups Allowed For example a Badge Administrator permission can be assigned the permission group All Groups Allowed whic
446. online Ack A yes no Y N flag field indicating whether the micro has any pending Ack messages Under normal circumstances for a Head of line micro this flag is set to N If it is set to Y it indicates an unresponsive micro and a problem that requires troubleshooting Timeout A yes no Y N flag field indicating if a packet is not acknowledged within the number of attempts specified in the Micro record When this occurs the micro is considered to be in error condition After an alarm is generated the condition changes to alarm and this flag is cleared Alarm A yes no Y N flag field indicating that a micro is in a communication alarm condition Once a valid ACK or data packet is received from the micro this flag is cleared as well as the offline flag if it is set Call Indicates the host is calling the micro using a dial up connection Dial Indicates the host is dialing the micro using a dial up connection Connected Indicates the host is connected to the micro using a dial up connection Resend Indicates the number of messages in queue for the micro 145 146 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Related procedures To create a Direct connect Micro record 1 Select Configuration Micros and then Micro tab 2 Refer to Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 3 Complete the Micros form with special attention to the items below The following fields must be set to the given value Primary port
447. ontinued Field name Description Timed APB Duration Enter a value to represent how long a badge holder s Timed APB status nested APB area will be set when their badge is used on the reader The Timed APB Duration cannot exceed one day A duration of 0 allows the micro to reset the status to Neutral immediately producing the same effect as Reset Timed APB Immediately Global Nested APB This control is enabled only if Nested APB under Logical Reader Status Method Function has been chosen Host Broadcasts to Controllers The host actively sends nested APB area information to participating controllers Controller Requests from Host The controller requests nested APB area information from the host as needed Global Nested APB This control is enabled only if Controller Requests from Host has been Micro Offline chosen Operation Mode Fail Safe While the controller is offline the controller will not consider nested APB area information when granting access Fail Secure While the controller is offline the controller will deny access to nested APB readers Note There is a period of time when the controller loses communication with host where it is not offline yet and during this time when a badge is swiped on a Controller Requests From Host type Fail Safe reader a learn timeout is generated Once the controller is offline the fail safe fail secure rules are followed to provide or deny access Scheduling Enabl
448. ontrols The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 117 Archive form fields Field name Description Include Select the type of history files you want to archive It is strongly recommended that you only Badge Alarm Operator Event archive one database at a time Optional Packages Each package should be archived to a separate tape or disk file Since the time needed to reach a history threshold varies with activity levels it s hard to predict when a particular threshold will be reached A Force Rollover option exists therefore which allows you to archive data on a regular schedule such as once a week This task can then be incorporated into your normal backup procedure The Force Rollover option takes data in the primary table and transfers it to the temporary table even if the primary table is not full Force Rollover Picture Perfect uses two history tables for each type of history primary and temporary When the primary fills up it is renamed history tmp and an archive notification window for that table displays Since the time needed to reach a history threshold varies with activity levels it s hard to predict when a particular threshold will be reached A Force Rollover option exists
449. oors Number of Badges Single means the reader requires only one valid badge read to open the door Double means the reader requires two separate valid badge reads to open the door Physical Reader Function Select the desired physical reader type for this reader Badge Only A reader used only to read badges using a badge swipe Keypad Only A reader used only as a keypad where in lieu of a badge swipe the badge encode number must be entered using the keypad Press or enter the badge encode number and then press Badge and Keypad A badge reader used in conjunction with a keypad where a PIN a duress code a shunt override code or an alarm response code can be entered in addition to the badge swipe See the procedures for each type of code below PIN or Duress Code Swipe the Badge e Press or enter the PIN or Duress Code and then press 8 Shunt Override Code e Press or enter the Shunt Code and then press Swipe the Badge Press or enter the PIN or Duress Code and then press Alarm Response Code Press or enter the Alarm Response Code and then press Swipe the Badge Press or enter the PIN or Duress Code and then press Badge or Keypad The reader can be used either as a badge reader or a keypad If Badge is selected then the reader is used only to read badges using a badge swipe If Keypad is selected the badge encode number is entered using the keypad
450. ooting your Picture Perfect 4 5 system cca 394 Imaging troubleshooting ENN cee th aede oe es 401 Contacting Technical Support 0 0 0 0 0c eee 406 394 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Overview This section provides information to help you diagnose and solve various problems that may arise while configuring or using your GE product and offers technical support contacts in case you need assistance See Contacting Technical Support on page 406 Troubleshooting your Picture Perfect 4 5 system Troubleshooting tools Note If you receive a syntax error popup when logging onto the Picture Perfect webtop from your browser make sure that you are using the following supported Web Browsers and Java Plug in e Java Plug in Java Runtime Environment JRE 6 0 update 13 e Web Browsers Internet Explorer 6 0 with Service Pack 1 or later Internet Explorer 7 0 e Firefox 3 0 The client log file and the Java console contain useful information that can be used for troubleshooting client issues To access these tools The client log file is located in c avatar logs avatar log There are two ways to open the Java console From the Internet Explorer window titled Picture Perfect Webtop navigate to Tools gt Sun Java Console From the coffee cup icon that appears at the right side within the Windows taskbar right click it and select Open Console from the context menu Log on troubleshooting If you get one of the fo
451. open before an alarm occurs Antipassback Normal A badge with an APB status of In will not be granted access through an APB In reader a badge with an APB status of Out will not be granted access through an APB Out reader a violation message is generated Passive A badge with an APB status of In will be granted access through an APB In reader a badge with an APB status of Out will be granted access through an APB Out reader a violation message is generated Archive To copy history transactions from the database to magnetic tape Some fields are expanded from IDs to descriptions Archives are used for later examination of transactions archives cannot be restored Area A logical grouping of readers and doors used to control access Array A collection of independent disks which allow you to spread your data among two or more hard disks See RAID Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM Available Language A fixed route network protocol in which transmission packets have direct paths and destinations ATM is an alternative to TCP IP which tags each packet with destination information in the header and can be routed through arbitrary paths on a carrier network such as the Internet A language that can be used by Picture Perfect operators A language must be supported by Picture Perfect and translated before it can be made available 407 408 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 127 Picture Perfe
452. option is enabled the seed counter assigns a unique number to each badge It is a global counter that is incremented each time a new badge is created The range is determined by the number of digits allocated to the counter This field is view only you can perform a search but it cannot be edited For more information see Seed counter on page 366 Saved Notes All saved notes applicable to this record are listed including the Date Time the note was created and the operator that created it Click on a column heading to sort by Date Time Operator or alphabetically by note Vacation scheduled 9 1 08 10 2006 10 26 09 Click to sort on the column 9 15 2006 Reviewed safety policy 08 14 2006 13 08 46 install Temporary badge issued 08 14 2006 13 07 05 install Reviewed security ei By hovering the mouse over the note the entire contents of the note displays Saved Notes Date Time Operator L Hotes Vacation scheduled 9 1 al 08 10 2006 10 26 09 install 35 2006 Reviewed safety policy 08 1 4 2006 13 08 46 install Temporary badge issued 08 14 2006 13 07 05 install Reviewed security Notes This is a free form text field where you can add information pertinent to Badge or Person records Example Employee work visa will expire on 12 12 05 Chapter 11 229 Badge management Related procedures To create a Badge record using the Console Reader method l 2 5 6
453. or each micro on which Keypad Alarm Response will be implemented When an authorized badge holder responds to an access violation on a door using this feature he will enter this code for reader keypads on this micro Chapter 18 Advanced access control features The same code can be used on any number of the system s micros or you can configure different codes for different micros The alarm response code must be different from the shunt code assigned to that micro Failure to define an alarm response code prevents Keypad Alarm Response from working on any of the micro s doors See Defining micros on page 132 Defining a reader Use the Readers form to define a reader as a Badge and Keypad reader Keypad Alarm Response only works with doors associated with Badge and Keypad readers Once the reader is defined you then associate it with a door that has Keypad Alarm Response enabled See Defining readers on page 182 Enabling keypad alarm response Use the Doors form to enable Keypad Alarm Response This feature can be enabled or disabled for individual doors and status requests on doors will show this The door must be associated with a Badge and Keypad reader You will be warned if the door is not associated with at least one Badge and Keypad reader connected to a micro with an alarm response code You may save the door information anyway or make the necessary associations before saving the door again but Keypad Alarm Response does no
454. or example to restore and verify the base Picture Perfect package from a disk file type cbr c a v d tmp basebackup The cbr restore option will restore the files contained in the restore cfg file After the database records are restored and if your backup included flat files messages similar to the following display This program edits the configuration file cas d text restore cfg before running the backup or restore programs For backups you must also precede each file or directory name with a package name followed by a colon and a space or tab This will cause the specified files to be backed up only when the associated package is backed up For restores do not precede each file or directory name with a package name colon or space Simply supply the file or directory you want to be restored from the media P Print Current List Add Item to List Edit Item on List Delete Item from List O o H Quit and Save File Enter Function P A E D Q p Type the letter p to print the list of files to be restored A list similar to the following of the files contained in the restore cfg files displays Current File List 1 cas forms 2 cas lists 3 photo photo 4 photo designs If these are the files you want to restore press Q to quit and save the file If you want to edit the list press A E or D as appropriate When you have completed your edits press Q to quit and save the file
455. or indicates alarm When the violation ends the alarm changes to reset state The access violation alarms must be routed to the Alarm Monitor for Keypad Alarm Response to function properly Keypad response Alarm response at the Badge and Keypad reader requires an alarm response code a badge swipe and a PIN or duress code The alarm response code is entered on the keypad as the first activity The required order of activity is outlined below 1 Press 7 or enter the Alarm Response Code and then press GP 2 Swipe the badge 3 Press 7 or enter the PIN or Duress Code and then press When the reader is configured for double transaction the first and or second component transaction may enter an alarm response code See Double badge function on page 366 Chapter 18 385 Advanced access control features Keypad response only affects an active access violation on a door to which the reader is associated It cannot affect any other door The following situations must exist for the keypad response to be valid The door must be closed before the keypad response The badge must be authorized for keypad response The entire reader transaction must be granted access For example an invalid PIN or a category mismatch will invalidate the keypad response Valid keypad alarm response does not unlock the door Keypad alarm response is essentially an acknowledgment that the door is secure so it makes no sense to unlo
456. orm provides an interface to the online Picture Perfect database so you can use ANSI standard SQL select statements to query the database and generate reports The SQL query function allows unlimited selection criteria and up to eight sort criteria The relational database allows a query to join separate database tables into one report To optimize complex queries used for reporting and decision making Picture Perfect uses Informix OnLine a Relational Database Management System RDBMS designed to run on a wide range of UNIX like operating systems in standalone or networked environments Informix optimizes the processing of large databases that are shared by many concurrent users Some advantages of Informix file management are The operating system does not limit the number of tables used at one time For example the SQL form lets you select data from all Picture Perfect database tables for a single report e The size of a database table is not limited except by disk size The Picture Perfect system captures history information for alarms badges and operator activity This information can then be manipulated into various reports that can be viewed on screen or sent to a printer Alarm history includes acknowledged alarms Badge history includes access attempts by valid invalid lost and suspended badges plus Swipe and Show transactions on readers Operator history includes database changes login transactions control outputs alarm graphi
457. orms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 44 Permissions form fields Field name Description Description The job description of the operators that will be assigned to this permission 1 to 60 characters Example Badge Administrator Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box This field reflects the facility to which this record is assigned For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Form Profile Controls the custom forms that display for an operator with this permission System Permissions Profile Controls the level of access the operator has to the Picture Perfect forms that are not controlled by Facilities such as the Facility and the System Parameter forms Facility Permissions Controls the level of access the operator has to the Picture Perfect forms that are controlled by Facilities such as Doors Readers and the majority of the Picture Perfect forms This window displays the facilities currently defined If the facility has an associated profile that profile description will appear after it Select a facility and click on it to display a facility profile list box If you want to assign a facility profile to this facility select a profile from the list Note In addition to any other facility permissions all users should have access to the
458. ose buttons may be selected The amount of time that the elevator buttons are active after a valid badge swipe is set using the Outputs form The same duration time should be used for all digital outputs assigned to floors Method 2 During a set period of time a button may be selected This amount of time in which the entry is accepted after a valid badge swipe is set using the Outputs form The same duration time should be used for all digital outputs Elevator access for all categories A badge that has the All Categories category assigned to it will be allowed access to all floors defined for the elevator regardless of whether the All Categories category is present on the area Free access floors There are two methods of allowing free access to particular elevator floors One method requires a badge swipe the other does not need a badge at all 372 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Free access for all badges Free access for all badges allows any badge that has access to the elevator reader to have free access to designated floors The wild card category is used as an elevator category on the Category Floors form to designate which floors are free access To set up a wild card category you must select All Categories from the Category list box and assign the free access floors to it This allows a badge holder to gain access to the free access floors as long as the badge is authorized for the elevator reader Free ac
459. ost computer A condition in which a reader is not enabled to release the doorstrike when a valid badge read occurs Access attempts at an offline reader can be routed to monitors printers and online history A micro is communicating with the host Online Reader A reader is enabled to release the doorstrike when a valid badge read occurs Access attempts at an online reader can be routed to monitors printers and online history Open Too Long See Door Open Too Long Operating Mode The mode associated with a set of schedules that defines system operating specifications Output A physical digital output DO that actuates devices such as a siren a doorstrike or lights which can be triggered by an output group Output Group A group of one or more outputs that can be triggered when activated by an associated input group Packet See ACK Packet Password A special code used during login that determines if an operator is authorized to log on to the system PCMCIA A standard for PC cards Adding a modem network card and removable disk drives especially on portable computers sometime requires the use of PCMCIA cards and compatible slots on computer systems Permissions A level of operator permission to perform system functions Each group of operators functions is a permission group that can be assigned to an operator authorized to perform those functions See Log on and Password Physical Volum
460. ot password as configured during installation Note If you received your system preconfigured by GE the default root password is pperf1 however it is strongly recommended that you change it once the initial installation is complete using the passwd command 3 Open a terminal window 4 If Picture Perfect is installed at the command prompt type cas sbin profile To log on as the ppadmin user For some of the procedures you will be instructed to log on as ppadmi n The ppadmin user is a special user that has access to every program and file on the Picture Perfect system The ppadmin user performs such Chapter 2 13 Getting started tasks as starting and stopping the Picture Perfect application monitoring the system from the command line and running all tools available in Picture Perfect l H At the prompt for user name in the console terminal type ppadmin At the prompt for password type the ppadmin password as configured during installation Note If you received your system preconfigured by GE the default ppadmin password is ppadmin however it is strongly recommended that you change it once the initial installation is complete using the passwd command Open a terminal window If Picture Perfect is installed at the command prompt type cas bin profile To log on as install Another user called install will automatically be set up when you install Picture Perfect The install user account that is log
461. ou want to edit In the Map Values pane select the mapping entry to be removed Click Delete X to remove the entry 260 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Setting a default badge design The system default for a badge design is set in a manner similar to setting a printer default When selected the system default will be used when no other design is specified The Default Badge Design field appears on the System Parameters form and displays a list of defined badge designs See Assigning system parameters on page 40 Beside each design one or two icons appear e The Person icon indicates the design references a field on the Personnel form and therefore a personnel record must be selected in order to print a badge using this design e The Badge icon indicates the design references a field on the Badge form and therefore a badge record must be selected to print a badge using this design f both icons display both a personnel and a badge record must be selected in order to print the badge Note A personnel or a badge record must be selected in order to print a badge Example In Figure 106 a default badge design Employee is used if no other design is selected when printing a badge Figure 106 Parameters form Default badge design B System Parameters L7 System Parameters LDAP Server LDAP DN D I MaxRecords Advanced Features Password AlarmEmail Modes Notes Parameters Alarms Badgin
462. ound 9089 JDBC DES inbound 8075 Tomcat Server inbound 8443 Tomcat Server SSL inbound PP SERVER Server Poris 8035 3100 eifevtmgr outbound Client Ports 8085 8100 eifevtmgr inbound 396 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual 8 10 Verify that personnel firewall and PC protection applications are turned off on the client workstation or have exception lists to allow inbound outbound TCPIP ports used by the Picture Perfect client to pass messages to and from the Picture Perfect server The following are some of the common personnel firewall and PC protection applications that are known to cause problems Cisco security agent e BlackICE XP Personnel Firewall e OfficescanNT firewall Check the Java Console output on the client workstation for any error messages or any indication of the problem with the login process Right click on the Java icon coffee mug on the Windows taskbar e Select Open Console to open the Java console and then check the messages for any errors Verify that the Apache Tomcat server on the Picture Perfect server is running properly Enter the following URL in the Internet Explorer address field http hostname 8075 PPServer ppservlet e Click Go If you get the following message in the body of the web page This is a test response then the Tomcat server is running properly In the event that the Tomcat server is not running properly e Stop and restart the Tomc
463. oup event prevents the system from receiving a flood of alarms when a fire occurs Remember that a mode start event requires a parallel mode end event You could also schedule an event to place a motion detector input group offline during the day and online at night if after hours activity in this area indicates a security violation Or to conserve electricity after hours schedule the input group for hallway motion detectors to trigger lights to turn on for a duration to provide lighting only when required An input group event can change the output groups associated with an input group For example To have security lights turn on when someone opens an exterior door at night using a badge or using force schedule an input group event to occur at sundown Select the output group that operates the security lights When an exterior door opens this output group triggers the outdoor security lights To have an alarm sound when someone uses an invalid badge between the hours of 5 PM and 8 AM schedule an input group event Select the output group that operates a siren When the reader detects an invalid badge the reader s invalid input group activates the associated output group triggers and associated output devices operate in this case a siren Example Schedule two parallel events to place a motion detector input group offline during the day and online at night after hours activity in this area indicates a security violation Chapt
464. oute point 24 hours set this time to 23 59 59 If this value is blank the route definition will not be enforced Time Zone From the drop down list select the time zone of one of the following the host receiving the alarm the micro from which the alarm originates or the operator monitoring the alarm See verifying time zones on page 168 Note In order for an operator to use this field they must have at least View page level permission for the Time Zone form See Creating facility permission profiles on page 81 Sun Sat These toggle buttons indicate what days of the week this route point should be enabled Select the desired days of the week by clicking the appropriate toggle button If no days are selected the route definition will not be enforced Chapter 7 Alarm activity configuration Table 49 Route Point form fields continued Field name Description Bump Time The value in this field must be in seconds minimum 1 maximum 86400 The operator has this number of seconds to respond to the alarm before the alarm is bumped to the operators selected in Bump To Operators This field should be ignored if you are creating a route point that is used only for Activity Monitor Routing The default value in this field is blank meaning that there is no bump time Mode This field identifies the system mode of the Global facility under which this route point is valid Click the Mode button to display the Mode list b
465. ove categories already assigned Each of these forms contain a Category Manager tab that displays the active categories assigned to the selected personnel badge holders area or area event on one side and the categories that are available for assignment on the other Example You can assign categories to an area and then schedule area events to change the categories depending on access requirements Categories are position sensitive so be careful not to overwrite categories that should remain intact For example e An area event can change the categories on an area for a specific time to control which badge holders have access to the area during that time If you assign a different category to each computer operator shift then you can control when certain staff members can access the computer room Set up area events that add and remove the categories from the area A series of area events that add and remove a single category can control the time frame in which a contractor s job is performed For example one area event adds a category to the R amp D Lab at 4 00 PM to allow the cleaning crew access another area event removes the category at 4 30 PM to restrict the time spent in this area You can use the same strategy to restrict access to a computer vault where daily backups are stored The categories on an area control who can enter the area when they can enter and how long they can remain An area event can change the categories
466. ows scheduled mode changes to occur 197 198 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual No allows you to override scheduled mode changes in an emergency For example if you change to an alternate mode on the day before a scheduled holiday and you permit scheduled mode changes to occur the system will switch to holiday mode as scheduled If you do not permit scheduled changes to occur the system will stay in the alternate mode until you use the Mode Command form to change the mode again 5 Select an e mail method under Email 6 Click Change Mode to tell the system to change to the selected mode and or to allow or disallow scheduled mode changes A message window displays the message Mode Change Successful Changing modes by scheduling a mode event Use the Mode Event form to schedule a mode change such as from Normal to Holiday To have the system return to normal operations when the mode event is over schedule another mode event that activates Normal mode When the system enters a new mode it does not execute events for the new mode that are scheduled to occur before the new mode starts For example 1f an event scheduled for 7 AM in normal operating mode unlocks the lobby doors but the system does not return to normal mode until 8 AM then the lobby doors will remain locked until the next day at 7 AM Exception If communication with the micro is lost when the micro resets it will go back to midnight and execute all events schedul
467. ox Select the desired Global facility mode and then click OK This is not a required field If this field is blank the route point is valid for all system modes Note Ifyou are following the setup sequence recommended in Chapter 3 Configuration checklist the Mode list box will only show the default Normal and Holiday modes See Creating modes on page 194 to create your own custom modes then return to this procedure to assign routing points for that mode Route point rules and restrictions There may be times when you question whether an alarm should or should not appear on the Alarm Monitor Since a system configured for Alarm Activity Monitor Routing may consist of many route points it is possible for two route points to have conflicting route operators For example assume that Route Point A and Route Point B belong to Route Definition A Route Point A explicitly routes all alarms to no operators whereas Route Point B explicitly routes all alarms to all operators In this case Route Point B has precedence Because of the many possible combinations of operators start times stop times bump operators bump times and modes it may be confusing as to where an alarm or activity should be routed The following lists some rules and restrictions that may be used to configure or troubleshoot Alarm Activity Monitor Routing e Ifthere is an operator route conflict between two route points the route point that displays the alarm has pr
468. p Complete the following fields of the Doors form Description Unlock Time Exit Button Asserts Strike Enabled Strike Output DO digital output point wired to the door strike Inputs Exit Button Click Save f Chapter 10 Schedules and modes This chapter describes how to create modes how to change your system to a different operating mode by schedule or command and how to schedule events within a mode Readers should familiarize themselves with the information in this chapter before continuing to other chapters in this document In this chapter 717 T DEPT 194 deco DE MOTE EDD 194 Events OVERVIEW MET 200 KEEN 201 Scheduling reader events 206 Scheduling door events con be ce Ce ches See e Seadee ts 209 Scheduling alarm eventi cnc eee ELE E Ne Ca y Rm Rs 211 Scheduling input group events 213 Scheduling output group events A NEE eee eee ee 217 Scheduling backup events ccce erresira ETEA er coke 219 194 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Overview Schedules allow you to change a variety of operational characteristics based on mode day of week and time of day Using the Schedule feature you can specify when you want a particular type of change to occur That change will remain in effect until overridden by another schedule or mode event or manually changed by an operator Picture Perfect supports multiple modes of operation such as emergency and non emergency modes Examples of non emergency m
469. plete a double badge transaction e Badge only readers need two distinct badges e Keypad only readers need two distinct badge encode numbers e Badge and keypad readers need two complete badge and keypad transactions The first reader activity may be a shunt code or an alarm response code entered on the keypad This first activity is optional Next must come the presentation of a badge to the reader Following that a PIN or duress code must be entered on the keypad The two transactions must have different badges but they may use the same PIN or duress code The required order for a badge and keypad reader transaction is outlined below a Shunt or Alarm Response code b Badge swipe c PIN or Duress code Note On badge and keypad readers shunt codes duress codes and alarm responses may be entered by either or both transactions For example the first transaction may shunt the reader s door while the second transaction responds to an alarm on that door The separate transactions comprising a double transaction may use the same or different categories while gaining access through the reader Each double badge reader must have an Interval Time defined on the Devices Doors Reader form This specifies the number of seconds allowed between stages of the transaction If during the processing of a transaction there is no reader activity for the specified interval time period the transaction times out and is considered at an end The next
470. ppear in the status window The record cannot be saved unless the count is reset to zero or two man rule mode is set to Disabled Disabled Select this radio button to deactivate two man rule mode if it is currently enabled Standard Select this radio button to activate the standard two man rule mode which ensures that at least two badge holders occupy a given controlled space Modified Door Control Select this radio button to activate the modified two man rule mode which restricts access to a controlled area based on their M2MR category type The first two badge holders to enter a controlled space must be of the Team member category type and at least two Team members must be present in the controlled space until all Guests have exited Additionally a Team member within the controlled space must press a door release button in order to allow entry to any subsequent badge holders The door release button must be pressed within the time specified in the Door Release Timeout field or the door will not be unlocked Modified No Door Select this radio button to activate the modified two man rule mode which Control restricts access to a controlled area based on their M2MR category type The first two badge holders to enter a controlled space must be of the Team member category type and at least two Team members must be present in the controlled space until all Guests have exited Door Release Timeout This field is enabled only if the ope
471. proteus Environment INFORMIXSERVER redmoon INFORMIXDIR cas db JDBCTEMP c avatar A Username informix Language English Protocol jdbc informix sqli Proto HTTP HTTP_Port 8075 EIFPort 8085 8100 EIFIncomingPort 8088 V pluginspage http java sun com products plugin index html download gt lt noembed gt 12 Chapter 19 399 Troubleshooting maintenance support alt Your browser understands the amp lt APPLET gt tag but isn t running the applet for some reason Your browser is completely ignoring the amp lt APPLET amp gt tag noembed embed comment object center lt l lt applet code com ge security avatar Avatar class width 1 height 1 gt lt applet gt gt lt END CONVERTED APPLET body html Verify that the Apache Tomcat server configuration file server xml is configured properly Linux var www apache tomcat 5 5 12 conf server xml AIX usr HTTPServer apache tomcat 5 5 12 conf server xml For standard connections the section in green port 8075 needs to be uncommented no XML tags lt around the block of code listed below and the SSL connections section in blue commented out XML tags gt around the block of code listed in the next section Connector port 8075 maxHttpHeaderSize 8192 maxThreads 150 minSpareThreads 25 maxSpareThreads 75 enableLookups fa
472. pty a Team member is allowed entry only with a second Team member Additional team members can enter individually after the initial two 2 team members are present in the M2MR controlled area Additionally the final two 2 team members will not be permitted to exit until no Guests remain This button is only available to operators with Occupancy Control permission granted See Occupancy control on page 338 Escort Required A badge with this category must be accompanied into an area by an escort with valid a non Escort category match See Escort required on page 390 for more information Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box This field reflects the facility to which this record is assigned For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Related procedures To create edit or delete a Category record 1 Select Access Places and then Categories tab 2 Refer to Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 174 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Creating areas An area is a group of one or more readers Identify functions within the facility that require the same kind of access control and give descriptive names to these areas For example Accounting MIS R amp D Lobby Stairwells Cafeteria A single area may be assigned to multiple readers and doors For example the Accounting Management Area may be assigned to a reader using the Area button on the Readers
473. puts may be physical connections to a micro controller or logical events such as a transaction buffer overflow or an invalid access attempt Outputs that operate devices such as door strikes lights or sirens must be described to the system Use the Outputs form to define where this output point is connected how it is wired to activate how long it remains on when activated how it resets and what output group is associated with it Example An output may control a light indicating the back door is open A typical description is 002 01 07 Back Door Open The first part of the description indicates that the output is connected to DO point 07 on CPU board 01 of Micro ID 002 The last part of the description indicates the purpose of the output Note How you format output descriptions is entirely an administrative decision but this format makes the system messages easier to use To make reports easier to read the number description should be first so that the text description is aligned with the other records Figure 66 Outputs Form 8 Inputs Outputs Input Groups Inputs Output Groups Outputs input Group Events Output Group Events LL Seege l O 41655 X x 00 1 00 READER A LE P Si MICRO 10 123898 Outputs Notes 002 01 07 Back Do Description 1002 01 07 Back Door Open Facility GLOBAL Output Group 00 1 00 READER lt GLOBAL gt Des Type Board Address amp Reset on Duration
474. r m micro id Specifies the micro or micros to be flashed ma Specifies that all active micros in the Picture Perfect database be flashed l micro id Specifies a micro in a line of micros where the entire line is to be flashed Note If options are repeated only the last value read from the file is used The exceptions are the m and 1 options which use all specified micros Processing Rules Parameters that control the flashing of the micros during the current execution of eFlash may be included The following parameters may be included flashwait value in seconds Sets the time that eFlash waits for the micro to actually flash the EPROM The flash of a micro is considered a failure if the flash times out The default is 90 seconds maxflash value in seconds Sets the maximum number of micros that can be flashed simultaneously The actual number of micros that is being currently flashed will always be less than this value due to restrictions on flashing multiple micros in the same line The default is 5 Note Setting this number to a higher value can impact the response time of the system You should keep this number low for best performance Comments The eFlash configuration file may contain comments A comment is a line that begins with the pound sign The pound sign and all characters up through the next carriage return are ignored 156 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Network
475. r Authorization Required or Authorization Not Required is turned on photos will be displayed for invalid transactions but not valid transactions Authorization Required Ves Designate a reader that will display a photo on the Activity Monitor and require an operator to unlock a door No Designate a reader thot will display a photo on the Activity Monitor and will unlock a door without operator intervention Do Not Care See Radio buttons on page 27 Notes The Yes and No buttons are not available unless Swipe And Show Enabled is selected Access cannot be granted through readers defined as Authorization Required while communications to the micro are down Logical Reader To change the way the reader functions schedule a reader event that changes the logical reader function Type Normal Anti passback In Anti passback Out Time amp Attendance In Time amp Attendance Out or Time amp Attendance In out Do Not Care See Radio buttons on page 27 Example To provide higher security after hours you can set up certain readers as anti passback in readers and others as anti passback out readers or To provide data about shifts that badge in and out of an area you can set up a reader event that changes a normal reader to a Time amp Attendance In or Out reader APB Type To change the way the anti passback feature functions schedule an area event that changes the APB Type of all readers in the area Global APB or Ti
476. r database records into meaningful units Micros Micros An application used to create and edit Micro records to identify each micro controller and define how it operates and communicates Ports An application used to create and edit Port records to define serial ports for micro controller communications Modems An application used to create and edit Modem records to define the types of modems that you intend to use for dial up communication Network Ports An application used to create and edit Network Port records to define ports for network micro controller communication Keys An application used to secure transmission between the host and the network micro by means of a key to create an encryption pattern Inputs Input Groups An application used to create and edit Input Group records to trigger output groups when Outputs any individual inputs in the input group are detected Inputs An application used to create and edit Input records to define the characteristics and the purpose of each input point Output Groups An application used to create and edit Output Group records to which individual outputs can be assigned When an input group triggers an output group all outputs assigned to the group activate Outputs An application used to create and edit Output records to define the characteristics and the purpose of each output point Input Group An application used to create and edit Input Group Event records to enable or disable a Events spec
477. r description starts with the characters Lob and ends with zero or more unspecified characters SELECT description FROM reader WHERE description LIKE Lob The following SQL select statement retrieves a list of reader descriptions from the reader table where the reader description contains the word Door or DOOR anywhere in the description SELECT description FROM reader WHERE description LIKE Door OR DOOR Chapter 14 305 Reports Logical operators Use AND OR and NOT to connect one or more search conditions that create a comparison condition AND OR Use AND to retrieve data that matches both of the values connected by AND The following SQL comparison statement retrieves each reader described as Engineering Reader and also has a set interval time of less than 5 seconds SELECT description FROM reader WHERE description Engineering Reader AND Interval_Time lt 5 Use OR to retrieve data that matches either one of the values connected by OR The following SQL comparison statement retrieves reader descriptions that match either Lobby Reader or Cafeteria Reader SELECT description FROM reader WHERE description Lobby Reader OR description Cafeteria Reader NOT IN Use NOT IN to screen out data that you do not want in the report For example the following SQL comparison statement retrieves all reader descriptions except those described as Engineering or Antipassback SELECT description FROM reader WHERE d
478. r from 8 AM to 5 PM and a badge and keypad reader from 5 PM to 8 AM To gain access after 5 PM a badge holder must swipe their badge and also use the keypad to enter a unique PIN code Reader Online Offline Online All readers in the area operate online during the event Offline All readers in the area to operate offline not able to unlock doors but able to read badges pass badge data route and archive access messages and activate associated alarms Do Not Care See Radio buttons on page 27 Number of Badges There are two badge controls available Single and Double Single Only one valid badge is required Double Two complete valid and distinct transactions are required Do Not Care See Radio buttons on page 27 207 208 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 85 Reader Event form fields continued Field name Description Swipe and Show Control This feature is only visible if you have the Image package installed You can schedule a specific time period for any of the following functions to be active Select Enabled to enable Swipe And Show on this reader Select Disabled to disable Swipe And Show on this reader Note A reader cannot be defined as Toggle when Swipe And Show is Enabled See Toggle on page 186 If Toggle is set to Yes and either Authorization Required or Authorization Not Required is turned on photos will be displayed for invalid transactions but not valid transactions
479. r of badge designs Problem Badge designs do not display as expected Picture Perfect 4 5 imaging provides enhancements to the badge designer some of which have defaults that may produce undesired results when printing badges After the upgrade to Picture Perfect 4 5 we recommend you examine all of your badge designs For each badge design perform the following checks Examine the dynamic text field objects to verify that there are no undesired duplicates Remove any duplicates you may find 404 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Right click on each dynamic text field object and select Properties from the menu On the Dynamic Text Properties dialog click on the Conditional Display tab The Always show object radio button must be selected Enable it if necessary and then click OK to save the change Problem Objects on the badge appear to be missing This is usually caused by old conditional expression data that was enabled at some time in the past and then disabled The object can be restored to proper functionality by editing the badge design as follows e Select the area where the missing object would be It is actually there but not rendered Right click on each dynamic text field object and select Properties from the menu On the Dynamic Text Properties dialog click on the Conditional Display tab e Ifthe text boxes under the radio buttons contain data that should not be there click the Show object only when field expre
480. rClass value com informix jdbc IfxDriver gt lt param name Hostname value redmoon gt lt param name Database value proteus gt lt param name Environment value INFORMIXSERVER redmoon INFORMIXDIR cas db JDBCTEMP c avatar gt lt param name Username value informix gt lt param name Language value English gt lt param name Protocol value jdbc informix sqli gt lt param name Proto value HTTP gt lt param name HTTP Port value 8075 gt lt param name EIFPort value 8085 8100 gt lt param name EIFIncomingPort value 8088 gt lt param name NUM RETRIES value 3 gt lt param name PING INTERVAL value 3 gt lt param name code value com ge security avatar Avatar class gt lt param name archive value lib xmlrpc 1 2 bl applet jar lib jhall jar lib PPHelp jar Avatar jar lib 10g4j 1 2 8 jar lib geSecurityNlsProject jar lib kunststoff jar gt lt param name type value application x java applet version 1 4 2 gt lt comment gt lt embed type application x java applet version 1 4 2 code com ge security avatar Avatar class archive lib xmlrpc 1 2 bl applet jar lib jhall jar lib PPHelp jar Avatar jar AvatarLocales jar lib log4j 1 2 8 jar lib geSecurityNlsProject jar lib kunststoff jar width 100 height 100 mayscript mayscript DriverClass com informix jdbc IfxDriver Hostname redmoon Database
481. rator has occupancy control permission granted Valid values range from 0 no timeout to 32767 seconds Category Manager This tab contains the active categories ordered by slot number that can be assigned to an area or an area event To access an area a badge must match at least one category that is assigned to that area You may add remove or replace a category in a slot Click Filter to enter search criteria to limit the category list or use the type ahead search feature by clicking in any cell and typing the first letters of the item for which you are searching For more information see Category manager on page 244 Note This field is position sensitive when used in conjunction with area category schedules 179 180 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 77 Areas form fields continued Field name Description Input Groups Invalid The input group to trigger when an invalid badge error condition occurs Deleted The badge presented has been deleted from the Picture Perfect database e Invalid PIN number The PIN number entered in the keypad reader does not match the PIN number in the badge record Category mismatch The category identified in the badge record does not match the area category where the badge read occurred Click the Invalid Grp button to display the Ingroups list box Select the desired Input Group and then click Close Suspended The input group to trigger when a suspended ba
482. rator is logged on IP Address A multi digit number such as 10 41 200 57 that identifies a unique location within a network of the computer to which the operator is logged on Port This is a number that identifies the port through which the host and the client communicate when transmitting real time events Login Date The date the operator logged on to the session Login Time The time the operator logged on to the session Facility The facility of the operator as defined in the Facility field of the Operator form Chapter 13 283 Alarm activity monitors Related procedures To view user activity 1 From the Monitor menu select User Monitor 2 Ifyou want to create a report of this information click Save to save the reportasa txt file To jump to an operator record from the User Monitor Note If an operator does not have permission to view the associated record the option is dimmed 1 From the Monitor menu select User Monitor 2 Right click an entry to display the following menu Alarm Monitor Badge Monitor Input Monitor Operator Monitor Status Monitor User Monitor Performance Monitor Total Licenses Unlimited il a E E E Q Total Users 1 Licenses Available Unlimited Image User ID User Hame Employee ID Permission Session IP Address Port Login Date Facili in Time install Systems Admin 0000 istr PDJBAL2YNI 3 112 49 121 8085 08 14 2006 11 05 25 GLOBAL Force Logof
483. rd before saving the record Passwords are restricted to contain only 7 bit ASCII characters such as a z A Z 0 9 Foreign language characters such as amp ae cannot be used within passwords Related procedures To create edit or delete an Operator record 1 Select Control Operators and then Operators tab 2 Referto Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 97 98 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Linking facilities facility profiles permissions and operators Examples Table 46 Examples of Operator Permission Profile Facility relationship Operator Permission Profile Facility Result install System Administrator All Facility System Global This combination allows operator install to responsible for the perform all functions on all records assigned to system administrative the Global Facility on all forms allows full access functions for the entire on all forms system All Facility System Facility X This combination allows operator install to perform all functions on all records assigned to Facility X on all forms allows full access on all forms All Facility System Facility Y This combination allows operator install to perform all functions on all records assigned to Facility Y on all forms allows full access on all forms All Facility System Facility Z This combination allows operator install to perform all functions on a
484. re Perfect 4 5 User Manual Figure 165 Personnel form M2MR Category 8 ij People zu E People Badges Places G Personnel personnel Type Department Last Name ei m uwo 2 Gi b x X ZC Gi ANDREW KR FEMIA RI Personal Address Properties Category Manager Badge Manager Images User Fields Notes REILLY Mi FRANCOLINI G Assigned Categories Available Categories IE Tuy RO Slot Category Category ADAMS Sr 1 Computer Room Team E Computer Room Team ABRAMS ST JOH MOTION SHUNT KEYPAD ACCETTA R JOH RECEPTION DOOR 7 24 ALEXANDER ELI Le JOH SERVER ROOM 7 24 AMEND ELI JOH STORE ROOM 7 24 AMMONDS BA Slot IMIS 24 Hour ASHMAN AL MIS Shift 1 ASHTON Ma 2 HE Mss shitt 2 BERSSON B NO ACCESS use w sched only DAMELIO A e NO ACCESS use wischedule only DAVISFRIEND Jul STL 1DC GALLERIES 7 24 DEBARGER cal DELUCA vin DEROBERTIS K SCHATZ z GIBNEY s GRAFF HE GRULLON Jo JONAS ST JONES GES EES j Results 500 records Save and exit the Personnel form How to set up a modified two man rule M2MR controlled space without door control You need to complete the following forms to set up M2MR with Door Control for an area Reader form To configure the area readers Door form To configure the doors in the area Facility Profile form To enable Occupancy Control Area form To enable Oc
485. re alarm can activate and the Allowable Open Time is changed to a value which means Pre alarm should already have activated it immediately does so When Pre alarm can activate and the Allowable Open Time is extended the timing continues uninterrupted Pre alarm activates when the door has been opened for the new Allowable Open Time minus the Pre alarm interval Pre alarm configuration Use the Doors form to configure Pre Alarm for an individual door Enable this feature using the Pre alarm radio button In order for Pre alarm to generate a warning signal an input group must be defined The associated outputs operate any type of physical device that can be connected to a micro including devices that produce audible warning signals The Pre alarm feature is not designed to associate inputs with the Pre alarm input group Pre alarm uses the Alarm routing defined on the Alarms form and the Door Status will display the door s Pre alarm input group and whether the door is disabled or enabled for Pre alarm The Allowable Open Time on the Doors form must be greater than the Pre alarm interval in order to use Pre alarm as the Pre alarm input group will be triggered at the specified interval before a sensing violation is detected and reported Keypad Shunt Time can be used to extend the allowable open time on a door In this case the Pre alarm warning signal will be triggered at the specified interval before the Held Open Too Long violation is
486. reader activity will be considered the start of a new transaction Time outs are not reported to users 368 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Double badge reporting All reader transactions are tracked by two separate reports one for each component transaction These reports are presented in the Badge Monitor and or Badge History Each transaction reports whether it is the first or second activity on a single or double transaction reader When both transactions are valid each transaction reports that access was granted When both transactions fail each transaction reports its individual reason for failure When only one transaction fails it reports its reason for failure while the other reports that it was valid but did not gain access It is possible to detect the one component transaction s failure before the other component transaction has been completely validated In this case the other component transaction will report that it was not completely validated All transaction reports include a time stamp It shows the time at which the access decision was made not when the transaction started Since a double transaction s access decision is made when both component transactions are complete both transactions will report the same time stamp Double badge configuration To configure a reader for double badge function set the Number Of Badges field on the Readers form to Double All readers can be configured to require one or two
487. red changes 5 When you have completed your changes click Save To delete a template 1 From the Primary menu such as Access Configuration Control or Setup select a Secondary menu item and then click the appropriate tab for the form whose template you are going to edit For example Configuration Elevators Elevators 2 Click 3 Chapter 16 327 Data Generator and templates A screen similar to the following displays Figure 135 Manage Template 5 Manage Templates for Elevators Create a New Template New Template from Blank Form Use a blank record form to create a new template New Template from Record Use the currently selected record to create a new template Modify Duplicate or Delete an Existing Template Select a Template Template Description Hame Facility his is for demonstration purposes only Engineering Elevator GLOBAL Marketing Elevator GLOBAL Modity Duplicate Delete Cancel kee 3 Select the template you want to edit and click Delete To duplicate a template 1 From the Primary menu such as Access Configuration Control or Setup select a Secondary menu item and then click the appropriate tab for the form whose template you are going to edit For example Configuration Elevators Elevators 2 Click x A screen similar to the following displays Figure 136 Manage Template 1 Manage Templates for Elevators
488. response was given at a reader not enabled as a Keypad reader Learn Timeout A badge was not learned by the micro within the set amount of time of 5 seconds No Categ Match An invalid badge read occurred because the badge holder s categories did not match one of the area s categories Not Validated In a Double Badge reader the second badge read was not validated because the first was invalid Reader Offline A read took place in an offline reader Usage Exhausted The badge holder s usage count for limited usage readers has been exhausted Double Door Locked A second valid read occurred before the door was opened for the first valid read The door then locks Invalid Nested APB An invalid read occurred at a nested APB reader Invalid Timed Nested APB An invalid read occurred at a timed nested APB reader Fail Secure An invalid read occurred at a global nested APB reader configured for Controller Requests from Host and the micro was offline Additionally the offline operation mode was configured to be Fail Secure Chapter 13 Alarm activity monitors Figure 111 Badge Monitor Image Type Classification J Device Time Host Date Host Time Operator Date Operator Time Employ 273 274 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Fields and controls Table 107 Badge Monitor fields Field name Description Image If Show Thumbnails in Monitor
489. ring Emergency modes using input groupe 220 Badge management EE 223 OVERVIEW deg ed aaa iaa EEE AE d E AER SEL EAE 224 Defining he CEET 224 EXGIM TEE 224 PICIAS CMG CONTOS EE 225 Related procedutes EE 229 Defining personnel dE EN ASSEN bane NES Eee pes penes ee EEN e remeare 231 Eet Pole ugin eee eT a 231 Fields and coritrols eek oreet VERANKEREN 231 El Ee Belle 236 Capturing and displaying Images 237 LE Eelere Ke le 237 El Ee Beleeg 238 Printing badges EES 242 Fields and Controls ssena e a EE E dd dE Es 242 Related Kelte ele 243 Category mandger 2e Ee ek sede eee nE ER XR ERN RU Rca COS RR BA EE RE EE EE Bale OE ER e 244 EXOM TEE 244 LE EI Ve TEE 245 Related Bel 245 Category SChedulen PDT 247 Eieldeamd controls EE 247 Related procedures s eso e ERR Gt d derer ENRON SY PERDERE es 248 Badge managet d he dE pere edu wee de dee EENS SEELEN 251 EXAMP aa RU ET T e aeospaystel Ssh afar 251 Fields and coritrols ius ire ere DU E ree PEE psu T FF A CUOI du KNEES 251 E wl m 252 FieldS GNG COMtONS Er 252 Related procedtures 2er hp ERR I Ra dr te D UN cae sede 252 Badge design 255 Setting up badge designs e 2 NEEN SEENEN NEEN er p Taste ees cone ee ay Yr EEN Rr EE ERU 256 SIE Eelere Ke le EE 256 El Ee Beie 256 x Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Chapter 13 Chapter 14 Mapping badge design E ENNEN cou ed geg Date Ee pir
490. rmission System Permission Non facility based forms Profile Permission Groups foi Areas Categories and Reports Example Operator Jane Doe is responsible for issuing badges to the Manufacturing plant in the Global facility She is assigned the permission Badge Admin The Badge Admin permission is assigned the Form Profile Manufacturing that has a custom Badge form the System Permission Profile View System Permissions and the Facility Permission Profile Update Badges that grants update permission on the Badges form only Figure 35 Permission Form 8 Operators i ee Operators Modes Routings Backup Restore Operators Permission Groups Permission System Permissions Profile Facility Permissions Profile Form Profile Description System Administrator GL a jJ a CH x A L gt 26 ZC ba Badge Admin GU Permission Description permission Groups Description Badge Admin Facility GLOBAL Form Profile Manufacturing GLOBAL System Permission Profile View System Permissions GLO Facility Permissions Permission Profile Boca Deerfield Delray S H Jletopat Update Badge Results 2records 94 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because f
491. rmissions 2 0 06 cette en eas 93 D uu DUI Ate TELE ENEE BAe Saw chee eee ER ER Laos 95 Linking facilities facility profiles permissions and operators 98 80 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Overview The Picture Perfect system allows you to group your system database records according to facilities A facility can be records associated with a group of buildings in a city a building a floor in a building a tenant or a room on a particular floor in a building Facility records are text descriptions of these places Database records can be grouped together by assigning them to a common facility At installation a facility Global is created and by default all database records are assigned to it Operators using your Picture Perfect system require access to different forms and facilities depending on their function and location They also require different levels of authority depending on their position A Permissions Profile is a way of defining the record and field level access permissions as well as action permissions that control what applications an operator can run There are two types of profiles Facility Permission Profiles which define permissions for Picture Perfect forms that are partitioned by facility and System Permission Profiles that define permissions for the Picture Perfect forms that are not partitioned by facility Default profiles are created at installation for System and Facility permissions All Inser
492. rneriE s auda em a6 6 eR KU CROR QR QR C olli e ah id 171 uS 172 Creating categories i EE ta EE EE CORREA EROR KR RNERA WERE RF ART A A DEBERE EEG EY 172 eent TEE 172 Fields and Ke lu 173 El Ee Beie 173 e lee le EE 174 Selen el 174 Nested anti passback 2 20 nnn nent entre denen e e tebe ees 175 Nested APB Configurations 2 eetelke bai peed KEN Ee e Ex e SERA ee 177 Fields arid CONTOS iganen cree eer ramin Een EES Ee 178 Related Rtg dtes ersero nean ENNEN NN CARERE RM 182 Defining readers s 2 och eren i Ie ERR RR n rel ER MBPTRN LHP ER SUE UERE HEN DER 182 EXC TEE 182 Fields and Controls co ANERE EE RE od SEENEN e eher y be weeks REN SEENEN ER er A 183 Related Kelte el 187 vii viii Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Chapter 10 Defining optesch cold can Ee Boa ening ead dole heed Adan bee td SEKR 187 eet 187 Fields Gnd control eR 188 Related procedures Ee he Palme ll eddie E RI SEN EMA es 191 Schedules ane 193 OVGIVIOW ss cameos bic VeL RE sasha t HEAR YU deene ER d EE E RE EN ees 194 Creating DO e 2 dE BEER EELER bedded tae RAST eed aa at ae eed Measham EE EE 194 lite Breet 194 Emergency ee EE 195 Holiday nee 195 EXC DIC ed Et 195 Fieldsand Kee 196 Related Kelte 196 Changing modes lege LEE 196 Itin cce 196 Fields Gnd COMICS e ET UE 197 Related Mel ee 197 Changing modes by scheduling a mode event 198 EXAMP E a E 198 Fields and coritrols ue
493. s Description Q J ALL CATEGORIES AU 4 WC NO ACCESS use AU Categories Description INO ACCESS use w sched only Facility GLOBAL Permission Group ALL GROUPS ALLOWED lt GLOB AT fe iita e ma Mit eR A s Type None Team Member Guest 4 Escort Required 2 records Chapter 9 173 Area management Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 75 Category form fields Field name Description Description Enter a category description up to 30 alphanumeric characters long Permission From the list box select the permission group to be associated with the category Group Type None Access to an M2MR controlled area is not permitted while M2MR control is enabled This button is only available to operators with Occupancy Control permission granted See Occupancy control on page 338 Guest A Guest is not allowed entry to an M2MR controlled area unless two 2 team members are already present in the area This button is only available to operators with Occupancy Control permission granted See Occupancy control on page 338 Team Member If an M2MR controlled area is em
494. s Y E Begin Evert At Mode Start At Mode End amp Time HH mm ss 06 00 00 WE T Ir Time Zone Context S Micro v Results Micro 2 2 records H Sunday Wf Monday Wf Tuesday Mf Wednesday W Thursday W Friday Saturday 201 202 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 84 Area Event form fields Field name Description Description Type any alphanumeric combination 1 to 60 alphanumeric characters for Description This event may include more than one location if the facility has multiple entrances or buildings Example Unlock Door at 08 00 Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box Selecting a facility will allow the administrator to restrict operator access to those records in a specific facility For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Area Select the area in which the event will occur Area Online Online All readers in the area operate online during the event Offline Offline All readers in the area operate offline during this event not able to unlock doors but able to read badges pass badge data route and archive access messages and activ
495. s Routings Permission Group ALL GROUPS ALLOWED GLOB e La Physicel State Enabled O Disabled Online j Offline Shunting Enabled Disabled logical State 0000000000000 Scheduling Enabled Disabled Antipassback Enforcement O Normal O Passive Occupancy Control Occupancy Counting Do Not Care Disabled Enabled Occupancy Count o Two Man Rule Do Not Care Disabled Standard Modified Door Control Modified No Door Control Door Release Timeout Results 95 records 5 Save and exit the Area form To define categories for M2MR category types 1 From the Access menu select Places and then click the Categories tab 2 Click New 4 Chapter 18 Advanced access control features 3 Define one or more categories groups of people who will access the controlled area and under Type enable the appropriate radio button Guest or Team Member Figure 172 Categories form M2MR People Badges Places Df Areas Categories Area Events Descripti Computer Room Team AU a AR Exod 9x 28 oe Categories Description Computer Room Team 3l Facility GLOBAL e Permission Group ALL GROUPS ALLOWED GLOB e
496. s networks and serial port adapters for modems and lines of microcontrollers Table 127 Picture Perfect 4 5 terms explained continued Term Definition DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is network protocol for automatically assigning TCP IP information to client machines Each DHCP client connects to the centrally located DHCP server that returns the client s network configuration including IP address gateway and DNS servers DHCP is useful for fast delivery of client network configuration Digital Input A physical sensing device used to monitor an electronic contact connected to a microcontroller Also called a DI Digital Output A physical control device used to turn on off an electronic contact connected to a microcontroller Also called a DO Disk Array See Array Disk Partition A division of storage disks into physical or logical segments such that each segment acts as an independent component Distributed Database Resident database downloaded to a microcontroller that allows independent decision making and faster response time DNS A service database that translates an IP address into a domain name Domain Name The site s name that an organization uses Example GE has a domain name of ge com Door A database record that links the logical functions of a door with the door strike output exit button and door sensor inputs Door Forced Open A
497. s Downstream Communications Failure input group normally set to 3 This input group must be defined prior to completing the Micro form See Creating input groups on page 127 Downstream Enter the number of seconds between each downstream retry normally set to 2 Retry Interval Host Micro Polling Retries Host Micro Polling Retry Interval Enter the number of times the host will try to contact this micro before triggering the Upstream Communications Failure input group normally set to 3 This input group must be defined prior to completing the Micro form See Creating input groups on page 127 Enter the number of seconds between each host to micro retry normally set to 2 seconds for direct connect micros and 8 seconds for dial up micros 135 136 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 56 Micros form fields continued Tab Field Description Polling Enter the number of days hours minutes and or seconds that must elapse without Interval communication to the host before the host polls this micro to verify that it is still capable of communicating normally set to 60 seconds If the polling interval is set to 0 no polling occurs Note To be UL compliant the polling interval must be less than 200 seconds CAUTION If the micro is configured as Network Dialup the polling interval is interpreted differently based on the current communications channel open to the micro If using the primary chann
498. s at that time Fail Safe and Fail Secure To accommodate different offline behaviors when using the Controller Requests from Host method there are two modes of operation Fail Safe and Fail Secure that can be configured on a per reader basis for readers that have been configured for Global Nested APB operations If the controller has lost communication with the host and the reader is configured for Fail Secure no access is granted at nested APB readers If the controller has lost communication with the host and the reader is configured for Fail Safe access is granted based on categories but not based on the From area 175 176 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Figure 75 Anti passback example transactions Controller 2 R6 Controller 2 Area B Area C Controller 2 Controller 1 R7 Controller 2 Controller 1 R8 R2 Controller 1 Controller 1 Area Z Outside area Here are the transactions in order with resulting current area after each Table 76 Anti passback example transactions Controller 2 Controller 1 Controller 2 Controller 1 Person Area Person Area Person Area Person Person Area Host Host Controller Controller Person Badge Badge Broadcast to Broadcast to Requests Requests from Last Access Area Transaction Current Area Controllers Controllers from Host Host Neutral Initial State Neutral Neutral Neutral Neutral Neutral Neutral Badge at Area A Area A Area
499. s for each mode Defining an event requires you to select a mode set the time of the event select an output group and specify one or more changes to the output group An output group event can enable or disable a specific output group and or change the state of its outputs to Off or On for the period of time entered in the Time field of the Output form associated with this output group For example e You can define an output group event to enable an output group made up of lights or perimeter cameras and have them turned on only during the night You can define an output group event for Emergency mode that turns on sirens and emergency lights for the duration of Time You can define output group events for Normal mode to turn on lights late at night and turn them off in the morning Example Define an output group event for Emergency mode that turns on sirens and emergency lights for the duration of Time Figure 86 Output Group Event form g8inputs Outputs gt Fu E Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Input Groups Inputs Output Groups Outputs Input Group Events Output Group Events Description e ZA 28HRHOLD GU A x B X o A xX a 32 1 28 HR HOLD GU Activate SirensiLig GU Output Group Event Description Activate Sirens Lights Facilty GLOBAL Output Group Sirens lt GLOBAL gt Enabled St
500. s information about when it was last used This reflects information captured as of the moment the badge record was displayed Note Type the slashes if the system date format requires them Type the colons if the system time format requires them Date The date the badge was last granted access Time The time the badge was last granted access Time Zone The time zone in which the badge was last granted access For examples see verifying time zones on page 168 Reader Indicates the reader last granted access to this badge Area Indicates the area this badge was last granted access to Person Indicates the Personnel record to which this badge is assigned This field is view only you can perform a search but it cannot be edited Temporary Set to On if this badge record is to be used as a temporary badge A pool of badges can be created and used repeatedly for this purpose A temporary badge must be expired in order to be reissued Usage Count Limited Usage To limit the number of times a badge may be used set the Limited Usage check box to On Count Type a specific number in the Count field Each time the badge is used in a Limited Usage reader the usage count is decremented by 1 When the count is 0 the badge will no longer grant access into a Limited Usage reader Tour Badge If you have the optional Guard Tours package installed select this option to designate a badge as a tour badge used to conduct guard
501. s order number For example SELECT last name 1 20 employee 1 15 FROM person ORDER BY 1 This will order the results by the last name field Follow these steps after you have added a printer to your OS and to Picture Perfect 1 Configure report width After a report is created a SOL command must be run to setup the width of the report manually This is not a configurable field within the UI Please follow the table below to configure the page width field for each report event record Table 118 Wide Carriage Printing Configuration Report width Printer paper size Orientation Page width 80 columns Letter landscape No action 80 columns Letter portrait 81 80and 132 Letter landscape 132 any Wide paper portrait 132 2 Type the following using the Page width from the above table sqlstmt update report setup set page width 132 where title title of your report 3 Youcan verify the change took place by doing the following selectrpt select title page width from report setup where title title of your report 4 Optional procedure if using wide paper Configure enscript to use wide paper when printing Enscript by default uses Letter size paper In order to use a different paper size a configuration file must first be edited All dimensions of paper size are measured in points A printer s point is approximately 1 72 of an inch The following is an example
502. s presented to a reader This approach has the least overhead at the host but will incur longer wait times on badge learn transactions at a Nested APB reader Timed Local Nested APB The current area status of a badge is not synchronized across controllers on a server The status is known local to each controller The controller will reset the current area status back to NUETRAL once the timeout period has expired Note Local Timed Nested APB is only useful if all readers are on a single controller 178 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 77 Areas form fields Field name Description Description Type an area description up to 30 alphanumeric characters long Example Lobby The lobby area may include more than one location if the facility has multiple entrances or buildings An area may be one contiguous physical space such as the Computer Room or it may be a number of separate but related spaces that require the same level of access control Example Computer Room MIS Lab Computer Vault MIS Equipment Room Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box This field reflects the facility to which this record is a
503. s tad dake ERE ERROR ERU EPA ERU ERA ERE E Rd RE 369 System configuration SLAM AAAS a suse our t e ERE ERU POSU Ed dd didi iua e pneu eate 369 Elevator OCCOSS EET H RM UT 369 Elevator access for all categories 371 Free ee eet 371 Howto setup elevator Control EE 372 Defining the number of floOIS iiis ee eger r PEES ENAGA EEEE e ena 372 Beleeg Pow Ae teda dat ui ebur ebd ba E adn Maas SESS 372 Riegel 373 Defining OULDURS EODD e EE EE 373 Defining lie EE 373 TAE Elevators TOM cos Aere Zen ENEE ENEE 373 Fields CHGICOMUPOIS esenee een erbe AS he AAA aaa EEEE atone 374 How toedit floor labels esnie NSA NS d dE E a ane 376 The Category Floors dun EE 378 Fields and eg 379 Scheduling elevator free access 2 nnn ened e e e rene 379 leegen EE 379 Pre alarm notifications cssc teer te ere eo nete REENEN web de EEN TR ER X Er Wee DER eee hes 381 elle one hu Deler el E EE 381 Pre alarm notification method 381 Disabling Bel Ce e EE 381 Pre aldiin CONTGURGTON EE 382 Chapter 19 Controlling alarms using a keypad code 384 Keypad alarm response function 6 ieee cece tenet ee tenet eee mea 384 Violation notificati EE 384 Keypad response iss verre beet ye EE EEN ANE EEA Ee 384 Eltere ET 385 eon EE 385 Process State cone s oor pe PR ere T a A A E EEEE ECEE EEERES ats 385 M ltipl access Violations uestre d 386 Door operation while violation is active isssssssssssssssssss cnet n et
504. s that affect it Never The micro will not dial the host for any schedule updates Updates are made during the next communications session Chapter 8 Device management Table 56 Micros form fields continued Tab Field Description eFlash eFlash is a method of flashing your DirecDoor PXNPlus Micro 5 PX Micro 5 PXN M PX 2000 and M PXN 2000 micros It does not require the micro to be in maintenance mode while the flash code is being downloaded All communication is handled by the host The eFlash download program is installed as part of the base Picture Perfect product and can be run on standalone systems network subhosts and on the primary host of a redundant system On a networked system eFlash should not be run on the network host It can run on all subhosts simultaneously and is capable of flashing the micros connected to each subhost eFlash can be run either from the Micros form or from the UNIX command line Using an optional file eflashrc you can define flashing requirements for the entire system once and then use part or all of the definition to flash or re flash micros as needed This file can be used for scheduling unattended flashing Note Only one instance of eFlash can be run on a system When eFlash begins it creates a lock file cas log eflashrc If the lock file exists indicating that the program is running when you attempt to launch eFlash an error message will display and the program will e
505. s that occur active pending or completed Alarms that are not yet acknowledged are active alarms that are acknowledged but not removed are pending and alarms that are removed but not yet reset are completed 1 From the Monitor menu select Alarm Monitor 2 To view all the columns on the Alarm Monitor stretch the window frame or use the scroll bar To jump to a record from the Alarm Monitor Note If an operator does not have permission to view the associated record the option is dimmed 1 From the Monitor menu select Alarm Monitor 2 Right click an alarm to display the following menu Alarm Monitor a X SZ Q New Alarms 3 Total Alarms 3 Display is now active Highest Priority 20 D HOST TO MICRO 0 COMM FAIL MICRO 0 Alarm N A 08 4 2006 10 44 10 08 1 4 2006 10 44 10 DOOR FORCED OPEN gomp to Aam Alarm N A 10 49 29 08 4 2006 10 49 29 Jump To Device 3 Ifyou select Jump to Alarm the associated alarm record displays such as the following Alarms j Alarm Monitor Badge Monitor Input Monitor Operator Monitor Status Monitor User Monitor Alarms AlarmColors Alarm Events Alarm Messages Alarm Responses Leg Q Ai DIE xn 4 X e 9 SUSPENDED BADGE a Alarm Description Instructions Description SUSPENDED BADGE Facility GLOBAL Priority sn Route Definition Alarm Routing MONITOR AND HISTORY GLOB e
506. s the number of persons in a controlled space to be monitored by enabling Occupancy Control through the Area form This option is used when the number of people in an area must be controlled such as fire code enforcement regulations or when Two Man Rule is enforced The occupancy count is set to zero and Picture Perfect updates the occupancy count when a valid entry or exit to from the area occurs Note Areas with Occupancy Counting enabled cannot span micros All readers and doors must be physically connected to the same micro How to set up occupancy control You need to complete the following forms to set up occupancy control for an area e Reader form To configure the area readers e Door form To configure the doors in the area e Facility Profile form To enable Occupancy Control Area form To enable Occupancy Counting for the area To set up the area readers 1 From the Configuration menu select Doors and Readers and then click the Readers tab 2 From the toolbar click Find to locate the reader record you want to set up 3 Onthe Function tab under Logical Reader Function enable the appropriate radio button APB In APB Out T amp A In or T amp A Out Note In an area with Occupancy Control enabled e All readers in the area must be assigned one of these logical functions APB In APB Out TSA In or TSA Out e APB readers must be set to Global Timed APB is not allowed e The logical reader function T amp A In
507. s user defined for each individual micro For micros that do not require immediate updates the host stores the updates until the next host to micro or micro to host call occurs and then downloads the new records Outputs and Output Group Commands The host dials the micro immediately whenever the operator changes the state of an output or output group on that micro Note For details that show how an operator can command state changes and control outputs using input groups output groups or selected outputs see Figure 109 Control Output Groups on page 268 Operator generated Commands The host allows the operator to dial any micro in the system to check the status See Monitoring status on page 280 Micro Reset Request Command The host dials the micro to send a reset command when an update to the system database requires major updates to one or more micro configurations The host dials the micro to send a reset request when an operator uses CMENU to reset a micro Note Before the reset sequence starts the micro terminates the call and disconnects to free the communications line after reset the micro dials the host to request its database and configuration Micro Poll The host can poll micros that have not communicated with the host for a user defined time period A zero Polling Interval setting tells the host that no polling is required See Polling Interval on page 136 Network micros Chapter
508. sages to a printer history log e mail and or to the monitor The routings you create populate list boxes that are used in various aspects of the system Example Incoming alarm messages are assigned a routing of Monitor Figure 24 Routings form Io x 2 4 x Routings Description MONITOR MONITOR AND PRIN GU Facility PRNTERANDHST GU GLOBAL MONITOR AND EMAIL eJ MONITOR HISTOR GU rit PRINTER MONITOR GU Mentor eus isi No Yes Yes i Printer Email Yes Printer ag 11 records Search operation completed successtully Chapter 5 System configuration Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 34 Routing form fields Field name Description Description Type a description 0 to 60 characters to identify the type of messages to be routed Example Badge Activity Operator Messages Overnight Messages or ALL A single routing description can include multiple routing destinations Example You may want messages received overnight to be routed to the printer the monitor and the history log Printer Select Yes
509. scription Alarm Response Type an alarm response for the operator to use up to 60 alphanumeric characters These alarm responses appear in a list box that is used when the operator responds to an alarm When the operator selects a response the response and the alarm event automatically route to the log Pre written responses save time but if none of the responses on the list box are appropriate the operator can type a unique alarm response Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box This field reflects the facility to which this record is assigned For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Related procedures To create edit or delete an Alarm Response record 1 Select Configuration Alarms and then Alarm Responses tab 2 Referto Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 Chapter 7 117 Alarm activity configuration Defining alarms Use the Alarms form to define each alarm both physical alarms such as door forced open and logical alarms such as invalid badge Define the alarm priority whether or not it can be scheduled how the alarm inputs and outputs reset where it is routed and which alarm instructions display when the alarm occurs These entries form a list box that is used in the Input Groups form where alarms are assigned to a specific input group See Input Groups Form on page 129 Example Ann Davis is the system administrator at Global Corporation
510. scription Define Floors Description Ge lt Configuration Template Facility Bocaratonm Field Locks Lock the following fields Locked fields cannot be edited when the template is run in the Wizard Reader DD Micro Configuration Type MicroiDO ReaderiDO Description Facility C Configuration C Define Floors lll Fire DO after Floor 9 Under Template Name enter a name for this template record for example Marketing Elevator form Under Template Description enter text that describes the purpose for which this template is used Under Template Facility select the facility to which this record is assigned L1 0 w P Under Field Locks select any fields that you do not want the user to edit when the template is run Be sure to populate those fields with the information that you want locked Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual 326 8 When you have completed the template click Save To edit a template 1 From the Primary menu such as Access Configuration Control or Setup select a Secondary menu item and then click the appropriate tab for the form whose template you are going to edit For example Configuration Elevators Elevators Click 3 A screen similar to the following displays Figure 133 Manage Template
511. se Shared Memory Free The amount Bytes of shared memory currently available Shared Memory Total The total amount Bytes of shared memory used free on the system Shared Memory Graphical display of used shared memory capacity Badges Processed The number of badge transactions processed since the time shown in Start Date Start Time Messages Processed The number of messages processed since the time shown in Start Date Start Time Start Date The date the system was last started Start Time The time the system was last started Communications Comm XON Yes Communicating with devices No Not communicating with devices buffer too full Comm XOFF Yes Not communicating with devices buffer too full No Communicating with devices History Usage Alarm History Alarm History capacity used The number of alarm transactions in the history table Badge History Badge History capacity used The number of badge transactions in the history table Event History Event History capacity used The number of event transactions in the history table Operator History Operator History capacity used The number of operator transactions in the history table Tour History Tour History capacity used System History The number of tour transactions in the history table System History capacity used The number of system transactions in the history table 287 2
512. se Response Enabled on the Doors form this code entered on a keypad allows an authorized badge holder to Code respond to and reset an active alarm This Alarm Response Code must be different from the Shunt Code on the Micros form See Controlling alarms using a keypad code on page 384 BadgeHistory Type the percentage at which the micro triggers the Badge History Overflow input group to notify Threshold the host that its Badge Transaction table has reached this percentage of capacity Alarm History Type the percentage at which the micro triggers the Alarm History Overflow input group to notify Threshold the host that its Alarm Transaction table has reached this percentage of capacity Controller Read only indicator of controller type that is set when the controller establishes communication Type with the host Controller Read only indicator of new firmware feature capabilities supported by this controller Features Timing Upstream Enter the number of times the micro will try to contact its upstream micro before triggering the Retries Upstream Communications Failure input group normally set to 3 This input group must be defined prior to completing the Micro form See Creating input groups on page 127 Upstream Enter the number of seconds between each upstream retry normally set to 2 seconds Retry Interval Downstream Enter the number of times the micro will try to contact its downstream micro before triggering the Retrie
513. select Operators and then click the System Permissions Profiles tab 2 Click Find Q to locate the System Permission Profile record to alter 3 Under Page Level Permissions make sure the profile for Access Secure is set to Update Insert or Delete 4 Click Save A 1 168 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Verifying time zones The Time Zone feature associates a time zone with items in your database that have a physical location such as micros operators or hosts Monitors display dates and times in all three time zones Host Micro and Operator Using the Preferences icon amp on the Monitor toolbar you can choose which columns to display Date and time entry fields on event forms and on the Category scheduler specify a context of either Host Micro or Operator which allows you to schedule events or categories in any of those contexts Note Some Picture Perfect systems may experience a temporary discrepancy in transaction date and time during the DST change This will only affect systems with servers or micro controllers that span multiple time zones For example if a server is located in Central DT and microcontrollers are in Eastern DT they may experience a one hour divergence The time will correct itself at the conclusion of DST Example Example 1 You have three offices one in New York one in San Francisco and one in Houston You are the system administrator and you are in New York the host is in Houston Yo
514. siness hours Detected Ignored po Not Care See Radio buttons on page 27 Forced Open You can set up area events to ignore doors that are forced open in an area Monitoring Example To keep a loading dock door open indefinitely during business hours without an alarm occurring Detected Ignored Do Not Care See Radio buttons on page 27 Related procedures To create edit or delete an Area Event 1 From the Access menu select Places and then click the Area Events tab 2 Refer to Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 206 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Scheduling reader events If you want to change the characteristics of a single reader rather than a group of readers in an area use a reader event instead of an area event Use the Reader Events form to define reader events for each mode Defining an event requires you to select a mode set the time of the event select a reader and specify one or more changes to the reader Note Do not set up the Reader Events form to match the fields on the Reader form Fields that do not need to be scheduled should not be selected for example if the reader is already online do not select Online on the Reader Event schedule Example For increased security the reader controlling access to the computer room is set for anti passback control During Emergency mode this feature is disabled Figure 82 Reader Event form Doors And Readers
515. sion View column is selected by default Update Used to determine if the operator will be allowed to update a record associated with the selected form If selected the Control Level Permission Update column is selected by default Insert Used to determine if the operator will be allowed to insert or add a record using the selected form If selected the Control Level Permission Insert columns will be selected by default Delete Used to determine if the operator will be allowed to delete a record using the selected form If selected the Control Level Permission Delete columns will be selected by default Control Level This section is used to set up the field level permissions This window becomes active with data when a form Permission has been selected from the Page Level Permission section The data in the Control Level Permission window is shown in three columns None View and Update This window should be used to set the field level permissions for the selected form by selecting one of the columns Name This column contains the field description of each of the fields that can be selected None This column determines if the field displays on the selected form View This column determines if the data in this field is viewable on the selected form The Page Level Permission View Update Insert or Delete must be selected for this column to be active Update This column determines if the field can be edited or not from th
516. so that you can indicate no secondary port A typical description of a network micro port should allow an operator to identify it on the ports list box on the Micros form It should also allow the operator to distinguish it from a serial port Example Network Micro O Port Host Name Type the host name of the network micro The host name of the network micro must be listed in the etc hosts file or a Domain Name Server DNS This can be either the IP address or the name Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box This field reflects the facility to which this record is assigned For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Note Firewall users If your installation requires ANY micro and its corresponding host to communicate through a firewall the firewall must be configured to allow for connections through the following ports 6767 6768 7777 Related procedures To create edit or delete a Port or a Network port record 1 From the Configuration menu select Micros and then click the Ports tab 2 Referto Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 69 70 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Configuring email Use the Email Recipients form to add email addresses for the routing of alarms and mode changes When an alarm is generated a message will be emailed to the address listed in the Email Address field Each time an alarm is set or reset another message will be s
517. sonnel Type After a design mapping has been saved the field used for the mapping cannot be changed and will be dimmed or grayed out Mapped Designs The designs assigned to the corresponding field value are displayed in this column Design Mappings Field Value A drop down list of values associated with the selected field The Default value allows you to set a default design for any values not directly mapped Design A drop down list of existing badge designs A blank value removes the mapping from the Mapped Designs list Chapter 12 259 Badge design Related procedures To create a new design mapping l H From the Setup menu select Badge Designs and then click the Design Mapping tab Refer to Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 To assign a new design to a design mapping 1 2 4 From the Setup menu select Badge Designs and then click the Design Mapping tab Click Find Q and select the design mapping you want to edit In the Map Values pane click New 4 The Field Values and Design buttons are enabled Click Field Values and select the new value to add to the design mapping Click Design to display a list of badge designs Select a design to associate with each Field Value To remove a design from a design mapping 1 2 3 From the Setup menu select Badge Designs and then click the Design Mapping tab Click Find Q and select the design mapping y
518. specified interval time M2MR category type is Team Member NO Transaction One valid badge swipe on IN reader when occupancy count is at least two M2MR category type NOT None door is not opened Valid no passage One valid badge swipe on IN reader when occupancy count is at least two M2MR category type NOT None door is opened One APB T amp A IN occupancy count incremented by one One valid badge swipe on IN reader when occupancy count is at least two M2MR category type is None but valid on area Valid door locked One valid badge swipe on IN reader when occupancy count is at least two M2MR category type is None and category not on area No Categ Match One valid badge swipe on OUT reader when occupancy count is at least three and there would not be two Team Members left in the room Valid door locked One valid badge swipe on OUT reader when occupancy count is at least three and there would be two Team Members left in the room door is not opened Valid no passage One valid badge swipe on OUT reader when occupancy count is at least three and there would be two Team Members left in the room door is opened One APB T amp A OUT occupancy count decremented by one Two valid badge swipes on OUT reader when occupancy count is two within specified reader interval time door is not opened Valid no passage Two valid badge swipes on OUT reader when occupancy count is two within spec
519. splayed for invalid transactions but not valid transactions See Monitoring Swipe and Show activity on page 274 Limited Usage Selecting Enabled defines the reader as a limited usage reader which will only grant access to a badge holder for the number of times specified in the Usage Count field of the Badges form There is no limit to the number of readers that can be defined as limited usage readers See Chapter 11 Badge management for related information The count must be manually reset Chapter 9 187 Area management Table 79 Readers form fields continued Field name Description Elevator Reader Selecting Yes defines the reader as an elevator reader A maximum of 16 readers on a micro can be configured as elevator readers Note Swipe and Show cannot be enabled when the reader is defined as elevator See Elevator control on page 369 for related information Related procedures To create edit or delete a Reader record 1 Select Configuration Doors and Readers and then Readers tab 2 Refer to Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 Defining doors Use the Doors form to define how each door operates Depending on the features that it should have you may want to associate the door with an area and with inputs input groups and outputs so that the system can process door status information and operate optional door hardware or alarm devices The Doors form links all access and
520. ss Start Date Emi HHmmss Stop Date Stop Time Context L Schedule Type f Make Permanent Daily Continuous Days E Sunday E Monday E Tuesday E Wednesday E Thursday E Friday E Saturday Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 97 Category Scheduler form fields Field name Description Start Date Enter the date on which the category schedule is to be enabled Use the format of your system date as set on the Parameters form or use the Calendar icon to set the date Start Time Enter the time at which the category schedule is to be enabled each day for a Daily schedule type Example Select start times that occur on the hour or half hour Use the format of your system time as set on the Parameters form or use the Clock icon to set the time Stop Date Enter the date on which the category schedule is to expire Use the format of your system date as set on the Parameters form Stop Time Enter the time at which the category schedule is to expire each day for a Daily schedule type Example Select stop times that occur on the hour or half hour Use the for
521. ssigned For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Permission Group Click display the Permission Group list box Select the desired permission group for this area to identify operators who can assign this area to readers and doors Physical State Enabled indicates that the system allows readers in this area to read badges Disabled indicates that the system does not allow the area s readers to operate Logical State Online indicates that the readers in this area operate in normal mode Offline indicates that the readers are not allowed to unlock doors but are allowed to read badges pass badge data route and archive access messages and activate associated alarms Shunting Enabled indicates that the system allows use of keypad override of shunt time on doors and readers in this area Disabled indicates that shunting is not allowed This has no effect on Door Held Open or Door Forced Open See Held Open Sensing on the Doors form and Shunting on the Reader form Scheduling Enabled indicates that the system recognizes scheduled changes associated with this area Disabled indicates that the system ignores scheduled changes Antipassback If anti passback is set to Normal for this area it works in conjunction with the anti passback status setting Enforcement on each badge used to access this area If set to Passive anti passback will not be enforced in this area which means that access will be granted regardless of the
522. ssion radio button to enable the text boxes e Clear the contents of the text boxes e The Always show object radio button must be selected Enable it if necessary and then click OK to save the change Problem Objects on the badge are doubled that is two copies one slightly offset from the other This is caused by a problem with the badge design conversion If two copies of one or more objects are displayed edit the badge design by deleting the extra copy of each object as follows e Select the extra copy The extra copy of the object is usually the one that is slightly to the right and lower than the original Click Delete Click OK to save the change Problem Unable to log on When logging out of the client applet on an imaging workstation it is necessary to close all of the browser windows before trying to log on again Problem Badge printing functionality is disabled on the Badge Manager tab of the Personnel form If this occurs try closing the Personnel form and then reopening it Problem After capturing a new image for an existing personnel record you undo the change but the newly captured image still appears in the image panel Chapter 19 405 Troubleshooting maintenance support If this occurs close the Personnel form and then reopen it to see the original image stored in the database Problem Badge design does not preview or print correctly When previewing or printing badges with Picture Perfec
523. st be configured with an elevator micro The elevator digital output addresses must be in the 16 to 31 range for each 16 DO DOR board used Fora maximum configuration 64 floors four 16 DO DOR boards must be installed in a Micro 5 The duration time should be the same for all elevator digital outputs Note Ina Reader DI DO configuration make sure the Reader Interval Time does not exceed the Output DO Duration Elevator digital outputs do not require output groups to be associated with them Defining inputs Required for Reader DI DO Configuration Use the Input form to define a digital input for each elevator floor button When this input is received by the micro it performs a category match and if successful activates the associated output for a floor to which access is allowed For more information see Defining inputs on page 161 Keep the following in mind when defining elevator floor inputs Toggle the Elevator Point button to On to make this input an elevator input e At least one 20DI board must be configured with an elevator configured to have the Reader DI DO configuration Fora maximum configuration 39 floors an 8RP reader configured to be an elevator reader two 20DI boards and two 16DO boards must be installed in a Micro 5 Elevator DI s do not require an input group to be associated with them The Elevators form Use the Elevators form to select the type of elevator configuration define the number
524. subhosts and on the primary host of a redundant system On a networked system eFlash should not be run on the network host It can run on all subhosts simultaneously and is capable of flashing the micros connected to each subhost eFlash includes the following features e eFlash is a new flash method which does not require the micro to be in maintenance mode while the flash code is being downloaded Flashes DirecDoor PXNPlus Micro 5 PX Micro 5 PXN Micro PX 2000 and Micro PXN 2000 micros All communication is handled by the host Note Micros must first be flashed with Picture Perfect micro firmware version 4 03 or later eFlash can be run either from a Graphical User Interface the default or from the UNIX command line Operating eFlash in a graphical mode To flash a micro using the eFlash GUI 1 Logon to a Picture Perfect client PC 2 From the Configuration menu select Micros to display the Micro form 3 Click Find a to search for the micro you want to update 4 Click the Network Map tab located at the bottom of the grid to display a graphical layout of your micros 152 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Figure 62 Network Map Tab Micros Online Micros Offline MICRO 0 Facity GLOBAL e FA P2 Time Zone HOST GLOBAL X Lei el Micro Address o Type amp Normal Elevator HOST lt GLOBAL gt
525. swer Enter the message 0 to 30 alphanumeric characters that this modem gives when it fails to connect this Message message differentiates between No Carrier and No Answer Busy Msg Enter the message 0 to 30 alphanumeric characters that this modem gives when it fails to connect this message differentiates between No Carrier and Busy Related procedures To create edit or delete a modem record 1 From the Configuration menu select Micros and then click the Modems tab 2 Refer to Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 Configuring ports Many of the port characteristics for micro communication lines are already configured at the time of installation so all you need to provide is a port description tty number and line settings If the port supports dial up micros you specify a phone number and modem type Use the Ports form to define a serial port and the Network Micro Ports form to define a network port The system then allows you to assign the device port line to a micro Unidirectional direct connection micros require only a primary port e Bidirectional direct connection micros require both a primary and a secondary port e Dial up micros do not require a port assignment but do require a Ports form e Network micros require only a network primary port The Ports form supports dynamic configuration for all fields except tty Dynamic configuration means that you can configure ports without
526. t Update View and No These profiles are locked cannot be changed but they may be copied and then edited to create additional profiles Once a permission profile is defined it can be associated with a facility and assigned to a permission This permission is then assigned to an operator and determines what records the operator is allowed to access and what they are allowed to do with them based on the facility of the particular record For example when the Global facility is paired with the All Facility Permission profile and assigned to an operator that operator has full access to the database records associated with the Global facility The following diagram depicts the relationship of the Picture Perfect tables when setting up facilities in your system All of the records stored in the Picture Perfect database are either facility based or system based By default a Global facility is defined on the system if no other facility is defined Records that are not associated with a facility are assigned to the Global facility To determine the records that an operator can access facilities are paired with a profile defining the level of access and are then assigned to the operator s permission Category and Reports availability are not governed by facility or system but by permission groups Figure 28 Operator administration overview A facility consists of database Facility based forms p a Permission m System Permission Non facility
527. t 4 5 imaging for badge designs created with Picture Perfect 4 0 some badge designs with a very large background static image may not preview or print correctly The problem is due to an internal library incompatibility in third party vendor software The badge design can be repaired to work correctly with Picture Perfect 4 5 imaging by following these steps 1 4 Locate the original image file for the background If it is a true color image reduce its color depth to 32 768 16 bit colors Edit the badge design and remove the background static image object Save the badge design Edit the badge design again and replace the background static image object using the new image Save the badge design Preview or print a badge using the updated design It should now work correctly Please note that you must save the badge design after removing the original image and before adding the new image If you try to remove and replace within the same editing session the update will not work correctly 406 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Contacting Technical Support For assistance installing operating maintaining and troubleshooting this product refer to this document and any other documentation provided If you still have questions you may contact technical support during normal business hours Monday through Friday excluding holidays between 8 a m and 7 p m Eastern Time GE Security United States 1 888 GE SECURITY 1 888 437 3287
528. t Input a Alarms Alarm Colors Alarm Events Alarm Messages Alarm Responses 7 CBAxs 4 x Oe Alarm Description Instructions SCHEDULE DID NOT TRACED PERSON A DOOR FORCED OPEN Instruction 1 UNKNOWN BADGE Forced Door Send Security Gua e E HOST TO MICRO 0 u Instruction 2 Results 118 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 52 Alarms form fields Tab Alarm Description Field name Description Description Type a description for this alarm up to 30 alphanumeric characters Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box This field reflects the facility to which this record is assigned For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Priority Select an alarm priority so that when several alarms occur simultaneously this alarm displays in order of priority Highest priority is 1 and lowest is 500 Slide the scroll bar until the number you want to select appears You may also use the up arrow down arrow keys to increase or decrease the priority level
529. t appears with a count of one and is incremented by each subsequent violation A single valid keypad response resets all occurrences of the violation and the operator responds to all occurrences using the single alarm It is also possible for a door to be forced open and open too long during a single keypad alarm response For instance the door can be held open for too long then closed and then forced open all before a valid keypad response is made for the sensing violation In this situation the violations appear as separate alarms on the Alarm Monitor A single valid keypad response resets both alarms Each alarm is separately removed from the Alarm Monitor when the response is completed Door operation while violation is active The door will continue to operate normally while the keypad alarm response is active This makes it possible for someone to gain access through the door even though the response to the violation has not been completed Keypad alarm response configuration To set up a Keypad Alarm Response details on each step are given below 1 Define the Alarm Response Code maximum of 10 digits on the Micros form 2 Define a reader as a Badge and Keypad reader on the Readers form 3 Enable the Keypad Alarm Response on the Door form 4 Enable a badge to be used as the Keypad Alarm Response badge on the Badge form Defining the alarm response code Use the Micros form to define an alarm response code up to 10 digits f
530. t application Chapter 5 System configuration This chapter describes the system hardware and site configuration required to start using your system Readers should familiarize themselves with the information in this chapter before continuing to other chapters in this document In this chapter d 7 Tm 64 Configuring modems ccce 64 Coni aor REPE 66 Configuring email NENNEN ee ina t eh exar et a 70 Deming EE 72 Defining badge formats SEENEN eee e ehem ne 74 Defining departmenis crie 085 esee ve ER RR E EE EE 76 Defining personnel types oe onc ne ode awe eon MER ER AEA 77 64 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Overview After your installer completes the initial hardware and software installation there are Picture Perfect forms that allow you to configure your system according to your specific requirements Some of the forms contain default information that you can change as required The various forms are presented in the order recommended in Configuration steps on page 30 Configuring modems Use the Modems form to describe each modem type that you intend to use for dial up communications Modem types that you define using the Modems form appear in a list box for assignment to a micro on the Micros form and a port on the Ports form A micro can dial up the host on any available port that is compatible meaning the modem type matches Only compatible modem types can establish a connection The DirecDoor PXNPlus and
531. t box the Route to Email window is updated Only operators with the selected email addresses will receive activity and alarms that have this route point assigned Note The alarm record Alarm form must be associated with a routing record Routing form that includes e mail in order to use this feature Bump to Email This field identifies an alternate email address to use if the message is not responded to within the time specified in Bump Time A list of selected email addresses is displayed To add an address to the list click the arrow on the Email drop down list One or more addresses may be selected for this route point As addresses are selected or unselected from the list box the Bump to Email window is updated This field should be ignored if you are creating a route point that is used only for Activity Monitor routing Note The alarm record Alarm form must be associated with a routing record Routing form that includes e mail in order to use this feature Start Time This field identifies when a route point becomes enabled The format of the value entered should conform to the time format in system configuration To enable a route point 24 hours set this time to 00 00 01 If this value is blank the route definition will not be enforced Stop Time This field identifies when a scheduled route point becomes disabled The format of the value entered should conform to the time format in system configuration To enable a r
532. t duration time elapses Any devices lights sirens etc operated by outputs stay on for the duration time set on the Outputs form Example You may use a duration reset for an alarm that triggers flood lights to go on The time duration can be set for the maximum amount of time required to implement the alarm instructions Note Both the Alarms form and the Outputs form define reset methods for outputs Output resets can be overridden as follows A Manual Reset of an output overrides any other reset method that is defined for that output Example If the Outputs form specifies Reset On Duration for an output but the Alarms form assigns it Manual Reset the Manual Reset overrides A Duration Reset overrides an Auto Reset defined for an output Example If the Alarms form specifies Auto Reset for an output but the Outputs form assigns it Reset On Duration the Duration Reset overrides A Duration Reset overrides a Reset On Input for an output If the Outputs form defines a Reset On Input for an output but the Alarms form assigns it Duration Reset the Duration Reset overrides Color Picker Click Change Colors to display a palette of colors Toggle the button at the top of the palette to set the foreground color for the text and the background color for the background of the alarm message that you want displayed on the Alarm Monitor Color Sample Foreground A sample is displayed representing the selected color for
533. t function correctly unless those associations are made While it is possible to configure a Picture Perfect system to have more than one reader associated with one door and for one reader to be connected to more than one doorstrike output Keypad Alarm Response does not support this configuration Keypad Alarm Response can be incorporated into scheduling For instance if a reader is scheduled to change between being a Badge Only reader and a Badge and Keypad reader for a door with Keypad Alarm Response enabled alarms occurring during the badge only state will not require a keypad alarm response while those occurring during the badge and keypad state will require it If an alarm occurs during the badge and keypad state but has not yet been responded to when the schedule change goes into effect the reader will remain in the Keypad Alarm Response mode until proper response is made then the reader will change to the badge only mode See Defining doors on page 187 To enable Keypad Alarm Response Use the Badges form to enable a badge for Keypad Alarm Response Status requests on badges show whether or not a badge is authorized for keypad response Keypad response authorization is independent of badge type such as permanent contractor etc but it must be an active badge See Defining badges on page 224 387 388 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Disabling keypad alarm response Keypad Alarm Response can be disabled in the followi
534. t iia etes Poe e bebe eR iSo M COMPS UTED Devices eener mie t atatim imus 47 Console 408 Continuous schedule type eremitae teretes 248 Control Level Permission eese 84 88 Control Level Bermissions 340 346 351 352 359 Control Output Group Window eseeeeeeeeenrn 164 Control O fpults ave comte emitte tnmen 164 Control Outputs Window ierit pnia 164 onda E xv Coordinated Universal Time 408 Count ae ENER EE 288 ENER 288 VE HERE 288 ENER E EE 288 Creating Records 36 op E 241 V E BE 241 Custom FORMS E 20 90 232 330 331 332 Custom Lists 5 oer ERES ETEA 20 34 333 334 335 D Dati occ EOD ERUNT e 408 Daily schedule type aseo reete ter tent nra dado 248 D t HE 68 IRC DE 25 331 IR 408 Database Protection is uses im OY POE RO AGES MN nde 4 Database Updates eite e e esie ce CR Macatee 142 IR 42 408 IR EE 16 IR Default Badge Design Default Badge Encode Format 45 Default Routing epe e e e nd Minas 46 Ip3nrgg Rm 375 Degraded Open ente bte ce e RH ER gern 271 Deinitialization Commande 65 Deinitialization Response esesseseesererenteetntnneeenene 65 Delete Imported D t eher edente e iren 299 Deleting Records eve eee th ce e ea a 37 D pa rtmeht iecit rice or Oe ye 16 31 76 77 232 303 RER Ee IR Diagnostic E Diagnostic MOHBITOFS esce rte PEST E EENS Dial Host
535. t indicates the length of the character string required in the Badge Encode Number field on the Badges form A 96 sign indicates the beginning of the variable data and a lower case s marks the end The entire badge ID must be between 1 and 16 characters long Example For example the badge ID format 002 10s can be described as a facility code of 002 and a badge encode number of 10 characters The system comes with one pre loaded format 10s which is the format for 10 digit Wiegand readers If additional formats are needed they can be added on the Badge Formats form Figure 25 Badge Format form Badges Badge Formats Description CL 5 Ar o Standard 10 Digit B 964 Ql 65 EX A 9 A a Standard 12 Digit B 271 Badge Format Standard 16 Digit B IT Description Standard 16 Digit Badge Facility aes 229 GLOBAL v l La Badge Id Format 9616s DES Results 3 records Constant data such as a facility code is data common to all badges and will be entered in front of the in this field Constant data does not appear in the Badge Encode Number field of the Badges form Chapter 5 75 System configuration Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear
536. t the time of day that the event will start Remember to schedule another event as the pair of this one Example If something is turned on every day at 8 AM it must be turned off at some time later that day Time Zone Context Select the time zone context in which the schedule should execute Host Micro or Operator See Verifying time zones on page 168 Days of the Week If the event is a Run Time event select the days of the week that the event will occur Related procedures To create edit or delete an Alarm Event 1 From the Configuration menu select Alarms and then click the Alarm Events tab 2 Referto Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 Scheduling input group events You can use an input group event to place an input group online or offline and to control what output groups or alarms trigger when this input group activates An event can place an input group online offline at a scheduled time on a daily weekly cycle within the normal operating mode or this event can be set to occur At Mode Start and to continue with no daily or weekly cycles until a parallel At Mode End event occurs to reverse the change 213 214 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual For example For use with Fire mode you could create an event that sets the fire detector input group to offline so that Open condition and or Short condition state changes do not continue to be detected This input gr
537. ta grid From the form toolbar click Print amp The Print Grid displays Print Grid Print Grid amp Tabular Form Cancel e Select Tabular to preview a page layout similar to the following Chapter 4 Setup Figure 10 Print Preview Tabular C System Parameters Print Preview File Navigation Zoom Help DBS K amp lt gt AA w System Parameters Backup Directory Node Name Xon Threshold Xoff Threshold EH NODE1 1750 2000 Select Form to preview a page layout similar to the following Figure 11 Print Preview form E formTableLayout Print Preview File Navigation Zoom Help J amp 5s 2 44 m System Parameters Baclay Directory Jcus Ib badaup Node Name NODEl Xon Tine boli 1750 Moff Threshold 2000 Shared Memory Size 16000 Diagnostic Buffer Size 256 Alarm Monitors 2 Diagnostic Made 1 Event Montors 2 Date Fannst MMiyyy Time Font HHamuss Schedule Updates Database Yes Enforce Report Permissims No Fhsh Directory kasthsfhh System Poll Interval 60 Duress Code 00000 Alarm Monitor Color Scheme Alarm Description Enforce UL Specifications No Alam Fiter dpt Default Badge Encode Fannst Standard 10 Diet Badge lt GLOBAL gt Default Badge Design Cisi GLOBAL Alam History Size 10000 Badge History Size 0000 Event History Sie 300 Operator History Size 10000 Tou History Siz 1000 Opentar Routing MONITOR AND HISTORY GLOBAL
538. tab From the toolbar click Add 4 In the Description field enter a unique text description Example Facility X From the toolbar click Save B Repeat step 3 and step 4 for Facility Y and Facility Z The Facility records will look similar to the following Figure 38 Defining Facilities Facility X uh amp l Es X 9 4 Facility Y Facility DS Facility Z Description Faciity z 100 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Step 2 Defining Facility Profiles To create the Update Badges facility profile l 2 3 4 5 From the Control menu select Operators and then the Facility Permission Profile tab From the toolbar click Add 1 In the Description field type Update Badges From the list of forms in the Page Level Permissions pane select Badges and click Update To set the desired Control Level permissions click Update for all the fields you want the operator to be able to edit From the toolbar click Save z The Update Badges facility permission profile record will look similar to the following Figure 39 Defining a facility profile Operators ZETN Operators Permission Groups Permissions System Permissions Profiles Facility Permissions Profiles FormProfiles Description amp Al Facility Permissi amp Insert Facility Permi Facility Permissions Q 4E X4 X Ba amp Updat
539. tab From the Available Badges column select a temporary badge and click the Temp Issue button E The Temp Issue window will display Enter the date and time that the temporary badge will expire Click Suspend to select the permanent badge that should be suspended Click Ok 254 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Chapter 12 Badge design This chapter describes how to set up photo badge designs and link the designs to badge holder Personnel records signatures and images stored in the Picture Perfect database These features are available if you have the optional Imaging package installed In this chapter Setting up badge designs 06 ccc ccc teen ees 256 Mapping badge designs Ae eet eoe ed se oe es 257 Setting a default badge design 260 256 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Setting up badge designs The first step in producing printed badges is to create a badge design or card layout The badge design determines the card s background size and placement of objects such as logo photo signature text or barcode fields that will be displayed on the badge A specific design can be selected at print time using a design mapping based upon field values in the badge or personnel record or a specific design can be assigned to print the badge Figure 104 Badge Designs form Badge Designs Badge Designs Design Mappings een e Q d 6 EI Xo 2 x mifare1 Design mifare myfareA i Description mifare10 myfare mifar
540. tact has been bypassed u Device Date The date the alarm occurred in the time zone context of the device See Verifying time zones on page 168 Device Time The time the alarm occurred in the time zone of the device See Verifying time zones on page 168 Host Date The date the alarm occurred in the time zone of the host See Verifying time zones on page 168 Host Time The time the alarm occurred in the time zone of the host See Verifying time zones on page 168 Operator Date The date the alarm occurred in the time zone of the operator See Verifying time zones on page 168 Operator Time The time the alarm occurred in the time zone of he operator See Verifying time zones on page 168 Process State Active Alarms that have not been acknowledged Pending Alarms that have been acknowledged but not removed Completed Alarms that have been removed but not reset Bumped Active alarms that have been bumped to another operator Notified Active alarms sent to the Network alarm Notification manager Remote Alarms sent to the Remote Alarm Notification manager Facility The facility of the alarm as determined by the Alarm Filter setting on the System Parameters form Count The number of times the alarm has set and reset 265 266 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Related procedures To view alarms on the Alarm Monitor Use the Alarm Monitor window to view and select any alarm
541. tatuscmd The command statuscmd is the only option where badge status information can be viewed Monitoring users The system records the operators that are logged on to the system and displays other details about the session and the operator Figure 116 User Monitor User Monitor GE zu E Alarm Monitor Badge Monitor Input Monitor Operator Monitor Status Monitor User Monitor Performance Monitor User Monitor il GO J 3 Leer m Licenses Available 99 ma UserID UserName EmployeeID Permission Session Ip Address Port LoginDate LoginTime Facility I install Systems Admin 0000 System Administr RAG2VVK 3 137 169 188 8085 08 28 2005 09 58 06 GLOBAL 282 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Fields and controls Table 111 User Monitor fields Field name Description User ID The Login name the operator types to gain access to Picture Perfect as defined in the Login ID field of the Operator form User Name The description of the operator using the Login ID as defined in the User Name field on the Operator form Employee ID The company identification number assigned to the operator using the system as defined in the Employee Id field on the Operator form Permission The operator s database access control as defined in the Permission field of the Operator form Session Asystem generated unique number identifying the session to which the ope
542. ted Entering numbers 3 or 4 would return an Invalid floor transaction and no access would be granted Refer to Figure 176 For a double badge transaction configuration each badge must first have access to the reader then the same access validation as above takes place The difference is that the final set of accessible floors will be denoted by the union of the two badges matched categories which correspond to floors In other words if the elevator category matches a category found on either badge access is granted See Double badge function on page 366 Chapter 18 371 Advanced access control features Figure 176 Example of Elevator Control Method 2 Category 3 FLOOR 6 Since this badge has category 1 this badge holder is granted access to floors Category 1 1 2 or 5 because those floors contain FLOOR 5 category 1 Category 2 4 5 FLOOR 4 Category 2 4 5 When one of the buttons for FLOOR 3 floors 1 2 or 5 is pressed an output is triggered to activate the Category 1 elevator to go to that floor FLOOR 2 d e 1 AT Category 1 FLOOR 1 Deg BADGE contains Coy 3 e M category 1 LEGEND A Category 1 General Access Category 2 Accounting Category 3 Administration Category 4 Marketing Category 5 Computer Dept Method 1 During the period of time when the elevator s digital outputs are active buttons are lit any number of th
543. ted This data can then be used for history and reporting purposes To generate a Floor Tracking report 1 From the Reports menu select the Report menu item and then click the Report tab 2 Click New amp A Modified Report dialog box displays Click Yes to continue 3 From the Select a Report Category list pane select History Reports Badge History 380 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual 4 From the Table Names list pane select badge_history Once you have selected the table the Column Names list pane displays the columns in the database 5 From the SQL Keywords and Operators select SELECT and click Apply 6 From the Column Names list pane select floor accessed Other fields such as transaction type xact_type date xact_date or time xact_time can be selected 7 Click Apply 8 From the SQL Keywords and Operators select FROM and click Apply 9 From the Table Names list pane select badge history Click Apply Figure 182 Floor Tracking report setup Se Uncategorized Reports x x 4 par e 3 Detaut Reports soL C History Reports View Results Header Footer TN Alarm History SELECT 4 door_evert Badge History SELECT FROM elevator 3 Operator History lenas SEES DN Tour History Apply JL Apply ZA SQL Keywords and Operators Table Hames SOL Variables Column Names Stextllabel facilty Sfacilty set floort Reger ES Apply ZA Apply JA
544. ted anti passback reader you can specify which area of the building the badge is coming from and which area it is going to For example the reader may allow a badge to go from area 1 e g main lobby to area 2 e g computer room The system remembers which area each badge and each person is in and updates this information whenever the badge is used and access granted at a reader all valid transactions update the area of the person and badge An anti passback alarm or event is generated if the reader s From area does not match the badge s currently recorded area For example an alarm or event is generated if the From area of the reader is area 3 but the badge is currently recorded as being in area 1 When an area is successfully entered the new current area will be retained on both the badge that entered the area and on the person record It is the last area on the person record not the badge as a person can have multiple badges that is recorded by a controller on a reset or learn of a badge There are two default areas included in the Picture Perfect application Neutral cannot be edited or deleted Outside can be edited but not deleted The area on a new person record is set to NEUTRAL a default area with id 1 The controller grants access to a badge whose current area is NEUTRAL The OUTSIDE area is a default area that represents the outside of the facility Note If a badge s currently recorded area and the From area of th
545. terne reiten tlt 272 Badg Tabl Request au resedit HO eSI Uer du 142 Badge Transactions cone denied alan eonomedde eid pues 363 Badge Unknown 2212 Badge Issue Read ets ng nn i a EE EEG 408 Badges 16 34 45 47 74 75 77 99 135 172 180 186 224 225 229 230 232 235 242 243 245 251 252 256 DTA 55 339 349 366 368 369 372 387 407 46 135 287 EUN 311 E 408 n 68 n 288 deed EE E E E 288 225 274 408 e E E E N A E E E toe 408 159 162 183 Broadcast State Changes sss 130 BUMP Er 113 B mp to Emallz ike e rere etu e tcs iecur nere ee 112 Bump to Opetratots tegit eet etre e eodera 111 Bump to Permission Busy re C Calendar tete rH rH Nim eer RR Ee EE GE Capture Photo E Capture Signatue Cascade EEN Categories Form Escort Required i sese eeneg 39 Category coin 16 91 92 173 179 203 235 245 246 247 408 CALS ROLY EE 224 Category ElO0fs seeta siete n Pene ere 18 372 378 379 Category Mata pens icd oett ei ORE RUE 355 362 Category Permission Group 91 94 Category Scheduler Sv Color Picker naaca e ein E E eet dr tere Cen Color Getters e Column Names Comm Serial Comm 911 RN Commi XON serseri gedd ie eint eee
546. tes Photograph 21 Has Photograph Serge 5 8 Fields and controls Table 94 Image tab fields Field name Photograph Control name Description Capture o Click to capture an image Depending on the input device used such as a digital or video camera the appropriate interface for capturing or loading a new image will display Load Click to download the image associated with this personnel record Export Nw Click to export the image associated with this personnel record Has Photograph Indicates that this personnel record has a photograph associated with it Use this as a search criteria when searching for personnel with photographs 238 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 94 Image tab fields continued Field name Control name Description Signature Capture Click to capture a signature Depending on the input device used such as kel a signature pad the appropriate interface for capturing or loading the signature will display Load a Click to download the signature associated with this personnel record Export Click to export the signature associated with this personnel record B Has Signature Indicates that this personnel record has a signature associated with it Use this as search criteria when searching for personnel with signatures Related procedures
547. than one facility for instance two companies occupying the same building that use separate doors for entry exit For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 To Area Click the To Area list box to display a list of available areas Select the area that this reader protects and then click Close The area that you select should have categories and controls appropriate for this reader From Area Click the From Area list box to display a list of available areas If configuring a nested APB reader select an area Refer to Nested APB in this table for more information Interval Time Type the maximum number of seconds allowed to elapse between stages of a transaction such as entering a PIN number in a keypad reader after a badge swipe and or between separate badge transactions on a double badge reader See Double badge function on page 366 for details on this feature The time starts after the first transaction Valid In Group Click to display the Input Groups list box Select the input group to be triggered when a valid badge is swiped through this reader Note Only Trigger on Input Individual which are non boolean input groups are displayed in the list box See Boolean Type on page 130 Invalid In Group Click to display the Input Groups list box Select the input group to be triggered when an invalid badge is swiped through this reader Note Only Trigger on Input Individual which are non boolean input groups
548. than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 55 Input Groups form fields Field name Description This delay helps avoid false input detections Notes on the Input Groups form Description Type a description of the Input Group usually including a micro wiring address Note In both single input groups and in a hierarchy of input groups all inputs in any given group or hierarchy must be associated with the same micro Delay Time Type the number of seconds an input must be true On State or Change State before the input group is true The Off To On Delay Time and On To Off Delay Time set on the Inputs form overrides the Delay Time set Set Delay Time to zero for any input group assigned to an exit push button 129 130 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 55 Input Groups form fields continued Field name Description Boolean Type Boolean refers to an Any or an All condition If the specified Any or All condition occurs an input group will change its state Select one of the following radio buttons OR Click this radio button if you want the Input Group to change state when any of its inputs Any are activated Boolean AND Click this radio button if you want the Input Group to change state only when all of its All inputs are activated Boolean Individual Click this radio button if you want the Input Group to pass along information that
549. that you define appear in a list box on the Micros form so that you can assign a serial port to direct communication micros unidirectional or bidirectional None appears in the list box so that you can indicate no secondary port for a unidirectional micro and no primary or secondary port for a dial up micro A typical description of a host port includes the line number and the port number Example Line 1 Port 1 tty2 There are two serial ports on the host and additional serial ports are available if a multi port adapter is attached Note Serial port S1 on the RISC 6000 is used by the system console in the case of an ASCII console Modem Type A port used for direct communication micros does not require a modem type select None None is the default selection If modems are connected click Modem Type to display a list box of modems Select the modem type that matches your modem and then click Close Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box Selecting a facility will allow the administrator to restrict operator access to those records in a specific facility For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Phone The dial up micro to host telephone number Include the area code but not the PBX prefix or country code A dial up micro can use this number to dial the host A dial up micro uses a dynamic list of phone numbers to call the host on any compatible port that is available When the port is ass
550. the LDAP server IP Address or host name The physical address of the LDAP server for example 204 171 64 2 or the hostname Port Address The address that identifies the port to be used for communication between the Picture Perfect server and the LDAP server Enable SSL Click Yes to enable DES encrypted transmission between the LDAP server and the Picture Perfect server Note In order for the Picture Perfect server to verify the identity of your LDAP server Picture Perfect must know the LDAP Certificate filename Prior to enabling SSL e Login to Picture Perfect as root e Atthe command prompt type EnableLdapSSL certificate filename Version The version of the LDAP interface for example 5 Priority When there are multiple LDAP servers this is the priority by which to attempt access Test Connection To test the connection between the LDAP server and the Picture Perfect server type the LDAP distinguished name DN and password and then click Test Figure 16 LDAP DN form amp B System Parameters System Parameters LDAP Server LDAPDN Description Results 0 records 19 AN 3 E X o LDAPDN Description iority 51 ER Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of thes
551. the text of the alarm message that will be displayed on the Alarm Monitor Background A sample is displayed representing the selected color for the background of the alarm message that will be displayed on the Alarm Monitor Alarm Blink Yes The alarm will blink for specified number of seconds 10 seconds is the default No The alarm will not blink Blink Until Acknowledged The alarm will blink until acknowledged Note When an alarm that is configured with blink options is bumped it will blink until acknowledged on the operator client workstation that it was bumped to Instructions Alarm Instructions Click to display a list box Select up to five alarm instructions The selected messages will appear as instructions to the operator on the Alarm Monitor when this alarm is activated 119 120 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Related procedures To create edit or delete an Alarm record 1 Select Configuration Alarms and then Alarms tab 2 Refer to Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 Defining alarm colors Alarm monitor color scheme Alarm description If you have selected Alarm Description in the Alarm Monitor Color Scheme box of the Parameters form the Alarm Color box will appear on the Alarms form This box contains the Foreground Color Background Color and the Change Color button Example Ann Davis is the system administrator at Global Corporation and sh
552. the week e Start End schedules the event to take place only once either at mode start or at mode end Note Schedules that run on the micros can update the database This is configurable on the Parameters form using the field Schedules Update Database With this feature enabled as long as there is communication with the micro the host will reflect the scheduled state of the device For example if a door is scheduled to unlock at 8 AM the host record will be updated to reflect the change If this feature is disabled the host record will only reflect the host database information Runtime events Runtime Events are events scheduled to occur in weekly cycles for selected areas readers doors alarms input groups and output groups A runtime event can occur on one or more days per week at the start time that you select Runtime events are frequently used for the normal operating mode Runtime events must be created in pairs so that the entire cycle of events can be completed Therefore you need to create two events for each cycle and make sure both events are assigned to the same mode For example an unlock door at 8 AM event is paired with a lock door at 5 PM event to define a 24 hour cycle for that door Both events are scheduled for weekdays only The door does not require a runtime schedule for weekends because the door locks at 5 PM on Friday and remains locked until Monday at 8 AM when the unlock door event occurs
553. therefore which allows you to archive data on a regular schedule such as once a week This task can then be incorporated into your normal backup procedure The Force Rollover option takes data in the primary table and transfers it to the temporary table even if the primary table is not full Save to Select the media to use for the archive JEE DISISINIE Note If Disk File is selected any file or path selected is appended to the system configured backup directory Chapter 15 315 Backup and restore Table 117 Archive form fields continued Field name Description Destination File If you chose to save to a Disk File enter the name of the file system to store the archive Click Browse to select from a list If your archive file is expected to exceed 2 GB ensure that the location where the file is to be stored is defined as a Large File System Otherwise the archive file will be incomplete Generate Verification Report Click to generate an on screen verification report Related procedures To archive data l 2 From the Control menu select the Backup Restore menu item and then click the Archive tab From the Include section select one or more of the tables Badge Alarm Operator Event or an optional package corresponding to the tables you want to archive The Force Rollover option is displayed beside each history option Toggle this button On if you want to force a rollover of infor
554. this badge holder is used in an anti passback reader the system will set the appropriate In Out state Use this setting when creating a new badge or when a badge holder gets locked in or out of an anti passback area This status is not used by nested APB readers In or Out Indicates whether the last use of any badge belonging to this badge holder logged the badge holder In or Out of the anti passback reader s area This reflects information captured as of the moment the badge record was displayed but the information will not be updated automatically while it is on the screen It can be changed manually if necessary This status is not used by nested APB readers Privileged Indicates that whenever any badge belonging to this badge holder is read by an anti passback reader the system ignores the anti passback status Access is granted if categories match the area regardless of whether the badge holder was logged into or out of the area Assign this status to a badge holder who has to use anti passback readers but is not to be governed by them This status is used by nested APB readers Reset Timed APB This button sends a message to the micro to reset the Timed APB status back to Neutral Reset Nested APB to Neutral This button sets the Person Last Access area to neutral and sends a message to micros that have Nested APB readers configured to set APB area back to neutral Note You must have Schedule Updates Database enabled
555. thorized for Keypad Alarm Response This section shows how to configure a Picture Perfect system to implement the Keypad Alarm Response feature Keypad alarm response function The Keypad Alarm Response function starts with an access violation the door is forced open or is held open too long The violation activates one of the door s input groups which then triggers the alarm and outputs associated with that input group Forcing the door open activates the door s forced open input group and holding the door open for too long activates the door s open too long input group The input group and its associated outputs are not reset until the door is closed and a valid keypad response and badge swipe are made on the reader associated with the door Without the Keypad Alarm Response feature the access violation would end when the door closes With Keypad Alarm Response the violation ends when a valid keypad response is entered after the door closes When the violation ends the violation s input group along with the associated alarm and outputs are reset Note Ending the violation is not the same as completely responding to the violation s alarm The alarm response is not complete until the violation is ended by a keypad response and the operator has fully responded to the alarm on the Alarm Monitor Violation notification When a violation starts the host displays an alarm on the Alarm Monitor The Condition field on the Alarm Monit
556. til the beginning of the next interval then automatically initiates the badge removal process again This process is repeated until all listed badges have been removed The minimum setting is one minute It is not required to restart Picture Perfect or the Badges form when changing this setting Note The badge removal process is initiated by clicking the Remove function button on the Badges form See To permanently remove a badge from the database on page 230 Record Remove Maximum Specifies the maximum number of badge records that can be removed during the Record Remove Interval It is not required to restart Picture Perfect or the Badges form when changing this setting Number of Person Categories This field is read only and is set to 96 during installation It is the maximum number of categories that can be assigned to a person Number of User Fields This field displays the number of User Fields that appear on the Badges form User Fields are used for detailed badge holder identification This field is read only and is set to 40 during installation Number of Area Categories This field is read only and is set to 32 during installation It is the maximum number of categories that can be assigned to an area Number of Floors Enter the number of floors 0 to 64 serviced by an elevator associated with the Elevator Control feature See Elevator control on page 369 Advanced Features Confi
557. time 0 345 config null ay 16 2006 9 50 36 AM org apache catalina storeconfig StoreLoader load H EH BH BH INFO Find registry server registry xml at classpath resource ay 16 2006 9 50 37 AM org apache catalina startup Catalina start INFO Server startup in 122212 ms Verify the c1ient html file on the Picture Perfect server is configured properly with the proper settings Linux var www html Picture client html AIX usr HTTPServer htdocs en US Picture client html See default sample file below for proper port and other settings in blue html head lt script type text javascript language JavaScript lt Hide script from old browsers function openHelp path page title var file path page var HelpWindow window open file title scrollbars yes resizable yes width 800 height 650 End hiding Script gt lt script gt lt title gt Picture Perfect lt title gt lt head gt lt body leftmargin 0 marginheight 0 marginwidth 0 topmargin 0 gt lt CONVERTED APPLET 398 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual lt HTML CONVERTER gt lt center gt lt object name PicturePerfectApplet classid clsid 8AD9C840 044E 11D1 B3E9 00805F499D93 codebase http java sun com products plugin autodl jinstall 1 4 2 windows 1586 cab Version 1 4 2 0 width 100 height 100 mayscript mayscript gt lt param name Drive
558. ting for each of the badge transaction types as listed on page 271 is routed to the Badge Monitor 3 Ifyou want to create a report of this information click Save tosavethereportasa txt file To view swipe and show activity To enable Swipe and Show the reader must be designated as Authorization Required or Authorization Not Required on the Reader form 1 Select Monitors and then Badge Monitor 2 From the toolbar click Preferences to display the Badge Monitor Preferences window 3 Click the Image Options tab 276 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual 4 Select Enable Swipe and Show Monitor and click Ok To jump to a record from the Badge Monitor Note If an operator does not have permission to view the associated record the option is dimmed 1 From the Monitor menu select Badge Monitor 2 Right click an entry to display the following menu Badge Monitor Alarm Monitor Badge Monitor Input Monitor Operator Monitor Status Monitor User Monitor Performance Monitor Badge Monitor lu QE GAS o isplay is now active Image Type Classification Device Date Device Time Employee ID Initials Last Hame First Hame Reader Area BID Facility T VALID TIMED APB IN 14 31 29 1234567890123 initials last name first name 00 1 O0 READER AREA 8888888822 GLOBAL T VALID NO PASSAGE Jump To Reader 14 34 25 1234567890123 initials last name first name 00 1 00 READER AREA 8888888822 GLOBAL Jump To Person
559. tion A person or badge holder can have multiple badges Type a description that defines the purpose of this particular badge Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box Selecting a facility will allow the administrator to restrict operator access to those records in a specific facility For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 BID BID This field contains the unique encoded number of a badge Note The Badge Encode Format field will have no effect on the Badge Encode Number BID displayed The BID displayed will always be the actual full BID read from the badge If Save is clicked then the BID entered will be checked against the badge Format to ensure it satisfies its specifications If the BID is OK then the field will be updated and the record saved Note Ifthe Seed Counter and the Copy to BID options are enabled the Badge Format BID and Reader Issue fields are disabled even on new records The Badge Format is set to the default chosen during Seed Counter installation and the BID is generated automatically See Seed counter on page 366 Badge Format This field displays the selected format for this badge 10 12 or 16 digit Note Ifyou are using a Mifare Wiegand Badge ID 5502 fomat select Standard 16 Digit Badge If you are using a Mifare Wiegand Badge ID 26 bit select Standard 10 Digit Badge Refer to To create a Mifare badge design on page 257 Reader Issue Click to allow the B
560. tion days Enter a numeric value less than that specified in Expires in that represents the number of days prior to expiration that the operator should receive a warning message The warning message includes the number of days before the password expires If the operator has permission to change their password they are prompted to change it If they do not have permission to change their password they are prompted to contact their System Administrator Chapter 6 Operator administration Table 45 Operator form fields continued Field name Description Idle Session Time The amount of time in minutes during which there is no operator activity after which the system will attempt to log the operator off Operator activity can be mouse movements button clicks or keystrokes The default value of 0 indicates no session timeout is enforced The maximum value is 17800 minutes Change Password Displays the Password dialog used to set the operator s password The character displays as you type the actual password is not visible When changing an existing password the old password must be entered before being prompted to enter the new one A text box lists the password rules that must be followed according to the parameters specified in the Parameters form Notes This dialog is not available if the operator does not have permission to change their password When adding a new operator you must enter a passwo
561. tion Failure 128 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Logical Input Events for an area are Invalid Badge Unknown Badge Lost Badge Suspended Badge e Antipassback Violation Duress Logical Input Events for a door are Door Held Open Door Forced Open Door Pre alarm Example Building 1 contains three smoke detectors one on each floor and all three of these inputs go to one Fire Emergency input group A fire breaks out on the ground floor If this input group is set up with the Any condition the input group will change state and activate the alarm as soon as the first floor s smoke detector is activated If this input group is set up with the A condition the input group will change state and activate the alarm only after all three smoke detectors have been activated This input group will activate an alarm and will trigger an output group which will activate the sprinkler system The smoke detectors are wired to the following address 01 Microl Reader board 1 00 the address on the board Figure 52 Input Groups Form amp Inputs Outputs InputGroups Inputs OutputGroups Outputs InputGroupEvents OutputGroup Events Chapter 8 Device management Boolean Type D Individual 2 OR Any D Individual Description Delay Time 00 1 00 READER pt 1 00 Fire Emerg ALARM HISTORY a sg xX a x ES Define Input Group Parent Input Groups Output Groups ALARM HI
562. tion detector could activate this group 2 Assign Motion the parent input group of Vault No alarms or outputs will be associated directly with Motion 3 Assign lault the appropriate alarm and output groups desired for motion being detected in the vault area and assign it a boolean type of All 4 Associate a toggle reader see Toggle on page 186 with an input group called Control The toggle reader will be the only input in this group Control will be a Trigger on Input ndividual input group which is non boolean so a badge swipe through this reader will toggle the input group s state on or off 5 Assign Control the parent input group of Vault No alarms or outputs will be associated directly with Control Vault s only inputs are its child input groups Motion and Control Both of these must be activated in order to trigger the alarm since Vault s boolean type is All When the vault is unpatrolled the toggle reader is used to toggle on Control meaning that this input group is activated If any of the three motion detectors should activate the Motion input group will be triggered since its boolean type is Any The Vault input group will then receive the activated state change of Motion When that happens the All condition of Vault has been met and the associated alarm and output groups will be triggered To deactivate the motion detector alarm during a routine patrol the security guard simply swipes their authorized badge throu
563. tipassback Grp button to display the Ingroups list box Select the desired Input Group for an anti passback violation and then click Close Duress The input group to trigger when a valid duress code badge read occurs Duress codes can be used with Badge and Keypad or Keypad readers to alert the system that a valid badge read was made under forced conditions or duress Click the Duress Grp button to display the Ingroups list box Select the desired Input Group for a duress code entry and then click Close Note Do not assign a reader s valid input group to one of the above groups This will result in an unlocked door Table 77 Areas form fields continued Field name Description Routings Select routings for the following types of conditions Chapter 9 Area management Route Definition Select the desired route definition for this area This route definition is used for Activity Monitor routing If this field is left blank this area s activity will be routed to all operators Invalid Routing Click the Invalid Routing button to display the Routings list box Select the desired routing for an invalid badge read and then click Close Suspended Routing Click the Suspended Routing button to display the Routings list box Select the desired routing for a suspended badge read and then click Close Lost Routing Click the Lost Routing button to display the Routings list box Select the desire
564. tivated Taped Badge Count The number of consecutive badge reads before the system will suspend the badge Minimum count 2 Maximum count 255 Micro Reset Click Reset Now to manually reset the micro Micro State Click Get Micro State to display the current state of the selected micro s attributes Chapter 8 Device management Table 56 Micros form fields continued Tab Dial Up Field Description Modem Type Displays the selected modem type Click the Modem Type button to display the Modems list box Select the type of modem to connect to at the host e For direct communication micros select None For network micros without Dial Up select None For network micros with Dial Up select the host modem type The modem type selected for the micro must match the modem type and baud rate indicated by the micro s DIP switch settings on Switch Bank 2 See the appropriate installation manual for information on DIP switch settings The modems in this list are created using the Modems form See Configuring modems on page 64 for information on setting up modems Micro Dialout Enter the PBX prefix area code or country code or other prefix to be pre pended to the host Prefix phone number in order for the micro to call the host Micro Backup Dialout Prefix For redundant configurations in which the primary and backup servers are located in two different area codes enter the PBX prefix ar
565. to complete The list is in the order that the fields appear on the form There is no required sequence to follow Table 115 Archive form fields Field name Description Restore from Select the media that contains the data to be restored Tape Disk File Source file If you chose to restore from a Disk File enter the name of the filesystem where the data is stored Click Browse to select from a list Delete Imported Data This button will remove system generated tables containing the restored data Related procedures To perform a restore 1 From the Reports menu select the Report menu item and then click the Import Archived Data tab 299 300 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual 2 Use the appropriate radio button to specify whether you are restoring from Tape or Disk File Note When Disk File is selected clicking Browse displays a list from which you can select the file from which the data will be restored 3 Click Execute to start the restore When the Media pop up window appears insert the tape 4 Click OK to start the restore Note Importing an archive can consume a large amount of available database space It is recommended that you delete imported data when execution of Archive Reports is completed This will free up the database space Note X Archive data must be imported prior to running an Archive History report Working with SQL SQL variables Picture Perfect 4 5 supports an e
566. to use this feature if configuring NAPB with a reader event See Assigning system parameters on page 40 Area Indicates which area the badge was last granted access to Chapter 11 Badge management Table 93 Personnel form fields continued Field name Description Access Category Manager The system tracks the badge and displays information about when it was last used This reflects information captured as of the moment the badge record was displayed This information can also be changed manually Date The date the badge was last granted access The system supplies this data Time The time the badge was last granted access The system supplies this data Time Zone Context The time zone context in which the badge was last granted access The system supplies this data See Verifying time zones on page 168 Reader Indicates which reader last granted access to this badge The system supplies this data This tab contains the active categories ordered by slot number that can be assigned to an area or an area event To access an area a badge must match at least one category that is assigned to that area You may add remove or replace a category in a slot Click Filter to enter search criteria to limit the category list or use the type ahead search feature by clicking in any cell and typing the first letters of the item for which you are searching For more information see Category manager on page
567. ture Perfect forms that are not partitioned by facility such as the System Parameters or the Facility form It also controls the ability to perform certain actions such as Purging Alarms See Table 40 Example For example All System Permissions allows the operator to view update insert and delete records on all non facility partitioned Picture Perfect forms It also grants full action permission No System Permissions on the other hand does not allow the operator any access to the records at all Figure 30 System Permissions Profile form L deseription C Safe 5 a DEE NS xo 4 X Ez D Insert System Permi GL System Permissions amp Update System Per GU amp View System Permi GU amp No System Permissi GU acilty GLOBAL Actions vj Backup and Restore i Custom Form vi Edit SQL Statements lvi Execute SQL Statements Ivi Force Logoff vj Form Preferences vi Log Monitor T oniani E Page Level Permissions Name View Update insert Delete Access Secure H o o o Alarm Colors Control Outputs Data Generator d 5 o OIOIOIC Emergency D Facilties LDAP DN LDAP Server Parameters Control Level Permissions o o OO 86 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 40 Default System Permissions Profiles Profile Action
568. ty 7 Click New Tab and then Rename to assign a meaningful name to the tab Figure 141 Tabs Tabs Rew Tab Tab Sequence v New Tab Rename Delete 8 From the Available Form Fields list box select a field that you want to appear on the tab and click the arrow to display it in the Form Fields on Tab list box Figure 142 Form fields Available Form Fields Division Manager Phone Userl User2 Form Fields on Tab Description Location Facility Field Sequence S 9 Continue to add or remove fields from the form You can rearrange the order of the fields using the arrows Chapter 17 333 User interface customization 10 As fields are added to the Form Fields on Tab list box corresponding boxes are displayed in the Tab Layout Preview window To adjust the width or height of a field box highlight the field in the Form Fields on Tab list box The corresponding field box in the Tab Layout Preview window will be highlighted and can be manipulated using the Width or Height spin boxes Figure 143 Tab layout Tab Layout Preview Width 11 Height 113 11 Under Field Settings To make a field mandatory change the required attribute to Yes e To change the name of a field type the new name in the fieldname box Figure 144 Field settings Field Settings Displayed Length
569. ty to display the facilities list box This field reflects the facility to which this record is assigned For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Alarm Select the alarm for which the event will occur Routing To send an alarm to a different routing at certain times schedule an alarm event that specifies the new routing and time You can send the alarm message to the alarm monitor a printer the history log or to a combination of the three Example If you want invalid badge alarms to route to the log and monitor during the business day but to the monitor and a printer after hours set an alarm event for MTWT at 17 00 to start routing invalid badge alarms to the alarm monitor and to a selected printer Set a parallel alarm event to occur on MTWTF at 08 00 to start routing the alarm to the history log and monitor If no one watches the alarm monitor on weekends another alarm event F at 17 00 can start routing this alarm to the log and to the printer On Monday scheduled alarm events begin to repeat the cycle Chapter 10 Schedules and modes Table 87 Alarm Event form fields continued Field name Description Online Online To set an alarm online when the facility is closed for a holiday use an alarm event that does not cycle daily Use a mode start alarm event associated with your holiday mode When the system starts to operate in holiday mode events that cycle during normal operating stop cycling Set this al
570. u tes creo out bre ae den a ER ERE 97 Linking facilities facility profiles permissions and operotors eene 98 Exdmplesssss ccce ree en NEL e en se bbb E M WR UO D P EET e bb Ps 98 Alarm activity configuration S usce icd OR RARO ERROR TR RR ERI CLR 105 Alarms OVERVIEW asic tesce seeded RE RELERTRE YAUARERRREAFRAECEDLUEERRRERPEERPER REEL ERA Add PRU 106 Alarm activity routing overview 0 cece cee II HH Hee 106 Defining routings ono epo wm rtr e nenshe rr dr ESL E Sheet es bet ues epe Eod Mera 107 EXAMP EEN 107 Field and coritrols xni scre rcr esd EE Te REAR ERE Mr rcbentP CODI OVI dE DUREE 108 Related procediles EE 108 Creating route definitions NS EEN dE re e ar erar aurea a e E REI ee E E RE YS 109 Example uses thee tet pix er bera re bd o des ue ETE EU e OR RN 109 Fields Oplag T 110 Related procedures eege 110 vi Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Chapter 8 Defining route DODERER Ee soe SR ere e EN ood vend xe dE Ae Rue Dareus rm Keck 110 ett 110 Fields and et TEE 111 Related procedures uere rr E andthe dep eb OU AUT BEN ev ERE 114 Creating alarm instructions 0 cece eee cee eee ehh ehh em 114 Egger ee Are AA Ub bero Rp ah hM eque MU EODEM BEER Id s 114 Fields aNd CONOS aanas sete tovc e Rd bep ter e vandals Lodi EE ERA NR EP RERRA EU RSEN 115 Related Procedures essre ouvre ad ed re tasa Re NM REI EE RAS DD dd E S 115 Creating alarm responses 2 a Eeer y eR RU re ReUpEPR e ade PED Spre
571. u want to schedule all of the doors in the system to open at 08 00 Host Context If you select Host as the context for this door event all doors in the system will open simultaneously at 08 00 Houston time However it will be 09 00 in New York and 06 00 in San Francisco Operator Context If you select Operator as the context for this door event all doors in the system will open simultaneously at 08 00 New York time However it will be 07 00 in Houston and 05 00 in San Francisco Device Context If however you select Device as the context for this door event all doors in the system will open at 08 00 local time the time local to the micro to which the doors are connected The doors in New York will open first at 08 00 local time and then one hour later the doors in Houston will open at 08 00 local time and finally two hours after that the doors in San Francisco will open at 08 00 local time Example 2 You have three offices one in New York one in San Francisco and one in Houston You are the system administrator and you are in New York the host 1s in Houston You want to expire a badge at 16 00 today Host Context If you select Host as the context to expire this badge at 16 00 the badge expiration will take effect at 17 00 in New York 16 00 in Houston and at 14 00 in San Francisco Operator Context If you select Operator as the context to expire this badge at 16 00 the badge expiration will take effect at
572. uard e 5 GIGS Ee S32 173 343 354 H Host Err 69 Host Micro Polling Retries cece eeseeeeseseeeseseeetsesesseeeeneeseaees 135 Host Micro Polling Retry Interval eee 135 TEE 20 dicar eet hy ae eine 137 image crop OUER 241 Image Ty M 45 pec ce c PORE 235 Imaging Terminals dein ee reete em eder eee ioter eter dh 30 Immediate Dial Required esee 118 Immediate Reset Input zs oseue reet e niemnecon eeu 118 Import Archived Data eee nete detergent reno 296 Import Export Increment Blogger eet 376 InfOffnix aate OR bt eiie ramon Hd 410 Inhibit Schedule Changes eese 118 Initialization Command errem trennen Initialization Response Input aic atroci ve eto nene ROIG ERE n InputBnabl d seiner rre eem teni Us siis Input Field iicet tee d ero E ai Input Gto onsec eme rene emite iens Input Group Evehts 4 eeiieeerte terrier tenen Input Groups tale o iue omm aH UU ERES Input Groups 17 32 109 117 126 127 129 131 132 136 162 180 EE 189 191 264 Input BTOUPS 2 eee epp d pede arae dico 200 Input Moniteure 17 278 Mauri 265 Inputs 17 32 33 106 109 110 126 127 132 134 160 161 163 189 190 191 192 216 218 262 264 292 340 E 346 350 358 373 382 TO LCE Insertion Point
573. uling reports on page 306 Creating modes Use the Modes form to define each system operating mode Operating modes are an administrative decision as each facility has unique requirements Examples of scheduled operating modes are Normal mode and Holiday mode Examples of command operating modes are emergency modes such as Fire or Lockdown mode which can be initiated by the operator at any time See Changing modes by command on page 196 A mode that you can design to provide tighter security in case working conditions change from the routine is Restricted access mode which can be scheduled or commanded After a mode is created using the Modes form you will define its characteristics by using the various Events forms Normal mode Normal mode usually does not require any start end events to be scheduled A start end event 1s something you schedule to happen once it is not subject to weekly or 24 hour cycles Use runtime events to schedule the necessary cycles You do not need weekend or evening modes since the runtime events in a single mode allow you to set different operating characteristics for all days of the week and all times of the day Chapter 10 195 Schedules and modes Emergency modes Create Emergency modes to handle situations such as fires accidents or other emergency situations Define these modes on the Modes Tab gt Mode Creation form by checking the Emergency Mode check box Enter a description such
574. ult is 2 for the current version Date Format Specify the date format of Month MM Day DD and Year YY or YYYY that the system will use Click a radio button to select one system date format Schedule Updates Database When a micro runs a schedule a SUP Schedule Update message is sent to the host This SUP message gets logged in the cas log sup mmdd log file where mm is the current month and dd the day If this value is set to Yes the database is updated to reflect the value changed by the schedule Note If this feature is enabled Area Events will update the database if all micros associated with all readers in the specified Area are within the same timezone Tab Field name Enforce Report Permissions Chapter 4 Setup Description These radio buttons are used if you want to restrict report access to certain permission groups By default report permissions will be not be available Select Yes to enable this option Backup Directory The default file system in which to store backups when backing up to Disk File Archive Directory Flash Directory The default file system in which to store archives when archiving to Disk File Specifies the source directory to search for flash files This replaces the default directory of cas flash eflash System Poll Interval Specifies the frequency with which the Performance Monitor data is refreshed Time Format cooSpe
575. umber of copies fi z Pages from fi to be Selection BUSSE teen Assigning system parameters System Parameters Form The System Parameters form is used to assign system parameters that will be used by the system during the setup procedures Some fields as indicated in Table 24 Parameter Form Fields on page 42 are pre set based on the system installation settings These should not be changed unless you are directed to do so by Customer Support Chapter 4 41 Setup Figure 14 System Parameters form ZE Password AlarmEmail Modes Bading History Xoff Threshold 6000 E Shared Memory Size Diagnostic Buffer Size 2 16000 256 E Alarm Monitors 2 Diagnostic Monitors KH Event Monitors a Date Format Time Format O MMddyy amp HH mm ss MMiddlyy O HHmmss amp MMiddiyyyy A No e Yes yyyyMMdd yyyy MM dd Enforce Report Permissions yyMMdd No yy MM dd Yes Schedule Updates Database Backup Directory Jppbackup archive Directory Jppbackup Flash Directory casiflash eflash System Poll Interval foo Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not app
576. unt Resend Count Shared Memory Used Shared Memory Free Shared Memory Total Shared Memory Badges Processed Messages Processed Start Date Start Time Standalone 62 D 59 1355204 15028796 16384000 LI D 622442 03 30 2009 13 45 59 History Usage Alarm History Badge History Event History Operator History Tour History 5c NEEN CPU Usage CPU Idle CPU Wait CPU User CPU Sys BDG s ALM s EVTis Ka TOURIs TPS Mode TPS Network Mode Comm Serial Message Count Resend Count Shared Memory Used Shared Memory Free Shared Memory Total 62 D 59 Badges Proce 0 Messages Proc 15038 Standalone 16039 Standalone 16040 Standalone 1355204 62 D 59 62 D 59 1355204 1355204 15028796 15028796 15028796 16384000 16384000 16384000 0 622418 622430 622442 Fields and controls Table 112 Performance Monitor fields Field name Description Memory Management TPS Mode Chapter 13 Alarm activity monitors Standalone Primary or Backup Displays the current TPS mode when using a standalone or redundant system TPS Network Mode Network Host or Subhost Shows the type of host in an Enterprise system Comm Serial Serial number for I O messages Message Count Total number of messages on all queues Shared Memory Used The size Bytes of shared memory currently in u
577. upancy Control permission From the Access menu select Places and then click the Area tab From the toolbar click Find to locate the area record you want to set up On the Area tab under Occupancy Control enable the Occupancy Counting radio button Under Two Man Rule enable the Modified Door Control radio button Enter a value in the Door Release Timeout field 353 354 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Figure 162 Area form M2MR Places People Badges Places OF areas categories Area Events Description STL GENERAL AREA a 4 amp Wi X5 J x GO 6 STLMDC GALLERIES ISTL AND FLR OCC Area Category Manager Input Groups Routings STL NODE T T STLIELEC ROOM Permission Group STL TELCO ROOM SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR lt GLO w ges STLIPARKING LOT d aie STLICORP SERVICE 8 STL ENERGY CENT Physical State Occupancy Control STLKITCHEN j Enabled EET COH STLALL HALLWAY i ae Disabled Do Nat Care STLIDOCK VEST Logical State Disabled STLME DATA CENT Online Enabled STLATEST FACILITY STLISECURITY CO CORE Occupancy Count STLISECURITY OFF Shunting H STLMASTERCOM Enabled ES STL SFTWDIST STL IE GALLERY E Disabled Do Not Care STLIEMBOSS Scheduling O Disabled STLI2E PRD SPPRT 8 Enabled O Standard STLIUNIX SUPPORT STLIDATA CENTER 2 O Disabled amp Modified Door Control ISTLIOCC Antipassback Enforcement Modified No Door Control STLGEMBRLMP
578. ups The required associations should be defined using the various Picture Perfect forms such as Ports Modems InGroups and Alarms before attempting to complete the Micros form Picture Perfect supports three kinds of micro communications direct dial up and network All three types of communications can be combined on a single host Note Depending on the amount of traffic on a system to avoid performance degradation a line of micros should contain no more than eight M5 controllers or 64 readers For more information refer to Direct connect micros on page 140 Dial up micros on page 140 e Network micros on page 143 Do not add or change a micro until you have configured the input groups that you need for the micro and the alarm and output groups that you want to have associated with the selected input groups Chapter 8 133 Device management A micro can be configured in the following ways e Non existent Direct connect e Dial up Downstream dial up Network e Network dial up All of these options are explained in the sections that follow However if you prefer you can configure all of your micros as non existent and then you can go back later and reconfigure them Example Micro 1 controls all of the inputs outputs doors and readers in Building 1 Figure 54 Micros Form Micros Ports Modems Network Ports Keys iQ AE XoOo 4 Xx SH Micro Timing Input Groups Advanced Features DialUp eFlas
579. uring separate times but the MIS Manager needs access 24 hours a day The two shifts also require a 30 minute overlap during shift changes To control when they can enter 1 First create three categories using the Categories form MIS 24 Hour MIS Shift 1 and MIS Shift 2 MIS 24 Hour ALL GROUPS ALLOWED N MIS Shift 1 ALL GROUPS ALLOWED N MIS Shift 2 ALL GROUPS ALLOWED lt N NO ACCESS use w sched only ALL GROUPS ALLOWED lt N 2 To provide 24 hour access for the MIS manager assign the MIS 24 Hour category on the Areas form Do not overwrite this category with an area event Assigned Categories Available Categories Slot Category Category 1 MIS 24 Hour 0000 PHYSICAL SECURITY ONLY lt DEn MASTERCARD SECURITY L Only badges with the 10001 CHL EMPLOYEE ACCESS MIS 24Hour category im 10002 CHL NON EMPLOYEE ACCE will have access to L 10003 CHL NON EMP AFTER HOURS this area Sia 10004 CHL LAN CLOSET 10005 CHL MOTION SHUNT KEYPAD 2 t002 PUR NON EMPLOYEE ACCESS 1003 PUR NON EMP AFTER HOURS 1004 PUR GATES AND PARKING G a 1005 PUR MAILROOM SPECIAL E 3 To provide access to the two shifts create separate categories MIS Shift 1 and MIS Shift 2 to an area event using the Area Events form Use the category NO ACCESS use w sched only to end the event When you assign the area events to a slot remember that the MIS 24 Hour category was plac
580. use Purge X in the Alarm Monitor The system logs the alarms and deletes them all from the monitor even if they are not reset Note An operator must have system permission to have access to the Alarm Monitor Purge button 1 Click Purge located on the Alarm Monitor not the Alarm Response window The Purge All Alarms window appears Figure 108 Purge All Alarms Purge All Alarms Enter Alarm Response 2 Type the reason for clearing all alarms for log records 3 Click OK in the Purge All Alarms window To clear a single alarm that is in a reset condition Click Remove X in the Alarm Response window The system logs the alarm and its responses and deletes it from the Alarm Monitor 267 268 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Note The Alarm Response window may now be configured to have the Remove function button unavailable unless the alarm is in reset state or has the alarm control Immediate Reset Input set Alarm form The configuration is determined by the Enforce UL Specifications parameter in the System Parameters form The default is No indicating the Remove function button is always available When set to Yes the Remove function button will be grayed out when the alarm is not in the reset condition To clear a single alarm that is not in a reset condition Click Purge 7 in the Alarm Response window if available The system logs the alarm and is responses and deletes it from the Alarm Monitor To co
581. using a wide carriage printer with wide track paper 14in x llin On Linux edit the file called etc enscript cfg Find the Letter line in Media definitions section it will look as follows name width height 11x lly urx ury Media Letter 612 792 24 24 588 768 Change the width of this type of paper as follows Media Letter 1008 792 24 24 984 768 On AIX edit the file called usr lib ps MediaSizes Find the Letter line it will look as follows f Name Width Depth 11x lly urx ury PageRegionName PaperTrayName Letter 612 792 18 17 2597 776 letter Chapter 15 Backup and restore This chapter shows you how to perform an archive back up the database restore the database and recover the entire system In this chapter qa c1 Em 310 Backing up your database oa cs ean eee obe eee 310 Archiving your database ee eee e dee t em ms 313 316 Restoring your database iios eo ee eo ecd aed asc e oed es 310 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Overview We recommend that during initial system setup you perform a daily backup Every day during initial setup new inputs outputs and alarms are configured and new badge data is entered Regular backups will protect this setup process The system stores badge transactions alarm events and operator activity in online history tables When the online history table for an activity is almost full the system displays an Archive Alert pop up window with a message to archive the recor
582. ust be pressed within the time specified in the Door Release Timeout field or the door will not be unlocked Modified without Door Select this radio button to activate the Modified Two Man Rule mode Control which restricts badge holder access to a controlled area based on their M2MR category type The first two badge holders to enter a controlled space must be team members At least two team members must be present in the controlled space until all Guests have exited Select the mode in which the area event will occur An event will not take place if it is not assigned to a mode and it will only occur in those modes to which it is assigned Chapter 10 Schedules and modes Table 84 Area Event form fields continued Field name Description Begin Event At Mode Start If this is a Start End event click if you want the event to activate at the start of the mode At Mode End If this is a Start End event click if you want the event to activate at the end of the mode Time If the event is a Run Time event click if you want the event to activate at a specified time HHmmss If the event is a Run Time event select the time of day that the event will start Remember to schedule another event as the pair of this one Example If something is turned on every day at 8 AM it must be turned off at some time later that day Time Zone Select the time zone context in which the schedule should execute Host Micro or Op
583. ut must be physically connected to the same micro 1 From the Configuration menu select Doors and Readers and then click the Doors tab 2 From the toolbar click on Find to locate the door record you want to set up 3 On the Inputs and Outputs tab click Door Sensor Input 346 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Figure 153 Doors form Inputs and Outputs j Doors And Readers 7 LLL m Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zone Doors Readers ReaderEvents DoorEvents Lies o c x E E a 9 Door Description Inputs and Outputs Door Sensor Input e Exit Button Input rike Output M2MR Output Held Open Sensing O ignored O Detected Held Open In Group v Forced Open Monitoring O Ignored Detected Forced Open In Group e Alarm Disabled Enabled 4 El gt EE i E m Pre Alarm In Group Results D records Lg i 4 Select the appropriate input from the list displayed 5 Saveand exit the Door form To enable Occupancy Control 1 From the Control menu select Operators and then click the Facility Permissions Profile tab 2 From the toolbar click on Find to locate the Facility Permission profile record you want to modify 3 Under Page Level Permissions click on Areas and make sure th
584. utput 3 Elevator Button 3 GLOBAL Output 4 Elevator Button 4 GLOBAL Output 5 Elevator Button 5 GLOBAL Output 6 e e r i Elevator Button 6 GLOBAL Names Value incr decr 2 fig increment Als E D Results 2 records al g KT pat pat pa fal pa To reset the default floor labels Floor 1 Floor n corresponding to floors 1 n 1 Enter 1 as the Starting Floor Number 2 Enter 0 or blank as the Increment or Decrement value 3 Click Increment Chapter 18 Advanced access control features Example 2 Set up an elevator that will access 64 floors described as Basement Parking Lobby and Floor 2 through Floor 62 Figure 180 Example of Decrement Floors Number of Floors 2 64 1 Type in descriptions Basement Parking Floor 1 cup Lobby Basement Elevator Button 1 lt GLOBAL gt v K f ES 2 Enter Starting Floor beer CC Seen levator ion t gt v 13 number as A Parking Y E 3 Enter Decrement Floor 3 Nees E levator ion 2 t gt b d CET Value as 2 Lobby Y of 4 Click Decrement Floor 4 pata This will result in Floor 4 Pen e DE 2 v displaying a WE
585. utputs displays Click the appropriate radio button to turn the desired output on or off To control an individual output When you select an output from the list on the Control Outputs window you can trigger the individual output l 2 3 4 From the Control menu select Control Outputs Select an output from the Outputs list Click Outputs A list of all outputs displays Click the appropriate radio button to turn the desired output on or off 166 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Controlling Access Secure operations Devices such as Inputs Input Groups or Doors normally exist in an Access state in which they are disabled or unlocked or in a Secure state in which they are enabled or locked These states are reflected on the appropriate device form It may be desirable to change this state back and forth to allow for unscheduled conditions such as heightened security levels or unscheduled peak access times This feature can be used in lieu of scheduling an event to accommodate situations that require operator control It allows state changes for multiple devices rather than applying the change to each device individually through the applicable form Example For example you may want all doors to be opened when the security guard arrives at his post rather than at a scheduled time Figure 71 Access Secure Form 3 Access Secure Operators Modes Routings Backup Restore Access Secure Doors Inp
586. uts InputGroups Door Locked Door Unlocked Description J Facility Description I 00 1 00 DOOR GLOBAL d Chapter 8 167 Device management Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 73 Access Secure form fields Device Fields and controls Description Doors Current State Access The door state is Unlocked Current State Secure The door state is Locked Inputs Current State Access The input state is Enabled Current State Secure The input state is Disabled Input Groups Current State Access The input group state is Enabled Current State Secure The input group state is Disabled Related procedures To display the Access Secure Operations window This option does not appear on the Control menu unless it has been enabled See How to enable Access Secure Operations 1 From the Control menu select Access Secure Then click the appropriate tab Doors Inputs or Input Groups 2 From the list displayed select the item whose state you wish to change Multiple selections may be made 3 Click the appropriate Change State arrow button To enable Access Secure Operations 1 From the Control menu
587. v18C180250 157 6080584Ww Deinitialization Response ER EOL ASCII Value Hangup Command 13 ATH Low Speed Baud 4800 Low Speed Connect Msg CONNECT 4800 High Speed Baud eo High Speed Connect Msg coNNECT 9600 Chapter 5 65 System configuration Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow If a default value appears in a field you can accept that value if the modem type is Hayes compatible Note There are system supplied forms for the Hidex modem Hayes 1200 2400 and 9600 modems the Cardinal 28 8 V 34 modem and the STAR Comm 144F 1 modem Table 30 Modem form fields Field name Description Description Type a modem description up to 60 alphanumeric characters long that specifies the modem type This modem description will appear in a list box on the Micros form and the Ports form so that you can assign a modem type to micros and ports Example Hayes 2400 Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box This field reflects the facility to which this record is assigned For
588. ve Alarm Alert El Receive Reset Alarm Alert E Receive System Notifications E LDAP Authentication Alz ID Results 2records E Permission to Change Password Save operatior 96 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 45 Operator form fields Field name Description User Name Description of the person using the Login ID 1 to 12 characters Employee Id Company identification number assigned to the person using the Login ID Login Id Login name the user types to gain access to the operating system and Picture Perfect Each operator must have a unique Login ID The Login ID is case sensitive Locale The locale used by this operator The list box is created at system installation based on available locales A locale is a language for a specified region Example English in the United States Portuguese in Brazil Time Zone Select from the drop down list the time zone in which the operator is located This allows Picture Perfect to display badge and alarm activity in the operator s local time See Verifying time zones on page 168 Note In order for
589. vedscesvevanes 66 NO Cartier MSE eege 66 No Categ Match cir Rte t hae annette 272 Node ET Normal Mode e Normally Closed etre tte e tec e ee Exe ade 163 naro cp 159 Not Validated EE 272 Number of Badges gie o ne eer 184 203 207 Number of Floors Number of Person Categories 47 Occupancy Control eterne ed ir im rens 178 419 420 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Off to Of Delay Time eee re ree Rete Eege iet reis Offline ET On to Off Delay Time M M Online Reader iuueni tiec nimi pires o p Open Condition Open Duress E E RE Open Too EE Open ee 21 Operating BEE et eege ee ee 3 4 Opefating Mode EE 411 VE 4 Operator 19 46 95 97 98 211 213 216 218 220 248 252 265 269 274 278 279 280 282 287 288 340 346 351 Operator HIStory niece e repre Dried ce oe ep ie Operator Interface esee A ENEE eier 4 Operator Monitor 17 279 280 Operator generated Commande 142 Um I M done 31 95 OPEN GE E 288 HEES EE EE 288 oid 411 Output Group 126 127 130 132 142 159 200 216 218 411 Output Group Events 17 33 217 218 Output at eeng 17 268 Outputs17 32 33 119 125 126 127 132 134 142 158 159 160 163 e 216 218 262 263 268 340 345 346 350 369 373 outputs P Packet
590. vel that defines the functions an operator can perform A Password provides secondary validation for that operator Log off A security procedure that protects the system from unauthorized use When an operator logs off the system displays the Login screen and requires the next operator to log on LVM Logical Volume Management A kernel level subsystem for managing multiple storage devices Physical drive partitions are collected into logical volumes and provide dynamic resizing of logical volumes with the addition or removal of physical drives Message Transaction information that the system displays Micro See Microcontroller micro Table 127 Picture Perfect 4 5 terms explained continued Term Definition Microcontroller micro The metal box containing the circuitry that controls the opening and closing of doors Badge readers alarm points and digital output points are wired to micros and micros are connected to the host computer See Upstream and Downstream Offline Reader Online Mode A set of schedules that defines how the system operates and specifies the characteristics of readers areas doors and other system components See Operating Mode Modem Hardware device used to communicate between computer systems over telephone or other communications lines Monitoring See Door Forced Open and Shunt Offline A condition in which the micro is not communicating with the h
591. when enabled requires that at least two authorized badge holders occupy a controlled space at the same time The Modified Two Man Rule M2MR when enabled further restricts access to controlled areas based on specific M2MR category types See Table 124 Badge transactions for Occupancy Counting and Two Man Rule features on page 363 When using Occupancy Control with the Two Man Rule feature the following restrictions apply e Occupancy Count must be enabled and the count must be zero in order to enable Two Man Rule e If Two Man Rule is enabled Occupancy Count cannot be disabled An error message will display and you will not be allowed to save the record If Standard Two Man Rule or Modified Two Man Rule is enabled and the occupancy count is greater than zero Two Man Rule can be disabled but you cannot switch to another Two Man Rule state For example if the area is set up as 2MR and the occupancy count is 2 you cannot change the area to M2MR with Door Control Instead you must disable 2MR reset the occupancy count to zero and then enable M2MR with Door Control If desired a digital output DO such as a blinking light can be activated on the reader following the first badge swipe to alert the badge holder that a second badge swipe is required before access will be granted This is an optional feature available by selecting 2MR Output from the Readers form Chapter 18 Advanced access control features Modified two man rule M2MR
592. when you log on to Picture Perfect the Time Zone selected is that assigned to your Operator record Example If you are traveling and log on to a Picture Perfect session in a different time zone you can select the appropriate time zone from this list See Verifying time zones on page 168 Related procedures To select a facility l Click on a facility to select or de select it or click Select All or Unselect All to select or de select all of the available facility sets Click OK By default when you log on to Picture Perfect the Time Zone selected is that assigned to your Operator record If for example you are traveling and log on to a Picture Perfect session in a different time zone you can select the appropriate time zone from this pick list To change the active facility set during a session display the Facility Set window by one of the following methods The change will not affect forms that are already open From the File menu select Facility Set Chapter 2 15 Getting started e Right click on the desktop and select Facility Set from the resulting window Press CTRL F to display the Facility Set window Navigating Picture Perfect The majority of Picture Perfect applications specifically those that manipulate data contained in the Picture Perfect database tables are based on a common framework A typical Picture Perfect application window is shown in Figure 5 The elements that make up the frame
593. wipes on IN reader when room is empty NO Transaction but second swipe is not within specified reader interval time Two badge swipes on IN reader when room is empty Valid door locked but second badge is invalid Two badge swipes on IN reader when room is empty Valid Door Locked and No Categ Match but second badge does not have a valid category Two badge swipes on IN reader when room is empty No Categ Match and Not Validated but first badge does not have a valid category and second badge is valid One valid badge swipe on IN reader when occupancy Valid no passage count is at least two door is not opened One valid badge swipe on IN reader when occupancy One APB T amp A IN occupancy count incremented count is at least two door IS opened by one One valid badge swipe on OUT reader when Valid no passage occupancy count is at least three door is not opened One valid badge swipe on OUT reader when One APB T amp A OUT occupancy count decremented occupancy count is at least three door IS opened by one Two valid badge swipes on OUT reader when Valid no passage occupancy count is two within specified reader interval time door is not opened Two valid badge swipes on OUT reader when Two APB T amp A OUT occupancy count decremented occupancy count is two within specified reader by two to zero interval time door IS opened Two valid badge swipes on OUT reader when NO Transaction occupancy count is two but second swipe is not within specified
594. work are described in more detail in the sections that follow Figure 5 Application Framework Primary navigation Secondary navigation Custom Toolbar menu item menu item i Status Indicator Application window Menu bar Host Indicator Zi Pictur Perfect Microsoft Internet Explorer Eile access monit ration Co port Fatages setup minded Hop 00 E i gi 7 People cms W People Badges cie 16 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual The menu bar When Picture Perfect is initially launched in your browser window the desktop is comprised of a primary navigation menu bar and a toolbar Each primary navigation menu item consists of secondary navigation items each of which is an application or a function Only those applications to which an operator has permission and only those actions that an operator has permission to perform are available Depending on those permissions the following primary navigation items are available File Access Monitor Configuration Control Setup Reports Window and Help and optional packages such as Tours See Table 3 through Table 12 to view the secondary navigation items and a description of their functions Table3 File Menu Sub Menu Function Facility Set Provides a list of facilities available for selection based on the operator s facility profiles Customize
595. x of the Route Points Alarms Inputs and Areas forms Facility Click Facility to display the facilities list box This field reflects the facility to which this record is assigned For more information see Creating facilities on page 53 Related procedures To create edit or delete a Route Definition record 1 Select Control Routings and then Route Definitions tab 2 Refer to Creating editing deleting and printing records on page 36 Defining route points A route point assigned to a route definition indicates to whom and when alarms and activity are routed A route point can also indicate which alarms are bumped and when they are bumped A route point belongs to only one route definition but several route points can belong to the same route definition Example The Global facility is made up of two buildings Buildings 1 and 2 and the route definitions are defined as Building 1 and Building 2 Jeff Jackson is the guard at Building 1 and Sean Ackerman is the guard at Building 2 They each view the alarm and activity for their respective buildings during the day A night shift guard Barry Evans views alarm and activity for both buildings at night During the day if Jeff does not respond to an alarm in Building 1 the alarm is bumped to Sean in Building 2 and vice versa Chapter 7 Alarm activity configuration Figure 45 Route Point Form Routings ZE Operators Modes Routings Backup
596. xit Dynamic configuration Micros firmware 4 03 or later required can be configured dynamically meaning the Picture Perfect system does not have to be restarted for the changes to take effect However there are some rules that must be met If these rules are not met an error message displays and none of the changes are made until that rule is satisfied The error message window remains open until you click OK Note All of the fields on the Micros form support dynamic configuration except for Micro ID Once a micro s ID is set it cannot be changed Dynamic configuration rules Every micro must have a head or upstream micro Every micro must have a tail or downstream micro e A micro can be upstream from at most one micro e A micro can be downstream from at most one micro e The primary port must be the same for a micro and its downstream micro e The secondary port must be the same for a micro and its downstream micro e An upstream micro must have a matching downstream micro A downstream micro must have a matching upstream micro e The last micro in a bi directional line must have a host downstream Two head micros cannot have the same primary port Two tail micros cannot have the same secondary port e A network dial up micro must have a matching downstream micro e A network micro must have a matching downstream micro 139 140 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Direct connect micros A direct com
597. xpanded version of SQL variable syntax The SQL Variables list box contains a list of pre defined template versions of the four types of variables as described below User defined variables may be embedded directly into the SOL syntax by enclosing the variable inside brackets It is up to the operator to put double quotes outside the variable as needed for character fields The variable will be detected when the operator clicks Run and the Variable window displays When the operator fills in the desired value and clicks OK the report is executed The value is then substituted in place of the variable SOL supports a maximum of ten variables in the SQL select statement If there are no variables detected the Report Variables window will not display Notes Multiple words with spaces for substitution variables cannot be supported for column descriptions SQL leaves it up to the operator to make the decision regarding the choice of variables and their textual descriptions The Report Events feature does not support variables An audit routine that detects variables in the Report Events form prevents reports from being scheduled if they contain variables e Ifyou use informix today function time comparisons with Picture Perfect date format must be done using to date function For example TODAY TO DATE person access_date VARCHAR 8 o Y om9 od text label UI Control Text field with a label Output Replaces
598. y match regulate its ability to open a door Example If a badge holder enters an anti passback area without using his own badge such as by following someone else through the open door that person will not be able to exit that area with his own badge because the system never registered him as having entered that area Likewise if a person exits an anti passback area without using his badge he cannot re enter that area since the system has not registered his exit Antipassback status is global meaning the system will register whether someone is in or out but it does not regulate the status on a per reader basis Example Someone can badge in at an anti passback reader in one room follow someone out of that room and into another anti passback controlled room without using his own badge and then be able to badge out of the second room The system registered him globally as in without regard to reader location therefore he can badge out of any room If he followed someone out of the first room and then tried to badge in at the second room however he would not be given access because the system has him already registered as in This example does not apply to Nested APB readers If the badge holder is required to use an anti passback reader assign the badge an anti passback status of neutral otherwise leave these buttons unselected Neutral Indicates an neutral user state neither In nor Out The next time any badge belonging to
599. yed Clear Clears the form so you can create a new report Run Click this button to generate the report which will then appear in the View Results tab There is no limit on the amount of data returned by the select statement and the View Results window shows how many data records are in the report When there are more than 1000 rows it also shows you the current page and the total number of pages If there are more than 1000 rows found the first 1000 can be viewed using the scroll bars click Next Page to see more To view the previous 1000 rows click Prev Page Click Go to Page to access a particular page Print Displays the Print Preview window You can adjust the paper size format the way the map will appear on the page select the number of copies and preview the page before printing The Print Report window allows you to Print to pdf if you want to create an electronic copy or to Print to your local printer There are also several formats to which you can export such as Excel HTML or CSV Note The Save as text file option does not function with Picture Perfect 295 296 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Table 114 Reports form fields continued Field name Description Import Archived Click the Import Archived Data tab to display the Restore form where you can restore an archived Data database to use for reporting purposes Related procedures To create a new report l 2 3 From the Reports
600. ypically incorporates your name and consists of an alphanumeric string of up to eight characters Password Your password keeps unauthorized personnel from logging on to the system and should remain confidential It typically consists of six to eight characters and for security reasons does not display on the screen as you type it Related procedures The following procedures are sometimes required in day to day operations and administration Logging off Logging on as the root user Logging on as the install user To log off of Picture Perfect It is important to log off of the system when you leave your workstation This protects the system from unauthorized use and also allows the next operator to log on 1 Save any new or changed data 2 Close open forms by clicking Close amp on the application window title bar 3 From the File menu select Log off To log on as the root user For some of the procedures you will be instructed to log on as root Logging on is the process of signing on to the system as a user The root user also known as the superuser is a special user that has access to every program and file on the system You will be doing the installation and configuration of the operating system as the root user You will install Picture Perfect as the root user as well 1 At the prompt for user name in the console terminal type root 2 At the prompt for password type the ro
601. ystem who you are and which functions you are authorized to perform Both of these fields are case sensitive so enter the information carefully For more information about the Login window fields refer to Table 4 Click Log on The Picture Perfect desktop appears Note When logging on to Picture Perfect with SSL enabled the following message displays Figure 3 SSL Security warning Warning Security E x The web site s certificate is invalid Do you want to continue Name bctrodeo Publisher bctrodeo The certificate cannot be verified by a trusted source Only continue if 3 you trust the origin of the application More Information Note Click Yes This window appears because Picture Perfect self signs the SSL certificates and does not obtain them from a third party If you wait too long to click Yes the application will time out and you will be denied access If the timeout occurs close Picture Perfect and try again 11 12 Picture Perfect 4 5 User Manual Fields and controls The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete Because forms are user customizable some of these fields may not appear or may appear in a different order than that shown in the following table There is no required sequence to follow Table 1 Login window fields Field Name Description Login ID This identifies you as an authorized Picture Perfect operator It t

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

460202008 460208 map 460200 thermostat

Related Contents

INSTRUCTION MANUAL  Quantifying Schema Evolution*  Guia de referência rápida  FT ELF ECLAT PLASTIQUES BRILLANT - PARFUM  Owners Manual • Manual del propietario  communiqué de presse des Entretiens de l  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file